Seat Alhambra 2014 v2 Owner’s Manual PDF

1 of 345
1 of 345

Summary of Content for Seat Alhambra 2014 v2 Owner’s Manual PDF

OWNERS MANUAL

Alhambra

7N 50 12 72 0B B

In gl

s 7

N 50

12 72

0B B

( 05

.1 4)

( G

T9 )

A lh

am br

a I

ng l

s (

05 .1

4)

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to under- stand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.

All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.

Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.

SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the Copyright Act.

All rights on changes are reserved.

This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.05.14

Foreword

This Instruction Manual and its corresponding supplements should be read carefully to familiarise yourself with your vehicle.

Besides the regular care and maintenance of the vehicle, its correct handling will help preserve its value.

For safety reasons, always note the information concerning accessories, modifications and part replace- ments.

If selling the vehicle, give all of the on-board documentation to the new owner, as it should be kept with the vehicle.

WARNING

Read and always observe safety information concerning the passenger's front airbag page 28, Impor- tant information regarding the front passenger airbag.

Table of Contents

About this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Safety first! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Tips for driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Sitting position for occupants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Transporting objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 How to wear seat belts properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Child seats (accessories) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Integrated child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 SEAT information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Three button unit in headliner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Vehicle key set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Central locking and locking system . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Sliding doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Panoramic sliding sunroof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Sun protection equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Windscreen and rear window wiper systems . . . 98 Rear vision mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Seats and storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Seat functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Centre armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Loading luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Roof carrier system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Drink holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Ashtray and cigarette lighter* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Power sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Auxiliary heater* (additional heater) . . . . . . . . . . 150

Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Stopping and starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Changing gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Braking, stopping and parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Driver assistance systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Start assist systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Parking sensor system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Park Assist system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Rear Assist system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Cruise Control* (Cruise control system- CCS) . . . 194 Lane Assist system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Sign Assist* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Tiredness detection (recommendation to take a break) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Tyre monitoring systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Driving and the environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Running-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Engine management and exhaust gas purification system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Appropriate ecological and environmentally friendly driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Environmental friendliness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Vehicle maintenance and cleaning . . . . . . . . . 222 Care and cleaning the vehicle exterior . . . . . . . . 222 Caring for and cleaning the vehicle interior . . . . 228 Notes for the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Accessories, replacement of parts and modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Accessories, replacement of parts and modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

3Table of Contents

Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Selective Catalytic Reduction* (AdBlue) . . . . . . . 248 Working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . 251 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Wheel trims* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Changing a wheel* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Anti-puncture kit TMS (Tyre Mobility System)* . . 283

If and when . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 In case of emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Emergency locking and unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Vehicle tool kit* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Starting assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Towing and tow starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Description of specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Checking fluid levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Petrol engine 1.4 110 kW (150 PS) . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Petrol engine 2.0 147 kW (200 PS) . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Diesel engine 2.0 TDI CR 85 kW (115 PS) . . . . . . 319 Diesel engine 2.0 TDI CR 100 kW (136 PS) . . . . . 320 Diesel engine 2.0 TDI CR 103 kW (140 PS) . . . . . 321 Diesel engine 2.0 TDI CR 130 kW (177 PS) . . . . . 322

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

4 Table of Contents

5About this manual

About this manual

What you should know before reading this manual

This manual contains a description of the equipment supplied with the ve- hicle at the time this manual was published. Some of the units described herein will not be available until a later date or are only available in certain markets.

Because this is a general manual for the ALHAMBRA, some of the equip- ment and functions that are described in this manual are not included in all types or variants of the model; they may vary or be modified depending on the technical requirements and on the market; this is in no way deceptive advertising.

The illustrations are intended as a general guide and may vary from the equipment fitted in your vehicle in some details.

The steering indications (left, right, forward, reverse) appearing in this man- ual refer to the normal driving movements of the vehicle except when other- wise indicated.

The equipment marked with an asterisk* is fitted as standard only in certain versions, and is only supplied as optional extras for some ver- sions, or are only offered in certain countries.

All registered marks are indicated with . Although the copyright sym- bol does not appear, it is a copyrighted mark.

The section is continued on the following page.

Marks the end of a section.

WARNING

Texts preceded by this symbol contain information on safety. They warn you about possible dangers of accident or injury.

CAUTION Texts with this symbol draw your attention to potential sources of damage to your vehicle.

For the sake of the environment Texts preceded by this symbol contain relevant information concerning envi- ronmental protection.

Note Texts preceded by this symbol contain additional information.

6 Content

Content This manual is divided into five large parts:

1. Safety

Information about the vehicle equipment relating to passive safety such as seat belts, airbags, seats, etc.

2. Operation

Information about the distribution of controls in the driver position of your vehicle, about the seat adjustment possibilities, about how to create a suit- able climate in the vehicle interior, etc.

3. Advice

Advice relating to the driving, care and maintenance of your vehicle and cer- tain problems you can solve yourself.

4. Technical specifications

Figures, values and the dimensions of your vehicle.

5. Index

At the end of this manual there is a detailed alphabetical index, this will help you to quickly find the information you require.

Each part consists of main chapters, chapters and sections.

7Safe driving

Safety

Safe driving

Safety first!

This chapter contains important information, tips, suggestions and warnings that you should read and consider for both your own safety and for your passengers' safety.

WARNING

This manual contains important information about the operation of the vehicle, both for the driver and the passengers. The other sections of the on-board documentation also contain further information that you should be aware of for your own safety and for the safety of your passen- gers.

Ensure that the onboard documentation is kept in the vehicle at all times. This is especially important when lending or selling the vehicle to another person.

Tips for driving

Introduction

Depending upon how you expect to use your vehicle, it may a good idea to protect the engine from below. A guard underneath the engine may help to reduce the risk of damage to the lower part of the vehicle, such as an oil

sump when driving over kerbs, or along dirt tracks or rough roads, etc. SEAT recommends you have the guard fitted by a Technical Service.

WARNING

Driving under the influence of alcohol, drugs, medication or narcotics may result in severe accidents and even loss of life.

Alcohol, drugs, medication and narcotics may significantly alter per- ception, affect reaction times and safety while driving, which could result in the loss of control of the vehicle.

Before starting every trip

For your own safety and the safety of your passengers, always note the following points before every trip:

Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turn signals are working properly.

Check tyre pressure.

Ensure that all windows provide a clear and good view of the surroundings.

Make sure all luggage is secured page 12.

Make sure that no objects can interfere with the pedals.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

8 Safe driving

Adjust front seat, head restraint and rear vision mirrors properly according to your size.

Ensure that the passengers in the rear seats always have the head restraints in the in-use position page 116.

Instruct passengers to adjust the head restraints according to their height.

Protect children with appropriate child seats and properly ap- plied seat belts page 35.

Assume the correct sitting position. Instruct your passengers al- so to assume a proper sitting position. page 9.

Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct your passengers also to fasten their seat belts properly. page 20.

Driving abroad

In some countries, certain safety regulations and requirements are in force relating to exhaust gas emissions, which differ from the technical character- istics of the vehicle. Before travelling abroad, SEAT recommends you con- sult a Technical Service about the legal requirements and the following points:

Does the vehicle need technical modifications for driving abroad, for ex- ample, adjustment of the headlamps?

Does the vehicle have all the tools, diagnostics equipment and spare parts required for inspections and repairs?

Are there any SEAT dealers in the destination country?

For petrol vehicles: Is unleaded petrol available at the right octane rat- ing?

For diesel engines: Is diesel fuel available with a low sulphur content?

Are a suitable engine oil (page 255) and other engine fluids comply- ing with SEAT specifications available in the destination country?

Will the navigation system fitted at the factory operate correctly in the destination country with the available navigation data?

Are special tyres required in the destination country?

CAUTION SEAT does not accept liability for any damage to the vehicle due to the use of a lower quality fuel, an inadequate service or the non-availability of genu- ine spare parts.

Driving along flooded roadways

To prevent damage to the vehicle when driving through water, for example, along a flooded road, please observe the following:

Check the depth of the water before entering the flooded zone. The wa- ter should never come above the lower edge of the bodywork .

Do not drive faster than a pedestrian.

Do not stop in the water, use reverse gear or switch off the engine.

Oncoming traffic will cause waves which raise the level of the water, making it difficult to cross the water.

WARNING

When driving through water, mud, melted snow, etc., please remember that due to damp or frozen brake discs and shoes in winter, the braking effect may be delayed, therefore the required braking distance is greater.

Dry the brakes and remove ice by braking carefully. Ensure that you are not endangering other road-users or breaking traffic regulations in the process.

After driving through water, avoid sudden sharp manoeuvres.

9Safe driving

CAUTION Driving through flooded areas may severely damage vehicle compo- nents such as the engine, transmission, running gear or electrical system.

Never drive through salt water as salt causes corrosion. Always rinse any parts of the vehicle which have been in contact with salt water.

Sitting position for occupants

Danger of injuries due to an incorrect sitting position

Number of seats

Depending on the equipment, your vehicle has a total of five or seven seats. Each seat is equipped with a seat belt.

Equipment Seats in the front

Seats in the sec- ond row

Seats in the third row

5 seats 2 3

7 seats 2 3 2

If the seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe injuries increases. Seat belts can provide optimal protection only if the belt web is properly worn. The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if the belt web is not positioned correctly. This could result in severe and even fatal injuries. The risk of severe or fatal injuries is especially increased when a deploying airbag strikes a vehicle occupant who has assumed an incorrect sitting po- sition. The driver is responsible for all passengers in the vehicle, particularly children.

The following list shows just some examples of incorrect sitting positions which can be dangerous to all vehicle occupants.

Whenever the vehicle is in motion:

Never stand in the vehicle.

Never stand on the seats.

Never kneel on the seats.

Never tilt your seat backrest too far to the rear.

Never lean against the dash panel.

Never lie on the rear bench.

Never sit on the front edge of a seat.

Never sit sideways.

Never lean out of a window.

Never put your feet out of a window.

Never put your feet on the dash panel.

Never put your feet on the surface of a seat or seat backrest.

Never travel in a footwell.

Never sit on the armrests.

Never travel on a seat without wearing the seat belt.

Never carry any person in the luggage compartment.

WARNING

An incorrect sitting position in the vehicle can lead to severe injuries or death in the event of sudden braking or manoeuvres, collision or acci- dents or if the airbag deploys.

Before the vehicle moves, assume the proper sitting position and maintain it throughout the trip. This also includes fastening the seat belt.

Never transport more people than there are seats with a seat belt available in the vehicle.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

10 Safe driving

WARNING (Continued)

Children must always be protected with an approved child restraint system suited to their height and weight page 35, page 27.

Always keep your feet in the footwell while the vehicle is in motion. Never, for example, put your feet on the surface of a seat or on the dash panel and never put them out of a window. Otherwise the airbag and seat belt offer insufficient protection and the risk of injury in the event of an accident is increased.

WARNING

Before every trip, adjust the seat, the seat belt and the head restraints and instruct your passengers to fasten their seat belts properly.

Move the front passenger seat back as far as possible.

Adjust the driver seat so that there is a distance of at least 25 cm (10 inches) between the centre of your chest and the hub of the steering wheel. Adjust the driver seat so that you are able to press the accelera- tor, brake and clutch pedals to the floor with your knees slightly angled and that the distance between your knees and the dash panel is at least 10 cm (4 inches). If your physical constitution prevents you from meeting these requirements, contact a specialised workshop to make any modifi- cations required.

Never drive with the seat backrest tilted far back. The further the seat backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to incor- rect positioning of the belt web or to the incorrect sitting position!

Never drive with the seat backrest tilted forwards. Should a front air- bag deploy, it could throw the seat backrest backwards and injure the passengers of the rear seats.

Sit as far away as possible from the steering wheel and the dash pan- el.

WARNING (Continued)

Keep your back straight and resting completely against the seat back- rest and the front seats correctly adjusted. Never place any part of your body in the area of the airbag or very close to it.

If passengers on the rear seats are not sitting in an upright position, the risk of severe injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt web in- creases.

WARNING

Incorrect seat adjustment may lead to accidents and severe injuries.

Only adjust the seats when the vehicle is stationary, as the seats could move unexpectedly while the vehicle is in motion and you could lose control of the vehicle. Furthermore, an incorrect position is adopted when adjusting the seat.

Only adjust the height, seat backrest and forwards or backwards po- sition of the seat when there is nobody in the seat adjustment area.

There must be no objects blocking the seat adjustment area.

Only adjust the height, angle and longitudinal position of the rear seats when nobody is in the way.

The seat adjustment and lock areas must be kept clean.

11Safe driving

Correct sitting position

Fig. 1 The correct dis- tance between the driver and the steering wheel must be at least 25 cm (10 inches).

Fig. 2 Correct belt web and head restraint posi- tions

The correct sitting positions for the driver and passengers are shown below.

If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the correct sit- ting position, contact a specialised workshop for help with any special devi- ces. The seat belt and airbag can only provide optimum protection if a cor- rect sitting position is adopted. SEAT recommends visiting a Technical Serv- ice.

For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an acci- dent or sudden braking or manoeuvre, SEAT recommend the following posi- tions:

Valid for all vehicle occupants:

Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same level as the top of your head, or as close as possible to the same level as the top of your head and under no circumstances below eye level. Keep the back of your neck as close as possible to the head restraint Fig. 1 and Fig. 2.

Short people must lower the head restraint completely, even if your head is below its upper edge.

Tall people must raise the head restraint completely.

Adjust the seat backrest to an upright position so that your back rests completely against it.

Always keep your feet in the footwell while the vehicle is in motion.

Adjust and fasten your seat belt correctly page 20.

Also valid for the driver:

Adjust the steering wheel so that there is a distance of at least 25 cm (10 inches) between it and your chest Fig. 1 and so that you can hold the steering wheel with both hands on the outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions with your arms slightly bent.

The adjusted steering wheel must face your chest and not your face.

Adjust the driver seat forwards or backwards so that you are able to press the accelerator, brake and clutch pedals to the floor with your knees slightly angled and the distance between your knees and the dash panel is at least 10 cm (4 inches) Fig. 1.

Adjust the height of the driver seat so that you can easily reach the top of the steering wheel.

Keep both feet in the footwell so that you have the vehicle under control at all times.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

12 Safe driving

Also valid for the front passenger:

Move the front passenger seat back as far as possible for optimum pro- tection should the airbag deploy.

Transporting objects

Introduction

Always transport heavy loads in the luggage compartment and place the seat backs in a vertical position. Always use the anchors provided with suit- able rope to secure heavy objects. Never overload the vehicle. Both the car- rying capacity as well as the distribution of the load in the vehicle have ef- fects on driving behaviour and braking ability .

WARNING

Unsecured or incorrectly secured objects can cause serious injury in case of a sudden manoeuvring or breaking or in case of an accident. This is es- pecially true when objects are struck by a detonating airbag and fired through the vehicle interior. To reduce the risks, please note the follow- ing:

Secure all objects in the vehicle. Always keep equipment and heavy objects in the luggage compartment.

Always secure objects with suitable rope or slings so that they cannot enter the areas around the front or side airbags in case of sudden braking or an accident.

Always ensure that objects inside the vehicle cannot move into the area of the airbags while driving.

While driving, always keep object compartments closed.

WARNING (Continued)

Remove all objects from the front passenger seat when folded down. When the seat backrest is folded down, it presses on small and light ob- jects and these are detected by the weight sensor on the seat; this sends false information to the airbag control unit.

While the seat backrest of the front passenger seat is folded, the front airbag must remain disabled and the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF light on.

Objects secured in the vehicle should never be placed in such a way as to make passengers sit in an incorrect position.

If secured objects occupy a seat then this should not be occupied or used by anybody.

WARNING

The driving behaviour and braking ability change when transporting heavy and large objects.

Adjust your speed and driving style to visibility, road, traffic and weather conditions.

Accelerate gently and carefully.

Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.

Brake early.

Transporting a load

Secure all objects in the vehicle

Distribute the load throughout the vehicle, on the roof and in a trailer as uniformly as possible.

Transport heavy objects as far forward as possible in the luggage com- partment and lock the seat backs in the vertical position.

13Safe driving

Secure luggage in the luggage compartment with suitable straps on the fastening rings page 119.

Check the headlight adjustment page 90.

Use the suitable tyre pressure according to the load being transported. Read the tire inflation information label page 267.

For vehicles with a tire pressure indicator, change the vehicle load status page 202.

CAUTION Objects on the shelf could chafe against the wires of the heating element in the heated rear window and cause damage.

Note Please note the information about loading a trailer page 212 and the roof carrier system page 129.

Driving with the rear lid open

Driving with the rear lid open creates an additional risk. Secure all objects and secure the rear lid correctly and take all measures possible to reduce toxic gases from entering the vehicle.

WARNING

Driving with the rear lid unlocked or open could cause serious injuries.

Always drive with the rear lid closed.

Secure all objects in the vehicle. Loose items could fall out of the ve- hicle and injure other road users or damage other vehicles.

Drive particularly carefully and think ahead.

WARNING (Continued)

Avoid sudden manoeuvres and braking given that this could cause an uncontrolled movement of the open rear lid.

When transporting objects that protrude out of the luggage compart- ment, indicate them suitably. Observe legal requirements.

If objects must project out of the luggage compartment, the rear lid must never be used to secure or attach objects.

If a baggage rack is fitted on the rear lid, it should be removed before travelling with the rear lid open.

WARNING

Toxic gases may enter the vehicle interior when the rear lid is open. This could cause loss of consciousness, carbon monoxide poisoning, serious injury and accidents.

To avoid toxic gases entering the vehicle always drive with the rear lid closed.

In exceptional circumstances, if you must drive with the rear lid open, observe the following to reduce the entry of toxic gases inside the vehi- cle:

Close all windows and the sliding sunroof.

Turn off the air recirculation for the heating and air conditioner.

Open all of the air outlets in the dash panel.

Turn the heating fan and heater to the highest level.

CAUTION An open boot lid changes the length and height of the vehicle.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

14 Safe driving

Driving a loaded vehicle

For the best handling when driving a loaded vehicle, note the following:

Secure all objects page 12.

Accelerate gently and carefully.

Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.

Brake early.

If necessary, read the instructions for driving with a trailer page 212.

If necessary, read the instructions for driving with a roof carrier system page 129.

WARNING

A sliding load could considerably affect the stability and safety of the ve- hicle resulting in an accident with serious consequences.

Secure loads correctly so they do not move.

When transporting heavy objects, use suitable ropes or straps.

Lock the seat backs in vertical position.

15Seat belts

Seat belts

Using seat belts

Introduction

Check the condition of all the seat belts at regular intervals. If you notice that the belt webbing, fittings, retractor mechanism or buckle of any of the belts is damaged, the belt must be replaced immediately by a specialised workshop . The specialised workshop must use the appropriate spare parts corresponding to the vehicle, the equipment and the model year. SEAT recommends visiting a Technical Service.

WARNING

Unbuckled or badly buckled seat belts increase the risk of severe or even fatal injuries. A seat belt cannot offer its full protection if it is not fas- tened and used correctly.

Wearing your seat belt is the most effective way of reducing the risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries in the event of an accident. Seat belts must be correctly fastened when the vehicle is in motion to protect the driver and all vehicle occupants.

Before each trip, every occupant in the vehicle occupants must sit properly, correctly fasten the seat belt belonging to his or her seat and keep it fastened throughout the trip. This also applies to other vehicle occupants when driving in town.

When travelling, children must be secured in the vehicle with a child restraint system suitable for their weight and height and with the seat belts correctly fastened page 35.

Instruct your passengers to fasten their seat belts properly before driving off.

WARNING (Continued)

Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the appropriate seat and en- sure it is engaged. Using the latch plate in the buckle of another seat will not protect you properly and may cause severe injuries.

Do not allow liquids or foreign bodies to enter the buckle fastenings. This could damage the buckles and seat belts.

Never unbuckle your seat belt when the vehicle is moving.

Never allow more than one passenger to share the same seat belt.

Never hold children or babies on your lap sharing the same seat belt.

Loose, bulky clothing (such as a jacket) impairs the proper fit and function of the seat belt.

WARNING

It is extremely dangerous to drive using damaged seat belts and could re- sult in serious injury or loss of life.

Avoid damaging the seat belt by jamming it in the door or the seat mechanism.

If the fabric or other parts of the seat belt are damaged, the seat belts could break in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

Always have damaged seatbelts replaced immediately by seat belts approved for the vehicle in question by SEAT. Seat belts which have been worn in an accident and stretched must be replaced by a specialised workshop. Renewal may be necessary even if there is no apparent dam- age. The belt anchorage should also be checked.

Never attempt to repair, modify or remove a seat belt yourself. All re- pairs to seat belts, retractors and buckles must be carried out by a speci- alised workshop.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

16 Seat belts

Warning lamp

Fig. 3 Warning lamp on the instrument panel.

Fig. 4 Example of seat belt status display for the rear seats (here, a 7-seat vehicle) on the instru- ment panel top: the sec- ond row; bottom: the third row of seats

Lights up or flash-

es Possible cause Solution

Driver's seat belt not fas- tened or front passenger seat belt not fastened if the front passenger seat is occupied.

Fasten seat belts!

Objects on the front passen- ger seat.

Remove any objects from the front passenger seat and store them safely.

Some control and warning lamps on the instrument panel will come on to check certain functions when the ignition is switched on. They will switch off after a few seconds.

An audible warning will be heard for a maximum of 90 seconds if the seat belts are not fastened when the car is started and then driven at a speed of more then 25 km/h (15 mph) or if the seat belts are unfastened while the vehicle is in motion. The seat belt warning lamp will also flash.

The warning lamp does not switch off until the driver and front passenger fasten their seat belts while the ignition is switched on.

Seat belt status display for rear seats

The seat belt status display on the instrument panel informs the driver, when the ignition is switched on, whether any passengers in the rear seats have fastened their seat belts. The symbol indicates that the passenger in this seat has fastened his or her seat belt Fig. 4.

The seat belt status is displayed for around 30 seconds when a seat belt in the rear seats is fastened or unfastened. You can switch off this display by pressing the 0.0 / SET button.

The seat belt status flashes for a maximum of 30 seconds when a seat belt in the rear seats is unfastened while the vehicle is in motion. An audible warning will also be heard if the vehicle is travelling at over 25 km/h (15 mph).

17Seat belts

The rear seat display can be enabled or disabled at a Technical Service.

Frontal collisions and the laws of physics

Fig. 5 Vehicle about to hit a wall: the vehicle oc- cupants are not wearing seat belts

Fig. 6 The vehicle hits the wall: the vehicle oc- cupants are not wearing seat belts

It is easy to explain how the laws of physics work in the case of a head-on collision: When a vehicle starts moving Fig. 5, a certain amount of energy known as kinetic energy is produced in the vehicle and its occupants.

The amount of kinetic energy depends on the speed of the vehicle and the weight of the vehicle and its passengers. The higher the speed and the

greater the weight, the more energy there is to be absorbed in an acci- dent.

The most significant factor, however, is the speed of the vehicle. If the speed doubles from 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph), for example, the corresponding kinetic energy is multiplied by four.

Because the vehicle occupants in our example are not restrained by seat belts, all of the occupants' kinetic energy has to be absorbed at the point of impact Fig. 6.

Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bodies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne (1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are even higher.

Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts are not attached to the vehicle. In a head-on collision, they will move forward at the same speed their vehi- cle was travelling just before the impact. This example applies not only to head-on collisions, but to all accidents and collisions.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

18 Seat belts

Dangers of not using the seat belt

Fig. 7 A driver not wear- ing a seat belt is thrown forward violently

Fig. 8 The unbelted rear passenger is thrown for- ward violently, hitting the driver wearing a seat belt

Even at low speeds the forces acting on the body in a collision are so great that it is not possible to brace oneself with one's hands. In a frontal colli- sion, unbelted passengers are thrown forward and will make violent contact with the steering wheel, dash panel, windscreen or whatever else is in the way Fig. 7.

It is also important for the rear passengers to wear seat belts properly, as they could otherwise be thrown forward violently through the vehicle interi- or in an accident. Passengers in the rear seats who do not use seat belts endanger not only themselves but also the front occupants Fig. 8.

Seat belt protection

Fig. 9 Drivers with prop- erly worn seat belts will not be thrown forward in the event of sudden brak- ing

Properly worn seat belts hold the occupants in their seats correctly. They al- so help to prevent uncontrolled movements that could lead to severe inju- ries and reduce the danger of being thrown from the vehicle in the event of an accident.

Vehicle occupants wearing their seat belts correctly benefit greatly from the ability of the belts to absorb kinetic energy. The front part of your vehicle and other passive safety features, such as the airbag system, are also de- signed to absorb the kinetic energy released in a collision. Taken together, all these features reduce the releasing kinetic energy and consequently, the risk of injury. This is why it is so important to fasten seat belts before every trip, even when "just driving around the corner".

Ensure that your passengers wear their seat belts as well. Accident statistics have shown that wearing seat belts is an effective means of substantially reducing the risk of injury and improving the chances of survival in a seri- ous accident. Furthermore, properly worn seat belts improve the protection provided by airbags in the event of an accident. For this reason, wearing a seat belt is required by law in most countries.

Although your vehicle is equipped with airbags, the seat belts must be fas- tened and worn. The front airbags, for example, are only triggered in some cases of frontal collision. The front airbags will not be triggered during

19Seat belts

minor frontal, minor side collisions, rear collisions, overturns, or accidents in which the airbag trigger threshold value in the control unit is not excee- ded.

Therefore, you should always wear your seat belt and ensure that all vehicle occupants have fastened their seat belts properly before you drive off!

Using seat belts

Twisted seat belt

If it is difficult to remove the seat belt from the guide, the seat belt may have become twisted inside the side trim after being wound too quickly on unfastening:

Pull out the seat belt completely, carefully pulling on the latch plate.

Untwist the belt and guide it back, assisting it by hand.

The seat belt must be fastened even if it is impossible to untwist it. In this case, the twisted area must not be in an area in direct contact with your body. Have the seat belt untwisted urgently by a specialised workshop.

WARNING

An improperly handled seat belt increases the risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries.

Regularly check that the seat belts and their components are in per- fect condition.

Always keep your seat belt clean.

Do not jam or damage the seat belt or rub it with sharp edges.

Make sure there are no liquids or foreign bodies on the latch plate and in the buckle.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

20 Seat belts

How to wear seat belts properly

Fastening or unfastening a seat belt

Fig. 10 Insert the latch plate into the buckle

Fig. 11 Release the latch plate from the buckle

Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle occupants in the position that most protects them in the event of an accident or sudden braking .

Fastening the seat belt

Fasten your seat belt before each trip.

Adjust the front seat and head restraint correctly page 9.

Engage the seat backrest of the rear seat in an upright position .

Pull the latch plate and place the belt webbing evenly across your chest and lap. Do not twist the seat belt when doing so .

Engage the latch plate in the buckle of the corresponding seat Fig. 10.

Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely engaged in the buckle.

Unfastening the seat belt

The seat belt must not be unfastened until the vehicle has come to a stand- still .

Press the red button on the buckle Fig. 11. The latch plate is released from the buckle.

Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls up easily and the trim will not be damaged.

WARNING

An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe or fatal injuries in the event of an accident.

The seat belt cannot offer its full protection unless the seat backrests are in an upright position and the seat belt is worn correctly, according to your size.

Unbuckling your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion can cause se- vere or fatal injuries in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

21Seat belts

Fastening or unfastening the seat belt with two buckles

Fig. 12 Fasten the seat belt on the centre seat in the second row of seats

Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle occupants in the position that most protects them in the event of an accident or sudden braking .

The seat belts for the centre seat in the second row of seats and for the seats in the third row of seats are fastened using two buckles.

Fastening the seat belt

Fasten your seat belt before each trip.

Adjust the rear seat and head restraint correctly page 9.

Engage the seat backrest of the rear seat in an upright position .

Use latch plate of the belt Fig. 12 1 to pull the seat belt down. Do not twist the seat belt when doing so .

Engage the latch plate 1 in the buckle of the corresponding seat A .

Use the latch plate Fig. 12 2 to pull the seat belt across your lap.

Engage the latch plate 2 in the buckle of the corresponding seat B .

Pull the belt to ensure that both latch plates are securely engaged in the buckles.

Unfastening the seat belt

The seat belt must not be unfastened until the vehicle has come to a stand- still .

Press the red button on the buckle Fig. 12 A . The latch plate is re- leased from the buckle.

Press the red button on the buckle Fig. 12 B . The latch plate is re- leased from the buckle.

Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls up easily and the trim will not be damaged.

WARNING

An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe or fatal injuries in the event of an accident.

The seat belt cannot offer its full protection unless the seat backrests are in an upright position and the seat belt is worn correctly, according to your size.

Unbuckling your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion can cause se- vere or fatal injuries in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

Note Seat belts with two buckles include a diagram to show how to fasten the seat belt.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

22 Seat belts

Seat belt position

Fig. 13 Correct belt web and head restraint posi- tions

Fig. 14 Correct position- ing of seat belts during pregnancy

Seat belts offer their maximum protection in the event of an accident and reduce the risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries only when they are properly positioned. Furthermore, if the webbing is correctly positioned, the seat belt will hold the vehicle occupants in the optimum position to ensure the airbag provides the utmost protection. The seat belt must therefore al- ways be worn and the webbing correctly positioned.

Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause severe or even fatal injuries page 9, Sitting position for occupants.

Correct seat belt position

The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie on the centre of the shoulder, never across the neck or the arm, under the arm or behind the shoulder.

The lap part of the seat belt must lie across the pelvis, never across the stomach.

The seat belt must lie flat and fit comfortably. Pull the belt tight if neces- sary to take up any slack.

In the case of pregnant women, the seat belt must lie evenly across the chest and as low as possible over the pelvis, never across the stomach and must be worn properly at all times during the pregnancy Fig. 14.

Adapting the position of the belt webbing to your size

The seat belt can be adapted using the following equipment:

Belt height adjustment for the front seats.

Seat height adjustment (front seats).

WARNING

An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident or sudden braking or manoeuvre.

The seat belt cannot provide optimum protection if it is not correctly worn and the seat backrest is not tilted slightly backwards.

The seat belt itself or a loose seat belt can cause severe injuries if the belt moves from hard areas of the body to soft areas (e.g. abdomen).

The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie on the centre of the shoul- der, never across the neck or the arm.

The seat belt must lie flat and fit comfortably on the torso

The lap part of the seat belt must lie across the pelvis, never across the stomach. The seat belt must lie flat and fit comfortably on the pelvis Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack.

23Seat belts

WARNING (Continued)

For pregnant women, the lap part of the seat belt must lie as low as possible over the pelvis and always lie flat, surrounding the stomach.

Do not twist the seat belt while it is fastened.

Never pull the seat belt away from your body using your hand.

Do not lie the seat belt across rigid or fragile objects, e.g. glasses, pens or keys.

Never use seat belt clips, retaining rings or similar instruments to al- ter the position of the belt webbing.

Note If you physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the correct posi- tion of the belt webbing, contact a specialised workshop for help with any special devices to ensure the optimum protection of the seat belt and air- bag. SEAT recommends visiting a Technical Service.

Belt height adjustment

Fig. 15 Next to the front seats: belt height adjust- er

Using the height adjusters for the front seats and the outer seats of the sec- ond row, the position of the seat belts can be adjusted in the shoulder area according to the height of the occupant:

Keep the guide device pressed down in the direction of the arrow Fig. 15.

Move the guide device up or down until the seat belt lies over the centre of your shoulder page 22, Seat belt position.

Release the guide device.

Pull the belt sharply to check that the device is engaged securely.

WARNING

Never adjust the belt height while the vehicle is in motion.

Seat belt tensioners

Automatic belt retainer, belt tensioner, belt tension limiter

Seat belts are part of the vehicle safety concept page 27 and consist of the following important functions:

Automatic belt retainer

Every seat belt is equipped with an automatic belt retainer on the shoulder belt. If the belt is pulled slowly or during normal driving, the system allows for total freedom of movement on the shoulder belt. However, during sud- den braking, during travel in mountains or bends and during acceleration, the automatic belt retainer on the seat belt is locked is pulled quickly.

Belt tensioners

The seat belts on the front seats and the outer seats of the second row are equipped with belt tensioners.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

24 Seat belts

Sensors will trigger the belt tensioners during severe head-on, lateral or rear collision and retract and tighten the seat belts. If the seat belt is loose, it is retracted to reduce the forwards movement of vehicle occupants or move- ment in the direction of the collision. The belt tensioner works in combina- tion with the airbag system. The belt tensioner will not be triggered in the event of the vehicle overturning if the side airbags are not deployed.

If the belt tensioner is triggered, a fine dust is produced. This is normal and it is not an indication of fire in the vehicle.

Belt tension limiter

The belt tension limiter reduces the force of the seat belt on the body in the event of an accident.

Note The relevant safety requirements must be observed when the vehicle or components of the system are scrapped. These requirements are known to specialised workshops page 24.

Service and disposal of belt tensioners

If you work on the belt tensioners or remove and install other parts of the vehicle when performing other repair work, the seat belt may be damaged. The consequence may be that, in the event of an accident, the belt tension- ers function incorrectly or not at all.

So that the effectiveness of the belt tensioner is not reduced and that re- moved parts do not cause any injuries or environmental pollution, regula- tions must be observed. These requirements are known to specialised work- shops.

WARNING

Improper handling and homemade repairs of seat belts, automatic belt retainers and tension devices increase the risk of sustaining severe or fa- tal injuries. The belt tensioner may fail to trigger or may trigger in the wrong circumstances.

Never attempt to repair, adjust or remove or install parts of the belt tensioners or seat belts. Any work must be performed by a specialised workshop only page 235.

Belt tensioners and automatic belt retainers cannot be repaired and must be replaced.

For the sake of the environment Airbag modules and belt tensioners may contain perchlorate. Observe the legal requirements for their disposal.

25Airbag system

Airbag system

Brief introduction

Introduction

Front airbags have been installed for both driver and passenger. The front airbags can also protect the chest and head of driver and passenger if the seats, seat belts head restraints and, for the driver, the steering wheel are correctly adjusted and used. Airbags are considered as additional safety equipment. An airbag cannot replace the seat belt, which must be worn at all times, even in front seats where front airbags have been installed.

WARNING

Never exclusively trust the airbag system as a means of protection.

Even when triggered, airbag protection is only auxiliary.

The airbags provide the best protection when the seat belts are prop- erly fastened, thus reducing the risk of sustaining injuries page 20, How to wear seat belts properly.

Before each trip, every occupant must sit properly, correctly fasten the seat belt belonging to his or her seat and keeping it fastened throughout the trip. This rule is valid for all vehicle occupants.

WARNING

Vehicle occupants sitting in the front of the vehicle must never carry any objects in the deployment space between them and the airbags, as this increases the risk of sustaining injuries if the airbag is triggered. This modifies the airbag deployment space or the objects may fly uncontrolla- bly and hit your body.

Never carry objects in your hand or on your lap while the vehicle is in motion.

Never transport objects on the front passenger seat. In the event of sudden braking and manoeuvres, the objects may end up in the airbag deployment space and fly uncontrollably around the vehicle interior if the airbag is activated.

Vehicle occupants of the front and outer rear seats must never carry any other people, pets or objects in the deployment space between them and the airbags. Make sure children and other passengers also respect this recommendation.

WARNING

The airbag system provides protection for one accident only. If they have been deployed, they must be replaced.

Ensure deployed airbags and the system components involved are im- mediately replaced with new, SEAT-approved components for the vehicle.

Have any repairs or modifications carried out at a specialised work- shop. Specialised workshops have the necessary tools, diagnostics equipment, repair information and qualified personnel.

Never fit recycled or reused airbag components in your vehicle.

Never modify the airbag system components.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

26 Airbag system

WARNING

If the airbags are triggered, a fine dust is produced. This is normal and it is not an indication of fire in the vehicle.

This fine dust may irritate the skin and eyes and cause breathing dif- ficulties, particularly in people suffering from or who have suffered from asthma or other illnesses of the respiratory tract. To reduce breathing dif- ficulties, get out of the vehicle and open and doors and windows to breath in fresh air.

Should you touch the dust, wash your hands and face using a mild soap and water before you eat.

Prevent the dust from affecting the eyes or open wounds.

Rinse your eyes with water if you have dust in them.

WARNING

Solvents cause the surfaces of the airbag modules to become porous. If an airbag is accidentally triggered, the detachment of plastic parts could cause serious injury.

Never clean the dash panel and the surfaces of the airbag modules with cleaners containing solvents.

Control lamp

Fig. 16 Control lamp for disabling the front pas- senger front airbag on the dash panel

It lights up

Digit Possible cause Solution

Instrument panel

Fault in airbag sys- tem and seat belt tensioners.

Have the system checked immediately by a special- ised workshop.

Dash panel

Fault in the airbag system.

Have the system checked immediately by a special- ised workshop.

Front passenger front airbag disabled.

Check whether the airbag should remain disabled.

Several warning and control lamps should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few seconds.

If the front passenger airbag is deactivated and the control lamp does not remain lit or if it is lit together with the control lamp on the instrument panel and the front passenger front airbag is disabled, there may be a fault in the airbag system .

27Airbag system

WARNING

In the event of a fault in the airbag system, the airbag may not trigger correctly, may fail to trigger or may even trigger unexpectedly, leading to severe or fatal injuries.

Have the airbag system checked immediately by a specialised work- shop.

Never mount a child seat in the front passenger seat or remove the mounted child seat! The front passenger front airbag may deploy during an accident in spite of the fault.

CAUTION Always pay attention to any lit control lamps and to the corresponding de- scriptions and instructions to avoid damage to the vehicle.

Airbag system

Description and function of the airbag

The airbag can protect vehicle occupants in the event of an accidents, cush- ioning the movement of the occupants in the direction of the collision in frontal and side accidents.

Deployed airbags fill with a propellant gas. This causes the airbag covers to break and the airbags to fully and powerfully deploy within their entire de- ployment space within fractions of a second. When an occupant with the seat belt properly fastened puts pressure on the inflated airbag, the propel- lant gas escapes to absorb the force of the impact and slow the movement. This reduces the risk of severe or fatal injuries. Airbag deployment does not mean that other types of injury such as swelling, bruising, burns and skin injuries can be ruled out.

Airbags do not protect the arms or the lower part of the body.

The most important factors for triggering the airbag are the type of accident, the angle of impact, the vehicle speed and the characteristics of the object the vehicle hits. Therefore, airbags are not triggered every time the vehicle is visibly damaged.

The airbag system is designed to be triggered in collisions with a severe im- pact. The front, curtain, side and knee airbags may be triggered under spe- cial circumstances. The scope of any visible damage to the vehicle is not an indication of airbag deployment.

Airbags act in conjunction with three-point seat belts in the event of certain accidents, when vehicle deceleration rate is severe enough to trigger the airbags. Airbags only deploy once and only under certain circumstances. Seat belts remain present to offer protection in situations where airbags are not triggered or where they have already deployed. For example, when a ve- hicle hits another after an initial collision or is hit by another vehicle.

The airbag system is an integral part of the car's passive safety system. The airbag system can only work effectively when the vehicle occupants are wearing their seat belts correctly and have adjusted the head restraints properly page 9.

Vehicle safety components

The following safety equipment makes up the vehicle safety design to re- duce the risk of severe and fatal injuries. Depending on the vehicle equip- ment, some equipment may not be fitted in the vehicle or may not be avail- able in some markets.

Optimised seat belts for all seats.

Belt tensioners for the driver and front passenger and, where applicable, on the outer seats of the second row of seats in combination with the side airbags.

Furthermore, belt tension limiters for the driver's and front passenger seat belt.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

28 Airbag system

Belt height adjustment for the front seats and, where applicable, the outer seats of the second row of seats.

Seat belt warning lamp

Front airbags for driver and passenger.

Side airbags for the driver, front passenger and, where applicable, the outer seats of the second row of seats.

Left and right curtain airbags.

One airbag for the driver's knees.

Airbag control lamp .

Control lamp .

Control units and sensors.

Height-adjustable head restraint optimised for rear collisions.

Adjustable steering column.

Where applicable, mountings for child seats on the rear seats and on the front passenger seat.

Where applicable, mountings for the child seat upper retaining strap.

Situations in which the front, knee, side and curtain airbag does not deploy:

If the ignition is switched off during the collision.

In frontal collisions when the deceleration measured by the control unit is too low.

In minor side collisions.

In rear collisions.

In the event of the vehicle overturning.

When the impact speed is lower than the reference value set in the con- trol unit.

Important information regarding the front passenger airbag

Fig. 17 Passenger side sun visor: airbag sticker.

Fig. 18 On the rear frame of the passenger side door: airbag sticker.

A sticker with important information about the passenger airbag is located on the passenger sun visor and/or on the passenger side door frame. Read and always observe the safety information included in the following chap- ters:

Child seats and passenger airbag page 37, Use of the child seat on the front passenger seat.

Safety distance with respect to the passenger airbag in Introduc- tion on page 25.

Objects between the passenger and the passenger airbag in Front airbags on page 29.

29Airbag system

Front airbags

Fig. 19 Location and deployment area of the front airbag for the driver

Fig. 20 Location and deployment area of the front airbag for the front passenger

In conjunction with the seat belts, the front airbag system gives the driver and the front passenger additional protection for the head and chest in the event of a severe frontal collision. Always remains as far away as possible from the front airbag. This way, the front airbags can freely and completely deploy when triggered, providing their maximum protection.

The front airbag for the driver is located in the steering wheel Fig. 19 and the airbag for the front passenger is located in the dash panel Fig. 20. Air- bags are identified by the word AIRBAG.

When the front airbags are triggered they fill the zones marked in red (de- ployment area) Fig. 19. Therefore, objects should never be placed or mounted in these areas , Factory-fitted accessories are outside the range of the front airbag for the driver and the front passenger, e.g. the baseplate for the mobile phone support.

The airbag covers fold out of the steering wheel or dash panel when the driver and front passenger front airbags are triggered Fig. 20. The airbag covers remain connected to the steering wheel or the dash panel.

WARNING

The airbag is deployed at high speed in fractions of a second.

Always keep the deployment areas of the front airbags free.

Never secure objects to the covers or in the deployment area of the airbag modules, e.g. drink holders or phone supports.

The deployment space between the front passengers and the airbags must not in any case be occupied by other passenger, pets and objects.

Never fix any object to the windscreen above the front airbag on the front passenger side.

Do not alter, cover or stick anything to the steering wheel hub or the surface of the airbag module on the passenger side of the dash panel.

WARNING

Front airbags are deployed in front of the steering wheel Fig. 19 and the dash panel Fig. 20.

When driving, always hold the steering wheel on the outer edge of the ring with both hands: 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock position.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

30 Airbag system

WARNING (Continued)

Adjust the driver seat so that there is at least 25 cm distance between your chest and the hub of the steering wheel. If your physical constitu- tion prevents you from meeting these requirements, make sure you con- tact a specialised workshop.

Adjust the front passenger seat so there is as much distance as possi- ble between the front passenger and the dash panel.

Types of front passenger front airbag systems

There are two different SEAT front passenger front airbag systems:

A B

Characteristics of the front passen- ger front airbag that can only be dis- abled in a specialised workshop.

Characteristics of the front passen- ger front airbag that can be disabled manually page 30.

Name: airbag system. Name: airbag system with front passenger front airbag disabling.

Control lamp on the instrument panel.

Control lamp on the instrument panel.

Front passenger front airbag loca- ted in the dash panel.

Front passenger front airbag loca- ted in the dash panel.

control lamp on the dash panel .

Key switch in the glove compart- ment on the front passenger side of the dash panel.

Deactivating and activating the front passenger front airbag using the key switch

Fig. 21 In the glove com- partment on the front passenger side: key-op- erated switch for activat- ing and deactivating the front passenger airbag

The front passenger front airbag must be disabled when a rear-facing child seat is mounted.

Disabling the front passenger front airbag

Switch the ignition off.

Open the glove compartment on the front passenger side.

Unfold the vehicle key shaft page 65.

Insert the key into the slot of the switch for deactivating the front pas- senger airbag Fig. 21. About 3/4 of the key should enter, as far as it will go.

Then turn the key gently to the OFF position. Do not force it if you feel resistance, and make sure you have inserted the key fully.

Close the glove compartment on the front passenger side.

The control lamp on the dash panel will remain lit while the ignition is switched on page 26.

Activating the front passenger front airbag

Switch the ignition off.

Open the glove compartment on the front passenger side.

31Airbag system

Insert the key into the slot of the switch for deactivating the front pas- senger airbag Fig. 21. About 3/4 of the key should enter, as far as it will go.

Then turn the key gently to the ON position. Do not force it if you feel resistance, and make sure you have inserted the key fully.

Close the glove compartment on the front passenger side.

Check if, when the ignition is switched on, that the control lamp on the dash panel does not light up page 26.

How to know whether the front passenger front airbag is disabled

Deactivation of the front passenger airbag is only indicated by the control lamp that remains lit on the dash panel ( remains yellow) page 26, Control lamp.

If the control lamp on the centre console does not re- main lit or is lit in combination with the control lamp on the instrument panel, a child restraint system cannot be mounted on the front passenger seat for safety reasons. The front passenger front airbag may deploy during an accident.

WARNING

The front passenger front airbag must only be disabled in special cases.

Disable and activate the front passenger front airbag when the igni- tion is switched off to avoid damage to the airbag system.

It is the driver's responsibility to ensure that the key operated switch is set to the correct position.

Only disable the front passenger front airbag when a child seat is to be mounted under exceptional circumstances.

As soon as the child seat is no longer needed on the front passenger seat, reconnect the front passenger front airbag.

Never leave the key in the airbag deactivation switch as it could get damaged or activate or deactivate the airbag during driving.

Side airbags

Fig. 22 On the side of the front seat: location of the side airbag

Fig. 23 Range of action of the front and rear side airbags. With 5 and 7 seats.

The side airbags are located in the outer cushion of the driver and front pas- senger seat backrests Fig. 22. Depending on the equipment of the model, the outer seats of the second row of seats may also be fitted with side air- bags, located between the seat backrests and the access area. Their posi- tion is indicated by the word AIRBAG. The red area (dotted line) Fig. 23 shows the field of action of the side airbags.

In a side collision, the side airbags are triggered on the affected side of the vehicle, thus reducing the risk of injury to passengers on that side.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

32 Airbag system

WARNING

The airbag is deployed at high speed in fractions of a second.

Always keep the deployment areas of the side airbags free.

Vehicle occupants of the front and outer rear seats must never carry any other people, pets or objects in the deployment space between them and the airbags.

The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.

Do not mount accessories on the doors.

Only used protective covers for the seats that are approved for the ve- hicle. Otherwise, the side airbag would be obstructed when deployed.

WARNING

Incorrect handling of the driver's and front passenger seat could prevent the side airbag from deploying properly and cause severe injuries.

Never remove the front seats of the vehicle or modify any of their components.

Great forces must not be exerted on the seat backrest bolsters be- cause the side airbags might not deploy correctly, might not deploy at all or might deploy unexpectedly.

Any damage to the original seat upholstery or around the seams of the side airbag units must be repaired immediately by a specialised workshop.

Curtain airbags

Fig. 24 On the left side of the vehicle: location and deployment area of the curtain air- bag

Fig. 25 Deployed curtain airbags

The curtain airbags are located on the driver and front passenger side above the doors Fig. 24. Airbags are identified by the word AIRBAG.

The area framed red Fig. 24 is covered by the curtain airbag when it is de- ployed (deployment area). Therefore, objects should never be placed or mounted in these areas.

33Airbag system

In a side collision, the curtain airbag on the side affected will be deployed. The airbag covers the windows and pillars.

In a side collision, the curtain airbags for the front and outer rear seats re- duce the risk of injury to the areas of the body facing the impact.

WARNING

The airbag is deployed at high speed in fractions of a second.

Always keep the deployment areas of the curtain airbags free.

Do not fix objects to the cover or in the deployment area of the cur- tain airbag.

Vehicle occupants of the front and outer rear seats must never carry any other people, pets or objects in the deployment space between them and the airbags.

The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.

Do not mount accessories on the doors.

Do not fit curtains to the windows other than those expressly ap- proved for use in the vehicle.

Only turn the sun blinds towards the windows if there is no object, e.g. pens or garage remote controls, secured to the sun blind.

Knee airbag

Fig. 26 On the driver side: location of the knee airbag

Fig. 27 On the driver side: radius of action of the knee airbag.

The knee airbag is located on the driver side below the dash panel Fig. 26. Airbags are identified by the word AIRBAG.

The area outlined in red Fig. 27 A is covered by the knee airbag when it is deployed (deployment area). Therefore, objects should never be placed or mounted in these areas.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

34 Airbag system

WARNING

The airbag is deployed at high speed in fractions of a second.

The knee airbag is deployed in front of the driver's knees. Always keep the deployment areas of the knee airbags free.

Never not fix objects to the cover or in the deployment area of the knee airbag.

Adjust the driver seat so that there is a distance of at least 10 cm (4 inches) between your knees and the location of the knee airbag. If your physical constitution prevents you from meeting these requirements, make sure you contact a specialised workshop.

35Child safety

Child safety

Child seats (accessories)

Introduction

Please read the information regarding the airbag system fully before trans- porting babies and children in a child seat or other child restraint system installed on the front passenger seat.

This information is extremely important for driver and passenger safety, par- ticularly that of babies and children.

SEAT recommends the use of child seats from the SEAT accessory pro- gramme. These child seats have been designed and tested for use in SEAT vehicles. You can purchase child seats with different mountings from a Technical Service.

Using child restraint systems with a base or foot

Some child restraint systems are secured to the seat using a base or foot. For certain equipment the use of an additional accessory will be necessary (for example, an accessory for the floor compartment) to fit the child re- straint system correctly and securely.

WARNING

Make sure children are properly belted in and correctly secured to avoid severe or fatal injuries while the vehicle is in motion.

Never use a rear-facing child seat in the front passenger seat if the front passenger front airbag is activated.

Children up to 12 years old should always travel on the rear seat.

WARNING (Continued)

Children must always be protected with an approved child restraint system suited to their height and weight.

Children must assume the proper sitting position and be properly bel- ted in while travelling.

Ensure the seat backrest is upright when a child seat is being used on it.

Do not allow the child's head or other part of his or her body to fall into the deployment area of the side airbags.

Make sure the belt webbing is correctly positioned.

Never hold children or babies on your lap or in your arms.

Only one child may occupy a child seat.

If you are using a child seat with a base or foot, always install this base or foot correctly and safely.

If the vehicle has a storage compartment in the footwell in front of the last row of seats, this compartment cannot be used as designed; on the contrary: It must be filled using the specially designed accessory so that the base or foot is correctly supported by the closed compartment and the child seat is secured properly. If this compartment is not suitably secured when using a child seat with a base or foot then the compart- ment cover could rupture in an accident and the child will be ejected and suffer serious injury.

Please read and observe the child seat manufacturer's handling in- structions.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

36 Child safety

WARNING

An empty or loose child seat could fly uncontrollably around the vehicle interior and cause injuries in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

When not in use while the vehicle is in motion, always safely secure the child seat or store it in the luggage compartment.

Note Replace the child seat after an accident, as it may have invisible damage.

General information on transporting children in the vehicle

Legal regulations and provisions will always take priority over the descrip- tions of this instruction manual. There are different regulations and provi- sions for the use of child seats and their mountings (table on page 36). In some countries, for example, the use of child seats on certain seats in the vehicle may be forbidden.

The physical principles and the forces acting on the vehicle in the event of a collision or other type of accidents also apply to children page 20. Howev- er, unlike adults and youngsters, children do not have fully developed mus- cle and bone structures. In the event of an accident, children are subject to a greater risk than adults of sustaining severe injuries.

Given that children's bodies are not yet fully developed, child restraint sys- tems must be used that are especially adapted to their height, weight and constitution. There are laws in force in many countries that determine the use of approved seat systems for transporting babies and children.

Only used authorised, approved child seats that are suitable for the vehicle. Always consult with a Technical Service or a specialised workshop should you have any doubts.

Specific child seat regulations for each country (selection)

Regulation Further information

ECE-R 44a) Technical Service or qualified work- shop

a) ECE-R: Economic Comission for Europe Regulation.

Categorisation of child seats according to ECE-R 44

Weight cate- gory

Weight of the child

Installation of the child seat

Group 0 up to 10 kg Rear-facing. On rear seats, optionally using the ISOFIX system.Group 0+ up to 13 kg

Group 1 9 to 18 kg Forward-facing. On rear seats, optional-

ly using the ISOFIX system.

Group 2 15 to 25 kg

Forward-facing. On the outer rear seats or in the centre seat of the second row

of seats and on all seats in the third row. Optionally with ISOFIX system.

Group 3 22 to 36 kg Forward-facing.

Not all children fit in the seat of their weight group. Nor do all seats adapt to the vehicle. Therefore, always check whether the child fits properly in the child seat and whether the seat can be installed safely in the vehicle.

The rear seats are suitable for child seats with the ISOFIX system specially designed for this type of vehicle in accordance with regulation ECE-R 44.

Child seats approved under the ECE-R 44 regulation are fitted with the corre- sponding approval symbol. The sign is an upper-case E in a circle with the identification number below it.

37Child safety

WARNING

In general, the rear seat is always the safest place for correctly belted in children in the event of an accident.

A suitable child seat that is correctly installed and used on one of the rear seats offer the most protection possible for babies and small chil- dren in most accidents.

Note Other accessories may be required to fit the child retention system with a base or foot security and safely. Contact a Technical Service or specialised workshop.

Different mounting systems

Fig. 28 On the rear seats: child seat installation options

Always secure child seats properly and safely in the vehicle according to the child seat manufacturer's installation instructions.

Mounted child seats must rest correctly on the vehicle's seat and must not move or rock more than 2.5 cm (1 inch).

Child seats equipped for a Top Tether strap must also be secured using the Top Tether retaining strap in the vehicle page 40. Only secure the re- taining belt to the rings fitted for this purpose and identified as Top Tether. Not all rings can be used with the Top Tether system. Always tighten the Top Tether retaining strap so that the child seat fits snugly against the corre- sponding seat in the vehicle.

Specific mounting systems for each country

Europe: ISOFIX retaining rings and upper retaining strap page 40 and page 40.

Three-point seat belt and upper retaining strap page 39.

The systems include the child restraint system mounting with an upper re- taining strap (Top Tether) and lower anchoring points on the seat.

Use of the child seat on the front passenger seat

Transporting children on the front passenger seat is not permitted in all countries. Furthermore, not all child seats are approved for use on the front passenger seat. Your Technical Service has an updated list of all approved child seats. Only used child seats that are approved for each vehicle.

The front airbag on the front passenger side is highly dangerous for a child. The front passenger seat is life-threatening to a child if he or she is trans- ported in a rear-facing child seat.

If a rear-facing child seat is secured to the front passenger seat, an inflating front airbag can strike it with such great force that severe or fatal injuries may result . Therefore, rear-facing child seats must never be used on the front passenger seat when the front passenger front airbag is activated.

Only use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the front pas- senger front airbag is disabled. When it is disabled, the yellow PASSENGER

A

B

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

38 Child safety

AIR BAG control lamp on the dash panel will be lit page 27. If you cannot disable the front passenger front airbag and it remains activated, it is forbidden to transport children on the front passenger seat .

Things to note if using a child seat on the front passenger seat:

The front passenger front airbag must be disabled when using a rear- facing child seat page 30.

The seat backrest of the front passenger seat must be upright.

The front passenger seat must be moved as far back as possible.

The seat backrest of the front passenger seat must be upright.

The seat belt height adjustment must be as high as possible.

Suitable child seats

The child seat must be authorised by the manufacturer especially for use on a front passenger seat with a front or side airbag.

If the front passenger seat is equipped with securing rings, the child seat can be secured using the approved restraint system provided it has been approved for this type of vehicle in accordance with current regulations in the country in question.

Universal seats for children for groups 0, 0+, 1, 2 or 3 according to the standard ECE-R 44 can be mounted in the front passenger seat and the rear seats.

WARNING

If a child seat is mounted on the front passenger seat, the risk of the child sustaining severe or fatal injuries in the event of an accident increa- ses. Rear-facing child seats must never be mounted on the front passen- ger seat when the front passenger front airbag is enabled. This is life- threatening to the child should the front airbag deploy, as the child seat would be struck by the inflated airbag and thrown against the seat back- rest.

WARNING

If, in exceptional circumstances, a child must be transported in a rear-fac- ing child seat on the front passenger seat, strictly observe the following:

Always disable the front passenger front airbag and leave it disabled.

The child seat must be approved by the manufacturer for use on a front passenger seat with front and side airbag.

Follow the installation instructions of the child seat manufacturer and observe the warnings.

Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and adjust it to its highest position to keep as far away as possible from the front airbag.

Move the seat backrest to the upright position.

The seat belt height adjustment must be as high as possible.

Children must always be protected with an approved child restraint system suited to their height and weight.

Use of the child seat on the rear seat

If a child seat is mounted on the rear seat, adapt the position of the front passenger seat so that the child has enough space. Therefore, adapt the front passenger seat to the size of the child seat and the height of the child. Ensure the passenger is in the correct position page 9.

Move the second and third row of seats fully back and lock them. Place the seat backs in a vertical position and fold the head restraints down.

ISOFIX child seats approved for rear seats

The rear seats are suitable for child seats with the ISOFIX system. These seats have been especially designed for this type of vehicle in accordance with regulation ECE-R 44.

ISOFIX child seats are divided into specific categories for the vehicle, limited or semi-universal.

39Child safety

Child seat manufacturers supply a list of vehicles with each ISOFIX seat, which includes the models for which the ISOFIX child seat in question is ap- proved. If the vehicle is included on the manufacturer's list and the ISOFIX child seat belongs to a seat category included in the list, then it can be used in your vehicle. If necessary, contact the child seat manufacturer for an updated list of vehicles.

Group (weight category)

ISOFIX child seat cate- gory

Seat position on the rear seats

Group 0: to 10 kg

E IUFa)

Group 0+: to 13 kg

E IUFa)

D IUFa)

C IUFa)

Group 1: 9 to 18 kg

D IUFa)

C IUFa)

B IUFa)

B1 IUFa)

A IUFa)

a) IUF: suitable for universal ISOFIX child seats authorised for use in this group.

WARNING

If child seats are fitted to all the seats in the second row then it is possi- ble that the seats of this row cannot be folded down from the third row of seats in case of an accident. In case of an emergency, passengers in the third row of seats will not be able to leave the vehicle and may require assistance.

Child seats should not occupy all the seats of the second row if other passengers are to occupy the third row of seats.

Securing child seats with the seat belt

Securing the child seat using the seat belt

Please read and observe the child seat manufacturer's handling instruc- tions.

Positioning the child seat on the seat according to the manufacturer's instructions.

The seat belt height adjustment must be as high as possible.

Fasten the seat belt or pass it around the child seat structure in the man- ner described in the manufacturer's instructions.

Make sure the seat belt is not twisted.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the appropriate seat and push it down until it is securely locked with an audible click.

Ensure that the upper belt web lies tightly on the child seat.

Pull the belt (it must be no longer possible to pull the lower belt web- bing out).

Removing the child seat

The seat belt must not be unfastened until the vehicle has come to a stand- still .

Press the red button on the buckle. The latch plate is released from the buckle.

Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls up easily and the trim will not be damaged.

Remove the child seat from the vehicle.

WARNING

Unbuckling the seat belt while the vehicle is in motion can cause severe or fatal injuries in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

The seat belt must not be unfastened until the vehicle has come to a standstill.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

40 Child safety

Securing the child seat using the lower anchor points (ISOFIX)

Fig. 29 Version 2: identi- fication of the anchor points for the child seat on the vehicle seat

There are two retaining rings, the so-called lower anchor points, on each rear seat or, where applicable, on the front passenger seat. The retaining rings are attached to the seat frames.

Child seats with rigid mounting

Observe the manufacturer's instructions when installing and removing the child seat .

Press the child seat onto the retaining rings Fig. 29 in the direction of the arrow. The child seat must be safely engaged and click audibly into place.

Pull on both sides of the child seat to ensure that it is secure.

Child seat with adjustable retaining straps

Observe the manufacturer's instructions when installing and removing the child seat .

Place the child seat on the seat cushion and attach the retaining strap hooks to the retaining rings Fig. 29.

Tighten the straps evenly using the corresponding adjustment device. The child seat must sit flush against the vehicle seat.

Pull on both sides of the child seat to ensure that it is secure.

WARNING

The lower anchor points for child seats do not include rings. Only secure booster seats to lower anchor points.

Securing a child seat using a Top Tether retaining strap

Fig. 30 Upper retaining strap hooked in the lug- gage compartment

Observe the manufacturer's instructions when installing and removing the child seat .

Raise the head restraint behind the child seat until it engages.

Secure the child seat to the lower anchor points page 40.

Pull the upper child seat retaining strap back to the seat backrest of the rear seat, below or on both sides of the head restraint (depending on the child seat model).

Hook the upper retaining strap to the back of the seat backrest using the corresponding retaining ring (for Top Tether) on the rear seat Fig. 30.

41Child safety

Push the head restraint down as far as it will go. Ensure that it does not interfere with the seatbelt from the upper attachment.

Tighten the strap so that the top of the child seat rests on the seat back- rest.

WARNING

Child seats with lower anchor points and with an upper retaining strap must be installed in line with the manufacturer's instructions. Failure to comply could result in severe injuries.

Always secure just one retaining strap from a child seat to a retaining ring (for Top Tether) on seat backrest on the rear seat in the luggage com- partment.

Never secure a child seat to the retaining rings.

Never secure a child seat to the movable attachment elements for ve- hicles with an attachment element and rail system.

Integrated child seat

Introduction

The integrated child seat is only suitable for children in Group 2 (15-25 kg) and Group 3 (22-36 kg), according to the ECE-R 44 regulation.

WARNING

Child travelling without their seat belt fastened or not secured using a suitable restraint system may sustain fatal injuries if the airbag is de- ployed.

Children up to 12 years old should always travel on the rear seat.

Always deactivate the front passenger front airbag if, in exceptional cases, you have no alternative but to transport a child in a rear-facing child safety seat in the front passenger seat.

Children must always be protected with a child restraint system suit- ed to their height and weight.

Always fasten children's seat belts correctly.

WARNING

Children must travel in a child seat appropriate to their weight and height while the vehicle is in motion.

Children must always be protected with a child restraint system suit- ed to their height and weight.

Children must assume the proper sitting position and be properly bel- ted in while travelling.

The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie approximately on the cen- tre of the shoulder, never across the neck or the arm.

The seat belt must lie close to the upper part of the body.

The lap belt part must lie across the pelvis, not across the stomach, and always fit closely.

Allow the belt to retract until it fits tightly over the child's seat.

Never hold children or babies on your lap.

Always use a child seat and the seat belt for children who are less than 1.5 metres tall. The normal seat belt could cause injuries to the ab- dominal and neck areas.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

42 Child safety

WARNING (Continued)

Only one child may occupy a child seat.

Read and follow the information and warnings provided by the child seat manufacturer.

Never leave an unsupervised child alone on a child seat or in the vehi- cle.

All modifications to the integrated child seat must be carried out by a specialised workshop.

Replace the child seat or any seat components damaged or involved in an accident.

WARNING

Loose objects could fly uncontrollably around the vehicle interior and cause injuries in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

Do not leave toys or other hard, loose objects on the child seat or on the seat while the vehicle is in motion.

Unfolding the integrated child seat

Fig. 31 Integrated child seats. lift up the cushion

Fig. 32 Integrated child seats. position the head restraint over the side head restraint A and fit into place B

The integrated child seat can be fitted with a side head restraint. SEAT rec- ommends use of the integrated child seat with the side head restraint fitted and also that this seat be used only for children above the age of 3.

43Child safety

Lifting the cushion

Pull the unlock lever Fig. 31 A on the cushion in the direction of the arrow Fig. 31 1 .

Fold both sides Fig. 31 B up in the direction of the arrow Fig. 31 2 .

Push the cushion Fig. 31 C back in the direction of the arrow Fig. 31 3 until it engages.

Fitting the side head restraint

Fold the seat backrest of the rear seat forwards page 110.

Remove the head restraint.

Make sure the belt guide handle on the window side is on the side head restraint page 43.

Insert the guide rods Fig. 32 A 1 of the head restraint into the guides on the side head restraint Fig. 32 2 .

Insert the head restraint and the side head restraint into the guides on the corresponding seat backrest Fig. 32 B.

Push the head restraint down as far as it will go.

Fold the seat backrest of the rear seat back.

Pull the rear seat and the seat backrest to check whether they are en- gaged properly.

Seat belt routing on the integrated child seat

Fig. 33 Integrated child seats. Adjusting the seat belt.

Fig. 34 Integrated child seats. seat belt routing with guide handle

Using the guide handle Fig. 34, position the seat belt so that the shoul- der part of the belt lies on the centre of the child's shoulder.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

44 Child safety

Seat belt guide handle

Secure the seat belt guide handle to the side head restraint on the win- dow side. The guide handle is secured by a button.

Open the upper button on the seat belt guide handle and pass the belt webbing below the side head restraint and through the guide handle.

Close the button again.

Adjusting the seat belt

Guide the automatic three-point seat belt below the side head restraint.

Pull the latch plate and slowly place the belt webbing across the child's chest and lap.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the appropriate seat and push it down until it is securely locked with an audible click.

Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely engaged in the buckle.

WARNING

The seat belt only offers maximum protection from severe or fatal injuries when it is correctly positioned.

Children must assume the proper sitting position and be properly bel- ted in while travelling.

The shoulder belt must be positioned against the middle of the shoulder.

The seat belt must lie flat and fit comfortably.

Allow the belt to retract until it fits tightly over the child's seat.

The lap part of the seat belt must lie across the pelvis, never across the stomach.

Only one child may occupy a child seat.

Removing the child seat

Fig. 35 Integrated child seats. lowering the cushion

Lowering the cushion

Pull the unlock lever Fig. 35 A on the cushion in the direction of the arrow 1 .

Push the cushion down through the central area B in the direction of the arrow 2 until it safely engages . The side supports fold away auto- matically.

Removing the side head restraint

Open the seat belt guide handle.

Guide the seat belt by hand to pull the belt back in more easily and not damage the trim.

Push the head restraint up as far as it will go.

Fold the seat backrest of the rear seat forwards page 110.

Remove the head restraint along with the side head restraint.

Remove the head restraint and side head restraint by pulling on it.

Fitting the head restraint.

45Child safety

CAUTION When lowering the integrated child seat, press on the centre of the cushion only Fig. 35 2 . Otherwise the cushion could bend and not engage prop- erly.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

46 Cockpit

Fig. 36 Dash panel.

47Cockpit

Operation

Cockpit

Overview

Door release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Central lock button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Switch for adjusting the exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Exterior mirror adjustment

Heated exterior mirrors

Folding exterior mirrors

Instrument panel controls and lighting control . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Headlamp range adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Light off --

Automatic dipped beam headlight control --

Side/dipped lights

Fog lights

Controls on the multi-function steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Volume control for radio, navigation system and phone conversations

Radio mute or voice control activation

Activate telephone main menu or accept an incoming call

SEAT information system control buttons , , OK,

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Lever for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Main beam headlights

Headlight flasher

Turn signals

Parking lights

Instrument panel:

Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Digital display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Horn (works only when the ignition is on)/Front driver airbag 27

Windscreen wiper/ windscreen wash lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Windscreen wipers

Intermittent wipe

Brief wipe x

Windscreen wipers

Automatic windscreen wash/wipe

Rear window wiper

Automatic rear window wash/wipe

Lever with buttons for controlling the SEAT information system - , / . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Left seat heating controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Radio or navigation system (fitted at factory) Booklet Ra- dio or Booklet Navigation system

Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Hazard warning lights switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

48 Cockpit

Switches for:

Electronic manual air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Right seat heating controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Button for:

Anti-slip regulation (ASR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Start/stop operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Parking distance warning system (Park Pilot) . . . . . . . . . . 182

Park Assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Tyre pressure monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Opening the rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Opening and closing of electric sliding doors . . . . . . . . . 77

Locking lever to open glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Position of passenger front airbag on the dash panel . . . . . . . 27

Key-operated switch in glove compartment for deactivating front passenger front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Passenger front airbag off warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Lever for:

Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

12 Volt power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Auto Hold Switch - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Electronic parking brake switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Engine start button (Keyless Access locking and starting sys- tem)

Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Steering column adjustment lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Fuse box cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

Lever for:

cruise control system (CCS) / - - / -- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Open bonnet lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Controls for:

Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Childproof locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Note Some of the items of equipment listed here are fitted only on certain model versions or are optional extras.

In versions with the steering wheel on the right, the layout of the control elements is somewhat different. But the symbols assigned to the controls correspond to the symbols used in the versions with the steering wheel on the left

32

33

34

49Cockpit

Instruments

View of instrument panel

Fig. 37 Instrument panel, on dash panel

Details of the instruments Fig. 37:

Clock set button1).

Press button to select the hour or minute display.

To continue setting the time, press button 0.0 / SET Fig. 37 7 . Hold button down to scroll through the numbers quickly.

Press button again to end the clock setting.

Rev counter (with the engine running, in thousands of revolutions per minute).

The beginning of the red zone of the rev counter indicates the maxi- mum speed in any gear after running-in and with the engine hot. How-

1

2

ever, it is advisable to change up a gear or move the selector lever to D (or lift your foot off the accelerator) before the needle reaches the red zone .

Engine coolant temperature display page 259.

Displays on the screen page 49.

Fuel reserve display page 242.

Speedometer.

Reset knob for trip recorder (trip).

Press button 0.0 / SET to reset to zero.

WARNING

Any distraction may lead to an accident, with the risk of injury.

Do not operate the instrument panel controls when driving.

CAUTION To prevent damage to the engine, the rev counter needle should only re- main in the red zone for a short period of time.

For the sake of the environment Changing up a gear in time reduces fuel consumption and noise.

Displays on screen

A variety of information can be viewed on the instrument panel display Fig. 37 4 , depending on the vehicle equipment:

3

4

5

6

7

1) Depending on the vehicle equipment, it is also possible to set the time using the settings menu on the instrument panel display page 60.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

50 Cockpit

Warning and information texts

Mileage

Time

Outside temperature.

Compass

Selector lever positions page 162

Recommended gear (manual gearbox) page 162

Multifunction display (MFI) and menus for different setting options page 56

Service interval display page 52.

Second speed display ( Configuration menu) page 56

Start/Stop operation status indicator page 51

Warning and information texts

The system runs a check on certain components and functions when the ig- nition is switched on and while the vehicle is moving. Faults in the opera- tion are displayed on the screen using red and yellow symbols and messag- es on the instrument panel display (page 54) and, in some cases, with audible warnings. The display may vary according to the type of instrument panel fitted.

Type of mes- sage

Symbol colour

Description

Priority 1 warning.

Red

Symbol flashing or lit; partly combined with audible warnings. Stop the vehicle! It is dangerous in Control and warning lamps on page 56! Check the function that is faulty and repair it. If necessary, request assistance from special- ised personnel.

Priority 2 warning.

Yellow

Symbol flashing or lit; partly combined with audible warnings. A faulty function, or fluids which are below the correct levels may cause damage to the vehicle and possible breakdown in Con- trol and warning lamps on page 56! Check the faulty function as soon as possible. If necessary, request assistance from special- ised personnel.

Informative text.

Information relating to different vehicle pro- cesses.

Mileage

The odometer registers the total distance travelled by the car.

The odometer (trip) shows the distance travelled since the last odometer re- set. The last digit of the trip recorder indicates distances of 100 metres or one tenths of a mile.

Outside temperature display

When the outside temperature is below +4 C (+39 F), the symbol ice crys- tal (warning of risk of freezing) is also displayed next to the temperature. At first this symbol flashes and then it remains lit until the outside tempera- ture rises above +6 C (+43 F) .

51Cockpit

When the vehicle is at a standstill, with the auxiliary heating on (page 150), or when travelling at very low speeds, the temperature dis- played may be higher than the true outside temperature, as a result of the heat produced by the engine.

The temperatures measured range from -40 C to +50 C (-40 F to +122 F).

Compass

With the ignition on and the navigation system on, the cardinal point corre- sponding to the vehicle's direction of travel is displayed on the instrument panel page 52.

Selector lever positions

The range of engaged gears of the selector lever is shown on the side of the lever, and on the instrument panel display. In positions D and S, and with the Tiptronic, the corresponding gear is also displayed.

Recommended gear (manual gearbox)

The recommended gear in order to save fuel is displayed on the instrument panel while you are driving page 162.

Second speed display (mph or km/h)

In addition to the speedometer, the speed can also be displayed in a differ- ent unit of measurement (in miles or in km per hour). To change the units, in the Settings menu, select the option Second speed page 56.

Vehicles without menu display on the instrument panel

Switch on the engine.

Press button three times. The odometer display flashes on the instru- ment panel display.

Press button 0.0 / SET once. mph or km/h is displayed briefly in- stead of the odometer.

This activates the second speed display. To switch it off, repeat the pro- cedure.

This option cannot be deactivated in models destined for countries in which the second speed must always be visible.

Start-Stop operating display

Updated information relating to the status is displayed on the instrument panel page 179.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings in Control and warning lamps on page 56.

WARNING

Although the outside temperature is above freezing, some roads and bridges may be frozen.

At an outside temperature above +4 C (+39 F), even when the ice crystal symbol is not visible, there may still be ice on the road.

Never rely on the outside temperature indicator!

Note Different versions of the instrument panel are available and therefore the versions and instructions on the display may vary. In the case of dis- plays without warning or information texts, faults are indicated exclusively by the warning lamps.

When several warnings are active at the same time, the symbols are shown successively for a few seconds and will stay on until the fault is recti- fied.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

52 Cockpit

Compass*

Fig. 38 Magnetic zones

The compass does not require calibration in vehicles for which the naviga- tion system was mounted at the factory. The option compass disappears.

The compass in vehicles in which the navigation system was not mounted at the factory, is permanently and automatically calibrated. If electronic or metal accessories (mobile phone, television) are subsequently mounted in the vehicle, the compass should be recalibrated manually.

Adjusting the magnetic zone

Switch the ignition on.

Select the Settings menu followed by the option Compass and Zone.

Select the magnetic zone corresponding to the position of the vehicle Fig. 38.

Adjust and confirm the magnetic zone (1-15).

Calibrating compass

To calibrate the compass you must be in one of the valid magnetic zones with sufficient space to be able to trace a circumference with the vehicle.

Switch the ignition on.

Select the Settings menu followed by the option Compass and Calibrate.

Confirm the message Describe a complete circumference to calibrate the compass with OK and then trace a complete circumference driving at ap- proximately 10 km/h (6 mph).

When the corresponding cardinal point is displayed, the calibration is com- plete.

Service interval display

The service indication is shown on the instrument panel display Fig. 37 4 .

SEAT makes a difference between services with engine oil change (Interval Service) and services without engine oil change (Inspection Service). The service interval display only gives information for service dates which in- volve an engine oil change. The dates of the remaining services (for exam- ple, the next Inspection Service or change of brake fluid) are listed on the sticker attached to the door pillar, or in the Maintenance Programme.

In vehicles with Services established by time or mileage, the service inter- vals are already pre-defined.

In vehicles with LongLife Service, the intervals are determined individually. Technical progress has made it possible to considerably reduce servicing re- quirements. The technology used by SEAT ensures that your vehicle only has an Interval Service when it is necessary. To establish when the Interval Service is due (max. 2 years), the vehicle's conditions of use and individual driving styles are considered. The service pre-warning first appears 20 days before the date established for the corresponding service. The kilometres

53Cockpit

remaining until the next service are always rounded up to the nearest 100 km and the time is given in complete days. The current service message cannot be viewed until 500 km (miles) after the last service. Prior to this on- ly lines are visible on the display.

Inspection reminder

When the Service date is approaching, when the ignition is switched on a Service reminder is displayed.

In vehicles without text messages, a spanner is displayed on the instrument panel with a figure given in km. The number of kilometres shown is the maximum number that may be driven until the next service. After a few sec- onds, the display mode changes. A clock symbol appears and the number of days until the next service appointment is due.

In vehicles with text messages, Service in --- km (miles) or --- days is dis- played on the instrument panel.

Service due

After the service date, an audible warning is given when the ignition is switched on and the spanner displayed on the screen flashes for a few sec- onds . In vehicles with text messages, Service in --- km or --- days is dis- played on the instrument panel.

Reading a service notification

With the ignition switched on, the engine off and the vehicle at a standstill, the current service notification can be read:

Press the button on the instrument panel several times until the spanner symbol is displayed .

OR: select the Settings menu.

From the Service submenu, select the option Info.

When the service date has past, a minus sign is displayed in front of the number of kilometres or days. In vehicles with text messages the following is displayed: Service --- km (miles) or --- days ago.

Resetting service interval display

If the service was not carried out by a Technical Service, the display can be reset as follows:

In vehicles with text messages:

Select the Settings menu.

In the submenu Service, select the option Reset.

Confirm with OK when requested to do so by the system.

In vehicles without text messages:

Switch the ignition off.

Press and hold the 0.0 / SET button.

Switch the ignition back on.

Release the 0.0 / SET button and, press for the next 20 seconds.

Do not reset the indicator to zero between two intervals, otherwise the dis- play will be incorrect.

If, while the LongLife service is valid, the service interval display is reset to zero, the service will be activated by time or mileage. The service interval is no longer calculated individually Booklet Maintenance Programme.

Note The service message disappears after a few seconds, when the engine is started or when OK is pressed.

In vehicles with the LongLife system in which the battery has been dis- connected for a long period of time, it is not possible to calculate the date of the next service. Therefore the service interval display may not be correct. In this case, bear in mind the maximum service intervals permitted in the Booklet Maintenance Programme.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

54 Cockpit

Control lamps

Control and warning lamps

The control and warning lamps are indicators of warnings, , faults or certain functions. Some control and warning lamps come on when the ig- nition is switched on, and switch off when the engine starts running, or while driving.

Depending on the model, additional text messages may be viewed on the instrument panel display. These may be purely informative or they may be advising of the need for action page 49, Instruments.

Depending upon the equipment fitted in the vehicle, instead of a warning lamp, sometimes a symbol may be displayed on the instrument panel.

When certain control and warning lamps are lit, an audible warning is also heard.

Red symbols

Symbol Meaning See

Do not continue driving! The electronic parking brake is on, the brake fluid level is too low or the brake system is faul- ty.

page 168

Do not continue driving! Fault in the engine cooling system.

page 259

Do not continue driving! Engine oil pressure too low.

page 255

Do not continue driving! At least one of the vehicles doors is open, or is not correctly closed.

page 76

Do not continue driving! The rear lid is open or is incorrectly closed.

page 80

Symbol Meaning See

Do not continue driving! Fault in the steering.

page 154

Engine cannot be started again! "AdBlue" level too low.

page 248

Driver or passenger has not fastened seat belt. page 20

Use the foot brake!

Change page 162 Brake page 168

Faulty generator. page 262

Yellow symbols

Symbol Meaning See

Front brake pads worn.

page 168

it lights up: ESC malfunction or off.

flashes: ESC working.

ASR manually deactivated.

ABS faulty or does not work.

Electronic parking brake faulty. page 168

Rear fog light switched on. page 90

it lights up: Driving light totally or partially faul- ty.

page 297

flashes: Fault in the adaptive light system. page 90

55Cockpit

Symbol Meaning See

Fault in catalytic converter.

page 206

it lights up: pre-ignition of diesel engine.

flashes: Fault in engine management.

Fault in engine management.

Diesel particulate filter blocked

Fault in the steering system. page 154

Tyre pressure too low. page 267

Fault in the tyre pressure gauge. page 202

Level of windscreen washer fluid too low. page 98

Fuel tank almost empty. page 242

flashes: Engine oil sensor faulty. page 255 it lights up: Insufficient engine oil.

Fault in airbag system and seat belt tensioners. page 27

Front passenger front airbag is deactivated ( ).

page 27

Top up "AdBlue", or there is a fault in the "AdBl- ue" system.

page 248

Fuel tank not closed correctly. page 242

Lane Assist is switched on, but not active. page 197

Green symbols

Symbol Meaning See

Left or right turn signal. page 90

Hazard warning lights on. page 287

Use the foot brake!

Change page 162 Brake page 168

Cruise control system operating. page 194

Lane Assist is switched on and active. page 197

Blue symbols

Symbol Meaning See

Main beam on or flasher on. page 90

Headlight adjustment (Light Assist) on.

Other control lamps

Symbol Meaning See

Electronic immobiliser active. page 156

Service interval display page 52

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

56 Cockpit

Symbol Meaning See

Mobile telephone is connected via Bluetooth to the original telephone device.

Booklet Ra- dio or Book- let Navigation system

Mobile telephone battery charge meter. Availa- ble only for pre-installed factory-fitted devices.

Freezing warning. The outside temperature is lower than +4 C (+39 F).

page 50

WARNING

If the warning lamps and messages are ignored, the vehicle may stall in traffic, or may cause accidents and severe injuries.

Never ignore the warning lamps or text messages.

Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.

Park the vehicle away from traffic and ensure that there are no easily inflammable materials under the vehicle which could come into contact with the exhaust system (e.g. dry grass, fuel).

A faulty vehicle represents a risk of accident for the driver and for oth- er road users. If necessary, switch on the hazard warning lamps and put out the warning triangle to advise other drivers.

Before opening the bonnet, switch off the engine and allow it to cool.

In any vehicle, the engine compartment is a hazardous area and could cause severe injuries page 251.

CAUTION Failure to heed the control lamps and text messages when they appear may result in faults in the vehicle.

SEAT information system

Introduction

With the ignition switched on, it is possible to read the different functions of the display by scrolling through the menus.

In vehicles with a multifunction steering wheel, there are no buttons on the windscreen wiper lever. The multifunction display can only be controlled from the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel.

The number of menus displayed on the instrument panel will vary according to the vehicle electronics and equipment.

A specialised workshop will be able to programme or modify additional functions, according to the vehicle equipment. SEAT recommends visiting a Technical Service.

Some menu options can only be read when the vehicle is at a standstill.

As long as a priority 1 warning is displayed, it will not be possible to read the menus. To display the menus, confirm the warning by pressing OK .

Summary of the menu structure

Multifunction display (MFI) page 59 Journey duration Current fuel consumption Average fuel consumption Operating range Distance covered Average speed Digital display of speed

57Cockpit

Oil temperature digital display Speed warning

Audio Booklet Radio or Booklet Navigation system Navigation Booklet Navigation system Telephone Booklet Radio or Booklet Navigation system Auxiliary heating page 150

Activation Programme On / Off Disconnection

Timer 1-3 Day Time Minute Activate

Duration Operating mode

Heat Ventilation

Day Default setting

Vehicle condition page 59 Configuration page 60

Multifunction display data Journey duration Current fuel consumption Average fuel consumption Distance covered Operating range Average speed Digital display of speed Speed warning

Compass

Convenience page 61 Easy Open On / Off Central locking system

Automatic lock On / Off Automatic unlock On / Off Unlock doors: All, Single door, Vehicle side, Individual) Back

Electric windows Off All Driver Back

Mirror inclination On / Off Exterior mirror adjustment

Individual Synchronised Back

Factory settings Back

Lights & visibility page 62 Coming Home Leaving Home Footwell light Convenience turn signals On / Off Default setting Tourist light On / Off

Time Winter tyres Language Units Second speed display On / Off Autohold

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

58 Cockpit

Service Info Reset

Default setting

Using the menus on the instrument panel

Fig. 39 Windscreen wip- er lever: buttons to ac- cess the instrument pan- el menus

Fig. 40 Multifunction steering wheel: buttons to access the instrument panel menus

Enabling the main menu

Switch the ignition on.

If a message or vehicle symbol is displayed, press OK (Fig. 39 A or Fig. 40).

If managed from the windscreen wiper lever: the main menu list is dis- played.

If managed from the multifunction steering wheel: the main menu list is not displayed. To scroll through the options of the main menu, press the ar- row keys or several times page 59.

Select a submenu

Press the rocker switch Fig. 39 B upwards or downwards, or, on the multifunction steering wheel, the arrow keys or until you reach the re- quired menu option.

The selected option is displayed between two horizontal lines. In addi- tion, a triangle is displayed on the right .

To select the submenu, press OK .

Making changes according to the menu

Use the rocker switch on the windscreen wiper lever or the arrow keys on the multifunction steering wheel to make the required modifications. If the switch or keys are held down, the scroll speed is faster (fast forward or re- turn).

Mark or confirm the selected option with OK .

Returning to the main menu

Via the menu: in the submenu, select the option Return to exit the sub- menu.

If managed from the windscreen wiper lever: hold down the rocker switch.

If managed from the multifunction steering wheel: press button .

59Cockpit

Main menu

Menu Function See

MFI Information and possible configurations of the multifunction display (MFD).

page 59

Audio If the radio is on, the station is displayed. In CD mode, the current CD is played.

Booklet Ra- dio or Book- let navigation

system

Navigation

Navigation system information: when the navigation to destination is on, change of direction arrows and a proximity bar are displayed. These symbols are similar to those used in the navigation system. If navigation to destination is not on, the di- rection of travel (compass) and the name of the street on which you are driving are dis- played.

Book- let Navigation

system

Telephone Information and possible configurations of the mobile phone preinstallation.

Booklet Ra- dio or Book- let Navigation

system

Parking heating

Information and configurations of the park- ing heating: switching the parking heating on or off. Se- lect the operating mode and duration.

page 150

Menu Function See

Vehicle con- dition

Current warning or information texts. This option only appears when one of the following texts is available. The number of available messages is displayed. Example 1/1 or 2/2.

page 49

Configura- tion

Different setting options, for example, the Convenience, Lighting & Visibility menus, and the time, speed warning with winter tyres, language, units of measurement, or Display off.

page 60

MFI (multifunction display) menu

The multifunction display (MFI) has two automatic memories: 1 - Partial memory and 2 - Total memory. The selected memory will be shown in the upper right-hand corner of the display.

With the ignition switched on, and memory 1 or 2 displayed, briefly press OK to change from one memory to another.

1

Trip memo- ry (for a single jour- ney).

The memory stores the values for the journey and the con- sumption from the moment the ignition is switched on un- til it is switched off again. If the journey is broken for more than 2 hours, the memory is automatically erased. If the journey is continued in less than 2 hours after the ignition is switched off, the new da- ta is added to the data already stored in the memory.

2 Total mem- ory (for all journeys).

The memory records the values for a specific number of partial trips, up to a total of 19 hours and 59 minutes or 99 hours and 59 minutes, or 1999.9 km (or miles) for 9999 km (or miles), depending on the model of instrument panel. On reaching either of these limits, the memory is automatically erased and starts to count from 0 again.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

60 Cockpit

Possible displays

Menu Function

Journey duration This indicates the hours (h) and minutes (min) since the ignition was switched on.

Current fuel con- sumption

The current fuel consumption while driving is dis- played in l/100 km (or miles per gallon, mpg); when the engine is running but the vehicle is not moving, in l/h (or gallons per hour).

Average fuel con- sumption

When the ignition is switched on, the average con- sumption (in l/100 km or in mpg) is displayed after the vehicle has moved approximately 100 metres (328 feet). Otherwise horizontal lines are displayed. The value shown is updated approximately every 5 seconds.

Operating range

Approximate distance in km (or miles) that can still be travelled with the fuel remaining in the tank, as- suming the same style of driving is maintained. This is calculated using the current fuel consumption.

Distance covered Distance travelled, after ignition is switched on, in km (or miles).

Average speed

After the ignition is switched on, the average speed will be shown after a distance of approximately 100 metres (328 feet) has been travelled. Otherwise hori- zontal lines are displayed. The value shown is upda- ted approximately every 5 seconds.

Digital display of speed

Current speed displayed digitally.

Oil temperature digi- tal display

Updated engine oil temperature digital display

Speed warning at --- km/h (mph)

If the stored speed is exceeded (between 30 - 250 km/h, or 18 - 155 mph), an audible warning is given together with a visual warning.

Changing between display modes

In vehicles without multifunction steering wheel: press the lever.

Vehicles with a multifunction steering wheel: press or .

Storing a speed for the speed warning

Select the display Speed warning at --- km/h.

Press OK to store the current speed and switch off the warning.

In addition, set the required speed by pressing the rocker switch on the windscreen wiper lever or buttons or on the multifunction steering wheel for 5 seconds. Next, press OK again or wait a few seconds. The speed is stored and the warning activated.

To switch off, press OK . The stored speed is deleted.

Manually erasing memory 1 or 2

Select the memory to be erased.

Press and hold OK for approximately two seconds.

Personalising the displays

It is possible to select which of the displays in the multifunction display you wish to see on the instrument panel in the settings menu. The units of measurement can also be modified page 60.

Configuration Menu

Configuration Menu

Function

Multifunction display data

Configuration of the multifunction display data that you wish to see on the instrument panel display page 59.

Compass Changing the magnetic region and calibration of the com- pass. To calibrate the compass, please follow the instruc- tions given on the instrument panel display.

Convenience Changing vehicle convenience functions page 61.

61Cockpit

Configuration Menu

Function

Lights & visi- bility

Configuration of vehicle lighting page 62.

Time

Changing the hours and minutes of the instrument panel clock and the navigation system. The time can be set here and the choice can be made between the 24 hour and 12 hour display. The S in the upper part of the display indi- cates that the clock is set to summer time.

Winter tyres

Changing the visual and audible speed warnings. This function should only be used when the vehicle is fitted with winter tyres, which are not designed for travel at high speeds.

Language Changing the language of the display texts and the navi- gation system.

Units Changing the units of measurement for the temperature, consumption and distance.

Second speed Switching second speed display on and off.

Auto-Hold Selecting whether the Auto-Hold function should remain on permanently.

Service Check the service notifications or reset the service inter- vals to zero.

Factory set- tings

Some functions of the Configuration menu will be reset to the factory value.

Back The main menu is displayed again.

Submenu Convenience

Convenience menu

Function

Easy Open Activation or deactivation of sensor-controlled boot lid opening (Easy Open) page 68

Central locking page 68

Auto. lock- ing

(Auto Lock): Automatic locking of all doors and boot lid on reaching an approximate speed. 15 km/h (10 mph). To unlock the vehicle when stationary, press the central locking button, pull the door handle or remove the key from the ignition if the Auto unlock function is acti- vated.

Auto un- lock

(Auto Lock): unlocking of all doors and boot lid when the key is pulled out of the ignition lock.

Door un- locking

When the vehicle is unlocked with the key, the following doors (depending upon the configu- ration) are unlocked: All: all of the doors will be unlocked. One door: when the vehicle is unlocked man- ually, only the driver door is unlocked. All doors and boot lid will be unlocked if button is pressed twice.

Vehicle side: The driver's side doors are un- locked. In vehicles with the Keyless Access page 68 system, similarly pulling the door handle unlocks the doors on the side of the ve- hicle where the key is located.

Handling win- dows

Adjusting the electric windows: This permits the windows to be opened or closed when the vehicle is unlocked or locked respectively. The open function can only be activa- ted from the driver door page 84.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

62 Cockpit

Convenience menu

Function

Rear vision mirror adjust- ment

Tilts passenger mirror downwards when reverse gear is en- gaged. This enables the driver to see the edge of the pave- ment, for example page 103.

Exterior mirror adjust.

If synchronised adjustment is selected, when the driver side exterior mirror is adjusted, the passenger exterior mir- ror is also moved.

Factory set- tings

Some functions of the Convenience submenu will be reset to the factory value.

Back The Configuration menu is displayed again.

Lights & visibility submenu

Lights & visi- bility menu

Function

Coming Home This permits the adjustment of the time the headlamps stay on after locking or unlocking the vehicle, the function can also be connected or disconnected here page 95.Leaving Home

Footwell light This permits the adjustment of the brightness of the foot- well lighting when the doors are open, the function can al- so be connected or disconnected here

Convenience turn signals

Switching convenience turn signals on and off If the con- venience turn signals are connected, when the turn signal is switched on, the signals will flash at least three times page 90.

Factory set- tings

All the configurations in the submenu Lights & visibility are reset to the predefined factory values.

Lights & visi- bility menu

Function

Tourist light

Headlamp adjustment for countries in which vehicles are driven on the other side of the road. When the mark is acti- vated, the headlamps of a left-hand drive vehicle are ad- justed for driving on the left. This function must only be used for a short period.

Back The Configuration menu is displayed again.

Personal convenience settings

When two people use a vehicle, SEAT recommends that each person always uses their own remote control key. When the ignition is switched off, or the vehicle is locked, the personal convenience settings are stored and au- tomatically allocated to the vehicle key page 56.

The values of the personalised convenience settings of the following menu options are allocated to the vehicle key:

Parking heating menu Configuration Menu

Time Language Units

Convenience settings menu Door unlock (individual opening, Auto Lock) Convenience handling of windows Rear vision mirror adjustment

Lights & visibility settings menu Coming home and leaving home Footwell light Convenience turn signals

63Cockpit

The stored settings are automatically activated, at the latest when the igni- tion is switched on. Please refer to the information and tips relating to the seat memory page 110.

Three button unit in headliner

Three button module*

Fig. 41 Three button unit in headliner: con- trols for the telephone management system.

Fig. 41 Function

Press it briefly: To accept or end a call. Press the button: To reject a call.

Press it briefly: To start or stop the voice control function, for ex- ample to make a call.a)

Fig. 41 Function

Press the button for more than 2 seconds: To obtain information about the SEAT brand and selected additional services related to traffic and travel.

Press the button for more than 2 seconds: To obtain help from the network of SEAT dealers in case of a breakdown.

a) Not applicable if a SEAT Media system 2.2 Navigation system with voice control has been installed.

Information and assistance calls

Communication with the SEAT Customer Care Service is established using the and buttons of the three button module.1) The system will automati- cally connect you with the service centre of the relevant country. You will on- ly be able to make calls if your mobile is turned on and connected to the pre-installed Bluetooth.

Information call

The Information call button offers information on the SEAT brand and selec- ted additional services related to traffic and your journeys.

To establish communication, press the button for more than 2 seconds.

In countries where there is no information telephone number, an informa- tion call is made after pressing the button.

Assistance call

The assistance call button gives immediate help in case of a breakdown. To this end, the SEAT dealer network, with its mobile service vehicles, is at your disposal.

To establish communication, press the button for more than 2 seconds.

1) Depending upon country.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

64 Cockpit

Note Calls made with the and buttons take priority over normal calls. If the or button is pressed during a normal telephone call, this call will be cut off and a connection will be made to the information or assistance centre.

Note Any call made to the information service will be interrupted if the assistance button is pressed. The connection to the assistance service will then be made (and vice versa).

Note Mobile phone coverage must be available to place a call to the information and assistance services. This service might not be available in some coun- tries.

Activating and deactivating voice control

Switching on the speech control system

Press the button on the multi-function steering wheel.

OR: Press the button in the three button module.

Wait for the acoustic signal.

Give the command.

Follow the dialogue instructions (extended dialogue).

Ending voice control

Press the button on the multi-function steering wheel.

OR: Press the button in the three button module.

Interrupting the instructions

During the instructions, press the button on the multi-function steer- ing wheel.

OR: Press the button in the three button module.

You will be able to speak a command immediately after.

65Opening and closing

Opening and closing

Vehicle key set

Vehicle key

Fig. 42 Vehicle keys

Fig. 43 Vehicle key for vehicles with electric sliding doors

Vehicle keys

With the vehicle key Fig. 42 or Fig. 43 the vehicle may be locked or un- locked remotely.

The vehicle key includes an emitter and batteries. The receiver is in the inte- rior of the vehicle. The range of the vehicle key with remote control and new batteries is several metres around the vehicle.

If it is not possible to open or close the vehicle using the remote control key, this should be re-synchronised page 67 or the battery changed page 67.

Different keys belonging to the vehicle may be used.

Folding the key shaft in and out

When the button is pressed A , the key shaft is released and unfolds.

To fold it press the button A and fold the key shaft in until it locks in place.

Replacing a key

To obtain a spare key and other vehicle keys, the vehicle chassis number is required.

Each new key must contain a microchip and be coded with the data from the vehicle electronic immobiliser. A vehicle key will not work if it does not con- tain a microchip or the microchip has not been encoded. This is also true for keys cut for the vehicle.

The vehicle keys or new spare keys can be obtained from a Technical Serv- ice, a specialised workshop or approved key service qualified to produce this kind of key.

New keys or spare keys must be synchronised before use page 67.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

66 Opening and closing

WARNING

Careless or incorrect use of vehicle keys may result in severe injury and accident.

Always take all the keys with you whenever you leave the vehicle. Children and unauthorised individuals could lock the doors or the rear lid, start the engine or turn the ignition on activating electrical systems, for example: the electric windows.

Never leave children or disabled people alone in the car. They could be trapped in the car in an emergency and will not be able to get them- selves to safety. For example, depending on the time of the year, temper- atures inside a locked and closed vehicle can be extremely high or ex- tremely low resulting in serious injuries and illness or even death, partic- ularly for young children.

Never remove the key from the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. The steering may lock and it will not be possible to turn the steering wheel.

CAUTION All of the vehicle keys contain electronic components. Protect the vehicle keys from damage, impacts and humidity.

Note Only use the key button when you require the corresponding function. Pushing the button unnecessarily could accidentally unlock the vehicle or trigger the alarm. It is also possible even when you are outside the radius of action.

Key operation can be greatly influenced by overlapping radio signals around the vehicle working in the same frequency range (for example, radio transmitters, mobile telephones).

Obstacles between the remote control and the vehicle, bad weather con- ditions and discharged batteries can considerably reduce the range of the remote control.

Control lamp on the vehicle key

Fig. 44 Control lamp on the vehicle key

When a button on the vehicle key is pressed, the control lamp flashes Fig. 44 (arrow) once briefly. If the button is pressed and held, the indica- tor blinks several times, for example: for the convenience opening function.

When the control lamp does not light upon pushing the button, the batter- ies of the vehicle key must be changed page 67.

67Opening and closing

Changing the battery

Fig. 45 Vehicle key: bat- tery compartment cover

Fig. 46 Vehicle key: re- moving the battery

SEAT recommend having the batteries changed in a specialised workshop.

The battery is located to the rear of the vehicle key, under a cover Fig. 45.

When changing the battery, use another battery of the same model and ob- serve the polarity when inserting it .

To change the battery

Unfold the vehicle key shaft page 65.

Remove the cover from the back of the vehicle key Fig. 45 in the direc- tion of the arrow .

Extract the battery from the compartment using a suitable thin object Fig. 46.

Place the new battery in the compartment, pressing in the direction of the arrow as shown Fig. 46 .

Fit the battery compartment cover, pressing in the direction of the arrow as shown Fig. 45 until it clicks into place.

CAUTION If the battery is not changed correctly, the vehicle key may be damaged.

Use of unsuitable batteries may damage the vehicle key. For this reason, always replace the dead battery with another of the same voltage, size and specifications.

For the sake of the environment Please dispose of your used batteries correctly and with respect for the environment.

The vehicle key battery may contain perchlorate. Observe the legal re- quirements for their disposal.

Synchronising the vehicle key

If the button is pressed frequently outside of the vehicle range, it is pos- sible that the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked using the key. In this case, the vehicle key must be synchronised once more as follows:

Unfold the vehicle key shaft page 65.

Remove the cover from the driver door handle page 289.

Press the button on the vehicle key. For this, it must remain with the vehicle.

Open the vehicle within one minute using the key shaft.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

68 Opening and closing

Turn on the ignition using the vehicle key. The key has been synchron- ised.

Replace the driver door handle cover.

Central locking and locking system

Introduction

Central locking functions correctly when all the doors and the rear lid are correctly shut. If the driver door is open, the vehicle cannot be locked with the key.

If the vehicle has the Keyless Access locking and starting system, it can only be locked when the engine is switched off and the driver's door is closed.

The battery of a vehicle left unlocked during a long period (for instance, in a private garage) may run down and fail to start the motor.

WARNING

The incorrect use of the central locking system may cause serious inju- ries.

The central locking system will lock all doors. A vehicle locked from the inside can prevent any non-authorised individual from opening the doors and accessing the vehicle. Nevertheless, in case of emergency or accident, locked doors will complicate access to the vehicle interior to help the passengers.

Never leave children or disabled people alone in the vehicle. The cen- tral locking button can be used to lock all the doors from within. There- fore, passengers will be locked inside the vehicle. Individuals locked in the vehicle can be exposed to very high or very low temperatures.

WARNING (Continued)

Depending on the time of the year, temperatures inside a locked and closed vehicle can be extremely high or extremely low resulting in seri- ous injuries and illness or even death, particularly for young children.

Never leave individuals locked in a closed and locked vehicle. In case of emergency, they may not be able to exit the vehicle by themselves or get help.

Description of the central locking system

The central locking system allows all doors and the rear lid to be locked and unlocked centrally.

From outside, using the vehicle key.

From the outside with the Keyless Access system page 71,

From inside, by pushing the central locking button page 70.

In the submenu Convenience in the Configuration menu, or by visiting a spe- cialised workshop, special functions of the central locking system can be switched on or off page 56.

In case of a vehicle key fault or central locking system fault, all doors can be locked or unlocked manually.

Automatic locking function (Auto Lock)

The vehicle locks automatically when moving at a speed of over 15 km/h (10 mph) page 56. When the vehicle is locked, the yellow control light is lit on the central locking button Fig. 48.

Automatic unlock (Auto unlock)

When the key is removed from the ignition, the vehicle, if necessary, auto- matically unlocks all doors and boot lid page 56.

69Opening and closing

Locking the vehicle after the airbags have been deployed

If the airbags are deployed due to an accident, the vehicle will be complete- ly unlocked. Depending on the amount of damage, the vehicle can be locked following an accident in the following ways:

Function Action

Lock the vehicle, by pushing the central locking button:

Turn off the ignition. Open one door once and close it again. Push the central locking button .

Use the key to lock the vehicle:

Switch off the ignition. OR: Remove the key from the ignition. Open any door just once. Lock the vehicle with the key.

Note If the buttons of the vehicle key are pressed Fig. 47 or one of the central locking buttons Fig. 48 is pressed repeatedly in short succession, the central locking briefly disconnects as protection against overloading. The vehicle is then unlocked for approximately 30 seconds. If no doors or the boot lid are opened during this time, the vehicle will subsequently become locked automatically.

Locking and unlocking the vehicle from the outside

Fig. 47 Buttons on the vehicle key

Function Handling the buttons on the vehicle

Unlocking the vehicle. Press button . Keep it pushed for the convenience opening.

Lock the vehicle. Press button . Keep it pushed for the convenience locking function.

Unlocking the rear lid. Press button .

Open the sliding door. page 77.

Please note: Depending on the selected function in the central locking Con- venience menu, you may push the button page 56 twice to unlock all doors and the boot lid.

The vehicle key only locks and unlocks the vehicle if it is within range of the vehicle and if the batteries have enough power. When locking, the vehicle's turn signals will blink.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

70 Opening and closing

If the driver door is open, the vehicle cannot be locked with the key. If you unlock the vehicle without opening any doors or the rear lid, it will lock again automatically after a few seconds. This function prevents the vehicle from remaining unlocked if the unlocking button is pressed by mistake.

Convenience open/close function

See "Electric windows: functions" page 84.

See "Panoramic sliding sunroof: operation" page 87.

Locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside

Fig. 48 In the driver door: central locking but- ton

Push the button Fig. 48:

Unlocking the vehicle.

Lock the vehicle.

The central locking button is still operative when the ignition is switched off.

The central locking button is only deactivated if the deadlock is activated page 74.

Please note the following when you use the central locking button to lock your vehicle:

Do not turn on the deadlock page 74.

Do not turn on the anti-theft alarm.

It will not be possible to open the doors or the rear lid from the outside this may offer extra safety, when stopped at traffic lights for example.

The doors can be opened and unlocked individually from the inside by pulling the inside door handle. If necessary, pull the door release lever twice.

The driver door cannot be locked when it is still open. This avoids lock- ing the vehicle key inside the vehicle when there is nobody inside.

71Opening and closing

Unlocking and locking the vehicle with Keyless Access

Fig. 49 Keyless Access locking and starting sys- tem: (A) from areas with- in range. (B) Open the boot lid with the sensor- controlled boot lid open- ing (Easy Open).

Fig. 50 Keyless Access locking and starting sys- tem: surface sensor A

for unlocking the internal part of the door handle and surface sensor B for locking the external part of the door handle.

Keyless Access is a locking and unlocking system that can be used to lock and unlock the vehicle without actively using the key. For this, all that is needed is a valid vehicle key within close proximity Fig. 49 A to the vehi- cle and for one of the surface sensors on the door handles to be touched Fig. 50 or the boot lid button to be pressed page 80 .

General information

If there is a valid key within one of the proximity zones Fig. 49 A, the Keyless Access locking and starting system grants access to that key when one of the surface sensors is touched or the rear lid button is pressed. The following functions are possible without having to actively use the vehicle key:

Keyless-Entry: Unlocks the vehicle via any one of the four door handles and the tailgate release button.

Keyless-Go: Starting engine and during driving. For this, a valid key must be inside the vehicle and the engine start button must be pressed page 156.

Keyless-Exit: Locks the vehicle via any one of the four door handles.

Easy Open: opening the rear lid by moving your foot beneath the rear bumper.

The central and general locking systems operate in the same way with the regular locking and unlocking system. Only the controls change.

The turn signals will flash twice when the vehicle is unlocked, and once when it is locked.

The vehicle will be locked again automatically if you do not open one of the doors or the boot lid a few seconds after unlocking the car.

Unlocking and opening the doors (Keyless Entry)

Grip the door handle. In doing so contact is made with the surface sen- sor Fig. 50 A (arrow) of the door handle and the vehicle is unlocked.

Open the door.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

72 Opening and closing

Vehicles without the "safe" security system: closing and locking the doors (Keyless Exit)

Switch the ignition off.

Close the driver's door.

Touch the surface sensor B (arrow) of the door handle once. The door being operated must be closed.

Vehicles with the "safe" security system: closing and locking the doors (Keyless Exit)

Switch the ignition off.

Close the driver's door.

Touch the surface sensor B (arrow) of the door handle once. The vehi- cle is locked via the "safe" security system page 74. The door being op- erated must be closed.

Touch the surface sensor of the door handle twice B (arrow) to lock the vehicle without the "safe" security system page 74.

Unlocking and locking the tailgate

When the vehicle is locked, the tailgate is automatically unlocked when the vehicle is opened if there is a valid key within its proximity zone Fig. 49 A.

Open or close the tailgate normally page 80.

The tailgate is then locked automatically. In the following cases the tailgate is not automatically locked when closed:

If the entire vehicle is unlocked.

If the key last used is inside the vehicle. All the turn signals of the vehi- cle flash four times. If none of the doors or boot lid is opened, the vehicle will lock again automatically after a few seconds.

Sensor-controlled tailgate opening (Easy Open)

If a valid key is within the proximity zone Fig. 49 A of the boot lid, it is possible to unlock and open it by moving your foot into the sensor zone Fig. 49 B below the rear bumper.

Switch the ignition off.

Stand in front of the rear bumper in the centre.

With a quick motion, move your foot and lower leg as close as possible to the bumper. The lower leg has to move close to the upper sensor zone and the foot to the lower sensor zone Fig. 49 B 1 .

Quickly remove your foot and lower leg from the sensor zones Fig. 49 B 2 . The rear lid will be automatically opened.

If the boot lid does not open, repeat the procedure after a few seconds.

To signal that the boot lid has opened with Easy Open, the third brake light will come on once.

When closing the boot lid, it will lock automatically if the vehicle has al- ready been locked and there are no valid vehicle keys inside.

In the following situations the Easy Open function will be limited or unavail- able (examples):

If the rear bumper is very dirty.

If the rear bumper is wet with water containing salt, for example, after driving on roads which have been gritted with salt.

If the electric release tow ball is not retracting.

If the electric release tow ball is not recessed.

If the vehicle has been retrofitted with a towing bracket.

In heavy rain the Easy Open function may take a while to open the boot lid or may deactivate automatically to avoid accidental opening of the lid, e.g. falling water.

The Easy Open function can be permanently activated or deactivated on the Configuration - Convenience menu of the SEAT information system page 56.

73Opening and closing

Using a second key to lock the vehicle.

If a vehicle key is left within the vehicle and the vehicle locked from the out- side with an identical second key, the key inside will remain locked for en- gine start page 156. To enable the engine to start, the button must be pressed on the key inside the vehicle Fig. 47.

Automatic deactivation of sensors

If the vehicle is not locked or unlocked over a long period of time, the pas- senger door proximity sensor automatically deactivates.

If, when the vehicle is locked, the exterior door handle sensor is activated unusually frequently (e.g. when rubbing up against branches of a bush), the proximity sensors will deactivate for a period of time. If this only occurs with the external sensor on the driver's door, only this sensor will be deactiva- ted.

The sensors will reactivate:

After a period of time.

OR: When the vehicle is unlocked using the remote control on the key.

OR: When the tailgate is opened.

Convenience functions

To close all the electrical windows, and sliding/tilting panoramic sunroof using the convenience function , hold your finger for a few seconds on the lock surface sensor Fig. 50 B located on the outside of the driver's or passenger's door handle until the windows and roof are closed.

The Opening door function which uses the sensor surface of door handles will be operational depending on the settings activated in the Configuration Convenience page 56 menu.

WARNING

If there is a valid key within the boot lid proximity zone, in some cases, such as when sweeping underneath the rear bumper, directing a jet of high-pressure water or steam at this zone or carrying out maintenance or repairs in this area, the Easy Open function can be accidentally activated and the lid opened. If accidentally opened, the rear lid could cause inju- ries to individuals within its vicinity and cause damage to property.

Therefore, always ensure that there are no valid keys left unattended within the boot lid proximity zone.

Before carrying out maintenance or repairs on the vehicle, always de- activate the Easy Open function in the SEAT information system.

Before washing the vehicle, always deactivate the Easy Open function in the SEAT information system.

Before mounting a bike rack or hooking up a trailer, always deactivate the Easy Open function in the SEAT information system.

CAUTION Door handle surface sensors can activate when a high-pressure jet of water or steam comes into contact with them if a valid key is within the proximity zone. If at least one window is open and the surface sensor B is perma- nently activated on one of the door handles, all windows will be closed. If the jet of water or steam is moved away from the surface sensor A on one of the handles and then again pointed in that direction, all the windows will probably be opened page 73, Convenience functions.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

74 Opening and closing

Note If the vehicle battery or the battery in the vehicle key is flat, it is possible that the vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked using the Keyless Access sys- tem. The vehicle can be locked or unlocked manually page 289.

If there is no valid key within the vehicle or it is not detected by the sys- tem, a warning will appear on the instrument panel display. This can hap- pen if another radio frequency signal interferes with the key's signal (e.g. from an accessory for mobile devices) or if the key is covered by another ob- ject (e.g. aluminium case).

Operation of door handle sensors can be affected if excessively dirty, e.g. with a layer of salt. If this occurs, wash the vehicle page 222.

In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, the vehicle can only be locked when the selector lever is in position P.

"Safe" security system

Function Necessary operations

Locks the vehicle and activates the "Safe" security system.

Press the button once on the vehicle key.

Locks the vehicle without acti- vating the "Safe" security sys- tem.

Press the button twice on the vehicle key.

Touch the surface sensor of the Keyless Access locking and starting system loca- ted on the outer part of the door handle twice page 71.

Press the central locking button on the driver door once.

Depending on the model, upon switching off the ignition, and depending on the vehicle, a warning indicating that the "safe" security system is acti- vated will appear on the instrument panel display ("Safe" locking or SAFE- LOCK).

Deactivating the "safe" security system

The system may be deactivated in the following ways:

Press the button twice on the vehicle key.

Touch the surface sensor of the Keyless Access locking and starting sys- tem located on the outer part of the door handle twice page 71.

Switch the ignition on.

Press the engine start button of the Keyless Access locking and starting system.

When the deadlock is deactivated, keep the following in mind:

The vehicle can be unlocked and opened from the inside using an inside door handle.

The anti-theft alarm will be activated.

The vehicle interior monitoring system and the anti-tow system are de- activated.

WARNING

Careless use of the "Safe" security system can cause serious injury.

Never leave anybody inside the vehicle if this is locked using the key. When the "Safe" security system is activated, doors cannot be opened from the inside!

When the doors are locked, it is difficult to get to passengers in the vehicle interior in case of an emergency. Passengers could remain trap- ped inside in an emergency.

Anti-theft alarm

The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to break into the vehicle or steal it.

75Opening and closing

The anti-theft alarm is automatically turned on when the vehicle is locked with the key.

When does the system trigger an alarm?

The anti-theft alarm siren will be triggered for about 30 seconds accompa- nied by optical warning signals for about five minutes when the vehicle is locked and the following unauthorised actions are taken:

When the door is mechanically unlocked using the vehicle key without turning the ignition within the following 15 seconds.

A door is opened.

The bonnet is opened.

The rear lid is opened.

When the ignition is switched on with a non-authorised key.

When the vehicle battery is disconnected.

When there is movement inside the vehicle (vehicles with interior moni- toring).

When the vehicle is towed (vehicles with anti-tow system)

When the vehicle is lifted (vehicles with anti-tow system).

Transporting the vehicle on a ferry or by railroad (vehicles with an anti- tow system or interior monitoring).

Unhitch a trailer connected to the anti-theft alarm page 212.

How to turn OFF the alarm

Unlock the vehicle with the unlocking button on the key or turn on the igni- tion with a valid key. In vehicles with the Keyless Access system, the alarm can also be disconnected by gripping the door handle page 71.

Note The alarm will be triggered once more when anybody enters the same zone of surveillance or any other zone. If, for example, after opening a door, the rear lid is also opened.

The anti-theft alarm is not activated when the vehicle is locked from within using the central locking button .

If the driver door is unlocked mechanically with the key, only the driver door is unlocked, the rest of the doors remain locked. Only when the igni- tion has been turned on will the other doors be available - but not unlocked - and the central lock button will be activated.

If the vehicle battery is run down or flat then the anti-theft alarm will not operate correctly.

Interior monitoring system and anti-tow system*

Fig. 51 On the roof con- sole: interior monitoring sensors

The interior monitoring system triggers the alarm if the vehicle is locked and movement is detected inside the vehicle. The anti-tow system triggers the alarm if the vehicle is locked when the system detects the vehicle is being raised.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

76 Opening and closing

Switching on the interior monitoring and the anti-tow systems

Close the storage compartment Fig. 51 1 on the ceiling console other- wise the interior monitoring function (arrow) may not work without restric- tions.

Use the key to lock the vehicle. If the anti-theft alarm is turned on, the interi- or monitoring and the anti-tow systems are also activated.

Switching off the interior monitoring and the anti-tow systems

The interior monitoring is switched off by pressing the remote control lock button twice.

Lock all doors and rear lid.

Use the key to lock the vehicle. The interior monitoring and / or anti-tow- ing alarm are switched off until the next time the vehicle is locked.

To turn off the interior monitoring and anti-tow systems before unlocking the vehicle, for example in the following situations:

When leaving animals inside the vehicle page 68.

When the vehicle must be loaded.

When the vehicle is being transported, for example, by ferry.

When the vehicle must be towed with the axle raised.

Risk of false alarms

The interior monitoring system only operates correctly if the vehicle is com- pletely closed. Observe legal requirements. The alarm may be accidentally triggered in the following cases:

When a window is completely or partially open.

If the sunglasses storage compartment in the roof console is open.

When the panoramic sliding sunroof is completely or partially open.

When suspended objects are hung from the interior mirror (air freshen- er) or there are loose papers in the vehicle.

If the separation net is fitted and moves (due to heating).

Due to a vibrating mobile telephone inside the vehicle.

Note Upon activating the alarm, if any door or the rear lid is open, only the anti- theft alarm will be activated. The interior monitoring and anti-tow systems will only be activated when the doors and rear lid are fully closed.

Doors

Introduction

WARNING

If a door is not correctly closed, it could open unexpectedly when driving and cause serious injuries.

Always stop immediately and close the door.

When closing, ensure that the door has closed correctly. A closed door should be flush with the corresponding parts of the bodywork.

Open and close doors only when nobody is in the way of the door.

WARNING

A door held open by its retainer could be blown closed by the wind or close if the vehicle is on a hill causing injury.

When opening and closing doors, always use the door handle.

77Opening and closing

Warning lamp

It lights up

Possible cause Solution

At least one vehicle door is open or not correctly shut.

Stop driving immediately! Open the corresponding door and close it immediately.

Several warning and control lamps should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few seconds.

If a door is open or incorrectly closed, the warning lamp or on the in- strument panel will light.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, a symbol may be displayed on the dash panel screen instead of the warning lamp. The indication is also visi- ble when the ignition is switched off. The indication disappears around 15 seconds after the vehicle has been locked.

Sliding doors

Introduction

WARNING

If a sliding door is not correctly closed, it could open unexpectedly when driving and cause serious injuries.

Stop immediately and close the door.

WARNING (Continued)

When closing, ensure that the sliding door has closed correctly. A closed sliding door should be flush with the corresponding parts of the bodywork.

Only open and close sliding doors when no body is in the way of the door.

WARNING

If a sliding door is not fully open, it could close unexpectedly and cause serious injuries.

Always open the sliding door fully.

WARNING

Opening sliding doors while driving is dangerous. These doors can be pushed open or closed when the vehicle accelerates or brakes, causing serious injuries.

Never open the sliding doors when the vehicle is in movement.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

78 Opening and closing

Manually opening and closing the sliding door

Fig. 52 On the sliding door. door handle 1

Function Necessary operations

Open the sliding door from the inside.

When the sliding door is released, open the door fully by pulling on the outside handle.

Opening the sliding door from the inside.

When the sliding door is released, open the door fully by pulling on its interior handle Fig. 52

1 .

Closing the sliding door.

Pull on the inside or outside door handle and close the sliding door by pushing gently. Make sure it is closed.

Opening and closing the sliding door electrically*

Fig. 53 On the dash pan- el, on the remote control key and on the interior lining of the sliding door: Button for opening and closing the electric slid- ing door.

All of the electric sliding doors can be opened and closed manually using more force.

Function Necessary operations

Opens the sliding door electrically.

Press the Fig. 53 button on the dash panel, on the remote control key and on the interior lining of the slid- ing door. The sliding door opens with the rollback anti- trap function as long as the button is not pressed again.

Pull briefly on the interior or exterior handle the door. The sliding door opens automatically.

Closing the slid- ing door electri- cally.

Press the Fig. 53 button on the dash panel, on the remote control key and on the interior lining of the slid- ing door. The sliding door closes with the rollback anti- trap function as long as the button is not pressed again. As it closes, a warning sound is given.

Pull briefly on the interior or exterior handle of the door. The sliding door closes with the roll-back func- tion. As it closes, a warning sound is given.

79Opening and closing

Note When the fuel tank cover is open, the right-hand side electric sliding door is locked and can only be opened manually.

If the window of a sliding door is lowered them this door cannot open fully.

Rollback anti-trap function of the electric sliding doors

The rollback anti-trap function of the electric sliding doors can reduce the risk of injury when opening and closing the sliding doors .

If an object gets in the way of the sliding door while it is closing, it opens again.

If an object gets in the way of the sliding door while it is opening, the door stops moving at that point.

Check the reason for which the sliding door does not open or close.

Try to open or close the sliding door again.

To close the sliding door without the rollback anti-trap function

Turn off the ignition and turn it on again.

Press and hold the Fig. 53 button. The sliding door closes with full force.

WARNING

Closing the electric windows without the anti-trap function can cause se- rious injury.

Always close the sliding doors carefully.

WARNING (Continued)

Nobody should ever get in the way of the electric sliding doors, espe- cially when closing without the anti-trap function.

The anti-trap function does not prevent fingers or other parts of the body getting pinched against the window frame and causing injury.

Electric child safety lock

Fig. 54 In the driver door: electric child safety locks buttons

The electric child safety lock avoids opening and locking of the sliding door and its electric windows from the inside so that children cannot accidentally open the door while the vehicle is being driven. Using the left-hand side Fig. 54 1 or right-hand side 2 button, the childproof lock is activated on the left hand or right-hand rear side respectively.

Turning on and off the electric child safety

Function Necessary operations

To switch system on: Press the button Fig. 54 1 or 2 .

To switch system off: Press the button again.

The yellow control lamp indicates that the function is on for the corre- sponding button.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

80 Opening and closing

WARNING

When the electric child safety function is activated, the sliding door can be opened from the outside only.

Never leave children or disabled people alone in the vehicle if the doors are to be locked. Therefore, passengers will be locked inside the vehicle. They could be trapped in the car in an emergency and will not be able to get themselves to safety. Individuals locked in the vehicle can be exposed to very high or very low temperatures.

Depending on the time of the year, temperatures inside a locked and closed vehicle can be extremely high or extremely low resulting in seri- ous injuries and illness or even death, particularly for young children.

Rear lid

Introduction

WARNING

Careless and unsuitable locking, opening and closing of the rear lid can cause accidents and serious injury.

Open and close the rear lid only when nobody is in the way.

Do not close the rear lid by pushing it down with your hand on the rear window. The rear window could break and cause injury.

Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing, otherwise, it may open un- expectedly while driving. A closed rear lid should be flush with the corre- sponding parts of the bodywork.

Always keep the rear lid closed while driving to avoid toxic gases en- tering the vehicle interior.

WARNING (Continued)

Do not open the rear lid when there is a load carrier installed. Like- wise, the boot lid cannot be opened when a load is attached to it, for ex- ample bicycles. An open rear lid could close itself if there is an additional weight on it. If necessary, press down on the rear lid and remove the load.

Close and lock both the rear lid and all the other doors when you are not using the vehicle. Ensure that nobody remains inside the vehicle.

Never allow children to play inside or around the vehicle without su- pervision, especially if the rear lid is open. Children could enter the lug- gage compartment, close the rear lid and become trapped. Depending on the time of the year, temperatures inside a locked and closed vehicle can be extremely high or extremely low resulting in serious injuries and ill- ness or even death, particularly for young children.

Never leave children or disabled people alone in the vehicle. If the ve- hicle key or the central locking button is used, they may be locked in the vehicle.

CAUTION Before opening the rear lid, ensure that there is sufficient free space to open and close it, for example if you are towing a trailer or in a garage.

Warning lamp

It lights up

Possible cause Solution

The rear lid is open or not correctly shut.

Stop driving immediately! Open the rear lid and close it again.

81Opening and closing

Several warning and control lamps should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few seconds.

A warning lamp appears on the instrument panel if the boot lid is open or not properly closed.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, a symbol may be displayed on the dash panel screen instead of the warning lamp. The indication is also visi- ble when the ignition is switched off. The indication disappears around 15 seconds after the vehicle has been locked.

WARNING

If the rear lid is not correctly closed, it could open unexpectedly when driving and cause serious injuries.

Always stop immediately and close the rear lid.

Ensure that the rear lid has been locked into place by the element on the lock carrier when you close it.

Opening the rear lid

Fig. 55 Detailed view of the centre console: but- ton for unlocking the rear lid

Fig. 56 Opening the boot lid from the exterior.

Before opening the rear lid, always remove any load on its luggage rack .

Opening with the ignition key

Press the button on the vehicle key until the rear lid opens automatical- ly.

To open using the centre console control

Press the button on the centre console Fig. 55. The rear lid will be au- tomatically opened.

The button is still operative when the ignition is switched off.

Open the boot lid with sensor-controlled boot lid opening (Easy Open)

In vehicles with Keyless Access the boot lid can be opened by moving your foot into the sensor zone beneath the rear bumper page 68.

Opening the rear lid with the button

Unlock the vehicle or open a door.

Raise the rear lid using the button Fig. 56 (arrow).

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

82 Opening and closing

WARNING

Unsuitable or careless unlocking and opening of the rear lid could cause serious injuries.

If there is a loaded luggage carrier on the rear lid, it could be un- locked or open but not recognised as such. An unlocked or open rear lid could open unexpectedly while driving.

Note At outside temperatures of less than 0 C (+32 F), the pressurised gas struts cannot always automatically lift the rear lid. In this case, open the rear lid manually.

Closing the rear lid

Fig. 57 Rear lid open: hand grip

Closing the rear lid

Grab the handgrip inside the rear lid Fig. 57 (arrow).

Push the rear lid downwards until it locks into place in the lock.

Ensure that it is correctly closed by pulling on it firmly.

Locking the rear lid

If you unlock the vehicle without opening any doors or the rear lid, it will lock again automatically after 30 seconds. This function prevents the vehi- cle from remaining unlocked if the unlocking button is pressed by mistake.

Locking is only possible when the rear lid is correctly and fully closed.

The rear lid is also locked by a central locking.

If the vehicle rear lid is locked or unlocked using the button, when it is closed once more it will lock automatically.

A closed but not locked rear lid will lock automatically at a speed above about 9 km/h (7 mph).

WARNING

Unsuitable or careless closing and locking of the rear lid could cause se- rious injuries.

Never allow children to play inside or around the vehicle without su- pervision, especially if the rear lid is open. Children could enter the lug- gage compartment, close the rear lid and become trapped. A locked vehi- cle can be subjected to extremely high and low temperatures, depending on the time of year, thus causing serious injuries/illness and even death.

Note Before closing the rear lid, make sure that the key has not been left inside the luggage compartment.

83Opening and closing

Opening the rear lid electronically

Fig. 58 Button with rear lid open

Opening the rear lid

Press and hold the button on the vehicle key until the rear lid opens automatically.

OR: Press and hold the button on the centre console for approxi- mately 1 second Fig. 55.

OR: Press the Fig. 56 boot lid button (arrow).

In case of difficulty or obstruction, automatic opening of the rear lid is inter- rupted.

Electronically opening the rear lid does not work when a trailer is electrically connected and hitched to a factory fitted tow hitch page 212.

The rear lid can be opened manually by applying more force.

Closing the rear lid

Press and hold the button on the vehicle key for approximately 1 second.

OR: Press and hold the button on the centre console for approxi- mately 1 second Fig. 55.

OR: Press the Fig. 56 boot lid button (arrow).

Press the button on the open rear lid Fig. 58 .

Manually push the rear lid down to close it.

The rear lid will move down to the closed position to close and lock itself automatically using the power-close feature .

In case of difficulty or obstruction, automatic closing of the rear lid is inter- rupted and it will open slightly.

Check why the rear lid could not close.

Attempt to close it once more.

Interrupting the opening and closing process

Rear lid opening and closing can be stopped by pressing one of the but- tons. Each time one of the buttons is pressed, the rear lid moves to its initial position.

Then, it can be opened or closed by hand. To do this, apply a little more force.

Memorising the opening angle

The rear lid must be at least half open to memorise an opening angle.

Stop automatic opening in the opening position required page 83.

Hold down the button Fig. 58 with the rear lid open for at least three seconds. The opening angle is memorised.

Memorisation is confirmed by blinking of the hazard warning lights and an audible warning.

To open boot lid completely, the opening angle must be memorised once more.

Release the rear lid and open it to the memorised height.

Push the rear lid all the way up. To do this, apply a little more force.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

84 Opening and closing

Hold down the button Fig. 58 with the rear lid open for at least three seconds.

The opening angle is reset to the original factory setting.

WARNING

Unsuitable or careless closing and locking of the rear lid could cause se- rious injuries.

Never allow children to play inside or around the vehicle without su- pervision, especially if the rear lid is open. Children could enter the lug- gage compartment, close the rear lid and become trapped. A locked vehi- cle can be subjected to extremely high and low temperatures, depending on the time of year, thus causing serious injuries or illness. It could even have fatal consequences.

WARNING

It is possible that the rear lid does not open completely or, if it is open, closes alone if a large amount of snow has built up on it or if a luggage rack is fitted. In this case, the rear lid must be supported.

CAUTION When using a trailer, ensure that there is sufficient space to open and close the rear lid.

Before opening the rear lid, any kind of equipment carrier should be re- moved, for example a bicycle carrier.

CAUTION In case of repeated short-term use, the system is turned off to avoid over- heating.

When it has cooled, it may be used once again. During this time, the rear lid may be manually opened or closed applying a little more effort.

If the vehicle battery is disconnected or the fuse blows when the rear lid is open, the rear lid system must be re-initialised. To do this, close the rear lid.

Note Before closing the rear lid, make sure that the key has not been left inside the luggage compartment.

Electric windows

Opening and closing the electric windows

Fig. 59 In the driver door: Buttons for front and rear electric windows and child safety lock

85Opening and closing

Buttons on the driver door

Legend for the Fig. 59:

For the front electric windows.

For the sliding door electric windows.

To lock the sliding doors and their windows.

Opening and closing the windows

Function Necessary operations

Opening: Press button .

Closing: Push the button .

To stop the one touch function:

Press or pull on the corresponding window button.

Press the button for the electronic child safety lock to deactivate the controls for the electric win- dows on the sliding doors and to lock these doors page 77. The indicator on the button will light up.

After turning off the ignition, the windows can be opened and closed for a short time using the buttons on the door as long as the driver door or pas- senger side door is not open. When the key is removed from the ignition and the driver door is open, all of the electric windows can be opened or closed using the corresponding button on the driver door. After a few sec- onds, the convenience opening or closing function will begin page 86.

WARNING

Careless use of the electric windows can cause serious injury.

Only operate the electric windows when nobody is in the way.

Never leave children or disabled people alone in the vehicle if the doors are to be locked. The windows cannot be opened in case of an emergency.

1

2

3

WARNING (Continued)

Always take all the keys with you whenever you leave the vehicle. Af- ter turning off the ignition, the windows can be opened and closed for a short time using the buttons on the door as long as the driver door or passenger side door is not open.

When transporting children in the rear seats, always deactivate the rear electric windows with the child safety lock so that they cannot be opened and closed.

Electric windows: functions

One-touch opening and closing

The one-touch automatic opening and closing is used to open or close the windows completely. It will not be necessary to hold the button of the corre- sponding electric window.

For the one-touch closing function: pull up on the button for the window to the second position.

For the one-touch opening function: push down the button for the window to the second position.

To stop the one touch function: push or pull on the button of the corre- sponding window.

Restoring one-touch opening and closing

The one-touch opening and closing function is not active after the vehicle battery has been disconnected or is flat and will have to be reset.

Close all windows and doors.

Pull the button of the corresponding window and hold it for one second in this position.

Release the button and pull upwards and hold again. The one-touch function is now ready for operation.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

86 Opening and closing

The automatic one-touch electric windows can be reinitialised individually or several at a time.

Convenience opening and closing function

The electric windows can be opened or closed from outside using the vehi- cle key:

Keep the vehicle unlocking or locking button pressed. All windows which function electrically will be either opened or closed.

To interrupt the function, release the locking or unlocking button.

During convenience closing, first the windows and then the sliding sunroof will be closed.

In the Configuration - convenience menu, there are different settings for oper- ating the windows page 56.

Note The one-touch function and roll-back function will not work if there is a mal- function in the electric windows. Visit a specialised workshop.

Electric Windows anti-trap function

The anti-trap function of the electric windows can reduce the risk of injury when opening and closing the electric windows . If a window is not able to close because it is stiff or because of an obstruction, it will automati- cally open again.

Check why the window does not close.

Attempt to close the window again.

If you try within the following 10 seconds and the window closes with difficulty or there is an obstruction once again, the one-touch closing will stop working for 10 seconds.

If the window is still obstructed, it will stop at the corresponding posi- tion. When the button is operated within 10 seconds, the window will close without the anti-trap function .

To close windows without the anti-trap function

Attempt to close the corresponding electric window within 10 seconds after by holding the button. The window is closed without the anti-trap function, deactivated for a short time.

After more than 10 seconds, the anti-trap function is reactivated. The window will stop once again if there is another difficulty or obstacle.

If the window will still not close, visit a specialised workshop.

WARNING

Closing the electric windows without the anti-trap function can cause se- rious injury.

Always close the electric windows carefully.

Nobody should be in the way of the electric windows, especially when the anti-trap function is deactivated.

The anti-trap function does not prevent fingers or other parts of the body getting pinched against the window frame and causing injury.

Note The anti-trap function also operates if the windows are closed from the out- side of the vehicle using the ignition key for convenience closing page 86.

87Opening and closing

Panoramic sliding sunroof*

Introduction

WARNING

Careless or uncontrolled use of the panoramic sliding sunroof can cause serious injuries.

Only close the panoramic sliding sunroof and the sun blind when no- body is in the way.

Always take all the keys with you whenever you leave the vehicle.

Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle, particularly if they have access to the keys. Uncontrolled use of the key could lock the vehicle, start the engine, turn on the ignition and operate the panoramic sliding sunroof.

The panoramic sliding sunroof can be operated for up to about ten mi- nutes after the ignition has been switched off, provided the driver door and the front passenger door are not opened.

Note In case of a fault in the operation of the panoramic sliding sunroof, the anti- trap function will not operate correctly. Visit a specialised workshop.

Opening or closing the panoramic sliding sunroof

Fig. 60 On the interior roof lining: use the rotary button for opening and closing

Fig. 61 On the interior roof lining: Press the but- ton and pull on it to lift and close the sliding sunroof.

To open the panoramic sliding sunroof, the switch must be in the position 1 .

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

88 Opening and closing

Function Switch setting Necessary operations

Fig. 60

To fully open the sliding sunroof:

3

Rotate the switch to the re- quired position.

To choose the conven- ience position for the slid-

ing sunroof: 2

To fully close the sliding sunroof:

1

Fig. 61

To completely deploy the tilting sunroof:

4 Briefly push the switch back (arrow).

To stop automatic opera- tion:

4 or 5 Briefly push back the button again or pull it.

To completely close the tilting sunroof:

5 Briefly push the switch back (arrow).

To set the intermediate position:

4 or 5 Pull the button or hold it back until the roof is in the required position.

The panoramic sliding sunroof will only work with the ignition on. It can be opened or closed for a few minutes after the ignition has been switched off, provided the driver door and the front passenger door are not opened.

Opening or closing the sun blind

Fig. 62 On the interior roof lining: switches for the sun blind

Function Necessary operations

To open completely (au- tomatic):

Press button Fig. 62 1 briefly.

To stop automatic opera- tion:

Press the button Fig. 62 1 or Fig. 62 2

briefly.

To set the intermediate position:

Hold the button Fig. 62 1 or Fig. 62 2

until the required position is reached.

To close completely (au- tomatic):

Press button Fig. 62 2 briefly.

The panoramic sliding sunroof can be operated for up to about ten minutes after the ignition has been switched off, provided the driver door and the front passenger door are not opened.

Panoramic sliding sunroof: operation

Convenience open/close function

The panoramic sliding sunroof can be opened or closed from outside the vehicle using the vehicle key:

89Opening and closing

Keep the vehicle unlocking or locking button pressed. The panoramic sliding sunroof is adjusted or closes.

Release the unlock or lock button to stop the function.

During convenience closing, first the windows and then the panoramic slid- ing sunroof will be closed.

Note The rotary button of the panoramic sliding sunroof remains in the last posi- tion selected if the roof is closed using convenience closing from outside the vehicle, and will have to be re-positioned the next time you drive.

Anti-trap function of the panoramic sliding sunroof and the sun blind

The anti-trap function reduces the risk of injury when opening and closing the panoramic sliding sunroof and sun blind . When they encounter an obstacle while closing, they roll back and open again.

Check why the panoramic sliding sunroof or the sun blind did not close.

Attempt to close the panoramic sliding sunroof or sun blind once again.

If the panoramic sliding sunroof or sun blind is still obstructed, it will stop at the corresponding position. Close it without the anti-trap function.

Closing without the roll-back function

The switch Fig. 60 should be in the closed position A .

Panoramic sliding sunroof: Within five seconds of triggering the anti- trap function, pull the control all the way back Fig. 61 (arrow E ) until the panoramic sliding sunroof closes fully.

Sun blind: Within five seconds of triggering the anti-trap function, push button Fig. 62 2 until the sun blind closes completely.

The panoramic sliding sunroof or sun blind closes without the anti-trap function.

If the panoramic sliding sunroof still cannot be closed, visit a special- ised workshop.

WARNING

Closing the panoramic sliding sunroof or sun blind without the anti-trap function can cause serious injuries.

Always close the panoramic sliding sunroof carefully.

Nobody should be in the way of the panoramic sliding sunroof or sun blind, especially when they are closed without the anti-trap function.

The anti-trap function does not prevent fingers or other parts of the body getting pinched against the window frame and causing injury.

Note The anti-trap function is activated if the windows and the panoramic sliding sunroof are closed from the outside of the vehicle using the ignition key for convenience closing page 86.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

90 Lights and visibility

Lights and visibility

Lights

Introduction

The legal requirements regarding the use of vehicle lights in each country must be observed.

The driver is personally responsible for the correct use and adjustment of the lights in all situations.

WARNING

If the headlights are set too high and the main beam is not used correct- ly, there is a risk of dazzling or distracting other road users. This could result in a serious accident.

Always make sure that the headlights are correctly adjusted.

Never use the main beam or flashed headlamps as this could dazzle other drivers.

Control lamps

It lights up

Possible cause Solution

Driving light totally or partially faulty.

Replace the corresponding bulb page 297. If all the bulbs are OK, the vehi- cle should be taken to a speci- alised workshop if necessary.

Fault in adaptive light. page 93.

It lights up

Possible cause Solution

Rear fog light switched on. page 92.

Fog lights switched on

Left or right turn signal. The control lamp flashes twice as fast when a vehicle or trailer turn signal is faulty.

If necessary, check the vehicle and trailer lighting.

Main beam on or flasher on. page 91.

Headlight adjustment (Light Assist) on.

page 92.

Flashes Possible cause Solution

Fault in the adaptive light sys- tem.

Contact a specialised work- shop page 92.

Several warning and control lamps should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few seconds.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings in Control and warning lamps on page 56.

91Lights and visibility

Turn signal and main beam lever

Fig. 63 Turn signal and main beam lever

Move the lever to the required position:

Right turn signal. Right-hand parking light (ignition switched off) page 92.

Left turn signal. Left-hand parking light (ignition switched off) page 92.

Main beam switched on . The control lamp will light up on the instrument panel.

Flashing the headlights. The flashed beam comes on if the lever is pressed. The control lamp lights up.

Push the lever all the way down to turn off the corresponding function.

Convenience turn signals

For the convenience turn signals, move the lever as far as possible upwards or downwards and release the lever. The turn signal will flash three times.

The control turn signals are switched on and off from the menu Lights & Visi- bility on the instrument panel display page 56. This function can be dis- connected at a specialised workshop for those vehicles which do not have the menu Lights & Visibility.

1

2

3

4

WARNING

Incorrect use of the headlights may cause accidents and serious injury, as the main beam may distract or dazzle other drivers.

Note The turn signal only works when the ignition is switched on. The hazard warning lights also work when the ignition is switched off page 287.

If a turn signal on the vehicle or trailer is faulty, the warning lamp flash- es twice as fast as usual.

The main beam headlights can only be switched on if the dipped beam headlights are already on.

Turning lights on and off

Fig. 64 Next to the steering wheel: diagram of some of the types of light switch

The legal requirements regarding the use of vehicle lights in each country must be observed.

In vehicles with tow hitch fitted as standard: If the trailer is connected elec- trically and is fitted with a rear fog light, it will automatically be switched off on the vehicle.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

92 Lights and visibility

Turn the light switch to the required position Fig. 64:

When the ignition is switched off

When the ignition is on

Fog lights, dipped beam and side lights off.

Lights off or daytime driving light on.

The guidance lights may be switched on.

Automatic dipped beam control or daytime driving light on.

Side light on. Side light on.

Dipped beam off; if necessa- ry, the side light comes on for a time.

Dipped beam switched on.

Fog lights

The warning lamps or on the light switch also indicate that the fog lights are switched on.

Switching on the fog lights : Turn the switch to position or pull out to the first stop.

Switching on the rear fog light : turn the light switch to position o pull out to the maximum.

To switch off the fog lights, press the light switch or turn it to position .

Audible warnings to advise the driver that the lights have not been switched off

If the key is not in the ignition and the driver door is open, an audible warn- ing signal is heard in the following cases: this is a reminder to turn off the lights.

When the parking light is on page 91.

When the light switch is in position .

WARNING

The side lights or daytime driving lights are not bright enough to illumi- nate the road ahead and to ensure that other road users are able to see you.

Always use your dipped beam head lights if it is raining or if visibility is poor.

Lights and visibility: functions

Parking light

When the parking light is switched on, (right or left turn signal), the front side light and the rear light on the corresponding side of the vehicle stay lit. The parking lights will only work with the ignition off.

Daytime driving light

The daytime light reduces the risk of accidents by increasing the visibility of the vehicle. The lights are built into the headlights and come on each time the ignition is turned on if the light switch is in position or 0.

When the light switch is in position , a photo sensor automatically turns the instrument and switch lighting on and off.

Automatic dipped beam control

The automatic dipped beam control is merely intended as an aid and is not able to recognise all driving situations.

When the light switch is in position , the vehicle lights and the instru- ment panel and switch lighting switch on and off automatically in the fol- lowing situations :

93Lights and visibility

Automatic switching on Automatic switching off or switch to daytime driving lighting

The photo sensor detects darkness, for example, when driving through a tunnel.

When adequate lighting is detected.

The rain sensor detects rain and ac- tivates the windscreen wipers.

When the windscreen wiper has been inactive for a few minutes.

Adaptive headlights (AFS)

The dynamic cornering lights only operate when the dipped beam is on and at speeds of over 10 km/h (6 mph). On bends, the adjustable lights auto- matically improve road illumination.

The adaptive headlights can be switched on and off from the infotainment system.

Static turning lights

When turning slowly to change direction or going round a tight bend, the static cornering lights automatically come on. The static cornering lights on- ly work at speeds of less than 40 km/h (25 mph).

The static cornering lights may be incorporated into the fog lights or the front headlights, depending upon the equipment.

WARNING

If the road is not well lit and other road users cannot see the vehicle well enough or at all, accidents may occur.

The automatic dipped beam control () only switches on the dip- ped beam when there are no changes in brightness, and not, for example when it is foggy.

WARNING (Continued)

Never drive with daytime lights if the road is not well lit due to weath- er or lighting conditions. Daytime lights do not provide enough light to illuminate the road properly or be seen by other road users.

The rear lights do not come on with the daytime driving light. A vehi- cle which does not have the rear lights on may not be visible to other drivers in the darkness, if it is raining or in conditions of poor visibility.

Headlight adjustment

Headlight adjustment (Light Assist)

The headlight adjustment automatically connects and disconnects the main beam headlights depending on the environmental and traffic conditions and on the speed, within the limitations of the system . This is moni- tored by a sensor located on the inside of the windscreen, above the interior rear vision mirror.

The automatic headlight adjustment automatically switches on the main beam depending on the vehicles travelling in front and in the opposite di- rection, and on other environmental and traffic conditions starting at an ap- proximate speed of 60 km/h (37 mph) and turns them off again at speeds below approximately 30 km/h (18 mph).

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

94 Lights and visibility

Switching on and off

Action

Switching on:

With the ignition on, turn the lights control to the position and put the turn signal and main beam lever in the main beam position page 91. When the headlight adjust- ment (including automatic adjustment) is activated, the warning lamp lights up in the instrument panel display.

Switching off:

Disconnect the on button. OR: turn the lights control to a different position to page 91. OR: place the turn signal and main beam lever in the headlight flasher or main beam position page 91.

The following conditions can cause the headlight adjustment to fail to turn off the main beam or fail to do so in time:

On roads with insufficient lighting with very reflective signs

If road users are insufficiently lit up, e.g. pedestrians or cyclists

On closed curves, when the traffic in the opposite direction is partially hidden, on pronounced slopes

On roads with traffic in the opposite direction and with a central reserva- tion barrier when the driver can see through gaps or over it e.g. lorry drivers

If the camera is damaged or if the power supply has been cut off

In the event of fog, snow or heavy rain

In the event of dust or sand storms

If the windscreen is damaged by the impact from a stone in the camera's field of vision

If the camera's field of vision is misted up, dirty or covered by a sticker, snow or ice.

WARNING

The greater comfort that the headlight adjustment provides (automatic also) must not cause you to take risks. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness.

Always monitor the lights yourself and adjust them depending on the light, visibility and traffic conditions.

The headlight adjustment (automatic also) may not correctly detect all situations and in certain situations may only provide limited function.

If the windscreen is damaged or modifications are made to the vehi- cle lighting, this may harm the functioning of the headlight adjustment (including automatic adjustment), for example, if additional headlights are fitted.

Note Main beam and flashed headlights can be turned on and off manually at any time with the turn signal and main beam lever page 91.

Adhesive strips for headlights or adjusting headlights

In those countries where vehicles drive on the other side of the road to the home country, the asymmetric dipped beam may dazzle drivers of oncom- ing vehicles. Therefore, when driving abroad, adhesive strips should be at- tached to the headlights or the headlights should be adjusted accordingly.

The direction of the headlights can be adjusted from the instrument panel, in the Tourist light submenu of the Configuration menu page 60.

For those vehicles in which it is not possible to adjust the headlights from the menu, adhesive strips are used to cover certain parts of the headlamp cover or the headlights may be adjusted at a specialised workshop. For fur- ther information, please refer to a specialised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a Technical Service.

95Lights and visibility

Note Use of the Tourist light option and the adhesives on the headlights is only allowed if they are to be used for a short period of time. To modify the direc- tion of the headlights permanently, please take the vehicle to a specialised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a Technical Service.

Coming home and Leaving home function (guidance lights)

The Coming home function should be switched on manually. However the Leaving home function is automatically controlled by a photo sensor.

Coming home Necessary operations

To switch sys- tem on:

Switch off the ignition. Briefly flash the headlights for approximately one sec- ond page 91. The Coming home lighting comes on when the driver door is opened. The delay in switching off the headlights is counted from when the last door or boot lid is closed.

To switch sys- tem off:

Automatically, at the end of the delay period. Automatically, if 30 seconds after coming on, a vehicle door or boot lid remains open. Turn light switch to position . Switch on ignition.

Leaving home Necessary operations

To switch sys- tem on:

Unlock the vehicle when the light switch is in position and the photo sensor detects darkness.

To switch sys- tem off:

Automatically, at the end of the delay period. Lock the vehicle. Turn light switch to position. Switch on ignition.

Lighting around the exterior mirrors

The lighting around the exterior mirrors illuminates the door area on enter- ing and leaving the vehicles. It comes on when the vehicle is unlocked, when the vehicle door is opened and when the Coming home or Leaving home function is switched on. If the equipment includes the light sensor, the lighting around the exterior mirrors only comes when it is dark.

Note The time taken for the headlights to go off can be changed in the Lights & Visibility menu and the page 56 function can be switched on or off.

When the Coming home function is on, if the vehicle door is opened there is no audible warning signal to advise that the light is still on.

Headlight range control, instrument and switch lighting

Fig. 65 Next to the steering wheel: instru- ment and switch lighting control 1 and headlight range control 2

1 Instrument and switch lighting

When the headlights are switched on, the brightness of the instruments and switch lighting can be regulated to suit your requirements by turning the switch Fig. 65 1 .

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

96 Lights and visibility

2 Headlight range control

The headlight range control Fig. 65 2 is modified according to the value of the headlight beam and the vehicle load status. This offers the driver op- timum visibility and the headlights do not dazzle oncoming drivers .

The headlights can only be adjusted when the dipped beam is switched on.

To adjust, turn switch Fig. 65 2 :

Value Vehicle load statusa)

Two front occupants, luggage compartment empty

1 All seats occupied, luggage compartment empty

2 All seats occupied, luggage compartment full With trailer and minimum drawbar load

3 Driver only, luggage compartment full With trailer and maximum drawbar load

a) If the vehicle load does not correspond to those shown in the table, it is possible to select intermediary positions.

Dynamic headlight range control

The control 2 is not mounted in vehicles with dynamic headlight range control. The headlight range is automatically adjusted according to the ve- hicle load status when the headlights are switched on.

WARNING

Heavy objects in the vehicle may mean that the headlights dazzle and distract other drivers. This could result in a serious accident.

Adjust the light beam to the vehicle load status so that it does not blind other drivers.

Interior and reading lights

Button/ Switch

Function

Switches interior lights off.

Switches interior lights on.

Switches door contact control on (central position). The interior lights come on automatically when the vehicle is unlocked, a door is opened or the key is removed from the ig- nition. The lights go off a few seconds after all the doors are closed, the vehicle is locked or the ignition is switched on.

Turning the reading light on and off

Storage and luggage compartment lighting

When the glove compartment and the rear lid are opened and closed, a light automatically switches on or off.

Ambient lighting

The ambient lighting in the front covering of the ceiling lights up the con- trols on the centre console from above when the side light or dipped beam lights are on.

In addition, the lever on the door moulding can also be illuminated.

Note The reading lights go out when the vehicle is locked, or a few minutes after the key is removed from the ignition. This prevents the battery from dis- charging.

97Lights and visibility

Sun protection equipment

Sun visors

Fig. 66 Sun visor

Options for adjusting driver and front passenger sun visors:

Lower the sun visor towards the windscreen.

The sun visor can be pulled out of its mounting and turned towards the door Fig. 66 1 .

Swing the sun visor towards the door, longitudinally backwards.

Vanity mirror light

There may be a vanity mirror, with a cover, on the rear of the sun visor. When the cover is opened Fig. 66 2 a light comes on.

The lamp goes out when the vanity mirror cover is closed or the sun visor is pushed back up.

WARNING

Sun visors and sun blinds may reduce visibility when open.

Always roll or fold sun blinds and visors away when not in use.

Note The light above the sun visor automatically switches off after a few minutes in certain conditions. This prevents the battery from discharging.

Rear side window sun blinds

Fig. 67 On the rear right-hand window: sun blind

The sun blinds for the vehicle interior are fitted in the side panels of the windows.

Pull the sun blind by the handle Fig. 67 A up to the top.

Hook both rings of the fastening rod in the spaces provided B . Check that the sun blind is securely hooked into the spaces provided when it has been lowered B .

To put the sun blind away, unhook it at the top and lower by hand .

CAUTION To prevent damage to the blind or the interior trim, do not lower the sun blind quickly.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

98 Lights and visibility

Windscreen and rear window wiper systems

Introduction

WARNING

Water from the windscreen washer water bottle may freeze on the wind- screen if it does not contain enough anti-freeze, reducing forward visibili- ty.

In winter, ensure the windscreen washer contains enough anti-freeze.

In cold conditions, you should not use the wash/wipe system unless you have warmed the windscreen with the ventilation system. The anti- freeze could freeze on the windscreen and reduce visibility.

WARNING

Worn or dirty wiper blades reduce visibility and increase the risk of acci- dent and serious injury.

Always replace damaged or worn blades or blades which do not clean the windscreen correctly.

CAUTION In icy conditions, always check that the wiper blades are not frozen to the glass before using the wipers for the first time. In cold weather, it may help to leave the vehicle parked with the wipers in service position page 100.

Control lamp

It lights up

Possible cause Solution

Windscreen wiper fluid level too low

Top up the windscreen wiper reservoir as soon as possible page 103.

Several warning and control lamps should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few seconds.

Window wiper lever

Fig. 68 Operating the windscreen wiper and rear wiper

Move the lever to the required position :

0 Windscreen wiper off.

1

Windscreen wipers interval wipe. Using the control Fig. 68 A adjust the interval (for vehi- cles without a rain sensor), or the sensitivity of the rain sen- sor.

99Lights and visibility

Move the lever to the required position :

2 Slow wipe.

3 Continuous wipe.

4 Brief wipe - short wipe. Hold the lever down for more time to increase the wipe frequency.

5 Automatic wipe for cleaning windscreens with the lever up.

6 Interval wipe for rear window. The wiper will wipe the win- dow approximately every 6 seconds.

7 Automatic wipe for cleaning rear windows with the lever pressed.

CAUTION If the ignition is switched off while the windscreen wipers are on, the wind- screen wipers carry on wiping at the same level when the ignition is switch- ed back on. Ice, snow and other obstacles may damage the windscreen wip- er and the wiper motor.

Note The windscreen wipers will only function when the ignition is switched on and the respective bonnet or rear lid are closed.

The interval wipe speed varies according to the vehicle speed. The faster the vehicle is moving, the more often the windscreen is cleaned.

The rear wiper is automatically switched on when the windscreen wiper is on and the car is in reverse gear.

Windscreen wiper functions

Windscreen wiper performance in different situations

If the vehicle is at a standstill

The activated position provisionally changes to the previous position.

During automatic wipe

The air conditioner comes on for approximately 30 seconds in air recirculation mode to prevent the smell of the windscreen washer fluid entering the in- side the vehicle.

For the interval wipe

The intervals operate according to vehicle speed. The higher the vehicle speed the shorter the intervals.

Heated windscreen washer jets

The heating only thaws the frozen jets, it does not thaw the water in the washer hoses. The heated windscreen washer jets automatically adjust the heat depending on the ambient temperature, when the ignition is switched on.

Headlight wash/wipe system

The headlight washers/wipers clean the headlight lenses.

After the ignition is switched on, the first and every fifth time the wind- screen washer is switched on, the headlights are also washed. Therefore, the windscreen wiper lever should be pulled towards the steering wheel when the dipped beam or main beam are on. Any incrusted dirt (such as in- sects) should be cleaned regularly (e.g. when refuelling).

To ensure the headlight washers work correctly in winter, any snow which has got into the bumper jet supports should be cleaned away. If necessary, remove snow with an anti-icing spray.

Note The wiper will try to wipe away any obstacles that are on the windscreen. The wiper will stop moving if the obstacle blocks its path. Remove the ob- stacle and switch the wiper back on again.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

100 Lights and visibility

Windscreen wipers service position

Fig. 69 Wipers in service position

The wiper arms can be raised when the wipers are in service position Fig. 69. To place the windscreen wipers in the service position, proceed as follows:

The bonnet must be closed page 251.

Switch the ignition on and off.

Press the windscreen wiper lever downwards briefly Fig. 68 4 .

Before driving, always lower the wiper arms. Using the windscreen wiper lever, the windscreen wiper arms return to their initial position.

Lifting and returning windscreen wiper arms

Place the wiper arms in the service position .

Only hold the wiper arms at the point where the blade is fixed.

CAUTION To prevent damage to the bonnet and the wiper arms, only leave them in the service position.

Before driving, always lower the wiper arms.

Rain sensor*

Fig. 70 Windscreen wip- er lever: adjusting the rain sensor A

Fig. 71 Rain sensor sen- sitive surface

The rain sensor controls the frequency of the windscreen wiper intervals, depending on the amount of rain . The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be adjusted manually. Manual wipe page 98.

Move the lever to the required position Fig. 70:

101Lights and visibility

Rain sensor off.

Rain sensor on; automatic wipe if necessary.

Setting sensitivity level of rain sensor

Set control to the right: highly sensitive.

Set control to the left: less sensitive.

When the ignition is switched off and then back on, the rain sensor stays on and starts operating again when the windscreen wipers are in position 1

and the vehicle is travelling at more than 4 km/h (2 mph).

Rain sensor modified behaviour

Possible causes of faults and mistaken readings on the sensitive surface Fig. 71 of the rain sensor include:

Damaged blades: A film of water on the damaged blades may lengthen the activation time, reduce the washing intervals or result in a fast and con- tinuous wipe.

Insects: insects on the sensor may trigger the windscreen washer.

Salt on roads: in winter, salt spread in the roads may cause an extra long wipe when the windscreen is almost dry.

Dirt: dry dust, wax, coating on glass (Lotus effect) or traces of detergent (car wash) may reduce the effectiveness of the rain sensor or make it react more slowly, later or not at all.

Cracked windscreen: the impact of a stone will trigger a single wipe cy- cle with the rain sensor on. Next the rain sensor detects the reduction in the sensitive surface area and adapts accordingly. The behaviour of the sensor will vary with the size of the damage caused by the stone.

WARNING

The rain sensor may not detect enough rain to switch on the wipers.

If necessary, switch on the wipers manually when water on the wind- screen obstructs visibility.

0

1

A

Note Clean the sensitive surface of the rain sensor regularly and check the blades for damage Fig. 71 (arrow).

To remove wax and coatings, we recommend a window cleaner contain- ing alcohol.

Changing windscreen wiper blades

Fig. 72 Changing the front wiper blades

Fig. 73 Changing the rear wiper blade

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

102 Lights and visibility

The windscreen wiper blades are supplied as standard with a layer of graph- ite. This layer is responsible for ensuring that the wipe is silent. If the graph- ite layer is damaged, the noise of the water as it is wiped across the wind- screen will be louder.

Check the condition of the wiper blades regularly. If the wipers scrape across the glass they should be changed if they are damaged, or cleaned if they are dirty .

Damaged wiper blades should be replaced immediately. These are available from qualified workshops.

Lifting and unfolding the wiper arms

The wiper arm may only be lifted at the point where it is fastened to the blade.

For windscreen wipers, please note: the wiper should be in service position before unfolding it page 98.

Cleaning windscreen wiper blades

Lifting and unfolding the wiper arms.

Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the windscreen wiper blades.

If the blades are very dirty, a sponge or damp cloth may be used .

Changing the windscreen wiper blades

Lifting and unfolding the wiper arms.

Hold down the release button Fig. 72 1 while gently pulling the blade in the direction of the arrow.

Fit a new wiper blade of the same length and design on to the wiper arm and hook it into place.

Rest the wiper arms back onto the windscreen.

Changing the rear wiper blade

Lift and unfold the wiper arm.

Pull the wiper blade out of its mounting on the wiper arm Fig. 73 (ar- row A ).

Hold down the release button Fig. 73 1 while gently pulling the blade in the direction of the arrow B . This may require some strength.

Insert a new blade of the same length and type in the wiper arm in the opposite direction to the arrow Fig. 73 B and click into place. This fea- ture is operational when the knob is in position (arrow A ).

Replace the wiper arm on the rear window.

WARNING

Worn or dirty wiper blades reduce visibility and increase the risk of acci- dent and serious injury.

Always replace damaged or worn blades or blades which do not clean the windscreen correctly.

CAUTION Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers could scratch the glass.

If products containing solvents, rough sponges or sharp objects are used to clean the blades, the graphite layer will be damaged.

Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint thinner or similar products to clean the windows.

103Lights and visibility

Checking and topping up the windscreen washer reservoir

Fig. 74 In the engine compartment: wind- screen washer reservoir top

Check the water level in the windscreen washer reservoir regularly and top up as required.

Open the bonnet page 251.

The washer reservoir is marked with the symbol on the lid Fig. 74.

Check there is enough water in the reservoir.

To top up, mix water with a window cleaner recommended by SEAT . Please follow the instructions for use found on the packaging.

In cold weather, a special antifreeze should also be added to prevent the water from freezing .

Reservoir capacity

The reservoir holds approximately 3.0 litres; in vehicles with headlight washer, it is approximately 7.0 litres.

WARNING

Never mix an unsuitable antifreeze or other similar additives with the windscreen washer water. A greasy layer may be formed on the wind- screen which will impair visibility.

Use clean water with a window cleaner recommended by SEAT.

If necessary, add a suitable antifreeze to the water in the reservoir.

CAUTION Do not mix cleaning products recommended by SEAT with other prod- ucts. This could lead to flocculation and may block the windscreen washer jets.

When topping up service fluids, make absolutely certain that you fill the fluids into the correct reservoirs. Using the wrong fluids could cause serious malfunctions and engine damage!

Rear vision mirror

Introduction

WARNING

The automatic anti-dazzle rear vision mirror contains an electrolytic fluid which may leak if the mirror is broken. This could cause irritation to the skin, eyes and respiratory organs.

The electrolytic fluid may cause irritation to the skin, eyes and respi- ratory organs, particularly in individuals suffering from asthma or other illnesses. Make sure that adequate quantities of fresh air enter and leave the vehicle if it is not possible to open all the doors and windows.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

104 Lights and visibility

WARNING (Continued)

If the electrolyte comes into contact with eyes or skin, wash the area for at least 15 minutes with plenty of water, and seek medical advice.

If the electrolyte comes into contact with shoes or clothing, wash the area for at least 15 minutes with plenty of water. Wash shoes and cloth- ing before wearing them again.

If the electrolytic fluid is swallowed, wash your mouth with plenty of water for at least 15 minutes. Do not try to provoke vomiting unless rec- ommended by a Doctor. Seek medical advice immediately.

CAUTION In the event that an automatic anti-dazzle rear vision mirror breaks, an elec- trolyte fluid may leak. This liquid attacks plastic surfaces. Therefore, it should be cleaned as fast as possible with a damp sponge or similar.

Rear vision mirror

Fig. 75 Manual anti-daz- zle function for rear vi- sion mirror

Fig. 76 Automatic anti- dazzle function for rear vision mirror

The driver should always adjust the rear vision mirror to permit adequate visibility through the rear window.

Manual anti-dazzle function for interior rear vision mirror

Basic position: point the lever at the bottom of the mirror forwards.

Pull the lever to the back to select the anti-dazzle function Fig. 75.

Automatic anti-dazzle function for interior mirror

Legend for the Fig. 76:

Control lamp

Control

Light incidence sensor

This function can be activated and deactivated by pressing the rear vision mirror switch Fig. 76 2 . When it is activated, the warning lamp lights up

1 .

When the ignition is on, the sensor 3 automatically moves the rear vision mirror to the anti-dazzle position depending upon the incidence of the light from behind.

The automatic anti-dazzle function is deactivated when reverse gear is en- gaged or the interior or reading lights are on.

1

2

3

105Lights and visibility

Note If the incidence of the light on the sensor is obstructed or fully blocked, e.g. by the sun blinds, the rear vision mirror with automatic anti-dazzle function will not operate correctly.

Exterior mirrors

Fig. 77 In the driver door: exterior mirror con- trols

Turn the knob to the required position:

Electric folding exterior mirrors .

Switch on the exterior mirror heating This only heats up if the ambient temperature is less than +20 C (+68 F).

Adjust the left-hand exterior mirror by turning the knob for- wards, backwards, to the left or to the right.

Adjust the right-hand exterior mirror by turning the knob for- wards, backwards, to the left or to the right.

Zero position. Exterior mirror unfolded, exterior mirror heating off, adjustment of exterior mirror not possible.

Synchronised mirror adjustment

In the Settings - Convenience menu, select whether or not the mirrors should move in synchronisation page 56.

Turn the knob to position L.

Adjust the left-hand exterior mirror. The right exterior mirror will be ad- justed at the same time (synchronised).

If necessary the right exterior mirror adjustment may need correcting. Turn the control to position R.

Automatic anti-dazzle exterior mirror, driver side

The automatic anti-dazzle exterior mirror is controlled in the same way as the automatic anti-dazzle rear vision mirror page 104.

Store the reverse settings for the passenger exterior mirror

Select the vehicle key in which the setting is to be stored.

Use this key to unlock the vehicle.

Connect the automatic parking brake.

Switch the ignition on.

Move the gear lever to neutral.

In the menu Settings - Convenience activate the function Mirror adjust- ment.

Select reverse gear.

Adjust the front passenger side exterior mirror so that you can see, for example, the kerb area.

The new position of the mirror will be stored automatically and allocated to the vehicle key that was used to unlock the vehicle. For vehicles with seat memory, please see page 110.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

106 Lights and visibility

Activating the passenger exterior mirror settings

Turn the exterior mirror knob to position R.

With the ignition switched on, select reverse gear.

The stored position of the passenger exterior mirror for reverse gear is deleted when driving forwards at 15 km/h (9 mph), or if the knob is turned from position R to another position.

WARNING

Fold and unfold the exterior mirror, taking care to avoid injuries.

Only fold or unfold the exterior mirror when there is no-one in the way of the mirror.

When moving the mirror, take care not to trap fingers between the mirror and the mirror bracket.

WARNING

Failure to correctly estimate the distance of the vehicle behind could lead to serious accident.

Rear-view convex or aspheric mirrors increase the field of vision, how- ever objects appear smaller and further away in the mirrors.

The use of these mirrors to estimate the distance to the next vehicle when changing lane is imprecise and could result in serious accident.

If possible, use the rear vision mirror to estimate distances to vehi- cles behind you or in other circumstances.

Make sure that the rear visibility is adequate.

CAUTION Before entering a car wash, always ensure that the exterior mirrors are correctly folded in.

Electrically-folding exterior mirrors should not be folded and unfolded mechanically as this may damage the electrical operation.

For the sake of the environment The exterior mirror heating should be switched off when it is no longer nee- ded. Otherwise, it is an unnecessary fuel waste.

Note The exterior mirror heating initially heats up with a high power, after two minutes the heat will depend upon the ambient temperature.

In the event of faults, the electric exterior mirrors can be adjusted man- ually by pressing the edge of the mirror surface.

107Seats and storage

Seats and storage

Seat adjustment

Mechanical controls on the front seat

Fig. 78 Front left seat controls

The controls are mirrored for the front right-hand seat.

Mechanically and electrically adjusted controls can be combined on the seat.

Fig. 78 Function Necessary operations

1 Moving the head re- straint backwards or for- wards.

Pull the lever and move the seat for- wards. The front seat must be engag- ed when the lever is released!

2 Adjusting the lumbar support*.

Turn the lever.

Fig. 78 Function Necessary operations

3 Adjusting the seat back- rest angle.

Turn the wheel.

4 Adjusting the seat height.

Pull the lever up or push down (sev- eral times if necessary) from its home position.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

108 Seats and storage

Electrical controls on the front seat*

Fig. 79 Adjusting the front left seat forwards or backwards, the height, the seat angle and the front seat backrest

Fig. 80 Adjusting the lumbar support

The controls are mirrored for the front right-hand seat.

Mechanically and electrically adjusted controls can be combined on the seat.

Fig. 79 Press the control in the direction of the arrow:

A

1 Move the seat backwards or forwards.

2 and 3 Raise or lower the seat.

2 or 3 Adjust the seat angle.

B Forwards or backwards.

Adjust the seat backrest angle.

Fig. 80 Press the corresponding area of the switch:

1 or 2 Adjust the curve of the lumbar support.

3 or 4 Adjust the height of the lumbar support.

WARNING

Using the front electric seats in a careless or uncontrolled manner may lead to severe injuries.

The front seats can also be electrically adjusted when the ignition is switched off. Never leave children or disabled people alone in the vehicle.

In the event of an emergency, stop electrical adjustment by pressing any button.

CAUTION So as not the damage the electrical components of the front seats, do not kneel on the seats or apply specific pressure to one point of the seat or seat backrest.

Note It may not be possible to electrically adjust the seat if the vehicle battery is very low.

Seat adjustment is stopped when the engine is started.

109Seats and storage

Adjusting the rear seats

Fig. 81 Adjusting rear seats

Fig. 81 Function Necessary operations

1 Adjusting the seat backrest angle.

Pull the lever and adjust the seat backrest to the required position . The seat backrest must be en- gaged when the lever is released! There is a handle instead of the lever on the third row of seats and on the central seat of the second row. It is used in the same manner as the lev- er.

2

On the second row of seats only: Moving the seat backwards or forwards.

Pull the lever and move the seat for- wards or backwards. The seat must be engaged when the lever is re- leased!

CAUTION Tilting the seat backrest of the second row of seats fully back could dam- age the luggage compartment tray. Remove the tray before adjusting the seat backrest.

Objects in the luggage compartment could cause damage when moving the rear seats forwards or backwards.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

110 Seats and storage

Seat functions

Seat heating*

Fig. 82 Detailed view of the centre console: front seat heating controls, here with the second temperature level set

Fig. 83 Detailed view of the centre console: con- trols for the front seat heating in vehicles equipped with Climatron- ic

The seat cushions can be heated electrically when the ignition is switched on. The backrest is also heated in some versions.

Switch off seat heating if there is nobody in the seat.

Function Action Fig. 82, Fig. 83

Activate Press button . Seat heating is switched on fully.

Adjusting the heating output

Keep pressing button until the required intensi- ty is set.

Deactivating Keep pressing button until all of the lights are switched off Fig. 82, Fig. 83.

WARNING

Inappropriate use of the seat functions can cause severe injuries.

Assume the proper sitting position before your trip and remain in it throughout. This also applies to the other occupants.

Only adjust the seat position memory when the vehicle is stationary.

Only switch the lumbar massage function on and off when the vehicle is stationary.

Keep hands, fingers, feet and other limbs away from the seat operat- ing and adjustment radius.

WARNING

People whose pain and temperature threshold has been affected by some kind of medication, paraplegia or chronic illness (e.g. diabetes) may sus- tain burns to the back, buttocks and legs from use of the seat heating that may lead to a long healing process or that may never completely heal. Seek medical advice if you have doubts regarding your health.

People with a limit pain and temperature threshold must never use seat heating.

111Seats and storage

CAUTION To avoid damaging the heating elements of the seat heating, please do not kneel on the seat or apply sharp pressure at a single point to the seat cushion and backrest.

Liquids, sharp objects and insulating materials on the seat could dam- age the seat heating.

In the event of smells, switch off the seat heating immediately and have the unit inspected by a specialised workshop.

For the sake of the environment The seat heating should remain on only when needed. Otherwise, it is an unnecessary fuel waste.

Seat with position memory*

Fig. 84 Memory buttons on the outside of the driver seat

Memory buttons

Individual settings for the driver seat and the exterior mirror can be as- signed to each memory button.

Storing exterior mirror settings for driving forwards

Connect the automatic parking brake.

Move the gear lever to neutral.

Switch the ignition on.

Adjust the front seat and the exterior mirrors.

Keep the SET button held down for more than one second Fig. 84.

Press the required memory button for the following 10 seconds. An au- dible warning confirms the settings have been stored.

Storing front passenger exterior mirror settings for driving in reverse gear

Connect the automatic parking brake.

Move the gear lever to neutral.

Switch the ignition on.

Press the required memory button.

Select reverse gear.

Adjust the front passenger side exterior mirror so that you can see, for example, the kerb area.

The new position of the mirror will be stored automatically and allocated to the vehicle key that was used to unlock the vehicle.

Activating exterior mirror settings

With the driver door open and the ignition turned off, push the memory button of the corresponding door briefly.

OR: With the ignition switched on, hold down the corresponding memo- ry button until the memorised position is reached.

To activate the memory function of the vehicle key

Important: a position must be memorised in the memory.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

112 Seats and storage

Open the driver-side door.

Press and hold any memory button.

Within the following three seconds, push the button to open the vehi- cle on the vehicle key. An audible warning confirms the settings have been activated.

Adjusting the wing mirrors for driving and assigning driver seat settings to a vehicle key

Activate the memory function of the vehicle key

Adjust the front seat and the exterior mirrors.

Lock the vehicle. The settings are assigned to the vehicle key.

To deactivate the memory function of the vehicle key

Important: a position must be memorised in the memory.

Press and hold the SET button.

Within the following ten seconds, push the button on the vehicle key to open the vehicle. An audible warning confirms the settings have been deactivated.

Initialising the seat position memory

The position memory system must be reset if, for example, the driver seat has been changed.

Resetting deletes all memories and assignments for the seat with position memory. The memory buttons can then be reprogrammed and the vehicle keys re-assigned.

Open the driver door and do not get into the vehicle.

Operating the seat settings from outside the vehicle.

Move the angle of the seat backrest completely forwards.

Release the control to set the angle and then press again until an audi- ble warning is heard.

Note The front passenger side exterior mirror automatically changes from the po- sition stored for reversing as soon as the vehicle moves forward at a speed of at least 15 km/h (9 mph) or when the gear selection lever is changed to a position other than R.

Convenient entry function for the third row of seats

Fig. 85 Second row of seats: convenient entry function controls

The outer seats of the second row can be folded down to make it easier to get in and out of the third row of seats.

Folding down a second-row seat.

If necessary, open the belt loop and wind up the seat belt by hand.

If necessary, remove the side head restraint of the integrated child seat page 41.

If necessary, raise the armrests.

Remove any objects located in the footwell of the second row of seats, where applicable .

113Seats and storage

Push the head restraint down as far as it will go page 9.

Push the lever Fig. 85 1 forwards and fold the seat backrest of the rear seat. The seat can still be moved forwards when rear seat is folded completely forwards .

Always take care when entering and leaving the vehicle .

Repositioning a second-row seat.

Lift the seat backrest of the rear seat in an upright position. The entire seat folds backwards .

Make sure that the rear seat is securely engaged so that the seat belts can provide proper protection in the rear seats. The red mark Fig. 85 2

should no longer be visible in Folding down rear seats to create load space on page 121.

Emergency exit function

If the lever Fig. 85 1 does not work, e.g. after an accident, the seats on the second row can be folded forwards from the third row to allow vehicle occupants in the third row of seats to exit the vehicle .

Pull handle Fig. 85 3 back and fold the seat backrest of the rear seat. The complete rear seat folds forward .

WARNING

Careless or uncontrolled use of the convenient entry assistant may result in severe injury and accident.

Never use the convenient entry function when the vehicle is in mo- tion.

Avoid trapping or damaging the seat belt when folding the rear seats back.

Keep your hands, fingers, feet and other body parts out of the hinges and the seat locking mechanism when folding and unfolding.

WARNING (Continued)

Mats or other objects can be caught in the hinges of the seat backr- ests or rear seat. This could prevent the seat backrest from locking safely when positioned upright.

All seat backrests must engage correctly for the seat belts on the rear seats to work properly. When the seat backrest of an occupied seat is not correctly locked in place, the passenger can be thrust forward with the seat backrest in case of sudden braking, sudden manoeuvres or an acci- dent.

A red mark on the side of the seat Fig. 85 2 indicates that the seat backrest is not engaged. The mark is no longer visible when the seat backrest is correctly engaged.

If the seat backrest or seat are folded down and are not correctly locked in place, no passenger should use them.

When getting in or out, never lean or hold onto the folded seat on the second row of seats.

WARNING

If child seats are fitted to all the seats in the second row then it is possi- ble that the seats of this row cannot be folded down from the third row of seats in case of an accident. In case of an emergency, passengers in the third row of seats will not be able to leave the vehicle and may require assistance.

Child seats should not occupy all the seats of the second row if other passengers are to occupy the third row of seats.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

114 Seats and storage

CAUTION Before folding down the rear seat backrest to return it to its position, ad- just the front seats so that the head restraints and seat backrests do not hit each other when folding and unfolding.

Any objects located in the footwell of the second row of seats may be damaged on folding the rear seat forwards. Remove any objects before fold- ing the seat down.

Folding the seat backrest of the front passenger seat*

Fig. 86 Folding the seat backrest of the front pas- senger seat

Fig. 87 Unlocking the folding seat backrest of the front passenger seat

The seat backrest of the front passenger seat can be folded and locked hori- zontally.

The front passenger front airbag must be disabled page 27 if objects are being transported on the folded front passenger seat.

Folding the seat backrest of the front passenger seat

Remove any objects from the front passenger seat cushion .

Adjust the front passenger seat to its lowest position page 9.

Push the head restraint down as far as it will go page 9.

Unlock the front passenger seat backrest in the direction of the arrow Fig. 86 1 .

Fold the front passenger backrest forwards in the direction of the arrow Fig. 86 2 until it is horizontal.

The seat backrest of the front passenger seat must engage safely in its folded position.

115Seats and storage

Lifting the seat backrest of the front passenger seat

Check that there are no objects or parts of the body in the hinge area.

Lift the seat backrest of the front passenger seat by first unlocking it again Fig. 87.

Lift the seat backrest of the front passenger seat until it is upright. The seat backrest must be engaged.

The upright seat backrest of the front passenger seat must safely en- gage.

WARNING

Folding and lifting the seat backrest of the front passenger seat uncon- trollably or without paying attention may lead to severe injuries.

Only fold and lift the seat backrest of the front passenger seat when the vehicle is stationary.

While the seat backrest of the front passenger seat is folded, the front airbag must remain disabled and the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF light on.

Keep your hands, fingers, feet and other body parts out of the hinges and the seat locking mechanism when folding and unfolding.

Mats or other objects can be caught in the hinges of the seat backrest of the front passenger seat. This could prevent the seat backrest from locking safely when positioned upright.

The upright seat backrest of the front passenger seat must engage. If the seat backrest of the front passenger seat is not locked, it may sud- denly move and cause severe injuries.

WARNING

Seat anchors and hinges exposed when the seat backrest of the front passenger seat is folded may lead to severe injuries in the event of an ac- cident or sudden braking.

Never carry people or children on the front passenger seat when the seat backrest is folded.

When the seat backrest of the front passenger seat is folded, only the outer seat behind the driver on the second row of seats may be occupied. This also applies to children sitting in a child seat.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

116 Seats and storage

Head restraints

Adjusting the head restraints

Fig. 88 A: Adjust the head restraints with no possibility of lengthways direction ad- justment, B: Adjust the head restraints with lengthways direction adjustment

Fig. 89 Adjust the head restraints in the second or third row of seats

All seats are equipped with a head restraint.

Adjusting height

Raise the head restraint in the direction of the arrow or lower it Fig. 88 or Fig. 89 1 with the button pressed .

The head restraint must engage securely in position. There are three possible positions on the second row of seats and two possible positions on the third row of seats.

Adjusting the front head restraints

Push the head restraint forward in the direction of the arrow or backward Fig. 88 1 B with the button pressed.

The head restraint must engage securely in position.

Correct adjustment of head restraints

Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same level as the top of your head, or as close as possible to the same level as the top of your head and under no circumstances below eye level. Keep the back of your neck as close as possible to the head restraint.

Adjusting the head restraint for short people

Lower the head restraint completely, even if your head is below its upper edge. When the head restraint is at its lowest, it is possible that a small gap remains between it and the seat backrest.

Adjusting the head restraint for tall people

Raise the head restraint completely.

WARNING

Travelling with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted in- creases the risk of severe or fatal injuries in the event of accidents and sudden braking or manoeuvres.

Always fit and adjust the head restraint properly whenever a person is occupying a seat.

117Seats and storage

WARNING (Continued)

All vehicle occupants must correctly adjust the head restraint accord- ing to their height to reduce the risk of back injuries in the event of an accident. The upper edge of the head restraint must be as close as possi- ble to the same level as the top of your head and under no circumstances below eye level. Keep the back of your neck as close as possible to the head restraint.

Never adjust the head restraint while the vehicle is in motion.

Removing and fitting the head restraints

Fig. 90 A: Fitting the head restraints with no possibility of longitudinal adjustment, B: Fitting the head restraints with lengthways direction adjustment

Fig. 91 Fitting the head restraints in the second or third row of seats

All seats are equipped with a head restraint.

Removing the front head restraints in vehicles without the lengthways direction adjustment of the head restraints

If necessary, adjust the seat backrest so that the head restraint can be fitted.

Push the head restraint up as far as it will go .

Pull out the head restraint pressing the button completely Fig. 90 1

A.

Fitting the front head restraints in vehicles without the lengthways direction adjustment of the head restraints

Correctly place the head restraint into the guides on the seat backrest and insert it.

Completely press the button 1 A and push the head restraint down- wards.

Adjust the head restraint according to the correct seat position and se- cure it page 116.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

118 Seats and storage

Removing the front head restraints in vehicles with the lengthways direction adjustment of the head restraints

If necessary, adjust the seat backrest so that the head restraint can be fitted.

Push the head restraint up and backward as far as it will go .

Place a flat object, e.g. a plastic card 2 B, on both sides between the seat backrest cover and the end protector of the seat backrest retaining bar and unlock the retaining bars with a little pressure.

Completely pull out the head restraint.

Fitting the front head restraints in vehicles with the lengthways direction adjustment of the head restraints

Pull out the two retaining bars from the head restraint as far as possible.

Correctly place the head restraint into the guides on the seat backrest and insert it.

Push the head restraint down as far as possible until the two retaining bars are secured.

Adjust the head restraint according to the correct seat position and se- cure it page 116.

Removing the head restraints from the second and third row of seats

Fold the seat backrest of the rear seat forwards page 119.

Push the head restraint up as far as it will go .

Pull out the head restraint Fig. 91 1 with the button pressed.

Fold the seat backrest of the rear seat backwards until it is engaged.

Installing the head restraints for the second and third row of seats

Fold the seat backrest of the rear seat forwards page 119.

Insert the head restraint into the guides on the seat backrest.

Push the head restraint down while pressing the button 1 .

Fold the seat backrest of the rear seat backwards until it is engaged.

Adjust the head restraint to the correct position page 116.

WARNING

Travelling with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted in- creases the risk of severe or fatal injuries in the event of accidents and sudden braking or manoeuvres.

Always fit and adjust the head restraint properly whenever a person is occupying a seat.

Refit any removed head restraints immediately so that passengers are properly protected.

CAUTION On removing and fitting the head restraint, make sure the head restraint does not hit the interior roof of the vehicle or the seat backrest of the front seat. This could damage the interior roof and other parts of the vehicle.

Centre armrest

Fig. 92 Front centre arm- rest

To lift the central armrest, lift it upwards in the direction of the arrow Fig. 92, through all positions.

119Seats and storage

To lower the centre armrest, pull it downwards. Then lower the centre arm- rest.

WARNING

The centre armrest may limit the freedom of movement of the driver's arm and cause a serious accident.

Keep the centre armrest compartments closed while the vehicle is in motion.

The centre armrest is not designed for children to sit on! Sitting in this incorrect position can cause severe injuries.

Loading luggage compartment

Introduction

Always transport heavy loads in the luggage compartment and place the seat backs in a vertical position. Always use the fastening rings with suita- ble rope or straps. Never overload the vehicle. Both the carrying capacity as well as the distribution of the load in the vehicle have effects on the driving behaviour and braking ability .

WARNING

When the vehicle is not in use or being watched, always lock the doors and the rear lid to reduce the risk of serious injury or death.

Do not leave children unwatched, especially when the boot lid is open. Children could climb into the luggage compartment, close the rear lid from inside and be unable to escape themselves. This could lead to serious injury or death.

WARNING (Continued)

Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle.

Never transport people in the luggage compartment.

WARNING

Unsecured or incorrectly secured objects can cause serious injury in case of a sudden manoeuvring or breaking or in case of an accident. This is es- pecially true when objects are struck by a detonating airbag and fired through the vehicle interior. To reduce the risks, please note the follow- ing:

Secure all objects in the vehicle. Always keep equipment and heavy objects in the luggage compartment.

Always secure objects with suitable rope or straps so that they can- not enter the areas around the front or side airbags in case of sudden braking or an accident.

While driving, always keep object compartments closed.

Do not place hard, heavy or sharp objects inside the vehicle interior, in open storage compartments, the rear shelf or on the dash panel.

Remove hard, heavy and sharp objects from clothes and pockets in- side the vehicle and store securely.

WARNING

The transport of heavy object changes vehicle handling and increases braking distance. Heavy loads that have not been stored or secured cor- rectly could cause loss of control and result in serious injury.

The vehicle handling changes when transporting heavy objects due to a change in the centre of gravity.

Distribute the load as uniformly and as low down on the vehicle as possible.

Store heavy objects in the luggage compartment as far from the rear axle as possible.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

120 Seats and storage

CAUTION Hard objects on the rear shelf could chafe the wires of the heating ele- ment and antenna of the rear window and cause damage.

The side window antenna could be damaged due to chafing from ob- jects.

Note The ventilating slits between the heated rear window and the shelf must not be covered so that used air can escape from the vehicle.

Folding down rear seats to create load space

Fig. 93 Second row of seats: folding rear seat A, rear seat as load space B

Fig. 94 Third row of seats: fold down the rear seat to load A then return to position B

Each rear seat can fold down individually to extend the luggage compart- ment.

Folding the seats in the second row of seats for loading

If necessary, open the belt loop and wind up the seat belt by hand.

If necessary, remove the head restraints from the integrated child seats then reinstall them page 41.

If necessary, raise the armrests.

Remove objects from the footwell in front of and behind the rear seat .

Move the rear seat all the way back.

Push the head restraint down as far as it will go page 9.

In the middle seat, close the drinks carrier in the rear of the centre con- sole, if necessary.

Pull lever Fig. 93 1 upwards and fold the seat backrest forwards. The complete rear seat folds forward .

Fold the seat backrest forwards until it locks into the load surface posi- tion Fig. 93 B.

121Seats and storage

If necessary, pull on the lever Fig. 94 2 to move the seat to the re- quired position.

When the seat is folded down, no adults or children should travel in it .

Folding the seats in the third row of seats for loading

If necessary, open the belt loop and wind up the seat belt by hand.

Open the rear lid.

Push the head restraint down as far as it will go page 9.

Remove objects from the footwell in front of and behind the rear seat .

Remove objects from the space below the rear seat.

Remove the attachment elements and supports for the net from the rail system.

Pull lever Fig. 94 1 upwards and fold the seat backrest forwards. The rear seat folds forward and the cushion also moves forward.

Fold the seat tray forward on top of the folded seat.

When the seat is folded down, no adults or children should travel in it .

Putting the seats in the second row back in place

Pull lever Fig. 93 1 upwards and place the seat backrests in the verti- cal position. The entire seat folds backwards.

Pull on the rear seats and the seat backrest to ensure that they are cor- rectly locked in place and that the seat belt protection is guaranteed for rear seat passengers.

Putting the seats in the third row back in place

Open the rear lid.

Pull on the handle Fig. 94 2 to put the seat tray back in position.

Pull on the handle Fig. 94 3 . The entire seat folds backwards.

Press on the seat tray in the seat backrest until it is held in position by its magnets.

Open the sliding door.

Put the seat backrest into position and press firmly until it clicks into place.

Pull on the rear seats and the seat backrest to ensure that they are cor- rectly locked in place and that the seat belt protection is guaranteed for rear seat passengers.

WARNING

Folding and lifting the rear seats carelessly without paying attention could cause serious injury.

Never fold or lift the seats while driving.

Do no trap or damage seat belts when raising the seat backrest.

Keep your hands, fingers, feet and other body parts out of the hinges and the seat locking mechanism when folding and unfolding.

Mats or other objects can be caught in the hinges of the seat backr- ests or rear seat. This could prevent the seat or seat backrest from lock- ing securely in the vertical position.

All seat backrests must engage correctly for the seat belts on the rear seats to work properly. When the seat backrest of an occupied seat is not correctly locked in place, the passenger can be thrust forward with the seat backrest in case of sudden braking, sudden manoeuvres or an acci- dent.

No seat must be occupied if the seat backrest or seat is folded or not correctly engaged.

CAUTION Before folding the seat backrest of the rear seat, adjust the front seats so that the head restraint or seat backrest do not hit them when it is folded.

Objects placed in the footrest area in front of and behind the rear seats can be damaged when seats are folded down or put back into position. Re- move any objects in the way before folding seats down or repositioning them.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

122 Seats and storage

Objects placed in the moulding on the back of the third row of seats can be damaged when folding down the seats or putting them back into posi- tion. Remove any objects in the way before folding seats down or reposi- tioning them.

The attachment elements and supports for the net partition placed on the rail system can be damaged when folding down seats from the third row or putting them back into position and can also damage the seats them- selves. Before folding down or repositioning the seats, remove the attach- ment elements and supports for the net from the rail system.

Rear shelf*

Fig. 95 In the luggage compartment: rear shelf

Fig. 96 Remove the shelf supports A then put them away safely B.

The rear shelf can be fitted behind the second or third row of seats .

Opening the shelf

Pull the shelf handle Fig. 95 A backwards.

Release the shelf upwards by the side supports and guide it forward.

Closing the shelf

Pull the unfolded shelf evenly on the guide backwards.

Secure the shelf using the left and right side supports.

Installing the shelf behind the second row of seats

Place the shelf in its position in the side lining, left-hand side first.

Release the shelf in the direction of the arrow Fig. 95 B .

Insert the shelf into the right-hand support, pressing down.

Installing the shelf behind the third row of seats

Remove the shelf from the support in the side trim Fig. 96 A. To do this, press the shelf upwards (arrow) and remove it.

Open the compartment in the left-hand side rear trim page 131 and hook the shelf to the rear of the luggage compartment cover Fig. 96 B.

Close the rear left-hand side lining compartment.

123Seats and storage

Place the shelf in its position in the side lining, left-hand side first.

Press the shelf in the direction of the arrow Fig. 95 B .

Insert the shelf into the right-hand support, pressing down.

Removing the shelf

Release the shelf in the direction of the arrow Fig. 95 B and lift it in the direction of the arrow C .

Remove the shelf from the right-hand side support.

Installing the shelf behind the third row of seats: Cover the side trim supports using their covers.

Only with 5 places: Safely store the released shelf by placing it in the front section of the luggage compartment floor page 131.

WARNING

If the shelf is placed on one of the rear seats, this could cause serious injury in case of sudden braking or an accident.

Whenever it the third row seats are occupied, the shelf should be put behind this row.

WARNING

Unsecured or incorrectly secured objects or animals on the rear shelf could cause serious injuries in case of a sudden manoeuvre or braking or even an accident.

Do not leave hard, heavy or sharp objects (loose or in bags) on the rear shelf.

Never transport animals on the rear shelf.

Net partition*

Fig. 97 Unfold the net partition 1 then fold it again 2 and 3

Fig. 98 In the luggage compartment: Installing the net partition behind the second row of seats

The net partition can prevent objects in the luggage compartment entering the vehicle interior / the driver area.

First remove the net from its bag and unfold it.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

124 Seats and storage

Fold out the net partition

Fold out the support transversal rods Fig. 97 1 for the net partition fully in the direction of the arrow until you hear a click.

Installing the net partition behind the second row of seats

Hook in the net partition on the left-hand side roof support Fig. 98. To do this, guide the rod from up to down.

Hook in the net partition on the rear right-hand side roof support by pressing on the rod.

Secure the net partition hooks onto the straps in the front of the lug- gage compartment Fig. 98 then tighten them.

Installing the net partition behind the front seats

Hook in the net partition on the front left-hand side roof support Fig. 98. To do this, guide the rod from up to down.

Hook in the net partition on the rear right-hand side roof support by pressing on the rod.

Secure the hooks of the net partition to the attachment rings in the left and right hand side footwells on the second row of seats then tighten the straps.

Removing the net partition

Loosen the net partition straps.

Release the net partition hooks from the rings Fig. 98.

Hook the net partition on the rear right-hand side roof support Fig. 98 by pressing on the rod.

Unhook the net partition from the left-hand side roof support.

Folding in the net partition

Press on the release button Fig. 97 2 and fold the rod A in the di- rection of the arrow with the release button pressed.

Press on the release button Fig. 97 3 and fold the rod B in the di- rection of the arrow with the release button pressed.

Store the net partition securely in the vehicle.

WARNING

Loose objects in the vehicle interior can be violently thrown in case of a sudden manoeuvre or braking and especially in accidents causing seri- ous injury.

Ensure that the rods are correctly locked in place.

Even when net partition is correctly fitted, objects must be secured.

When driving with the net partition, no passengers should be behind it.

Fastening rings*

Fig. 99 In the luggage compartment: fastening rings

To the front and rear of the luggage compartment, there are fastening rings for securing objects Fig. 99 (arrows). On some models, the fastening rings are located at the far back of the lock carrier plate.

There are other fastening rings located to the left and right hand side of the second row footrests.

Some models of fastening rings must be lifted to use them.

125Seats and storage

WARNING

Unsuitable or damaged ropes or straps may be released in case of sud- den braking or an accident. As a result, objects may be fired through the vehicle interior causing serious injury or death.

Always use suitable ropes and straps in good condition.

Secure the ropes and straps to the fastening rings.

Loose objects in the luggage compartment can suddenly slide and change the way the vehicle handles.

Secure all objects, little and large.

Never secure a load that is too heavy for the fastening rings.

Never secure a child seat to the fastening rings.

Note The maximum load of the fastening rings is approximately 3.5 kN (3.57 Kp).

You can find suitable transport straps and load securing systems at a specialised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a Technical Service.

Rails and attachment system*

Fig. 100 In the luggage compartment: System in- cluding rails, adjustable attachment elements 1

and adjustable tighten- ing straps 2 .

The rails and attachment system consists of four rails, movable attachment elements, straps to be secured to the rails and a net with supports to cover baggage page 126. The rail and attachment system is designed to se- cure light objects. If the seats in the third row are to be occupied by passen- gers then attachment elements should never be placed in the rail area close to the seats .

Installing the attachment elements

Fit the attachment element with the tracks facing upwards Fig. 100 1

on the upper part of the guide and press downwards.

Move the attachment element to the desired position.

Always ensure that the attachment inserts into the guide system .

Removing the attachment elements

Remove the attachment element from the guide and pull downwards.

Securing a load

Pull the strap through the attachment element and secure the load .

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

126 Seats and storage

WARNING

In case of an accident or sudden braking, the attachment elements in the rail area close to the third row seats could injure seat occupants.

Whenever the seats on the third row are to be occupied, remove the attachment elements from the rails or move them along the rails so that they are located at one end.

WARNING

Movable attachment elements that are not secured correctly can be re- leased from the guide in case of sudden braking or accident. As a result, objects may be fired through the vehicle interior causing serious injury or death.

Always ensure that the movable attachment elements are correctly in- serted into the guides.

WARNING

Unsuitable or damaged ropes or straps may be released in case of sud- den braking or an accident. As a result, objects may be fired through the vehicle interior causing serious injury or death.

Always use the attachment straps of the rail and attachment system.

Secure the attachment straps firmly to the attachment elements.

Loose objects in the luggage compartment can suddenly slide and change the way the vehicle handles.

Secure all objects, little and large.

Never secure a child seat to the attachment elements.

CAUTION The attachment elements placed on the rail system can be damaged when folding down seats from the third row or putting them back into posi- tion and these can also damage the seats themselves. Before folding down or repositioning the seats, remove the attachment elements and supports for the net from the rail system.

Baggage net*

Fig. 101 Hook the baggage net A and use it as a bag B

Fig. 102 Release the baggage net

127Seats and storage

If the seats in the third row are to be occupied by passengers then attach- ment elements should never be placed on the rails close to the seats .

Installing the baggage net supports

Fit the baggage net support into the guide from the back and press downwards.

Move the baggage net support to the required position.

Always ensure that the net support inserts into the rail system .

Hooking the baggage net into the support

Place the attachment rod on the baggage net support Fig. 101 1 and ro- tate 90 to the left 2 . The red mark on the attachment rod should not be visible .

Using the net for bag type baggage

Fit the baggage net supports to each one of the upper rails.

Fit a movable baggage net attachment element to each one of the lower guides page 125.

Hook the baggage net into the supports.

Hook the baggage net attachment strap underneath into one of the mov- able attachment elements Fig. 101 B.

Join the baggage net supports to the upper rails as much as possible by pushing them.

Press the sides of the baggage net together so that they are held by the Velcro.

Using the baggage net to separate the luggage compartment

Fit the baggage net supports to each one of the upper rails.

Fit the baggage net supports to each one of the lower rails.

Hook the baggage net into the supports.

To release the baggage net

Rotate the attachment rod 90 to the right Fig. 102 1 until you can see the red mark on the rod. Pull the attachment rod upwards 2 .

Only with 5 places: After removing the baggage net, store it safely in the front compartment on the floor of the luggage compartment page 131.

Removing the baggage net supports

Remove the net attachment element from the rail and pull it out down- wards.

WARNING

In case of an accident or sudden braking, the attachment elements in the rail area close to the third row seats could injure seat occupants.

Whenever the seats on the third row are to be occupied, remove the attachment elements from the rails or move them along the rails so that they are located at one end.

WARNING

Baggage net supports that are not secured correctly can be released from the guide in case of the sudden braking or accident. As a result, objects may be fired through the vehicle interior causing serious injury or death.

Always ensure that the baggage net supports are correctly inserted into the rails; the red mark should not be visible.

Never secure a child seat to the baggage net supports.

CAUTION The supports for the net partition placed on the rail system can be dam- aged when folding down seats from the third row or putting them back into position and can also damage the seats themselves. Before folding down or repositioning the seats, remove the baggage net supports from the rail sys- tem.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

128 Seats and storage

Retaining hooks

Fig. 103 In the luggage compartment: retaining hooks

On the right-hand side of the luggage compartment, there are folding re- taining hooks Fig. 103 that can be used to secure light shopping bags.

Press the retaining hooks down Fig. 103 (arrow) and fold them.

Hook the bags in place.

After use, raise the hooks again.

WARNING

Never use these hooks to secure objects. In case of sudden braking or an accident, the hooks could break.

CAUTION The hooks can support a maximum of 2.5 kg (about 5 lbs).

Luggage net*

Fig. 104 In the luggage compartment: net used on secured baggage

The baggage net can be used to secure lighter items.

Hooking the baggage net into the luggage compartment floor

Hook the baggage net onto the fastening rings Fig. 104 1 and 2 .

Releasing the baggage net

The secured baggage net is taut .

Carefully unhook the baggage net hooks from the fastening rings Fig. 104 1 .

Carefully unhook the baggage net hooks from the fastening rings Fig. 104 2 .

129Seats and storage

WARNING

The elastic baggage net stretches when it is secured to the luggage com- partment fastening rings. The secured baggage net is taut. The hooks on the baggage net can cause injury if the net is incorrectly hooked or un- hooked.

Always ensure that the hooks do not suddenly release from the fas- tening rings when hooking or un-hooking.

Always keep your face and eyes protected at a safe distance to avoid injury should a hook slip while hooking or unhooking.

Always engage the hooks in the order given. If a baggage net hook springs back this can cause injury.

Roof carrier system*

Introduction

The vehicle roof has been designed to optimise aerodynamics. For this rea- son, conventional roof carrier systems cannot be secured to the roof rails anymore.

Given that the water drains have been incorporated into the roof for aerody- namic reasons, only the SEAT approved basic supports and roof carrier sys- tems can be used.

When should the roof carrier system be removed?

When it is not being used.

When the vehicle is being washed in a car wash.

When the vehicle height exceeds the maximum height (for example, in some garages).

WARNING

The risk of an accident is increased by transporting heavy or bulky loads on the roof, which affects the car's handling by shifting the centre of gravity and increasing susceptibility to cross winds.

Always secure loads correctly with suitable and undamaged attach- ment rope or straps.

Large, heavy, wide and flat loads negatively affect the vehicle aerody- namics, centre of gravity and handling.

Avoid brusque manoeuvres and sudden braking.

Adjust your speed and driving style to visibility, road, traffic and weather conditions.

CAUTION Always remove the roof carrier system from the roof before entering a car wash tunnel.

The height of your vehicle is changed by the installation of the roof carri- er and the load secured on it. Compare the vehicle height with the passage height, for example in underground car parks or when entering garage doors.

The roof antenna, the range of the panoramic sliding sunroof and the boot lid should not be affected by the roof carrier system and the load being transported.

Take extra care not to let the boot lid strike the roof load when opening.

For the sake of the environment The vehicle uses more fuel when the roof carrier system is fitted.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

130 Seats and storage

Securing the base supports and roof carrier system

Fig. 105 Attachment points for the base sup- ports and the roof carrier system

The mounts are the basis of a complete roof carrier system. Special fixtures must then be added in order to safely transport luggage, bicycles, skis, surf boards or boats on the roof. All these system components are available from a Technical Service.

Securing the base supports and roof carrier system

Always secure the base supports and roof carrier system correctly.

The roof carrier system must always be installed exactly according to the in- structions provided.

The position holes are located on the inside of the roof side rails Fig. 105.

WARNING

If the base supports and the roof carrier system are incorrectly fitted or used in an unsuitable manner, the entire system could break free causing accident and injury.

Always take the manufacturer assembly instructions into account.

WARNING (Continued)

Only use base supports and roof carrier systems that are not dam- aged and are correctly fitted.

The base support should only be fitted to the points indicated in the diagram Fig. 105.

Secure the base supports and roof carrier system correctly.

Check the screw fittings and attachments before driving and after a short distance. During each long journey, check the attachments during every break.

Always fit the roof carrier system correctly for wheels, skis and surf- boards, etc.

Never change or repair the basic supports or roof carrier system.

Note Read and take into account the instructions included with the roof carrier system fitted and keep them in the vehicle.

Loading the roof carrier system

Loads can only be correctly secured when the roof carrier system is correctly fitted .

Maximum authorised roof load

The maximum authorised roof load is 100 kg (about 220 lbs). The roof load includes the roof carrier system and the load being transported .

Always check the roof carrier system weight and the weight of the load to be transported and, if necessary, weigh them. Never exceed the maximum au- thorised roof load.

131Seats and storage

If you are using a roof carrier with a lower weight rating, you cannot trans- port the maximum roof load. Do not exceed the maximum weight limit for the roof carrier given in the fitting instructions.

Distributing a load

Uniformly distribute loads and secure them correctly .

Check attachments

After fitting the base supports and the roof carrier system, always check the attachments after a short trip or at regular intervals.

WARNING

Exceeding the maximum authorised roof load can result in accidents and/or vehicle damage.

Always observe the maximum authorised weight for the roof, the maximum authorised weight on the axles and the total maximum author- ised weight of the vehicle.

Never exceed the capacity of the roof carrier system even if this is less than the maximum authorised roof load.

Secure heavy items as far forward as possible and distribute the vehi- cle load uniformly.

WARNING

Loose and incorrectly secured loads can fall from the roof carrier system causing accidents and injury.

Always use suitable ropes and straps in good condition.

Always secure loads correctly.

Storage compartments

Introduction

Storage compartments must only be used to store light or small objects.

The front central armrest compartment houses the factory-fitted AUX-IN or multimedia (MEDIA-IN) connection sockets.

The factory-fitted CD changer is located in the left-hand storage compart- ment of the luggage compartment.

WARNING

In the event of sudden braking movements or turns, loose objects may be thrown around the vehicle interior. This could cause serious injuries to passengers and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

Do not transport animals or place hard, heavy or sharp objects inside the vehicle in: open storage compartments, dash panel, rear shelf, items of clothing or bags.

While driving, always keep object compartments closed.

WARNING

Objects falling into the driver's footwell could prevent use of the pedals. This could lead the driver to lose control of the vehicle, increasing the risk of a serious accident.

Make sure the pedals can be used at all times, with no objects rolling underneath them.

The floor mat should always be secured to the floor.

Never place other mats or rugs on top of the original mat supplied by the factory.

Make sure that no objects can fall into the driver's footwell while the vehicle is in motion.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

132 Seats and storage

CAUTION Objects on the shelf could chafe against the wires of the heating ele- ment in the heated rear window and cause damage.

Do not keep heat-sensitive objects, food or medicines inside the vehi- cle. Heat and cold could damage them or render them useless.

Light-transparent objects placed inside the vehicle, such as lenses, magnifying glasses or transparent suction caps on the windows, could con- centrate the sun's rays and cause damage to the vehicle.

Note The ventilating slits between the heated rear window and the shelf must not be covered so that used air can escape from the vehicle.

Spectacle case in the roof console

Fig. 106 On the roof console: Sunglasses stor- age compartment

To open, press and release the button Fig. 106 (arrow).

To close, press the cover upwards until it clicks into place.

To ensure the interior monitoring works correctly, the spectacle case must be closed when the vehicle is locked page 75.

Storage compartment on the roof console

Fig. 107 On the roof console: storage com- partment

To open press the button and release it Fig. 107.

To close, press the storage compartment upwards until it clicks into place.

To ensure the interior monitoring works properly, the storage compartments must be closed when the vehicle is locked page 75.

Compartment on the instrument panel*

Fig. 108 Storage com- partment on the dash panel

133Seats and storage

The storage compartment on the instrument panel may have a cover.

To open, press the button on the cover Fig. 108 (arrow).

To close, press the cover down until it clicks into place.

Compartment on the centre console

Fig. 109 Compartment in the front centre con- sole.

There is an open compartment on the centre console Fig. 109 in which there may be a 12 volt power socket page 141.

Compartment in the front central armrest

Fig. 110 Storage com- partment in the front cen- tral armrest.

To open, fully lift the central armrest in the direction of the arrow Fig. 110.

To close, lower the central armrest.

WARNING

The centre armrest may limit the freedom of movement of the driver's arm and cause a serious accident.

Keep the centre armrest compartments closed while the vehicle is in motion.

WARNING

The centre armrest is not designed for children to sit on!

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

134 Seats and storage

Card compartments*

Fig. 111 Centre console, lower section: card com- partment

At the bottom of the centre console there is a compartment Fig. 111 1

for coins, cards, car park tickets and similar items.

Note To avoid theft or use by others, do not use the compartment to store credit or ATM cards or similar.

Glove compartment

Fig. 112 Glove compart- ment

Fig. 113 Glove compart- ment open

Opening and closing the glove compartment

Unlock the glove compartment where necessary. The glove compartment is locked when the key slot is vertical.

Pull the lever to open Fig. 112.

Press the cover upwards to close.

Vehicle wallet compartment

The glove compartment is designed to store the vehicle documentation.

135Seats and storage

The vehicle on-board documentation wallet should always be kept in the glove compartment. Insert it in the glove box transversely.

Glove compartment cooling

There is an air vent Fig. 113 A on the rear panel which allows cooled air from the air conditioner (this must be connected) to enter the glove com- partment. Turn the air vent to open and close it.

WARNING

The risk of serious injuries in the event of an accident during a sudden braking manoeuvre or turn is increased if the glove compartment is left open.

Keep the glove compartment closed while the vehicle is in motion.

CAUTION For structural reasons, some model versions will have gaps behind the glove compartment into which small objects may fall. This could lead to strange noises and damage to the vehicle. You should therefore not keep very small objects in the glove compartment.

Storage compartments in the rear footwell*

Fig. 114 Storage com- partments in the footwell of the second row of seats

Move the mat to one side (where applicable).

To open, pull on the rear centre part of the cover Fig. 114 (arrow).

To close, press the cover down.

WARNING

Make sure children are properly belted in and correctly secured to avoid severe or fatal injuries while the vehicle is in motion.

If you are using a child seat with a base or foot, always install this base or foot correctly and safely.

If the vehicle has a storage compartment in the footwell before the last row of seats, this compartment cannot be used for its intended pur- pose; instead it must be filled with a special accessory so that the base or foot is correctly supported on top of the closed compartment and the child seat properly secured. If this compartment is not suitably secured

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

136 Seats and storage

WARNING (Continued)

when using a child seat with a base or foot then the compartment cover could rupture in an accident and the child will be ejected and suffer seri- ous injury.

Please read and observe the child seat manufacturer's handling in- structions.

Drawers*

Fig. 115 Drawer under the front seat

There may be a drawer below the front seats.

Opening and closing the drawer

To open, press the button on the drawer handle and pull the drawer out.

To close, push the drawer under the seat until it clicks into place.

WARNING

If the drawer is open it could obstruct use of the pedals. This could result in serious accident.

The drawers must remain closed while the vehicle is in motion. Other- wise, the drawer and any objects in it could fall into the driver's footwell and obstruct the pedals.

Folding table*

Fig. 116 Folding table on the front seat

Fold out the table by pulling on it Fig. 116 (arrow).

A drink holder is built into the folding table page 138.

To fold it back, push the folding table down as far as possible Fig. 116.

WARNING

The folding table must not be folded down while the vehicle is in motion to avoid the risk of injuries.

137Seats and storage

Portable waste bin*

Fig. 117 left sliding door trim: portable waste bin

The portable waste bin fits onto the bottle holder on the trim of the left- hand sliding door.

WARNING

Do not use the portable waste bin as an ashtray to avoid the risk of fire.

Other storage compartments

Fig. 118 In the luggage compartment: Side stor- age compartment

Fig. 119 Additional com- partments in the luggage compartment floor

Side compartments in the luggage compartment

There are other compartments Fig. 118 1 and 2 in the side of the lug- gage compartment. To open the compartment 1 , turn the catch clockwise. To open the compartment 2 , lift the cover. Compartment 1 contains the factory installed CD changer. Compartment cover 1 can store tray brackets securely.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

138 Seats and storage

Compartments in the luggage compartment floor

More storage compartments can be found in the luggage compartment floor.

Function Necessary operations

Open the rear compartment Fig. 119 4 :

Lift the rear of the luggage compart- ment floor using the handle.

Keeping the rear compartment open:

Move the hook at the rear right of the luggage compartment and hook the lug- gage compartment floor onto it page 119.

Closing the compartment: Push back the hook and push the rear of the luggage compartment floor 4

down.

Other storage compartments:

in the centre console, front and rear.

in the door trims, front and rear.

Coat hooks on the central door pillars and on the rear roof handles.

Bag hook in the luggage compartment page 119.

WARNING

Clothing hung on the coat hooks could restrict the driver's view and lead to serious accidents.

Hang the clothes from the hooks so that driver's view is not restric- ted.

The coat hook is suitable for light items of clothing. Never place heavy, hard or sharp objects in the bags.

CAUTION Keep the CD changer compartment closed while the vehicle is in motion to reduce vibrations that could damage the changer.

Note The first aid kit is located in the rear left compartment of the luggage com- partment.

Drink holders

Introduction

Bottle holders

There is a bottle holder in the open compartments in the driver and front passenger doors and in that of the sliding door.

WARNING

Improper use of the drink holders can cause injury.

Never place hot drinks in the drink holders. During sudden braking or driving manoeuvres, the hot drink could be spilled and lead to scalding.

Ensure that bottles and other object is dropped in the driver footwell, as it could get under the pedals and obstruct their working.

Never place heavy containers, food or other heavy objects in the drink holder. In the event of an accident, these heavy objects could be thrown around the vehicle interior and cause serious injuries.

WARNING

Closed bottles inside the vehicle could explode or crack due to the heat or the cold.

Never leave a closed bottle in the vehicle if the inside temperature is too high or too low.

139Seats and storage

CAUTION Do not leave open cans in the drink holders when the vehicle is in motion. They could spill during braking, for example, and cause damage to the vehi- cle and the electrical system.

Note The drink holders can be removed for cleaning.

Drink holders in front centre console

Fig. 120 Front centre console: drink holder

To open, move the cover backwards Fig. 120.

To close, move the cover forwards.

Drink holders, rear*

Fig. 121 Centre console, rear section: folding out the drink holder

Opening and closing the drink holder in the rear centre console

To open, move the drink holder downwards in the direction of the arrow Fig. 121.

To close, lift the drink holder.

The third row of seats has a drink holder in the side trim compartment on the rear left.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

140 Seats and storage

Ashtray and cigarette lighter*

Ashtray

Fig. 122 Front centre console: ashtray closed

There are ashtrays located on the front of the centre console Fig. 122 and on the rear lining of the rear door.

Opening and closing the ashtray

To open, lift the ashtray cover.

To close, push the ashtray cover down.

Emptying the ashtray

Remove the ashtray from the drink holder or lining of the door by pulling it upwards.

After emptying the ashtray, insert it from above into the drink holder or door lining.

WARNING

Undue use of the cigarette lighter may cause a fire or burns and other se- rious injuries.

Never put paper or other flammable objects in the ashtray.

Cigarette lighter

Fig. 123 Front centre console: lighter

Depending on the vehicle equipment, there may be a lighter to the front of the centre console Fig. 123 or in the compartment to the front of the cen- tre console.

Push the button on the cigarette lighter inwards with the ignition on Fig. 123.

Wait for the lighter to pop out slightly.

Pull out the cigarette lighter and light the cigarette on the glowing coil .

Replace the cigarette lighter in its insert.

WARNING

Undue use of the cigarette lighter may cause a fire or burns and other se- rious injuries.

The cigarette lighter must only be used to light cigarettes or similar.

Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. The cigarette lighter can be used when the ignition is switched on.

141Seats and storage

Note The cigarette lighter can also be used with the 12 Volt power socket page 141.

Power sockets

Introduction

Electrical equipment can be connected to the power sockets in the vehicle.

All connected appliances should be in perfect working order without any faults.

WARNING

Improper use of the power sockets or electrical devices could lead to a fire and cause serious injuries.

Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. The power sockets and equipment connected to them can be used when the ignition is switched on.

Should a connected electrical device overheat, switch it off and un- plug it immediately.

CAUTION To avoid damage to the vehicle's electrical system, never connect equip- ment that generates electrical current, such as solar panels or battery charg- ers, to the 12 Volt power sockets in order to charge the vehicle's battery.

Only use accessories with approved electromagnetic compatibility ac- cording to current regulations.

To avoid damage due to voltage variations, switch off all appliances con- nected to the 12 V power sockets before switching the ignition on or off and before starting the engine.

Never connect an appliance to the 12 Volt power socket that consumes more than the power indicated in watts. Exceeding the maximum power ab- sorption could damage the vehicle's electrical system.

For the sake of the environment Do not leave the engine running when the vehicle is at a standstill.

Note Using electrical appliances with the engine stopped and the ignition switched on will drain the battery.

Unshielded equipment can cause interference on the radio equipment and the vehicle's electrical system.

Interference can occur on the radio's AM waveband if electrical applian- ces are used near the rear window aerial.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

142 Seats and storage

Vehicle power sockets

Fig. 124 Centre console, rear section: 12 volt pow- er socket

Fig. 125 Rear centre console: 230 Volt Euro power socket

Depending on your vehicle's version, you may have a 12-volt power socket and/or a 230 volt power socket.

Maximum power consumption

Power socket Maximum power consumption

12 Volts 120 Watts

230 Volts 150 Watts (300 Watt peak)

The maximum capacity of each power socket must not be exceeded. The power consumption is indicated on the rating plate of each appliance.

Where two or more appliances are connected at the same time, the total rat- ing of all the connected devices must never exceed 190 Watts .

12 volt power socket

The 12 Volt power socket will only work with the ignition on.

Using electrical appliances with the engine stopped and the ignition switch- ed on will drain the battery. Therefore, electrical devices connected to the power socket must only be used when the engine is running.

To prevent voltage variations from causing damage, switch off the electrical consumer connected to the 12 Volt power socket before switching the igni- tion on or off and before starting the engine.

12 Volt power sockets can be found in the following locations in the vehicle:

Compartment in the centre of the centre console.

Compartment in the front centre console.

Storage compartment in the front central armrest.

Rear centre console Fig. 124.

At the rear right of the luggage compartment.

230 Volt Euro power socket*

The power socket only works when the engine is running .

Connecting an electrical appliance: Plug the device into the power socket as far as possible to unlock the built-in childproof lock. The current only flows when the childproof lock is unlocked.

LED on the power socket Fig. 125

Steady green light: The childproof lock is unlocked. The power socket can now be used.

Flashing red light: Faults (e.g. disconnection due to excess current or temperature).

143Seats and storage

Heat protection

The 230 Volt Euro power connector converter switches off automatically when a certain temperature is exceeded. This disconnect prevents overheat- ing in the event of an increase in power consumption of the connected ap- pliance and where the atmospheric temperature is too high. The inverter will switch on again automatically after it has cooled down. Appliances that are switched on and connected to the power socket will start up again. Therefore, switch off all electrical appliances connected to the power socket when the current converter switches off due to overheating.

WARNING

High voltage in the electrical installation!

Liquids must not be spilt over the power socket.

Do not plug adapters or extension cords into the 230 Volt Euro power connector. Otherwise, the built-in child safety device will switch off and the connector will become live.

Do not plug current conductors such as a knitting needle into the 230 Volt Euro power connector.

CAUTION Always follow the operating instructions for the appliances to be con- nected!

Never exceed the maximum power rating as this could damage the vehi- cle's general electrical system.

12 volt power socket:

Only use accessories with approved electromagnetic compatibility ac- cording to current regulations.

Never power the socket.

230 Volt Euro power socket:

Do not hang devices or plugs that are too heavy (e.g. a transformer) from the power socket.

Do not connect lamps which contain a neon tube.

Only plug appliances with a voltage that matches the power socket voltage into the power socket.

For devices that require a high start-up current, surge protection pre- vents them from switching on. In this case, unplug the device cable and try plugging it back in after around 10 seconds.

Note Some appliances may not work properly in the 230 Volt Euro power con- nector due to a lack of power (Watts).

The 230 Watt Euro power connector can be modified for 115 Watt appli- ances and vice versa. Consult a specialist shop for advice on accessories to adapt the connector. SEAT recommends visiting a Technical Service.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

144 Air conditioning

Air conditioning

Air conditioner

Introduction

Viewing Climatronic information

The factory-fitted radio or navigation system screen briefly displays informa- tion relating to Climatronic.

The units of temperature measurement is displayed on the factory-installed radio or navigation system and, depending on the vehicle equipment, can be set using the Configuration menu on the instrument panel.

WARNING

Reduced visibility through the windows increases the risk of serious acci- dents.

Ensure that all windows are free of ice and snow and that they are not fogged up preventing a clear view of everything outside.

The maximum heat output required to defrost windows quickly is only available when the engine has reached its normal running temperature. Only drive when you have good visibility.

Always ensure that you use the air conditioner and heated rear win- dow to maintain good visibility.

Never leave the air recirculation on for a long period of time. If the cooling system is switched off and air recirculation mode switched on, the windows can mist over very quickly, considerably limiting visibility.

Switch air recirculation mode off when it is not required.

WARNING

Stuffy or used air will increase fatigue and reduce driver concentration possibly resulting in a serious accident.

Never leave the fresh air fan turned off or use the air recirculation for long periods of time; the air in the vehicle interior will not be refreshed.

CAUTION Switch the air conditioner off if you think it may be broken. This will avoid additional damage. Have the air conditioner checked by a specialised workshop.

Repairs to the air conditioner require specialist knowledge and special tools. SEAT recommends visiting a Technical Service.

Do not smoke when air recirculation is switched on in vehicles with an air conditioner. The smoke taken in could lie on the cooling system vaporis- er and on the activated charcoal cartridge of the dust and pollen filter, lead- ing to a permanently unpleasant smell.

Note When the cooling system is turned off, air coming from the outside will not be dried. To avoid fogging up the windows, SEAT recommends leaving the cooler (compressor) on. To do this, press the A/C button. The button lamp should light up.

If the humidity and temperature outside the vehicle are high, condensa- tion can drip off the evaporator in the cooling system and form a pool un- derneath the vehicle, this is completely normal and there is no need to sus- pect a leak.

Keep the air intake slots in front of the windscreen free of snow, ice and leaves to ensure heating and cooling are not impaired, and to prevent the windows from misting over.

145Air conditioning

Controls

Fig. 126 Detailed view of the centre console: Electronic manual air conditioning con- trols

Fig. 127 Detailed view of the centre console: Climatronic controls

To switch a function on or off, press the appropriate button. Press the but- ton again to switch off the function.

The LED on each control lights up to indicate that the respective function of a control has been switched on.

Some Climatronic controls may also be on the air conditioner control panel located in the rear centre console. These controls are used to make the ap- propriate settings for the rear seats.

Control but- ton

Additional information. Electronic manual air conditioning Fig. 126; Climatronic Fig. 127.

1 Temper- ature ...

Electronic manual air conditioning: Rotate the control to ad- just the temperature accordingly. In the position MAX, the cooling output will be set to maximum. The air recirculation mode and the cooling system are automatically switched on. Climatronic: The left and right sides can be adjusted sepa- rately. Rotate the control to adjust the temperature accord- ingly.

2 Fan

Electronic manual air conditioning: Setting 0: Air fan and air conditioning system (manual) switched off, setting 4: Maxi- mum fan setting. Climatronic: The power of the fan is automatically adjusted. Rotate the control to manually adjust the fan.

3 Air dis- tribution

Electronic manual air conditioning: rotate the continuous control to direct the airflow to the desired area. Climatronic: The airflow will be automatically adjusted to a comfortable flow. It can also be switched on manually with

the buttons 3 .

4 Climatronic: Display of the selected interior temperature for the left and right sides.

Electronic manual air conditioning: defrost function. The air- flow is directed at the windscreen. In this position, air recir- culation is automatically switched off or is not switched on. Increase the fan power to clear the windscreen of condensa- tion as soon as possible. To dry the air, the cooling system will automatically switch on.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

146 Air conditioning

Control but- ton

Additional information. Electronic manual air conditioning Fig. 126; Climatronic Fig. 127.

Climatronic: defrost function. The air drawn in from outside the vehicle is directed at the windscreen and air recirculation is automatically switched off. To defrost the windscreen more quickly, the air is dehumidified at temperatures over approxi- mately +3 C (+38 F) and the fan runs at maximum output.

The air is directed at the chest of driver and passengers by the dash panel air vents.

Air distribution towards the footwell.

Electronic manual air conditioning: Air distribution towards the windscreen and the footwell.

Climatronic: Upward air distribution.

Heated rear window: Only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after 10 minutes.

Electronic manual air conditioning: Air recirculation page 148.

Climatronic: Manual and automatic air recirculation page 148.

Instant auxiliary heating on/off button page 150.

Buttons for the seat heating page 110.

Climatronic: Depending on available vehicle equipment there may be a button for windscreen heating on the air con- ditioner control panel. The windscreen heating only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a few minutes.

Press the button to switch on or off the cooling system.

Control but- ton

Additional information. Electronic manual air conditioning Fig. 126; Climatronic Fig. 127.

Climatronic: Accept the temperature selection for the driver and front passenger sides. When the SYNC button light is on, the temperature settings on the driver side also apply to the passenger side. Press the button or adjust the tempera- ture control for the passenger side in order to set a different temperature. No lamp lights up on the button.

Climatronic: Automatic temperature, fan, and air distribution control. Press the button to switch on the function. The con- trol lamp lights up on the AUTO button.

Climatronic: Press the button REAR to adjust the air condi- tioner for the rear seats from the front seats. A lamp is lit in the REAR button if the function is activated. The settings for the rear seats will be displayed. Press the button again to switch the function off or do not touch any other button for around 10 seconds.

Climatronic: Press the button REST to use the heat radiated by the engine. When the engine is still warm but the ignition switched off, the heat given off by the engine can be used to keep the vehicle interior warm. The REST button will light up when the function is switched on. The function will switch off after around 30 minutes and if the battery level is low.

a)

Switch off. Electronic manual air conditioning: turn the fan switch to set- ting 0. Climatronic: Press the button OFF or manually set the fan to 0. When the device is switched off the OFF button will light up.

a) Depending on the version of the model.

Note Not all Climatronic buttons are operational in REAR mode.

The REAR button is locked in defrost mode.

147Air conditioning

Rear operation

Fig. 128 Centre console: Controls located in the rear seats.

Control Fig. 128

Description

A Temperature selector

B Air flow regulator

Air conditioner user instructions

The interior cooling system only works when the engine is running and fan is switched on.

The air conditioner operates most effectively with the windows and the elec- tric sliding panoramic roof closed. However, if the vehicle has heated up af- ter standing in the sun for some time, the air inside can be cooled more quickly by opening the windows and the sliding electric panoramic sunroof briefly.

Setting for conditions of optimal visibility

When the air conditioning is switched on, the temperature and the air hu- midity in the vehicle interior drop. Hence, when the outside air humidity is

high, the windows will not mist over and comfort for the vehicle occupants is improved:

Electronic manual air conditioning

Switch off the air recirculation page 148.

Set the fan to the required setting.

Turn the temperature control to the centre position.

Open and direct all the air outlets in the dash panel page 148.

Turn the air distribution control to the required position.

With Climatronic

Press the AUTO button.

Set the temperature to +22 C (+72 F).

Open and direct all the air outlets in the dash panel page 148.

Climatronic: Switching the measuring units for temperature on the radio display or the navigation system installed with the default settings

Switching the temperature indication from Celsius to Fahrenheit on the ra- dio display or the navigation system is carried out in the menu on the in- strument panel page 60.

The cooling system does not switch on

If the air conditioning system cannot be switched on, this may be caused by the following:

The engine is not running.

The fan is switched off.

The air conditioning fuse is blown.

The outside temperature is lower than approximately +3 C (+38 F).

The air conditioner compressor has been temporarily switched off be- cause the engine coolant temperature is too high.

Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air conditioner checked by a speci- alised workshop.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

148 Air conditioning

Things to note

If the humidity and temperature outside the vehicle are high, condensation can drip off the vaporiser in the cooling system and form a pool underneath the vehicle. This is normal and does not indicate a leak!

Note After starting the engine, any residual humidity in the air conditioner could mist over the windscreen. Switch on the defrost function as soon as possi- ble to clear the windscreen of condensation.

Air vents

Fig. 129 Air vents in the dash panel

Air vents

Make sure that the air vents Fig. 129 A are never completely closed, as this will guarantee the operation of heating, cooling and ventilation inside the vehicle.

Turn the thumbwheel in the required direction to open and close the air vents. When the thumbwheel is in the position, the corresponding air vent is closed.

Change the air direction using the ventilation grille lever.

There are other air vents that cannot be adjusted on the dash panel B , in the footwell and in the rear area of the interior.

CAUTION Never place food, medicines or other heat-sensitive objects close to the air vents. Food, medicines and other heat-sensitive objects may be damaged or made unsuitable for use by the air coming from the air vents.

Note The air from the vents flows through the vehicle interior and out through the outlets below the rear window. The slots must not be covered with items of clothing or other objects.

Air recirculation mode

Air recirculation mode prevents the ambient air from entering the interior.

When the outside temperature is very high, selecting manual air recircula- tion mode for a short period refreshes the vehicle interior more quickly.

For safety reasons, air recirculation mode is switched off when the button is pressed or the air distributor turned to .

Switching the recirculation mode on and off manually on the air conditioning (Electronic manual air conditioning)

Switching on: Press the button until the lamp on the button lights up.

Switching off: Press the button until the lamp on the button switches off.

149Air conditioning

Switching the recirculation mode on and off manually on the Climatronic

Switching on: Press the button until the lamp on the button lights up.

Switching off: Press the button until the lamp on the button switches off.

Automatic air recirculation mode

Fresh air enters the vehicle interior in position . If the system detects a high concentration of hazardous substances in the ambient air, air recircu- lation mode is switched on automatically. When the level of impurities drops to within a normal range, recirculation mode is switched off.

The system is unable to detect unpleasant smells.

With the following outside temperatures and conditions the air recirculation does not switch on automatically:

The cooling system is switched on (the A/C button is lit up) and the out- side temperature is below +3 C (+38 F).

The cooling system and the windscreen wipers are switched off and the outside temperature is below +10 C (+50 F).

The cooling system is switched off and the outside temperature is below +15 C (+59 F). The windscreen wiper is switched on.

Switching the automatic air recirculation mode on and off

Switching on: Press the button until the right lamp on the button lights up.

Switching off: Press the button until all the lamps on the button are switched off.

Switching the automatic air recirculation mode off temporarily

Press the button once to temporarily switch to manual air recircula- tion mode in the event of unpleasant smells from outside. The left indicator lamp turns on.

After more than two seconds, press the button again to restart auto- matic air recirculation. The right indicator lamp turns on.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings in Introduction on page 144.

If the cooling system is switched off and air recirculation mode switched on, the windows can mist over very quickly, considerably limit- ing visibility.

Switch air recirculation mode off when it is not required.

CAUTION Do not smoke when air recirculation is switched on in vehicles with an air conditioner. The smoke taken in could lie on the cooling system vaporiser and on the activated charcoal cartridge of the dust and pollen filter, leading to a permanently unpleasant smell.

Note Climatronic: Air recirculation mode switches on to prevent exhaust gas from entering the vehicle interior when it is in reverse and while the automatic windscreen wash and wipe is working.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

150 Air conditioning

Auxiliary heater* (additional heater)

Introduction

The auxiliary heater is powered by fuel from the vehicle's fuel tank and can be used while the vehicle is in motion and at a standstill. Select the mode required (heat or fan) page 152 on the instrument panel.

In winter, the auxiliary heater can be used in heat mode before switching on the ignition to remove any ice, mist or snow from the windscreen (thin lay- ers only).

WARNING

The auxiliary heater fumes contain carbon dioxide, an odourless and col- ourless toxic gas. Carbon monoxide can cause people to lose conscious- ness. It can also cause death.

Never switch on the auxiliary heater or leave it running in places that are enclosed or unventilated.

Never program the independent heating system to be activated and operated in closed, unventilated areas.

WARNING

The components of the auxiliary heater exhaust system heat up a great deal. This could cause a fire.

Always park your vehicle so that no part of the exhaust system can come in contact with flammable materials (such as dried grass).

CAUTION Never place food, medicines or other heat-sensitive objects close to the air vents. Food, medicines and other heat-sensitive objects may be damaged or made unsuitable for use by the air coming from the air vents.

Switching the auxiliary heater on and off

Switching the auxiliary heater on:

Manually using the instant on/off button. page 145

ON Manually using the remote control. page 151

Automatically at the programmed and enabled on time.

page 152

Switching the auxiliary heater off:

Manually using the instant on/off button for the air conditioner.

page 145

OFF Manually using the remote control. page 151

Automatically after the programmed time. page 152

Automatically when the light comes on (fuel re- serve).

page 242

Automatically when the battery power drops to a very low level.

page 262

Things to note

After switching the auxiliary heater off, it continues to run for a short period to completely burn any fuel remaining in the auxiliary heater. The exhaust gases are also extracted from the system.

151Air conditioning

Remote control

Fig. 130 Auxiliary heat- er: remote control

Fig. 130 Meaning

ON Switch the auxiliary heater on.

OFF Switch the auxiliary heater off:

A Aerial.

B Light.

The auxiliary heater may accidentally switch on if a button is pressed on the remote control by mistake. This may also occur outside the range of the re- mote control or if the light flashes.

Remote control light

The remote control light provides users with different information at the push of a button:

Battery light Fig. 130 B Meaning

Lights up green for around two seconds.

The auxiliary heater has been switched on using the ON button.

Lights up red for around two seconds.

The auxiliary heater has been switched off using the OFF button.

Battery light Fig. 130 B Meaning

Slowly flashes green for around two seconds.

No ona) signal has been received.

Quickly flashes green for around two seconds.

The auxiliary heater is locked. Possible causes: the fuel tank is almost empty, the battery charge is very low or there is a fault.

Flashes red for around two seconds.

No offa) signal has been received.

Lights up orange for around two seconds, then green or red.

The remote control battery is almost flat. However, the on or off signal has been re- ceived, respectively.

Lights up orange for around two seconds, then flashes green or red.

The remote control battery is almost flat. The on or off signal has not been received, respectively.

Flashes orange for around five seconds.

The remote control battery is flat. The on or off signal has not been received, re- spectively.

a) Within its range, the remote control might not receive the signal sent by the vehicle receiv- er. In this case, the remote control will send an error message despite the auxiliary heater being on or off. Come closer to the vehicle and press the corresponding button on the re- mote control once again.

Replacing the remote control battery

When the light Fig. 130 B on the remote control does not come on when the button is pressed, the remote control battery should soon be replaced.

The battery is located beneath a cover on the back of the remote control. Turn the slot to the left using a flat, blunt object (e.g. a coin). When chang- ing the battery, use another battery of the same model and observe the po- larity when fitting it .

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

152 Air conditioning

Range

The receiver is in the interior of the vehicle. The remote control, when fitted with new batteries, has a range of several hundred metres. Obstacles be- tween the remote control and the vehicle, bad weather conditions and dis- charged batteries can considerably reduce the range of the remote control.

An optimum range is obtained by keeping the remote control vertical, with the aerial Fig. 130 A pointing upwards. When doing so, do not cover the aerial with your fingers or with the palm of your hand.

There must be a minimum distance of two metres between the remote con- trol and the vehicle.

CAUTION The radio frequency remote control contains electronic components. Therefore, protect the remote control from getting wet, being knocked and from direct sunlight.

Use of inappropriate batteries may damage the remote control. For this reason, always replace the dead battery with another of the same voltage, size and specifications.

For the sake of the environment Please dispose of old batteries so that they do not harm the environ- ment.

The remote control battery may contain perchlorate. Observe the legal requirements for their disposal.

Programming the auxiliary heater

The heater or ventilation inside the vehicle can be programmed for a certain period.

Before programming, check that the day is correctly set in the Auxiliary heat- er - day of the week menu .

Enabling the Auxiliary heater menu on the instrument panel

From the main menu, select the Auxiliary heater submenu and press the OK button on the windscreen wiper lever.

OR: press the or arrow buttons on the multi-function steering wheel until the Auxiliary heater menu is displayed.

Menu options Description

Switching on Switching off

The auxiliary heater can be set to come on automati- cally if required. To do so, select a timer: The timer is displayed marked with a . Only one timer can be selected. If a timer has been selected, Prog. ON will be displayed on the screen. If no timer has been selected, the instrument panel dis- play will show Prog. OFF. To modify the programmed timer, select another tim- er or select the Off option.

Timer 1 Timer 2 Timer 3

Three different timers (hh.mm) can later be selected using the On option. If the auxiliary heater is to be switched on for just a certain day of the week, select the day of the week and the time for the auxiliary heat- er to come on.

Duration The operating time may vary between 10 and 60 mi- nutes and can be set to 5-minute intervals.

Operating mode Set to heat or ventilate the vehicle interior when the auxiliary heater is switched on.

Day Set the current day of the week.

Factory settings The predefined factory values for the functions of this menu are restored.

Back This returns to the main menu.

153Air conditioning

Checking programming

If the timer has been switched on after switching the ignition off, the instant activation button will remain lit for around ten seconds.

WARNING

Never program the independent heating system to be activated and oper- ated in closed, unventilated areas. The auxiliary heater fumes contain carbon dioxide, an odourless and colourless toxic gas. Carbon monoxide can cause people to lose consciousness. It can also cause death.

Operating instructions

The auxiliary heater exhaust system located below the vehicle must be kept clear of snow, mud and other objects. The exhaust gases must not be ob- structed in any way. The exhaust gases generated by the auxiliary heater are removed via an exhaust pipe fitted underneath the vehicle.

On heating the vehicle interior, depending on the outside temperature the warm air is first directed at the windscreen and then to the rest of the vehi- cle interior through the air vents. If the air vents are turned towards the win- dows, for example, the form of air distribution may be affected.

Depending on the outside temperature, the temperature at which the auxili- ary heater warms the vehicle interior may be somewhat higher if the heating or air conditioner temperature control is set to maximum before switching the heating on.

Depending on the engine, vehicles with auxiliary heater may be fitted with a second battery in the luggage compartment that is responsible for powering the auxiliary heater.

Cases in which the auxiliary heater will not switch on

The auxiliary heater requires about as much power as the dipped beam headlights. If the battery charge is low, the auxiliary heater will switch off automatically or will not even switch on. This avoids problems when starting the engine.

The heater will switch just once each time. The timer will also have to be switched back on every time it is required.

Note Noise will be heard while the auxiliary heater is running.

When the air humidity is high and the outside temperature low, the heating system may evaporate condensation from the auxiliary heater. In this case, steam may be released from underneath the vehicle. This is com- pletely normal and there is no need to suspect a fault!

If the auxiliary heater runs several times over a prolonged period, the ve- hicle battery may run flat. To re-charge the battery, drive the vehicle for a long distance. As a general rule, try to drive for as much time as the auxili- ary heating was working.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

154 Driving

Driving

Steering

Introduction

The power steering is not hydraulic but electromechanical. The advantage of this steering system is that it disposes of hydraulic tubes, hydraulic oil, the pump, filter and other components. The electromechanical system saves fuel. While a hydraulic system requires oil pressure to be maintained, electromechanical steering only requires energy when the steering wheel is turned.

With the power steering system, the assisted steering function automatical- ly adjusts according to the vehicle speed, the steering torque and the wheel turning angle. The power steering only works when the engine is running.

WARNING

If the power steering is not working then the steering wheel is much more difficult to turn and the vehicle more difficult to control.

The power steering only works when the engine is running.

Never allow the vehicle to move when the engine is switched off.

Never remove the key from the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. The steering may lock and it will not be possible to turn the steering wheel.

Control and warning lamps

It lights up Possible cause Solution

(red)

Power steering faulty. The steering system should be checked by a specialised work- shop as soon as possible.

(yellow)

Power steering operation reduced.

The steering system should be checked by a specialised work- shop as soon as possible. If, after restarting the engine and driving for a short distance, the yellow warning lamp no lon- ger comes on, it will not be nec- essary to take the vehicle to a specialised workshop.

The vehicle battery was disconnected and has been reconnected.

Drive for a short distance at 15 20 km/h (9 12 mph).

155Driving

Flashes Possible cause Solution

(red)

Fault in the steering col- umn electronic lock.

Do not drive on! Seek professional advice.

(yellow)

Steering column deviation. Gently turn the steering wheel to and fro.

Steering wheel not un- locked or locked.

Remove the key from the igni- tion and then switch the ignition back on. Check the messages displayed on the instrument panel at the same time. Do not drive on, if the steering column remains locked after the ignition has been switched on. Seek specialist assistance.

Several warning and control lamps should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few seconds.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings in Control and warning lamps on page 56.

Information on the steering

Steering column electronic lock

Vehicles with Keyless Access: The steering column locks when the driver's door is opened and the ignition is switched off. Therefore, the vehicle should be at a standstill and, where applicable, the selector lever in posi- tion P.

If the driver door is opened before the ignition is switched off, the steering column electronic lock is activated via the ignition key or the sensor built into the door handle.

Mechanical steering lock

To prevent theft, we recommend you lock the steering before leaving the ve- hicle.

Please engage steering lock Unlocking the steering

Parking the vehicle page 168. Turn the steering wheel slightly to release the steering lock.

Remove the key from the ignition. Insert the key in the ignition lock.

Turn the steering wheel slightly until you hear the steering lock.

Hold the steering wheel in this posi- tion and switch on the ignition.

Electromechanical power steering

With the power steering system, the assisted steering function automatical- ly adjusts according to the vehicle speed, the steering torque and the wheel turning angle. The power steering only works when the engine is running.

You should remember that you will need considerably more power than nor- mal to steer the vehicle if the power steering is not working correctly or not at all.

Counter steering assistance system

The counter steering assistance system helps the driver in critical situa- tions. Additional steering power helps the driver when counter steering.

WARNING

The counter steering assistance system combined with ESC helps the driver to steer the vehicle in critical driving conditions. At all times, it is the driver who steers the vehicle. The counter steering system does not steer the vehicle.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

156 Driving

Adjusting the steering wheel position

Fig. 131 Mechanical steering wheel adjust- ment

Adjust the steering wheel before your trip and only when the vehicle is sta- tionary.

Push the lever Fig. 131 1 downwards.

Adjust the steering wheel so that you can hold onto the steering wheel with both hands on the outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions and your arms slightly bent.

Push the lever firmly upwards until it is flush to the steering column .

WARNING

Incorrect use of the steering wheel adjustment function and an incorrect adjustment of the steering wheel can result in severe or fatal injury.

After adjusting the steering column, push the lever Fig. 131 1

firmly upwards to ensure the steering wheel does not accidentally change position while driving.

WARNING (Continued)

Never adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is in motion. If you need to adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is in motion, stop safely and make the proper adjustment.

The adjusted steering wheel should be facing your chest and not your face so as not to hinder the driver's front airbag protection in the event of an accident.

When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions to reduce inju- ries when the driver's front airbag deploys.

Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position or in any oth- er manner (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In such cases, if the driver's airbag deploys, you may sustain injuries to your arms, hands and head.

Stopping and starting the engine

Introduction

Immobiliser display

When an invalid key is used or in the event of a system fault, or Immo- biliser on is displayed on the instrument panel. The engine cannot be star- ted.

Pushing or towing

For technical reasons, the vehicle must not be push- or tow-started. Jump starting is preferable.

157Driving

WARNING

Turning off the engine while driving will make stopping the vehicle diffi- cult; this could even result in the loss of control causing an accident with serious consequences.

The assisted braking and steering systems, the airbag system, seat belts and certain safety equipment are only active while the engine is running.

The engine should only be switched off when the vehicle is at a standstill.

WARNING

While the engine is running or starting it could help reduce the risk of se- rious injury.

Never start or leave the engine running in poorly ventilated or closed spaces. Exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, a toxic, colourless and odourless gas. Carbon monoxide can cause people to lose conscious- ness. It can also cause death.

Never leave the vehicle unattended if the engine is running. The vehi- cle could move off suddenly or something unexpected could happen re- sulting in damage and serious injury.

Never use start boosters. Cold start sprays could explode or increase the engine speed unexpectedly.

WARNING

The components of the exhaust system reach very high temperatures. This could cause a fire and considerable damage.

Always park your vehicle so that no part of the exhaust system can come in contact with flammable materials (such as wood, leaves, spilled fuel, dried grass, etc).

Do not apply additional underseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the exhaust pipes, catalytic converter, heat shields or the diesel particulate filter.

Ignition lock

Fig. 132 Vehicle key po- sitions

Car keys Fig. 132

No key in the ignition lock: The steering lock may be activated.

0 Ignition off, all electrical devices disconnected. Key can be re- moved from the vehicle.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

158 Driving

Car keys Fig. 132

1 Ignition is switched on. Pre-heating of diesel engine. The steering lock can be unlocked.

2 Switch on the engine. Release the key when the engine has star- ted. When it is released, the key returns to position 1 .

Key not authorised for the vehicle

If a key which is not authorised for this vehicle is inserted in the ignition lock, it can be removed as follows:

Automatic gearbox: the key cannot be removed from the ignition lock. Press and release the selector lever locking button. Key can be removed from the vehicle.

Manual gearbox: remove the key from the ignition.

WARNING

Unsuitable or careless use of the vehicle key could result in serious in- jury.

Always take all the keys with you whenever you leave the vehicle. The engine could accidentally be started and electrical equipment such as the windows could accidentally be operated resulting in serious injury.

Never leave children or disabled people alone in the car. In case of an emergency, passengers will not be able to leave the vehicle and may re- quire assistance. For example, depending on the time of the year, tem- peratures inside a locked and closed vehicle can be extremely high or ex- tremely low resulting in serious injuries and illness or even death, partic- ularly for young children.

Never remove the key from the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. The steering may lock and it will not be possible to turn the steering wheel.

Note If the key is left in the ignition lock with the engine off for long periods, the vehicle battery will run flat.

For automatic gearbox vehicles the key can only be removed from the ig- nition lock if the gear selector lever is in position P. In this case, press and release the selector lever locking button.

Starter button

Fig. 133 In the centre console: Engine start but- ton of the Keyless Access locking and starting sys- tem. Regulation in right- hand drive vehicles is symmetrical.

Fig. 134 Emergency start in vehicles with KESSY.

159Driving

The starter button can only be used if there is a valid key inside the vehicle.

On leaving the vehicle with the ignition switched off, the electronic lock on the steering column is activated when the driver's door is opened page 154.

Switching the ignition on/off

Briefly press the starter button once without pressing the clutch or brake pedal Fig. 133 .

Emergency starting function

If no valid key is detected within the passenger compartment, it will be nec- essary to perform an emergency start. The relevant text message will appear in the dash panel display. This can be the case if, for example, the key bat- tery is almost completely or completely drained:

Place the key close to the steering column immediately after pressing the start button Fig. 134.

The ignition is switched on and, if necessary, the engine is started auto- matically.

Emergency disconnection

If it is not possible to switch off the engine by briefly pressing the starter button, the emergency disconnection system should be used:

Press the starter button twice within a second or press it once for more than two seconds .

The engine turns off automatically.

Re-starting the engine

If, after the engine is switched off, a valid key is not detected in the vehicle, the engine can only be started within an interval of approximately 5 sec- onds. The relevant message will appear in the dash panel display.

After this interval, it will not be possible to start the engine without a valid key inside the vehicle.

WARNING

Any accidental movement of the vehicle could result in serious injury.

When the starter button is pressed do not press the brake or clutch pedal, otherwise the engine will start immediately.

WARNING

If the vehicle keys are used negligently or without paying due attention, serious injury may result.

Never leave a vehicle key inside if you leave the vehicle. Children and other unauthorised persons could lock the vehicle, start the engine or switch on the ignition and any electrical components such as the electric windows.

Note In diesel vehicles with the Keyless Access system, the engine may take a while to start if it has to preheat.

Starting the engine

Complete operations only in the sequence given:

Perform all of the above steps in the order indicated.

Step Vehicles without Keyless Access: Vehicles with Keyless Access:

1. Press and hold the brake pedal until step 5 has been completed.

1 a. In vehicles with a manual gearbox: Press the clutch pedal all the

way and keep pressed until the engine starts.

2. Put the gearbox lever in neutral or the selector lever in position P or

N.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

160 Driving

Perform all of the above steps in the order indicated.

Step Vehicles without Keyless Access: Vehicles with Keyless Access:

3.

Only in vehicles with diesel en- gine: To preheat the engine, turn the key in the ignition lock to po-

sition Fig. 132 1 . A control lamp lights up on the instrument

panel .

4. Turn the key in the ignition lock

to position Fig. 132 2 ; do not press the accelerator.

Press the starter button Fig. 133; do not press the ac- celerator. For the engine to start, there should be a valid key in the

vehicle.

5. When the engine has started, re- lease the key in the ignition lock.

Once the engine has started, re- lease the engine start button.

6. If the engine fails to start, stop, and repeat this step after about

one minute.

If the engine fails to start, stop, and repeat this step after about one minute. If necessary, per-

form an emergency start page 159.

7. Disconnect the electronic parking brake when you wish to start driv-

ing page 168.

WARNING

Never leave the vehicle unattended if the engine is running. The vehicle could move off suddenly, especially if it is in gear, resulting in an acci- dent and serious injury.

WARNING

Cold start sprays could explode or cause a sudden increase in the engine speed.

Never use start boosters.

CAUTION An attempt to start the engine while driving or starting the engine imme- diately after turning it off can cause damage to the engine or starter motor.

When the engine is cold, avoid high revs and heavy acceleration and do not make the engine work hard.

Do not push or tow start the engine. Unburnt fuel could damage the cat- alytic converter.

For the sake of the environment Do not warm the engine at idle speed; start driving immediately if the visi- bility is OK. This helps the engine reach operating temperature faster and reduces emissions.

Note For example, if the key battery is very worn or flat, the engine cannot be started with the starter button. In this case, remove the ignition button from the lock and insert the key.

Electrical components with a high power consumption are switched off temporarily when the engine starts.

When the engine is started cold, there may be strong vibrations for a few moments for technical reasons. This is quite normal, and no cause for con- cern.

At temperatures below +5 C (+41 F), smoke may be given off below the vehicle when the additional heater is connected.

Stopping the engine

Complete operations only in the sequence given:

161Driving

Perform all of the above steps in the order indicated.

Step Vehicles without Keyless Access: Vehicles with Keyless Access:

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop .

2. Press and hold the brake pedal until step 4 has been completed

3. For an automatic gearbox, move the selector lever to position P.

4. Connect the electronic parking brake page 168.

5. Turn the key in the ignition lock to position Fig. 132 0 .

Briefly press the starter button Fig. 133. If it is not possible to switch off the engine, use the emergency disconnection page 159.

6. If the vehicle is equipped with a manual gearbox, engage first gear

or reverse.

WARNING

Never switch off the engine while the vehicle is moving. You may lose control of the vehicle, posing serious accident risks.

The airbags and belt tensioners do not work when the ignition is switched off.

The brake servo does not work with the engine off. To stop, the brake pedal must be pressed with more force.

As the power steering does not work if the engine is not running, you will need more strength to steer than normally.

If the key is removed from the ignition, the steering may lock and it will not be possible to steer the vehicle.

CAUTION If the engine has been driven at high speed for a prolonged period of time, it may overheat when turned off. To avoid engine damage, allow the engine to run for approximately two minutes in neutral before switching it off.

Note In vehicles with automatic gearbox, the key can only be removed when the selector lever is in position P.

After stopping the engine, the engine compartment fan may continue running for a few minutes, even when the ignition has been switched off or the key removed. The radiator fan is automatically switched off.

Electronic immobiliser

The gear lock prevents the engine from being started with an unauthorised key and the vehicle being moved.

Inside the key there is a chip that deactivates the electronic immobiliser au- tomatically when the key is inserted into the ignition.

The electronic immobiliser will be activated again automatically as soon as you pull the key out of the ignition lock. In vehicles with the Keyless Access system, the vehicle key must be outside the vehicle page 71.

For this reason, the vehicle can only be used with a genuine SEAT key with the correct code. Coded keys can be obtained from your Technical Services page 65.

If an unauthorised key is used, the message SAFE or Immobiliser active is displayed on the instrument panel. The vehicle cannot be started in this case.

Note The correct operation of the vehicle is only guaranteed when original SEAT keys are used.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

162 Driving

Changing gear

Introduction

When reverse gear is engaged and the ignition is switched on the following takes place:

Reverse lights light up.

When reversing, the air conditioner automatically changes to air recircu- lation mode.

The rear window heater switches on when the windscreen wiper is acti- vated.

Also, the parking sensor system, the optical parking sensor and the camera for the reverse assist system are connected.

WARNING

Rapid acceleration can cause loss of traction and skidding, especially on slippery ground. This could cause loss of control of the vehicle resulting in an accident and considerable damage.

Only use the kick-down function or rapid acceleration if visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions so permit.

WARNING

Do not allow the brakes to rub for a prolonged period of time, or brake frequently or for long periods of time. Continuous braking heats up the brakes. This could significantly reduce braking power, increase braking distance or even result in the total failure of the brake system.

Warning and control lamps

It lights up Possible cause Solution

(red)

Brake pedal not pressed! Press brake pedal to the floor.

(green)

Brake pedal not pressed.

To select a range of gears, press the brake pedal. Please also see "Electronic park- ing brake" page 168.

Flashes Possible cause Solution

(green)

The selector lever locking button has not engaged. The vehicle does not start to move.

Engage the selector lever lock page 164.

Several warning and control lamps should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few seconds.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings in Control and warning lamps on page 56.

Pedals

Do not allow floor mats or other objects to obstruct the free passage of the pedals.

Floor mats should leave the pedal area free and unobstructed and be cor- rectly secured in the footwell zone.

163Driving

In the event of failure of a brake circuit, the brake pedal must be pressed harder than normal to brake the vehicle.

WARNING

Objects falling into the driver's footwell could prevent use of the pedals. This could lead the driver to lose control of the vehicle, increasing the risk of a serious accident.

Make sure the pedals can be used at all times, with no objects rolling underneath them.

Always secure the mat in the footwell.

Never place other mats or rugs on top of the original mat supplied by the factory.

Ensure that no objects can fall into the driver's footwell while the ve- hicle is in motion.

CAUTION The pedals must always have free and unobstructed passage to the floor. For example, in case of a fault in the brake circuit, the brake pedal will need to be pressed further to stop the vehicle. To press the brake pedal down fur- ther will require more force than usual.

Manual gearbox: Engaging gears

Fig. 135 Gear shift pat- tern of a 6-speed manual gearbox

The position of each of the gears is shown on the gear stick Fig. 135.

Keep the clutch pedal pushed all the way down.

Move the gearbox lever to the required position.

In some countries, it is necessary to press the clutch pedal to the floor to start the engine.

Selecting reverse gear

With the vehicle at a standstill, press the clutch pedal to the floor and keep pressed.

Push the gear lever down.

Move the gear stick to the left and then forwards to reverse gear Fig. 135 R .

WARNING

When the engine is running, the vehicle will start to move as soon as a gear is engaged and the clutch released. This is also the case with the electronic parking brake on.

Never engage the reverse gear when a vehicle is moving forward.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

164 Driving

CAUTION To prevent damage and avoid premature wear, please observe the follow- ing:

While driving, do not leave your hand resting on the gear stick. The pres- sure applied by your hand is transmitted to the gearbox selector forks.

Always ensure that the vehicle is completely stopped before engaging the reverse gear.

When changing gear, always make sure the clutch pedal is pushed right to the floor.

Never hold the vehicle on the clutch on hills with the engine on.

Automatic gearbox*: Selecting gears

Fig. 136 Automatic gear- box selector lever with locking button (arrow)

The selector lever has a lock. When changing the selector lever from posi- tion P to a range of gears, press the brake pedal and press the lock on the selector lever, located on the front part of the knob, in the direction of the arrow Fig. 136. To move the gear selector lever from the position N to D or to R, first press and hold the brake pedal.

When the ignition is on, the current position of the selector lever is shown on the instrument panel.

Selector lever po- sitions

Denomination Meaning

Parking lock

The driven wheels are locked mechanically. They only engage when the vehicle is at a standstill. To change the position of the selec- tor lever, press the brake pedal and switch on the ignition.

Reverse gear Reverse gear is engaged. Only select reverse gear when the vehicle is at a standstill.

Neutral The gear box is in neutral. No movement is transmitted to the wheels and the engine does not act as a brake.

Standard for- wards driving position (nor-

mal pro- gramme)

The gears are changed (up and down) auto- matically. The gear shifts are determined by the engine load, your individual driving style and the speed of the vehicle.

Standard for- wards driving

position (sports pro-

gramme)

The shift up to a higher gear is automatically delayed and the shift down is faster with re- spect to the D range of gears, to take full ad- vantage of the engine power. The gear shifts are determined by the engine load, your indi- vidual driving style and the speed of the vehi- cle.

Selector lever locking

The gear selector lever lock prevents, in P or N, a gear selection from being inadvertently engaged and the vehicle moving off accidentally.

To release the gear selector lever lock, press and hold the brake pedal with the ignition on. Press simultaneously on the selector lever lock.

The selector lever lock is not engaged if it is moved quickly through position N (e.g. when shifting from R to D). This makes it possible, for instance, to

165Driving

rock the vehicle backwards and forwards if it is stuck in snow or mud. The selector lever lock engages automatically if the brake pedal is not pressed and the lever is in position N for more than about one second at a speed of less than 5 km/h (3 mph).

In vehicles with a DSG automatic gearbox, on rare occasions the selector lever lock may not engage. In this case, the transmission is locked to pre- vent the vehicle from moving accidentally. The green control light flashes and an information text is displayed. Proceed as follows to engage the se- lector lever lock:

Press the brake pedal and then release.

WARNING

Placing the selector lever in an incorrect position may cause loss of con- trol of the vehicle and a serious accident.

Do not press the accelerator when engaging a range of gears.

With the engine running and a range of gears selected, the vehicle will move off when the brake pedal is released.

Never select reverse gear or the parking lock while driving.

WARNING

Unintentional movements of the vehicle could cause serious injury.

As a driver, you should never leave your vehicle if the engine is run- ning and a gear range is engaged. If you have to leave your vehicle while the engine is running, you must apply the electronic parking brake and engage parking lock P with the selector lever.

While the engine is running and with the D, S or R range of gears se- lected, keep the brake pressed to keep the vehicle at a standstill. Trans- mission is not totally interrupted either when the vehicle is idling or when the vehicle continues moving forwards.

WARNING (Continued)

Never engage the R or P gear ranges when the vehicle is moving.

Never leave the vehicle with the gear selector in N. The vehicle may move downhill regardless of whether the engine is switched on or not.

CAUTION If, when the vehicle is at a standstill, the electronic parking brake is not ap- plied and the brake pedal is released while in position P, the vehicle may move a few centimetres forwards or backwards.

Note If, while driving, the selector lever is accidentally placed in position N, lift your foot off the accelerator. Wait until the engine is running at idle speed before selecting a new gear range.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

166 Driving

Changing gears with Tiptronic*

Fig. 137 Selector lever in Tiptronic position (left- hand drive vehicles). The lay-out in right-hand drive vehicles is symmet- rically opposed.

Fig. 138 Steering wheel with two paddle shifts for Tiptronic

The Tiptronic system allows you to manually change gears in vehicles with an automatic gearbox. When you change to the Tiptronic programme, the vehicle remains in the currently selected gear. This is possible as long as the system is not changing gear automatically due to a change in traffic.

Using Tiptronic with the selector lever

Press the selector lever from position D to the right into the Tiptronic se- lector gate in Automatic gearbox*: Selecting gears on page 165.

Press the lever forwards + or backwards to move up or down a gear Fig. 137.

Using the Tiptronic with the steering wheel paddle shifts

In D or S, move the steering wheel paddle shifts Fig. 138.

Pull the right-hand side paddle + OFF Fig. 138 towards the steering wheel to step up a gear.

Pull the left-hand side paddle Fig. 138 towards the steering wheel step down a gear.

If the paddles are not used for a period of time, the vehicle leaves Tiptronic mode.

CAUTION When accelerating, the gearbox automatically shifts up into the next gear shortly before the maximum engine speed is reached.

When reducing speed manually, the gear box only shifts gear when the engine can no longer exceed the maximum engine speed.

Driving with an automatic gearbox

The gearbox changes gear ratios automatically as the vehicle moves.

Driving down hills

The steeper the gradient, the lower the gear you will need. The lowest gears increase the engine braking work. Never go down hills with the selector lev- er in neutral N.

You should reduce speed accordingly.

Press the selector lever from position D to the right into the Tiptronic se- lector gate page 166.

Gently pull the selector lever back to change down a gear.

OR: Reduce using the steering wheel paddles page 166.

167Driving

Back-up programme

If all the selector lever positions on the instrument panel display are shown with a light-coloured background, this means there is a fault in the system. The automatic gearbox will operate in back-up mode. When the backup pro- gramme is activated, it is possible to drive the vehicle, however, at low speeds and within a selected range of gears.

For the DSG dual clutch gearbox, in some cases, this may mean that the reverse gear does not engage. The gearbox should be checked by a special- ised workshop as soon as possible.

Overload protection for the 6-speed DSG gearbox

When the clutch is overloaded, the vehicle begins to jerk and the selector lever position indicator begins to flash. To prevent damage to the clutch, it will interrupt power transmission between the engine and the gearbox. There is no more traction and it is not possible to accelerate. If the clutch is opened automatically due to overloading, press the brake pedal. Wait a few seconds before starting to move again.

Kick-down

The kick-down system provides maximum acceleration when the gear selec- tor lever is in the positions D, S or in the Tiptronic position.

When the accelerator pedal is pressed right down, the automatic gearbox will shift down to a lower gear, depending on road speed and engine speed. This takes advantage of the maximum acceleration of the vehicle .

When the accelerator is pressed to the floor, the automatic gearbox shifts to the next gear only after the engine reaches the specified maximum engine speed.

Launch-Control Programme

The Launch-Control programme enables maximum acceleration while at a standstill.

Switch off the ASR page 168.

Press and hold the brake pedal with your left foot.

Place the selector lever in position S or Tiptronic.

Press the accelerator with the right foot until the vehicle reaches an en- gine speed of approximately 3200 rpm.

Lift the left foot off the brake . The vehicle starts with maximum ac- celeration.

Turn on the ASR after accelerating!

WARNING

Rapid acceleration can cause loss of traction and skidding, especially on slippery ground. This could cause loss of control of the vehicle resulting in an accident and considerable damage.

Only use kick-down and rapid acceleration when weather conditions, surface conditions and traffic conditions permit; accelerate and drive in a manner that does not endanger other road users.

Please remember that the driven wheels can slip and the vehicle can skid if the ASR is turned off, especially on slippery ground.

Turn on the ASR after accelerating!

CAUTION If you stop on a hill with a gear range engaged, do not try to prevent the vehicle from rolling back by pressing on the accelerator. This could cause overheating and damage the automatic gearbox.

Never allow the vehicle to move with the gear selector lever in N, espe- cially with the engine turned off. The automatic gearbox will not be lubrica- ted and could be damaged.

Recommended gear display

In some vehicles, the recommended gear for reducing fuel consumption is displayed on the instrument panel:

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

168 Driving

display Meaning

Optimum gear.

Recommendation to change up a gear.

Recommendation to change down a gear.

Information for cleaning the diesel particulate filter

The exhaust gas system control recognises when the diesel particulate filter is blocked, and helps to clean it by recommending a specific gear for driv- ing. It may therefore be necessary to drive with the engine at an exception- ally high speed page 206.

WARNING

The recommended gear display is intended as a guideline only; it should never replace the driver's attention to driving carefully.

Responsibility for selecting the correct gear for each situation contin- ues to lie with the driver, for example when overtaking, climbing a hill or towing a trailer.

For the sake of the environment Selecting the most appropriate gear for the situation will help you to save fuel.

Note The recommended gear display is switched off when the clutch pedal is pressed.

Braking, stopping and parking

Introduction

The assisted braking systems include the anti-lock braking system (ABS), the brake assist system (BAS), the electronic differential lock (EDL), the trac- tion control system (ASR) and the electronic stability control (ESC).

WARNING

Driving with worn brake pads or a faulty brake system may lead to seri- ous accident.

If lights, alone or accompanied by a warning message on the in- strument panel display, please go immediately to a specialised work- shop to check the brake pads and to replace them if they are worn.

WARNING

Careless parking can cause serious injury.

Never remove the key from the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. The steering lock may engage and locked the steering wheel making the vehi- cle impossible to control.

Always park your vehicle so that no part of the exhaust system can come in contact with flammable materials (such as wood, leaves, spilled fuel, dried grass, etc).

Always apply the electronic parking brake when you leave your vehi- cle and when you park.

Never leave children or disabled people alone in the vehicle. They could release the electronic parking brake, activate the selector lever or gear stick and start the vehicle moving. This could result in a serious ac- cident.

169Driving

WARNING (Continued)

Always take all the keys with you whenever you leave the vehicle. The engine could accidentally be started and electrical equipment such as the windows could accidentally be operated resulting in serious injury.

Never leave children or disabled people alone in the car. They could be trapped in the car in an emergency and will not be able to get them- selves to safety. For example, depending on the time of the year, temper- atures inside a locked and closed vehicle can be extremely high or ex- tremely low resulting in serious injuries and illness or even death, partic- ularly for young children.

CAUTION Special care should be taken when parking in areas with high kerbs or fixed barriers. Objects protruding from the ground may damage the bumper or other parts of the vehicle during manoeuvres. To avoid damage, stop be- fore the wheels touch the barrier or kerb.

Special attention is required when driving through entrances, over ramps, kerbs or other objects. The vehicle underbody, bumpers, mudguards and running gear, and the engine and exhaust system could be damaged as you drive over these objects.

Warning and control lamps

It lights up

Possible cause Solution

(red)

Together with the control lamp on the button: Elec- tronic parking brake on.

page 171

Fault in the brake system Stop the vehicle! Seek professional assistance! page 173.

Brake fluid level inadequate. Do not drive on! Check brake fluid level page 177.

Together with the ABS con- trol lamp : ABS fault.

Contact a specialised workshop. The vehicle can be braked with- out ABS.

(red)

Brake pedal not pressed! Press brake pedal to the floor.

(yellow)

Front brake pads worn.

Contact a specialised workshop immediately. Inspect all the brake pads and replace as nec- essary.

(yellow)

ESC disconnected by the sys- tem.

Switching the ignition on and off If necessary, drive for a short distance.

Fault in the ESC. Contact a specialised workshop.

Together with the ABS con- trol lamp : Fault in ABS.

Contact a specialised workshop. The vehicle can be braked with- out ABS.

The battery has been recon- nected.

page 262

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

170 Driving

It lights up

Possible cause Solution

(yellow)

ASR manually deactivated.

Switch on ASR page 176. ASR is automatically activated when the ignition is switched on or off.

(yellow)

Together with the ESC control lamp : Fault in ABS. Contact a specialised workshop.

The vehicle can be braked with- out ABS.Together with the warning

lamp or : ABS fault.

(yellow)

Together with the warning lamp flashing: Electronic parking brake faulty.

Contact a specialised workshop.

(green)

Brake pedal not pressed.

Press the brake pedal to select a gear range.

Press the brake pedal to discon- nect the electronic parking brake page 171.

Flashes Possible cause Solution

(red)

Electronic parking brake faul- ty. The control lamp may light up at the same time or the control lamp may flash on the button.

Contact a specialised work- shop, as it may not be possible to park the vehicle in safety.

(yellow)

ESC or ASR regulating. Take your foot off the accelera- tor. Adjust your driving style to the road conditions.

Several warning and control lamps should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few seconds.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings in Control and warning lamps on page 56.

WARNING

Driving with brakes in bad condition could result in a serious accident.

If the brake warning lamp does not go out, or if it lights up when driving, the brake fluid level in the reservoir is too low or there is a fault in the brake system. Obtain professional assistance immediately page 177, Brake fluid.

If the brake warning lamp lights up together with the ABS warning lamp , the regulation function of the ABS could be malfunctioning. As a result, the rear wheels can lock relatively easily when braking. If the rear wheels lock this could result in loss of vehicle control! If possible, reduce your speed and drive carefully to a specialised workshop close by to check the brake system. During the following journey, avoid sudden brak- ing and manoeuvres.

If the ABS warning lamp does not go out or if it lights while driv- ing, the ABS is malfunctioning. The vehicle can only be stopped using normal braking without ABS. The protection provided by the ABS is not available. Visit a specialised workshop as soon as possible.

If lights, alone or accompanied by a warning message on the in- strument panel display, please go immediately to a specialised work- shop to check the brake pads and to replace them if they are worn.

171Driving

Electronic parking brake

Fig. 139 Detailed view of the centre console: elec- tronic parking brake switch

Applying the electronic parking brake

The parking brake can be applied whenever the vehicle is at a standstill, even when the ignition is switched off. Always apply the parking brake when you leave your vehicle and when you park.

Pull button until the control lamp on the button lights up.

The parking brake is applied when the control lamp lights up on the instrument panel page 169.

Releasing the electronic parking brake

Switch the ignition on.

Press button . At the same time, press the brake pedal hard or gently press the accelerator pedal with the engine switched on.

The control lamps on the button and on the instrument panel go out.

Automatic release of the electronic parking brake on starting the engine

The electronic parking brake is automatically released when the vehicle starts moving, if the driver door is closed and the driver is wearing his/her seat belt. In vehicles with a manual gearbox the clutch pedal should also be

pressed to the floor before starting the engine so that the system recogni- ses that the parking brake should be released.

Emergency braking function

Only use the emergency braking function if the vehicle cannot be stopped with the brake pedal !

Pull button hard to stop the vehicle. The warning display will be ac- companied by the corresponding audible warning.

To stop the braking process, release the button or press the accelerator.

WARNING

The incorrect use of the electronic parking brake may result in serious ac- cident.

Never use the electronic parking brake to brake the vehicle except in an emergency. The braking distance is considerably longer, because braking is only applied to the rear wheels. Always use the foot brake.

Never accelerate from the engine compartment with the engine run- ning and a gear or a gear range engaged. The vehicle could move, even if the parking brake is applied.

Note In vehicles with a manual gearbox: When the clutch pedal is released and the accelerator pressed at the same time, the electronic parking brake is automatically released.

If the vehicle battery is flat, it will not be possible to disconnect the elec- tronic parking brake. Use the jump-start page 305.

When the electronic parking brake is applied or released, noises may be heard.

If the electronic parking brake has not been used for a long while, the system sometimes performs automatic and audible checks while the vehi- cle is at a standstill.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

172 Driving

Parking

When parking your vehicle, all legal requirements should be observed.

To park the vehicle

Complete operations only in the sequence given.

Park the vehicle on a suitable surface .

Press and hold the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a standstill.

Connect the electronic parking brake page 171.

For an automatic gearbox, move the selector lever to position P.

Switch off the engine and release the brake pedal.

Remove the key from the ignition.

If necessary, turn the steering wheel slightly to lock the steering.

With a manual gearbox, engage the 1st gear on flat ground and slopes, or even the reverse gear on hills, and release the clutch pedal.

Ensure that all passengers leave the vehicle, especially children.

When leaving the vehicle, take all keys with you.

Lock the vehicle.

Additional information for steep slopes and hills

Before switching off the engine, rotate the steering wheel so that if the vehi- cle should move then it will be held by the kerb.

On slopes, turn the front wheels so that they are against the edge of the kerb.

Uphill, turn the wheels towards the centre of the road.

WARNING

The components of the exhaust system reach very high temperatures. This could cause a fire and considerable damage.

Always park your vehicle so that no part of the exhaust system can come in contact with flammable materials (such as wood, leaves, spilled fuel, dried grass, etc).

CAUTION Special care should be taken when parking in areas with high kerbs or fixed barriers. Objects protruding from the ground may damage the bumper or other parts of the vehicle during manoeuvres. To avoid damage, stop be- fore the wheels touch the barrier or kerb.

Special attention is required when driving through entrances, over ramps, kerbs or other objects. The vehicle underbody, bumpers, mudguards and running gear, and the engine and exhaust system could be damaged as you drive over these objects.

Information about the brakes

For the first 200 to 300 km (100 to 200 miles), new brake pads have not yet reached their maximum braking capacity, and need to be run in first . The slightly reduced braking effect can be compensated for by increasing pressure on the brake pedal. While running in, the full braking distance or emergency braking distance is larger then when the brake pads have been run in. While running in, avoid full power braking or situations requiring braking performance. For example, in heavy traffic.

The rate of wear of the brake pads depends to a great extent on the condi- tions in which the vehicle is used and the way the vehicle is driven. If the vehicle is used frequently in city traffic or for short trips or driven sport style, visit a specialised workshop regularly, more frequently than advised in the Maintenance Programme, to have the bake pads checked.

173Driving

If you drive with wet brakes, for example, after crossing areas of water, in heavy rainfall or even after washing the car, the effect of the brakes is less- ened as the brake discs are wet or even frozen (in winter). At higher speed, dry the brakes as quickly as possible by braking gently several times. On- ly do this without endangering vehicles behind you or any other road users .

A layer of salt on the discs and brake pads will reduce the effectiveness of the brakes and increase braking distance. If you drive for a prolonged peri- od on salted roads without braking then brake carefully several times to eliminate the layer of salt on the brakes .

If the vehicle remains parked for considerable lengths of time, is used little, or if the brakes are not used, there may be corrosion on the brake discs and a build up of dirt on the brake pads. If the brakes are not used frequently, or if rust has formed on the discs, SEAT recommends cleaning the pads and discs by braking firmly a few times at a moderately high speed. Only do this without endangering vehicles behind you or any other road users .

Faults in the brake system

During braking, if you notice that the vehicle does not react as usual (that the braking distance has increased suddenly) it may be possible that there is a fault in the braking system. The warning lamp lights up and a text message displayed. Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop immediately and have the fault repaired. Drive at a moderate speed and be prepared to use more pressure on the brake pedal, and allow for longer stopping distan- ces.

Brake servo

The brake servo only operates when the engine is running and the pressure applied by the driver on the brake pedal increases.

If the brake servo does not operate or the vehicle must be towed, then the brake pedal will have to be pressed with more force given that the braking distance will be increased when the brake servo does not operate .

WARNING

New brake pads do not brake to full efficiency.

For the first 320 km (200 miles), new brake pads have not yet reached their maximum braking capacity, and need to be run in first. For this, to compensate for reduced braking efficiency the brake pedal will have to be pressed with more force.

To avoid losing control of the vehicle and causing serious accidents, always take great care when driving with new brake pads.

When running in new brake pads, always respect the safety distances between you and other vehicles and do not cause situations requiring ex- treme braking performance.

WARNING

When brakes overheat, braking is less efficient and braking distances in- crease.

When driving on slopes, brakes can be overloaded and overheat quickly.

Reduce speed or reduce the gear when faced with steep and long slopes. This allows you to use the engine braking effect and to reduce the strain on the brake system.

Non-standard or damaged front spoilers could restrict the airflow to the brakes and cause them to overheat.

WARNING

Wet, frozen or salt-covered brakes take time to brake and this increases braking distances.

Test the brakes carefully.

Dry the brakes, free them of ice and salt by braking gently several times, when weather, road and traffic conditions permit.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

174 Driving

WARNING

Driving without the brake servo may significantly increase the braking distance and result in a severe accident.

Never allow the vehicle to move forwards when the engine is switched off.

If the brake servo does not operate or the vehicle must be towed, then the brake pedal will have to be pressed with more force given that the braking distance will be increased when the brake servo does not op- erate.

CAUTION Never make the brakes slip by pressing the pedal gently, if it is not really necessary to brake. Continuously pressing on the brake pedal will heat the brakes. This could significantly reduce braking power, increase braking distance or even result in the total failure of the brake system.

Reduce speed or reduce the gear when faced with steep and long slopes. This allows you to use the engine braking effect and to reduce the strain on the brake system. Otherwise, the brakes may overheat and fail. Only use the brakes to reduce speed or to stop.

Note When checking the front brake pads, take the time to also check the rear brake pads. The thickness of the brake pads should be checked visually and regularly, by looking through the openings in the wheel rims or from under- neath the vehicle. If necessary, remove the wheels to check them thorough- ly. SEAT recommends visiting a Technical Service.

Brake assist systems

The brake assist systems ESC, ABS, BAS, ASR and EDL only operate when the ignition is switched on. They contribute significantly to increasing active safety.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

ESC reduces the risk of skidding and increases the vehicle stability by brak- ing individual wheels under specific driving conditions. ESC detects critical handling situations, such as understeering, oversteering and wheelspin on the driven wheels. The system stabilises the vehicle by braking individual wheels or by reducing the engine torque.

The ESC has limits. It is important to realise that the ESC is also subject to the laws of physics. ESC will not be able to deal with all situations with which drivers may be faced. For example, if the road surface changes sud- denly then ESC will not be useful in all cases. If the vehicle suddenly enters a section covered by water, mud or snow then ESC will not provide assis- tance in the same way as on dry ground. If the vehicle loses its grip on the ground and moves on a film of water (aquaplaning), the ESC will not be able to help the driver to control the vehicle due to the loss of adherence with the road surface preventing braking and steering. If the vehicle is driv- en through series of bends at high speed, the ESC will not always be as ef- fective: the vehicle reaction to aggressive driving is not the same as at re- duced speeds. When driving with a trailer, ESC does not provide the same amount of vehicle control as without a trailer.

Adjust your speed and driving style to road, traffic and weather conditions. ESC cannot push the limits of the laws of physics; improve the transmission available or maintain the vehicle on the road if a lack of driver attention cre- ates an inevitable situation. Otherwise, ESC assists in maintaining vehicle control in extreme situations and uses the movements of the steering made by the driver to maintain the vehicle moving in the desired direction. If the vehicle is driven at such a speed that it will leave the road before ESC can intervene then the system cannot provide assistance.

175Driving

The ABS, BAS, ASR and EDL systems are incorporated into the ESC. The ESC is always on. The ESC should only be turned off using the ASR button Fig. 140 when traction is insufficient. Always remember to turn on the ASR once more when the vehicle has traction again.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

ABS can prevent the wheels from locking during braking until just before the vehicle stops thus helping the driver to steer the vehicle and maintain control. This means that, even during full braking, the risk of skidding is re- duced:

Press and hold the brake pedal fully. Do not remove your foot from the brake pedal or reduce braking force!

Do not pump the brake pedal, or reduce braking force!

Maintain vehicle direction when braking fully.

When the brake pedal is released or when the brake force is reduced, ABS is turned off.

ABS control can be observed by vibration of the brake pedal and noise. You should never expect the ABS to reduce the braking distance under any cir- cumstances. Braking distances will increase when driving on gravel, new snow or on icy and slippery ground.

When driving on loose ground, the all-terrain configuration of the ABS is au- tomatically turned on. When ABS is activated, the front wheels may lock briefly. This shortens the braking distance in off-road situations as the wheels are prevented from digging into loose surfaces. All-terrain ABS only intervenes when driving in a straight line. When the front wheels are turned, the normal ABS is activated.

Brake assist system (BAS)

The brake assist system may reduce the required braking distance. The brake assist system boosts the braking force if you press the brake pedal quickly in an emergency. As a result, the braking pressure increases rapidly, the braking force is multiplied and the braking distance is reduced. This en- ables the ABS to be activated more quickly and effectively.

Do not lift your foot off the brake pedal! When the brake pedal is released or when the brake force is reduced, braking assist automatically turns off the brake servo.

Traction control when accelerating (ASR)

In the event of wheelspin, the traction control system reduces the engine torque to match the amount of grip available. The ASR makes some situa- tions easier, for example, when starting, accelerating or going uphill, even in unfavourable road conditions.

The ASR can be switched on or off manually page 176.

Electronic differential lock system (EDL and XDS)

EDL is available when driving in straight lines under normal conditions. When the EDL detects wheelspin, it brakes the spinning wheel and directs the power to the other drive wheels. To prevent the disc brake of the braked wheel from overheating, the EDL cuts out automatically if subjected to ex- cessive loads. The EDL will switch on again automatically when the brake has cooled down.

The XDS function is an extension of the electronic differential lock. The XDS does not react to the traction of the driving wheels, but to the adherence of the front wheel on the inside of the curve whilst gripping rapidly in corners. The XDS gives pressure to the brakes of the wheel on the interior of the cor- ner to prevent skidding. This improves traction, which assists the vehicle in continuing the required line.

WARNING

Driving at high speed on icy, slippery wet ground can result in loss of ve- hicle control and serious injury to the driver and passengers.

Adjust your speed and driving style to visibility, road, traffic and weather conditions. Even though the brake assist systems, ABS, BAS, EDL, TCS and ESC improve safety, do not take unnecessary risks while driving.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

176 Driving

WARNING (Continued)

Brake assist systems can not overcome the laws of physics. Even with ESC and other systems, slippery and wet roads will always be dangerous.

Driving to quickly on wet ground can result in the wheels losing con- tact with the ground in an effect known as aquaplaning. Without ad- herence, it is impossible to brake, steer or control the vehicle.

Brake assist systems cannot avoid accidents if, for example, the driv- er does not respect safety distances or drives to quickly in difficult condi- tions.

Even though brake assist systems are extremely effective and help control the vehicle in difficult situations, remember that the vehicle sta- bility depends on tyre grip.

When accelerating on a slippery surface, for example on ice and snow, press the accelerator carefully. The wheels can still slip even with brake assist systems resulting in loss of vehicle control.

WARNING

The effectiveness of the ESC can be considerably reduced if other compo- nents and systems affecting driving dynamics are not maintained or are not functioning correctly. This includes, among others, brakes, tyres and other systems already mentioned.

Remember that changing and fitting other components to the vehicle can affect operation of the ABS, BAS, ASL EDL and ESC.

Changes to the vehicle suspension or using unapproved wheel/tyre combinations can affect operation of the ABS, BAS, TCS, EDL and ESC and their effectiveness.

Likewise, the effectiveness of ESC depends on the use of suitable tyres page 267.

Note To ensure that the ESC and ASR work properly, all four wheels must be fitted with identical tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius of the tyres can cause the system to reduce engine power when this is not desired.

If a malfunction should occur in the ABS, the ESC, EDL and ASR will also be out of action.

Noises may be heard while any of the above systems are operating.

Turning on and off the ASR

Fig. 140 Detailed view of the centre console: but- ton used to switch ASR on and off (vehicles with ESC)

The electronic stability control ESC consists of ABS, EDL and ASR and only works when the engine is running.

The ASR can be switched off while the engine is running by pressing the OFF Fig. 140 button. The ASR (and similar) is only switched off when the

required traction is not obtained:

When driving through deep snow or on loose ground (gravel, etc.).

When freeing a trapped vehicle.

Turn the ASR back on by pressing the button OFF Fig. 140.

177Driving

Brake fluid

Fig. 141 In the engine compartment: brake fluid reservoir lid.

In the course of time, the brake fluid absorbs water from the ambient air. If there is too much water contained in the brake fluid, the brake system could be damaged. In addition, the boiling point of the brake fluid is significantly lowered. When the brake fluid contains too much water and the brakes are subject to considerable forces, bubbles of water vapour can form in the sys- tem. These bubbles of water vapour can significantly reduce braking power, notably increasing braking distance, and could even result in the total fail- ure of the brake system. Ensuring that the brake system is always function- ing correctly is essential for your own safety and the safety of other road users .

Brake fluid specifications

SEAT have developed a special brake fluid optimised for the brake systems of their vehicles. To ensure the optimum working of the brake system, SEAT recommends the use of brake fluid in accordance with the VW 501 14 standard. If this brake fluid is not available or another brake fluid is used for other reasons, use a brake fluid that complies with the United States stand- ard FMVSS 116 DOT 4 or the German standard DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 .

Brake fluids conforming to the standard VW 501 14 fulfil the American re- quirements of the FMVSS 116 DOT 4 standard and the German DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standard. However, other fluids that comply with the American FMVSS 116 DOT 4 standard or the German DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4

standard may not necessarily comply with the VW 501 14 standard. Always check the information on the brake fluid container and ensure that you are using suitable brake fluid.

A suitable brake fluid can be obtained from Technical Services.

Brake fluid level

The level of the brake fluid should always be between the MIN and MAX marks, or above the MIN mark .

It is not always possible to check the level of the brake fluid, as in some models the engine components make it difficult to see the brake fluid reser- voir. If you cannot read the exact brake fluid level, consult a specialist.

The brake fluid level drops slightly when the vehicle is being used due to wear of the brake pads and the automatic readjustment of the brake.

Changing the brake fluid

The brake fluid should be changed in accordance with the instructions giv- en in the Maintenance Programme. Have the brake fluid changed by a spe- cialised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a Technical Service. This means that only brake fluid complying with the required specifications will be used.

WARNING

If the brake fluid level is low or unsuitable/old brake fluid is used, the brake system may fail or braking power may be reduced.

Check the brake system and the brake fluid level regularly!

The brake fluid should be changed regularly in accordance with the instructions given in the Maintenance Programme.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

178 Driving

WARNING (Continued)

When the brake fluid is used and brakes are subjected to extreme braking forces, bubbles of vapour form in the brake system. These bub- bles of water vapour can significantly reduce braking power, notably in- creasing braking distance, and could even result in the total failure of the brake system.

Only used brake fluid that conforms to the VW 501 14 standard, FMVSS 116 DOT 4 standard or even the DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standard. Other types of brake fluid could affect brake operation and reduce brak- ing power. Do not use a brake fluid if the container does not specify com- pliance with the VW 501 14, FMVSS 116 DOT 4 or DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standards.

The replacement brake fluid must be new.

Always ensure that you use suitable brake fluid. Do not use a brake fluid if the container does not specify compliance with the VW 501 14, FMVSS 116 DOT 4 or DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standards.

WARNING

Brake fluid is poisonous.

To reduce the risk of poisoning, do not keep brake fluid in drinks bot- tles/containers or similar. Other people could drink from these recipients even if the contents are clearly marked.

Always keep brake fluid in the original container; keep it correctly sealed and out of reach of children.

CAUTION Brake fluid damages the vehicle paintwork. Wipe off any brake fluid from the paintwork immediately.

For the sake of the environment Brake fluid is an environmental pollutant. Collect any spilt service fluids and allow a professional to dispose of them.

179Driver assistance systems

Driver assistance systems

Start assist systems

Introduction

WARNING

The intelligent technology in the start assist systems cannot change the laws of physics. The improved comfort provided by start assist systems should not prompt you to take risks.

Unintentional movements of the vehicle could cause serious injury.

The start assist systems are not a replacement for driver awareness.

Always try to adapt the speed of the vehicle and your style of driving to the condition of the ground or the road and to weather and traffic con- ditions.

The start assist system cannot keep the vehicle stationary in all con- ditions on a gradient or cause it to brake on steep downhill gradients, e.g. if the road is slippery or icy.

Auto Hold function*

Fig. 142 Detailed view of the centre console: Au- to Hold button

The control lamp on the button switches on when the Auto Hold function is on.

When the Auto-Hold function is on, it helps the driver if they must regularly stop the vehicle or if they must stop with the engine running for prolonged periods, for example, on hills, before a traffic light or in traffic jams with continuous stopping and starting.

The Auto-Hold function automatically prevents the vehicle from rolling away accidentally when at a standstill, without the driver having to keep his/her foot on the brake pedal.

When the system that detects that the vehicle has stopped, the Auto Hold keeps the vehicle at a standstill. The brake pedal can be released.

If the driver presses the brake pedal briefly or presses the accelerator to start off, the Auto-Hold function releases the brake once more. The vehicle moves according to the gradient.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

180 Driver assistance systems

If any of the conditions necessary for the Auto Hold function change while the vehicle stopped, the system is turned off as is the indicator on the but- ton Fig. 142. The electronic parking brake engages where necessary to park the vehicle safely .

Conditions for keeping the vehicle at a standstill with Auto Hold:

The driver door must be closed.

The driver seat belt must be buckled.

The engine must be running.

The ASR system is switched on page 168.

Switching Auto Hold on and off manually

Press the AUTO HOLD button . The control lamp on the button switches off when the Auto Hold function is switched off.

Permanent Auto Hold connection

The Auto Hold function must be switched on every time the engine is star- ted. However, to switch the Auto Hold function on permanently, the mark must be switched on in the Settings menu, Autohold submenu page 56.

Auto Hold works automatically under the following conditions:

All points must be fulfilled simultaneously :

Manual gearbox Automatic gearbox

1. If the vehicle is stopped using the brake pedal on a flat or slope.

2. The engine must be running smoothly.

3. On a slope, the 1st gear is engag- ed uphill or the reverse gear is en- gaged for a downhill. The clutch must be held down.

A gear for driving is selected from R, D or S.

Upon accelerating and pressing in the clutch simultaneously, the brake releases gradually.

Upon accelerating, the brake re- leases gradually.

Auto Hold turns off automatically under the following conditions:

Manual gearbox Automatic gearbox

1. If one of the conditions mentioned in table on page 180 changes.

2. If the engine is not running regularly or if there is a malfunction.

3. When changing to idle speed. If the selector lever is placed in neutral (N).

4. If the engine is turned off or stalls. If the engine is switched off.

5. If the driver accelerates while pressing the clutch in.

If the vehicle is accelerated.

6. When one of the wheels has mini- mal contact with the ground (for example, on uneven ground).

WARNING

The Auto Hold technology is limited by the laws of physics. The improved comfort provided by Auto Hold should never prompt you to take risks.

Never leave the vehicle running and with the Auto Hold function switched on.

Auto-Hold cannot always stop the vehicle uphill and downhill (for ex- ample, if the ground is slippery or frozen).

CAUTION Before entering an automatic car wash, always switch the Auto Hold func- tion off, as it could be damaged when the electronic parking brake automat- ically engages.

181Driver assistance systems

Start-Stop Function*

Fig. 143 Detailed view of the centre console: Start- Stop function button

In Start-Stop mode, the engine is automatically switched off when the vehi- cle is at a standstill. The engine restarts automatically when required.

The function is enabled automatically whenever the ignition is switched on. The instrument panel displays information on the current status.

Vehicles with a manual gearbox

When the vehicle is at a standstill, leave it in neutral and take your foot off the clutch. The engine switches off.

Simply depress the clutch pedal to move off again.

Vehicles with an automatic gearbox

When the vehicle is at a standstill, depress the brake or keep it pressed down. The engine switches off.

The engine will start again as soon as you release the brake pedal.

With the selector lever set to position P, the engine will not start until a range of gears is selected or the accelerator pedal is depressed.

Important conditions for the engine to automatically switch off

The driver seat belt must be buckled.

The driver door must be closed.

The bonnet must be closed.

The factory-fitted towing bracket must not be electrically connected to a trailer.

A minimum engine temperature has been reached.

The steering wheel must not be turned more than 270 degrees.

The vehicle has moved since the last stop.

In vehicles with Climatronic: The temperature inside the vehicle is within the preset temperature range.

The temperature set is neither very high nor very low.

The air conditioning defrost function is not switched on.

In vehicles with Climatronic: the blower has not been manually set to a high speed.

The power level of the vehicle's battery is sufficient.

The vehicle's battery temperature is neither too high nor too low.

The vehicle is not on a steep gradient or slope.

The front wheels are not overly turned.

The heated windscreen is not switched on.

Reverse gear is not engaged.

The park assist system is not switched on.

Conditions for automatically restarting the engine

The engine may automatically restart under the following conditions:

If the vehicle interior is too hot or too cold.

If the vehicle moves.

If the vehicle's battery voltage drops.

Conditions requiring the key to restart the engine

The engine must be started using the key under the following conditions:

If the driver unbuckles his/her seat belt.

If the driver door is opened.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

182 Driver assistance systems

If the bonnet is opened.

In vehicles with a manual gearbox: If a gear has been selected.

Switching Start-Stop mode on and off manually

Press the button on the centre console Fig. 143.

The button will light up when the Start-Stop function is switched off.

The engine will start immediately if the vehicle is in Stop mode when it is switched off manually.

WARNING

The brake servo and the power steering do not work when the engine is switched off.

Never allow the vehicle to move when the engine is switched off.

CAUTION Using the Start-Stop function for a long period at very high outside tempera- tures could damage the vehicle's battery.

Note In some cases, you may have to restart the vehicle using the key. Ob- serve the corresponding message on the instrument panel display.

If the steering wheel is turned more than 270, Stop will not function; however, the angle of steering wheel turn does not affect starting the vehi- cle.

Parking sensor system*

Introduction

The parking sensor system assists the driver when parking. When the vehi- cle approaches an obstacle, either in front or behind, an intermittent audi- ble warning will be heard, higher or lower depending on the distance. The shorter the distance, the shorter the intervals between tones. If the vehicle is too close to the obstacle, the audible warning becomes constant.

If you continue to approach an obstacle when the sound is continuous, this means the system can no longer measure the distance.

The sensor system on the bumpers transmit and receive ultrasound. Using the ultrasound signal (transmission, reflection from the obstacle and recep- tion), this system continuously calculates the distance between the bumper and the obstacle.

WARNING

The parking sensor system and the optical parking system cannot re- place driver awareness.

The sensors have blind spots in which obstacles and people are not registered.

Always observe the area around the vehicle, as the sensors do not al- ways detect small children, animals or objects.

The surface of certain objects and some clothing do not reflect the ul- trasound signals from the parking distance system. The system cannot detect or incorrectly detects these objects and people wearing these types of clothes.

External sound sources can affect the parking distance aid signals. In this case, under certain circumstances, people and objects will not be de- tected.

183Driver assistance systems

CAUTION The sensors may not always be able to detect objects such as trailer draw bars, thin rails, fences, posts, trees and open luggage compartments, etc. This could result in damage to your car.

Although the parking sensor system detects and warns of the presence of an obstacle, the obstacle could disappear from the angle of measure- ment of the sensors if it is too high or low and the system would no longer indicate it. Therefore, it will not warn you of these objects. Ignoring the warnings of the parking sensor system could cause considerable damage to the vehicle.

The bumper sensors may become damaged or misaligned, for example, when parking.

To ensure that the system works properly, the bumper sensors must be kept clean, free of ice and snow and uncovered.

When cleaning the sensors with high-pressure or steam cleaning equip- ment, spray the sensors briefly at a distance of no less than 10 cm (4 in- ches).

Note Acoustic sources may lead to erroneous warnings on the parking sensor system, e.g. rough tarmac, cobbles or the noise of other vehicles.

Parking sensor system*

Fig. 144 Detailed view of the centre console: but- ton for switching the parking sensor system on and off

Fig. 145 Parking sensor system sensors on the front bumper

The parking sensor system assists the driver when parking. If the vehicle is approaching an obstacle, an intermittent audible warning is emitted. The shorter the distance, the shorter the intervals between tones. If the vehicle is too close to the obstacle, the audible warning becomes constant.

Switching the parking sensor system on and off

Press the button Fig. 144 when the ignition is switched on.

Automatic on: select reverse gear.

Automatic off: Do not drive faster than 15 km/h (9 mph).

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

184 Driver assistance systems

The button lights up when the function is switched on.

Things to note regarding the parking sensor system

The parking sensor system sometimes registers water on the sensors as an obstacle.

If the distance does not change, the warning signal will sound less loud- ly after a few seconds. If the continuous signal sounds, the volume will re- main constant.

When the vehicle moves away from the obstacle, the beeping sound au- tomatically switches off. On approaching the obstacle again, the beeping sound will automatically switch back on.

If the electronic parking brake is engaged or the selector lever is set to P, no audible warning will be emitted.

Your Technical Service can adjust the volume of the warning signals.

Note If the parking sensor system is faulty, a constant audible warning will be emitted the first time it is switched on and the button will flash. Switch the parking sensor system off using the button and take the vehicle to a speci- alised workshop to have the system checked as soon as possible.

Optical parking system* (OPS)

Fig. 146 On-screen OPS display: A an obstacle has been detected in the collision zone; B an ob- stacle has been detected in the section; C scan- ned area behind the vehi- cle.

Fig. 147 On-screen OPS display: A an obstacle has been detected in the segment; B scanned area in front of the vehi- cle.

The optical parking system is an accessory to the Parking sensor system page 183 and the park assist system page 186.

The zone recorded by the sensors in front of and behind the vehicle is dis- played on the factory-fitted radio or navigation system screen. Any obsta- cles are display in relation to the vehicle .

185Driver assistance systems

Function Necessary operations

Switching the display on:

Switch on the parking sensor system page 183 or the park assist system page 186. The OPS switches on automatically.

Switching the display off manually:

Press a zone selection button on the factory-fit- ted radio or navigation system OR: Briefly press the function button or RVC

on the screen.

Switching the display off manually:

Drive forwards at more than about 10-15 km/h (6 to 9 mph). Select the reverse gear on vehicles with rear as- sist page 189. The display changes to the im- age of the camera.

Zones explored

The zone in which obstacles are recognised runs to a distance of around 120 cm from the front of the vehicle and up to 60 cm to the side Fig. 147 B . Behind the vehicle, the zone analysed reaches a distance of up to

160 cm and around 60 cm to the sides Fig. 146 C .

Screen display

The image displayed represents the supervised zones in several segments. As the vehicle moves closer to an obstacle, the segment moves closer to the vehicle displayed Fig. 146 B and Fig. 147 A . When the penultimate segment is displayed, this means that the vehicle has reached the collision zone. Stop the vehicle!

Distance from the vehicle to the obstacle

Audible warn- ing

Displayed in colour on the screen: colour of the segment if an obstacle is

recognised

Front: approx. 31 - 120 cm Behind: approx. 31 - 160 cm

beeping sound

Yellow

approx. 0 30 cm in front or be- hinda)

sustained beep

Red

a) The permanent sound starts at a somewhat greater distance on vehicles with a factory-fit- ted towing bracket.

With towing bracket

A specific image is displayed on the screen of vehicles with a factory-fitted towing bracket and an electrically connected trailer. In this case, the distan- ces behind the vehicle are not indicated.

Switching the parking sensor system sound on and off

If the button on the radio or navigation system screen may mute the sound of OPS warnings. To switch the warnings back on, press the button again briefly.

When the OPS is switched off and back on again, muting is cancelled. Error messages cannot be switched off.

WARNING

Do not be distracted from the traffic when looking at the screen.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

186 Driver assistance systems

Park Assist system*

Introduction

The Park Assist system helps the driver to find a suitable place to park, to insert the vehicle into parallel and perpendicular parking places and to exit parallel parking places.

The Park Assist system is limited to the system abilities and requires that the driver is especially attentive .

The parking sensor system is a component of the Park Assist system that helps to park the vehicle.

For vehicles with the optical parking system (OPS), the radio or navigation systems screen displays the detected zones in front of and behind the vehi- cle, indicating - within the limits of the system - the position of obstacles compared to the vehicle.

The park assist system cannot be switched on if the factory-fitted towing bracket is electrically connected to a trailer.

WARNING

Despite the assistance provided by the park assist system, do not run any risks when parking. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness.

Unintentional movements of the vehicle could cause serious injury.

Adjust your speed and driving style to visibility, road, traffic and weather conditions.

The surface of certain objects and items of clothing and external sound sources may have a negative affect on the park assist signals or on the system sensors or may not reflect its signals.

WARNING (Continued)

The sensors have blind spots in which obstacles and people are not registered.

Always observe the area around the vehicle, as the sensors do not al- ways detect small children, animals or objects.

CAUTION The park assist system aims exclusively at other parked vehicles, with- out taking curbs or other circumstances into account. Make sure you do not damage the tyres and wheel rims when parking. Where necessary, stop ma- noeuvring to avoid damaging the vehicle.

The sensors may not always be able to detect objects such as trailer draw bars, thin rails, fences, posts and trees, etc. This could result in dam- age to your car.

Although the parking sensor system detects and warns of the presence of an obstacle, the obstacle could disappear from the angle of measure- ment of the sensors if it is too high or low and the system would no longer indicate it. Therefore, it will not warn you of these objects. Ignoring the warnings of the parking sensor system could cause considerable damage to the vehicle. This is also valid when using the park assist (e.g. parking be- hind a truck or motorcycle). Therefore, always keep a close watch on the area in front of and behind the vehicle while parking, and intervene prompt- ly if necessary.

To ensure that the system works properly, the bumper sensors must be kept clean, free of ice and snow and uncovered.

The bumper sensors may become damaged or misaligned, for example, when parking.

When cleaning the sensors with high-pressure or steam cleaning equip- ment, spray the sensors briefly at a distance of no less than 10 cm.

Note Contact a specialised workshop with any system faults. SEAT recommends visiting a Technical Service.

187Driver assistance systems

Parking using the park assist system

Fig. 148 Detailed view of the centre console: but- ton to switch the park as- sist system on manually

Fig. 149 Gap detected: Engage the reverse gear to park (parallel or nose/tail to the kerb)

Preparing to park

The Traction control system ASR must be turned on page 168.

Parallel parking: press the button at speeds up to 50 km/h (31 mph) once. When the function is enabled, the button Fig. 148 will light up.

Perpendicular parking: press the button at speeds up to 50 km/h (31 mph) twice. When the function is enabled, the button Fig. 148 will light up.

If necessary, press the button once more to change parking mode.

Apply the turn signal for the side on which a gap is to be detected for parking. The instrument panel displays the side corresponding to the road.

Parking

Parking parallel to the road: Drive next to the gap at a speed of no more than 40 km/h (25 mph) and at a distance of between 0.5 m and 2 m.

Parking perpendicular to the road: Drive next to the gap at a speed of no more than 20 km/h (12 mph) and at a distance of between 0.5 m and 2 m.

The best parking results will be achieved if you position the vehicle as parallel as possible to the line of parked cars or the kerb.

When a suitable parking place is displayed on the instrument panel, stop and select reverse gear.

Follow the instructions given on the instrument panel display

Then, release the steering wheel when the warning signal sounds : The system will move the steering wheel! Observe the surrounding area.

Observe the surrounding area and accelerate carefully at a maximum of up to 7 km/h (4 mph).

The park assist system is only responsible for moving the steering wheel during the manoeuvre. The driver applies the accelerator, the clutch, the gears and the brake.

Follow the instructions given by the park assist system until the ma- noeuvre is completed.

The park assist system steers the vehicle forwards and backwards until it is in a straight position in the parking space.

The manoeuvre is complete when the corresponding indication is given on the instrument panel display.

Stopping the parking manoeuvre

The park assist system stops the manoeuvre in the event of one of the fol- lowing:

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

188 Driver assistance systems

Press button .

Driving faster than 7 km/h (4 mph).

The driver moves the steering wheel.

The parking manoeuvre has not been completed, and six minutes have passed since the park assist system was activated.

A sliding door is opened. To restart the manoeuvre, close the sliding door and press the button again.

There is a system malfunction (system temporarily unavailable).

The ASR system is switched off or the ASR or ESC is working.

WARNING

The steering wheel turns quickly by itself when parking using the park assist system. Placing your hand between the steering wheel spokes could lead to injuries.

Note The park assist system has its limitations. For example, it is not possible to park on tight bends using the park assist system.

Even if the park assist system recognises that there is not enough space for parking the vehicle, the instrument panel display will still show this place. In this case, the parking manoeuvre should not be requested.

Changing gears between forward and reverse gears before indicated (that is, before the signal from the parking sensor system) the parking re- sults may not be ideal.

For parallel parking (parallel to the road), a sound will tell the driver when they must change from forward gears to reverse; the signal from the parking sensor system does not indicate changes of direction.

The park assist can also be activated afterwards, if you pass close to a parallel parking space at a maximum of 40 km/h (25 mph) or close to a per- pendicular parking space at about 20 km/h (12 mph) then press the button .

The progress bar on the screen of the instrument panel shows a display of the relative distance to be covered.

When the Park Assist system is turning the steering wheel of the stop- ped vehicle the symbol is also displayed. Press on the brake pedal so that the steering can turn with the vehicle at a standstill and thus reduce the number of manoeuvres.

A suitable parking space length is at least 1.1 m greater than the length of the vehicle.

If the results of the park assist system are not as good after changing the wheels, the system must memorise the perimeter of the new wheels. This process is performed automatically while the vehicle is in motion. To help this process, turn slowly (at less than 20 km/h (12 mph)), e.g. in an empty car park.

Leaving a parking space using the Park Assist system

Driving off

Switch on the engine.

Press button . When the function is enabled, the button Fig. 148 will light up.

Apply the turn signal for the side on which you want to leave the parking space.

Select reverse gear.

Follow the instructions given by the park assist system.

When the next indication appears, release the steering wheel in Parking using the park assist system on page 188: The system will move the steering wheel! Observe the surrounding area.

Observe the surrounding area and accelerate carefully at a maximum of up to 7 km/h (4 mph).

189Driver assistance systems

The park assist system is only responsible for moving the steering wheel during the manoeuvre. The driver applies the accelerator, the clutch, the gears and the brake.

When it is possible to leave the parking space, the Park Assist system will stop. Take control of the steering and when traffic conditions permit, leave the parking space.

Automatic stoppage of the manoeuvre

The park assist system stops the manoeuvre in the event of one of the fol- lowing:

Driving faster than 7 km/h (4 mph).

The driver moves the steering wheel.

A sliding door is opened. To restart the manoeuvre, close the sliding door and press the button again.

There is a system malfunction (system temporarily unavailable).

The ASR system is switched off or the ASR or ESC is working.

WARNING

The steering wheel turns quickly automatically when leaving a parking space using the park assist system. Placing your hand between the steer- ing wheel spokes could lead to injuries.

Park Assist brake operation

The Park Assist system helps the driver by braking automatically. Automatic braking does not relieve the driver of responsibility for controlling the accel- erator, brake and clutch .

Braking to avoid damage at excess speed

It is possible that the system operates the brakes to reduce excess speed. The parking manoeuvre can then continue. The brakes will intervene during each parking process.

Braking to minimise damage

When approaching an obstacle, the vehicle may brake automatically. In cer- tain circumstances (for example, storm, detection of ultrasound, vehicle sta- tus, load, inclination), the Park Assist system may stop the vehicle com- pletely before an object.

Press the foot brake !

Following the intervention of the brakes, the Park Assist will stop.

WARNING

Despite the assistance provided by the park assist system, do not run any risks when parking. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness.

Always be ready to brake.

Automatic brake intervention will end after 1.5 seconds approximate- ly. Following automatic intervention of the brakes, stop the vehicle your- self.

Rear Assist system*

Introduction

The camera fitted to the rear lid helps drivers during parking or reversing manoeuvres. The camera image and certain orientation points generated by the system are indicated on the factory-fitted radio or navigation system screen.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

190 Driver assistance systems

Two types of location point (modes) can be selected:

Mode 1: reverse parking perpendicular to the road (e.g. in a car park).

Mode 2: reverse parking parallel to the curb.

The mode can be changed by pressing the button on the radio or navigation system screen. Only the mode to which the points can be changed will be displayed.

WARNING

Use of the camera to calculate the distance from obstacles (people, vehi- cles, etc.) is inaccurate and may cause accidents and severe injuries.

The camera lens expands and distorts the field of vision and displays the objects on the screen in a different, vague manner.

Some objects may not be displayed or may not be very clear (e.g. very thin posts or fences), due to the resolution of the monitor or if the light is dim.

The camera has blind spots in which obstacles and people are not registered.

Keep the camera lens clean and clear of snow and ice. Do not cover it.

WARNING

The intelligent technology in the rear assist system cannot change the limits imposed by the laws of physics and by the system itself. Careless or uncontrolled use of the rear assist system may result in severe injuries and accidents. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness.

Adjust your speed and driving style to visibility, road, traffic and weather conditions.

WARNING (Continued)

Always keep a close eye on the area around the vehicle and always look towards where you are parking. The display shows the path of the rear end of the vehicle using the current steering angle. The front of the vehicle turns more in comparison with the rear.

Do not be distracted from the traffic when looking at the screen.

Always observe the area around the vehicle, as the cameras do not al- ways detect children, animals or objects.

The system might not show all areas clearly.

Only use the rear assist system when the boot lid is completely closed.

CAUTION The camera only displays 2D images on the screen. Due to the lack of depth, it might be difficult or impossible to recognise protruding objects or cracks in the road.

The cameras may not always be able to detect objects such as thin rails, fences, posts and trees, etc. This could result in damage to your car.

191Driver assistance systems

User instructions

Fig. 150 On the rear lid: location of the rear assist camera

Fig. 151 Rear assist dis- play: mode 2 connected

Function buttons on the screen:

display the menu; hide the menu.

Turning off the reversing camera images

Display help. The help list explains the surfaces and lines on the cam- era image. Press to exit help.

Mute the sound.

Adjust the display: brightness, contrast, colour.

1

2

3

4

5

Switching on the orientation points for rear parking perpendicular to the road (mode 1).

Displaying the optical parking system.

Function Operations in vehicles with no optical parking system (OPS)

Operations in vehicles with the optical parking system (OPS)

Switching the display on auto- matically:

select reverse gear with the ignition switched on or the engine running. Mode 1 will be displayed.

Switching the display off man- ually:

Press a button to select the area on the radio or the navi- gation system Booklet Radio or Booklet Navigation

system.

OR: Press the button on the screen.

OR: After switching off the ignition, the rear assist image remains on the screen for a short period.

Press button .

Switching off the display by disengaging re- verse gear:

The image will switch off af- ter around 10 seconds.

The OPS display will imme- diately be shown.

Switching off the display by driving for- wards:

Drive forwards at more than approximately 15 km/h (9 mph).

Drive forwards at more than approximately 10 km/h (6 mph).

Things to note

1) Do not use the rear assist system in the following cases:

If there is a fault in the dynamic chassis control (DCC).

If the image displayed is not very clear or reliable (low visibility or dirty lens).

If the space behind the vehicle cannot be clearly or completely recog- nised.

If the vehicle has been overloaded at the rear.

6

7

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

192 Driver assistance systems

1) Do not use the rear assist system in the following cases:

If the driver is not familiar with the system.

If the rear lid is open.

- If the position and installation angle of the camera have been changed, e.g. in a rear-end collision: have a specialised workshop check the system.

2) Optical illusions of the camera (examples)

The rear assist camera produces two-dimensional images. Any cracks in or objects protruding from the ground or from other vehicles are more diffi- cult to spot or cannot be seen due to a lack of depth in the image dis- played.

Objects or other vehicles may seem to be closer or further away than what they really are:

On changing from a flat surface to a slope or gradient.

On changing from a slope or gradient to a flat surface.

If the vehicle has been overloaded at the rear.

On approaching protruding objects. These objects may be outside the angle of vision of the camera when reversing.

Cleaning the camera lens

Keep the camera lens clean and clear of snow and ice:

Moisten the lens using a commercially available, alcohol-based glass cleaning agent and clean the lens with a dry cloth .

Remove snow using a small brush.

Use de-icing spray to remove any ice .

CAUTION Never use abrasive cleaners to clean the camera lens.

Never remove snow or ice from the camera lens using warm or hot water. This could damage the lens.

Note SEAT recommends that you practise parking with the rear assist system in a quiet location or in a car park to become familiar with the system, in- cluding the orientation lines and their function.

The orientation lines will not be displayed on the screen if the rear lid is open or the factory-fitted towing bracket is electrically connected to a trailer.

Parking perpendicular to the road (mode 1)

Fig. 152 Display: orien- tation lines for the park- ing space behind the ve- hicle

Summary of the orientation points

Meaning of orientation lines displayed on the screen Fig. 152. All of the lengths of the orientation lines use a vehicle located on a horizontal surface as reference.

193Driver assistance systems

Red: safety distance; i.e. road area located up to around 40 cm behind the vehicle.

Green: prolongation of the rear of the vehicle (somewhat enlarged). The area shown in green ends around two metres behind the vehicle, on the road.

Yellow: prolongation of the rear of the vehicle as the steering wheel turns. The area shown in yellow ends around three metres behind the vehicle, on the road.

Parking

Stop the vehicle in front of a space and select reverse gear.

Reverse slowly and turn the steering wheel so that the yellow orientation lines guide you towards the space Fig. 152 3 .

Align the vehicle straight in the parking place using the help of the green orientation lines.

Parking parallel to the road (mode 2)

Fig. 153 Display: orien- tation lines and surfaces for the space behind the vehicle

After applying the turn signal, the lines and surfaces not required are de- leted.

1

2

3

Summary of the orientation points

Meaning of orientation lines and surfaces displayed on the screen Fig. 153. All of the lengths of the orientation lines use a vehicle located on a horizontal surface as reference.

Safety distance: road area located up to around 40 cm behind the vehi- cle.

Vehicle side limit.

Turning point when parking. When the yellow line touches the curb or another limit of the parking space, the point for changing direction (magnifying glass) will have been reached.

Free space required to park the vehicle in parallel. The surface dis- played must completely fit in the space.

Possible vehicle parked next to the curb.

Parking

Stop the vehicle 1 m away parallel to the parking space and select re- verse gear.

Switch on mode 2 on the navigation system screen for parallel parking.

Slowly reverse and turn the steering wheel so that the surface shown in yellow on the screen is clear of any obstacles 5 (e.g. another vehicle).

Turn the steering wheel fully towards the space and reverse slowly.

When the yellow line 3 touches the side limit of the space, e.g. the bor- der or curb (magnifying glass), turn the steering wheel fully in the opposite direction.

Continue reversing until the vehicle is inside the space, parallel to the road. Correct the position if necessary.

1

2

3

4

5

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

194 Driver assistance systems

Cruise Control* (Cruise control system- CCS)

Introduction

The cruise control system (CCS) is able to maintain the set speed when driv- ing forwards from approx. 20 km/h (12 mph).

The CCS only slows down by reducing the accelerator but not by braking .

WARNING

Use of the cruise control system could cause accidents and severe inju- ries if it is not possible to drive at a constant speed maintaining the safe- ty distance.

Do not use the cruise control system in heavy traffic, if the distance from the vehicle in front is insufficient, on steep roads, with several bends or in slippery circumstances (snow, ice, rain or loose gravel), or on flooded roads.

Never use the CCS when driving off-road or on unpaved roads.

Always adapt your speed and the distance to the vehicles ahead in line with visibility, weather conditions, the condition of the road and the traffic situation.

To avoid unexpected operation of the cruise control system, turn it off every time you finish using it.

It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for the prevailing road, traffic or weather conditions.

When travelling down hills, the CCS cannot maintain a constant speed. The vehicle tends to accelerate under its own weight. Select a lower gear or use the foot brake to slow the vehicle.

Warning and control lamp

Fig. 154 Instrument panel display: CCS status indications

It lights up

Possible cause Solution

This cruise control system maintains the set speed of the vehicle.

Several warning and control lamps should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few seconds.

Indication on display

There are different versions of the cruise control system. In vehicles with the multifunction display (MFI), the set speed is displayed on the instrument panel screen.

Status Fig. 154:

195Driver assistance systems

CCS temporarily switched off. The set speed is displayed in small fig- ures.

System error. Contact a specialised workshop.

CCS switched on. The speed memory is empty.

The CCS is switched on. The set speed is displayed in large figures.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings in Control and warning lamps on page 56.

Cruise control system operation

Fig. 155 On the left of the steering column: con- trol lever for cruise con- trol system (CCS).

A

B

C

D

Function Control position, control operations Fig. 155

Action

Switching on the CCS

Click ON 1

The system is switched on. The system does not maintain the speed because there is still no speed set.

Activating the CCS SET button A The current speed is stored and maintained.

Temporarily switching off the CCS

Press CANCEL 2

or engage the clutch or the brake

The cruise control system is switched off temporarily. The speed setting will remain stored.

Switching the CCS on again

Press RESUME 1

The stored speed is reached again and maintained. If no speed has been set then the vehicle will re- cord and maintain the actual speed of the vehicle.

Increasing the stored speed (dur- ing CCS setting)

Hold down SPEED + +

Short press: Increases the speed at intervals of 10 km/h and re- cords it. Long press: the vehicle acceler- ates while the button remains pressed. Release the button to store the current speed.

Reducing the stor- ed speed (during CCS setting)

Press SPEED

Short press: Reduces the speed at intervals of 10 km/h and records it. Long press: while this remains pressed, speed is reduced inter- rupting the accelerator without using the brakes. Release the but- ton to store the current speed.

Switching off the CCS

Click OFF 2 The system is switched off. The stored speed is deleted.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

196 Driver assistance systems

Travelling down hills with the CCS

When travelling down hills the CCS cannot maintain a constant speed. Slow the vehicle down using the brake pedal and reduce gears if required.

Automatic off

The cruise control system (CCS) is switched off automatically or temporarily:

If the system detects a fault that could affect the working order of the CCS.

If you increase the stored speed by using the accelerator for a certain time.

if the brake or clutch pedal is depressed.

If you change gears.

If the airbag is triggered.

Lane Assist system*

Introduction

WARNING

The intelligent technology in the lane assist system cannot change the limits imposed by the laws of physics and by the system itself. Careless or uncontrolled use of the Lane Assist system may cause accidents and injury. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness.

Always adapt your speed and the distance to the vehicles ahead in line with visibility, weather conditions, the condition of the road and the traffic situation.

WARNING (Continued)

Always keep your hands on the steering wheel so you can turn it at any time.

The lane assist system does not detect all road markings. In some cir- cumstances, the poor state of the road, structures located on it or certain objects may be mistakenly recognised as road markings by the lane as- sist system. In such situations, switch the lane assist system off immedi- ately.

Pay attention to the instructions on the instrument panel display and act accordingly to its requests.

Always pay attention to the vehicle's surroundings.

Note The lane assist system has been exclusively developed for driving on as- phalted roads.

Note If the Lane Assist system does not work as described in this chapter, do not use it and contact a specialised workshop.

Note If you observe any system malfunction, have the system checked by a speci- alised workshop.

197Driver assistance systems

Control lamps

Blinks or lights up

Possible cause Solution

(yellow)

Lane assist system connec- ted but inactive.

The system cannot clearly de- tect the lane. See page 198, The lane assist system is inac- tive (control lamp lit in yellow).

(green)

Lane assist system connec- ted and active.

Several warning and control lamps should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few seconds.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings in Control and warning lamps on page 56.

Operation mode

Fig. 156 In the wind- screen: Field of vision of the lane assist system camera

Using the camera located in the sun visor, the lane assist system detects any lines dividing the lanes. When the vehicle involuntarily approaches a di- viding line it has detected, the system will notify the driver with a corrective intervention. It is possible to override the corrective intervention at any time.

If the turn signal is connected, there will be no warning as the lane assist system understands that you wish to change lanes voluntarily.

Steering wheel vibration

The following situations cause the steering wheel to vibrate and require the driver to take active control of the steering:

If the limits inherent to the system are reached.

If the maximum rotational torque during the corrective intervention is not enough to keep the vehicle inside the lane.

If during the corrective intervention by the system the lane is no longer detected.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

198 Driver assistance systems

Switching the lane assist system on or off

Select the corresponding menu option using the button for the driver as- sist systems page 56.

OR: Activate or deactivate the system in the Settings menu, Assist sys- tems menu, Lane Assist menu page 56. The confirmation sign indicates that the driver assist system is switched on.

Automatic deactivation: the lane assist system can be deactivated automat- ically if there is a system malfunction. Control lamp switches off.

The lane assist system is inactive (control lamp lit in yellow)

When the speed of travel drops to below approx. 65 km/h (40 mph).

When the Lane Assist system does not detect the dividing lines of the road. For example, in the event of road works, and snow, dirt, moisture or reflections.

When the radius of a curve is too small.

When there is no dividing line.

When the distance to the next dividing line is excessive.

When there are more than two lane markings per lane.

When the TSC is switched off.

When the system does not detect any active rotation of the steering wheel by the driver during a prolonged period.

Temporarily, in the event of very dynamic driving.

When the turn signal is connected.

Note Before starting travel, verify that the camera's field of vision is not cov- ered Fig. 156.

Keep the camera window clean.

Disconnect the lane assist system in the following situations

Due to the limits of the lane assist system, disconnect it in the following sit- uations:

When more attention is required of the driver

For very sporty driving

In very unfavourable weather conditions

In very unfavourable road conditions

In areas of road works

Sign Assist*

Introduction

Sign Assist can help the driver with information on speed limits or if over- taking is prohibited at that moment. The traffic signs and additional infor- mation detected by the system is shown on the instrument panel display and in the visual presentation of the navigation system map.

Applicable countries:

Sign Assist is supported in the following countries:

Andorra, Belgium, Denmark, Germany, Finland, France, Ireland, Italy, Liech- tenstein, Luxembourg, Monaco, the Netherlands, Norway, Austria, Poland, Portugal, San Marino, Sweden, Switzerland, Spain, Czech Republic, United Kingdom, and Vatican City.

199Driver assistance systems

WARNING

The traffic signs and instructions shown by Sign Assist may differ from the current traffic situation.

The signs and Highway Code rules always take precedence over Sign Assist instructions and display.

Adjust your speed and driving style to visibility, road, traffic and weather conditions.

The system cannot always detect or correctly show all the traffic signs.

WARNING

The traffic sign detection is not a replacement for driver awareness.

Adverse conditions of visibility, darkness, snow, rain and fog can cause the system not to show the traffic signs or to show them errone- ously.

CAUTION If old mapping data is used in the navigation system, this may cause the traffic signs to be shown incorrectly.

In the route points mode (navigation by route points) of the navigation system, Sign Assist is only partly available.

Indication on display

Fig. 157 Instrument panel display: Examples of speed limits or over- taking prohibitions de- tected together with the corresponding additional signs

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

200 Driver assistance systems

Display text of Sign Assist on the instrument panel

Cause and solution

Error: Sign Assist System fault. Have the system checked by a specialised workshop.

Sign Assist: Clean the wind- screen!

The windscreen is dirty in the area of the camera. Clean the windscreen.

Sign Assist: only partly availa- ble at the moment.

No data is being transmitted from the navi- gator. Connect the navigator and insert the navi- gation data medium. ALTERNATIVELY: Sign Assist is not suppor- ted in the country in which you are driving at this time.

WARNING

If the warning lamps and messages are ignored, the vehicle may stall in traffic, or may cause accidents and severe injuries.

Never ignore the warning lamps or text messages.

Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.

CAUTION Failure to heed the control lamps and text messages when they appear may result in faults in the vehicle.

Operation mode

Sign Assist does not work in all countries. This must be taken into account when travelling abroad.

Display of traffic signs

Speed limits or overtaking prohibitions together with the corresponding ad- ditional signs are shown on the instrument panel display Fig. 157. De- pending on the navigation system installed in the vehicle, traffic signs will be shown as above and also in the navigation system's map display.

When Sign Assist is connected, the vehicle records the traffic signs with a camera in the base of the interior rear vision mirror. After checking and eval- uating the information from the camera, the navigation system and the cur- rent vehicle data, up to three valid traffic signs are displayed in conjunction with the corresponding additional signs. The traffic sign that is currently val- id for the driver is shown first, in the left side of the screen. A traffic sign of only limited validity, e.g. 90 km/h (56 mph) is shown second, together with the additional sign if the road is wet. If the vehicle's rain sensor detects rain during travel, the traffic sign valid at this moment will move to the first position along the additional sign if the road is wet.

The permanent display on the instrument panel screen is shown as you pass the real traffic signs. The signs located at the entry and exit points of towns activate the display of the usual speed limits for that country on roads in populated areas and national highways, even if the speed is not limited by an actual traffic sign.

The end of a prohibition or limitation is not displayed. If you exceed the speed limits shown, a warning will not appear. The system does not detect areas with little traffic. The current legal provisions apply.

Connection and disconnection

Connect or disconnect the assist system in the Settings menu in the SEAT information system page 56.

OR: Press the button for the driver assist systems on the main beam lev- er.

Trailer

Connect or disconnect the secondary display for speed limits and overtak- ing bans that apply to trailers (trailer mode) in the Settings menu in the SEAT information system page 56.

201Driver assistance systems

Tiredness detection (recommendation to take a break)

Introduction

WARNING

Do not let the extra convenience afforded by the tiredness detection func- tion tempt you into taking any risks when driving. When making long trips, conveniently long breaks must be taken.

The driver is responsible for determining their capacity to drive.

Never drive when tired.

The system does not always detect the tiredness of the driver. Please read the information provided in the section page 202, Limited opera- tion.

In some situations the system may incorrectly interpret an intended manoeuvre as a sign of tiredness of the driver.

In the event of the an episode called microsleep at the wheel, a strong warning is not in place!

Observe the indications on the display of the instrument panel and act in accordance with them.

Note The tiredness detection function has only been conceived for driving on motorways and wide roads.

If there is a fault in the system, refer to a Specialised workshop to have the system inspected.

Function and operation

Fig. 158 On the instru- ment panel display: tired- ness detection symbol

The tiredness detection function registers the behaviour of the driver at the wheel at the beginning of a journey and, using this, evaluates the tiredness. This is continually compared with the current behaviour at the wheel. If the system detects that the driver is tired, an audible warning using a gong is given and a symbol and complementary message on the instrument panel display are shown Fig. 158. The message on the instrument panel display is shown for approximately 5 seconds, and depending on the case, is repea- ted. The system stores the last message displayed.

The message that appears on the instrument panel display can be switched off by pressing the OK button on the multifunction steering wheel or on the window wiper lever page 58. Using the multifunction display page 58 the message on the instrument panel display can be shown.

Conditions of operation

The behaviour at the wheel is only evaluated at speeds of above 65 km/h (40 mph).

Switching on and off

The system can be switched on or off in the Assistants menu. If an assis- tance system is switched on, this is indicated with a mark.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

202 Driver assistance systems

Limited operation

The tiredness detection function is subject to certain limitations. Therefore it is possible that in some driving situations behaviour at the wheel cannot be correctly interpreted. E.g. in the following situations:

at speeds lower than 65 km/h (40 mph),

in sections with corners,

on roads in poor condition,

in the event of adverse weather conditions,

when a sporty driving style is employed,

in the event of a major distraction for the driver,

The tiredness detection function switches off when the ignition is switched off or when the driver unbuckles their seat belt and opens the door. If travel- ling for a long period of time at a speed of at least 65 km/h (40 mph), the system automatically stops evaluating tiredness. If driving speed is then in- creased, the behaviour at the wheel will again be evaluated.

Tyre monitoring systems

Introduction

The tyre monitor indicator monitors the tyre pressure of each wheel during driving using the ABS sensors. The ABS sensors monitor the tyre tread pe- rimeter and vibrations of each tire. The tyre monitor indicator warns the driv- er if it detects a considerable drop in tyre pressure of one or several tyres while driving. Loss of tyre pressure will be indicated by the indicator as well as an audible warning and sometimes a text message on the instru- ment panel display. When you open the driver door, you will find a sticker indicating the tyre pressure recommended by the manufacturer for the maxi- mum vehicle load for each tyre approved for the vehicle in question. By pressing the adjustment button on the tyre monitoring indicator, you may

change the reference pressure for the tyres so that the tyre pressure to be monitored coincides with actual tyre pressure page 204.

Suitable use of the adjustment button page 204.

WARNING

Unsuitable handling of the wheels and tyres may lead to sudden tyre pressure losses, to tread separation or even to a blow-out.

Check tyre pressures regularly and ensure they are maintained at the pressures indicated. If the tyre pressure is too low, the tyres could over- heat, resulting in tread detachment or even burst tyres.

Tyre pressure should be that indicated on the label when the tyres are cold at all times page 271.

Regularly check the cold inflation pressure of the tyres. If necessary, change the tyre pressure of the vehicle tyres while they are cold.

Regularly check your tyres for damage and wear.

Never exceed the maximum permitted speed or loads specified for the type of tyre fitted on your vehicle.

WARNING

Incorrect use of the tyre monitoring indicator button could result in the indicator giving erroneous messages or prevented from indicating the danger caused by a defective tyre page 204.

CAUTION The tyre valves may be damaged if the cap is not in place. Check that the caps are identical to the standard caps and have been correctly tightened. Do not use metal caps page 204.

Do not damage the valves when changing the tyres page 204.

203Driver assistance systems

For the sake of the environment Under-inflated tyres lead to increased fuel consumption and tyre wear.

Note Do not only rely on the tyre monitoring system. Regularly check your tyres to ensure that the tyre pressure is correct and that the tyres are not damaged due to puncture, cuts, tears and impacts/dents. Remove objects from the tyres only when the tyres have not been pierced by these.

The tyre monitoring system is set to the tyre pressure recommended by the manufacturer and indicated on the label Fig. 179.

Elements of the tyre monitoring indicator

Tyre monitoring indicator with button.

See page 204.

Control lamp on the instrument panel.

SET button on the centre console.

Monitoring the tread of all tyres using ABS sensors (indirect measure- ment).

Adjustable medium and full-load tyre pressures.

Button to update the system when the tyre pressure is changed.

Control lamp

Lights up or

flashes Possible cause Solution

The tyre pressure of a wheel has dropped considerably in relation to the pressure set by the driver page 204.

Stop the vehicle! Reduce your speed immediately! Stop the ve- hicle safely as soon as possible. Avoid sudden manoeuvres and braking! Check all tyres and pressures. Replace any damaged tyres.

System malfunction.

Consult a specialised workshop if the tyre pressure is correct and the lamp remains lit after switching the ignition off and back on again. Have the system checked there.

Several warning and control lamps should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few seconds.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings in Control and warning lamps on page 56.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

204 Driver assistance systems

WARNING

When the tyres are inflated at different pressures or at a pressure that is too low then a tyre may be damaged resulting in a loss of control of the vehicle and a serious or fatal accident.

If the warning lamp lights up, stop immediately and check the tyres.

If the tyres are inflated at different pressures or if a tyre pressure is too low, this will increase tyre wear, negatively affecting vehicle stability and increasing braking distances.

If tyres are inflated at different pressures or a tyre pressure is too low, a tyre may be damaged and burst resulting in a loss of control of the ve- hicle.

The driver is responsible for ensuring that all of the vehicle tyres are correctly inflated to the right pressure. The recommended tyre pressure is indicated on the label Fig. 179.

The tyre monitoring system can only operate correctly if all of the tyres are inflated to the correct pressure when cold.

Driving with tyres at the wrong pressure can damage them and result in an accident. Ensure that the tyre pressures of all the tyres correspond to the vehicle load.

Before starting a journey, always inflate tyres to the correct pressure.

If tyre pressure is too low then the tyre is subject to greater forces and it may be heated to such an extent that the tread can rupture and the tyre will burst.

With an overloaded vehicle at high speed, the tyres can overheat and burst resulting in a loss of vehicle control.

Tyre pressures which are too high or too low reduce the useful life of the tyre, affecting vehicle performance.

If a tyre has not been punctured and it does not have to be changed immediately, drive to the nearest specialised workshop at a moderate speed and have the tyre checked and inflated to the correct pressure.

Tyre monitoring indicator

Fig. 159 Detailed view of the centre console: but- ton for the tyre pressure monitoring indicator

The tyre monitor indicator compares wheel revolutions and, with this infor- mation, the tread of each wheel using the ABS sensors. If the tread of a wheel is changed, the tyre monitoring indicator will indicate as such on the instrument panel. The wheel tread changes when:

Tyre pressure is insufficient

Tyre structure is damaged

The vehicle is unbalanced because of a load

If the wheels on an axle are subject to a heavier load (e.g. when towing a trailer).

The vehicle is fitted with snow chains

The wheel on one axle is changed

There may be a delay in the reaction of the tyre monitoring indicator or it may not indicate anything under certain circumstances (e.g. sporty driving, snow-covered or unpaved roads).

Adaptation of the tyre monitoring indicator

On adjusting tyre pressure or changing one or more wheels, the Fig. 159 button on the tyre monitoring indicator must be kept pressed down, with

205Driver assistance systems

the ignition on, until an audible warning is heard. Do the same, for example, when the front and rear wheels are swapped Fig. 178.

If the wheels are subjected to an excessive load (towing a trailer, heavy load), the tyre pressure must be increased to the maximum recommended pressure page 267. Press the tyre monitoring indicator button to confirm the new pressure value.

Note An erroneous indication may be given when snow chains are in use because the chains increase the wheel perimeter.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

206 Driving and the environment

Advice

Driving and the environment

Running-in

Please observe the instructions for running-in new components.

Running-in the engine

The engine needs to be run-in over the first 1500 km (1000 miles). During its first few hours of running, the internal friction in the engine is greater than later on when all the moving parts have bedded down.

How the vehicle is driven for the first 1500 km (1000 miles) influences the future engine performance. Throughout the life of the vehicle, it should be driven at a moderate speed especially when the engine is cold this will reduce engine wear and increase its useful life. Never drive at extremely low engine speeds. Always engage a lower gear when the engine works irregu- larly. For the first 1000 km or 600 miles, please note:

Do not use full throttle.

Do not force the engine above two thirds of its maximum speed.

Do not tow a trailer.

Between 1000 and 1500 kilometres (600 to 1000 miles), gradually in- crease power until reaching the maximum speed and high engine speeds.

Running in new tyres and brake pads

Replacement of new tyres and wheel rims page 267

Notes on the brakes page 172

For the sake of the environment If the engine is run in gently, the life of the engine will be increased and the engine oil consumption reduced.

Engine management and exhaust gas purification system

Introduction

WARNING

The components of the exhaust system reach very high temperatures. This could cause a fire.

Always park your vehicle so that no part of the exhaust system can come in contact with flammable materials (such as dried grass).

Do not apply additional underseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the exhaust pipes, catalytic converter, heat shields or the diesel particulate filter.

207Driving and the environment

Control lamps

It lights up

Possible cause Solution

Fault in engine management (Electronic Power Control).

Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop as soon as possible and have the engine checked.

Pre-heating a diesel engine before starting the engine.

page 156

Fault in catalytic converter.

You should reduce speed ac- cordingly. Drive carefully until you reach the next specialised workshop. Have the engine checked there.

Diesel particulate filter blocked

Drive for 15 minutes in 4th gear (manual gearbox), or in D (auto- matic gearbox) at a minimum speed of 70 km/h (45 mph). Observe speed limits . If the warning lamp remains lit up, take the vehicle to a special- ised workshop page 208.

Flashes Possible cause Solution

Fault in the engine manage- ment (diesel engines).

Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop as soon as possible and have the engine checked.

Combustion fault which could damage the catalytic convert- er.

You should reduce speed ac- cordingly. Drive carefully until you reach the next specialised workshop. Have the engine checked there.

Several warning and control lamps should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few seconds.

WARNING

Observe traffic regulations when cleaning the diesel particulate filter while driving.

Only carry on driving if visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions so permit.

Never endanger your safety or that of other road users.

CAUTION Always pay attention to any lit control lamps and to the corresponding de- scriptions and instructions to avoid damage to the vehicle.

Note While the indicators , or remain lit, there may be engine problems, fuel consumption may be greater and the engine may lose power.

Catalytic converter

The catalytic converter permits the subsequent treatment of the exhaust gases thus reducing contaminating gas emissions. To ensure a longer work- ing life for the exhaust system and catalytic converter in a petrol engine:

Always use unleaded petrol.

Never run the fuel tank completely dry.

Do not top up with too much engine oil page 255.

Do not tow-start the vehicle; use the starter cables page 305.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

208 Driving and the environment

If you should notice misfiring, uneven running or loss of power when the car is moving, reduce speed immediately. Have the car inspected by a special- ised workshop. If this happens, unburnt fuel can enter the exhaust system and escape into the atmosphere. The catalytic converter can also be dam- aged by overheating.

For the sake of the environment Even when the emission control system is working perfectly, there may be a smell of sulphur from the exhaust gas under some conditions. This depends on the sulphur content of the fuel being used.

Diesel particulate filter

The diesel particulate filter removes, captures and burns soot particulates from the exhaust gas. To assist the combustion process, SEAT recommends you avoid frequent short trips.

Always use diesel with a low sulphur content page 245.

Never use petrol or fuel oil.

Never use biodiesel. However, a blend prepared by the diesel manufac- turer containing biodiesel within the limits established by the EN 590 standard may be used page 245.

Never run the fuel tank completely dry.

Do not top up with too much engine oil page 255.

Do not tow-start the vehicle; use the starter cables page 305.

In order to reduce blocking of the diesel particulate filter, some vehicles with an automatic gearbox may increase the engine speed slightly to auto- matically start cleaning the diesel particulate filter. The control lamp will not light up in this case .

For the sake of the environment Even when the emission control system is working perfectly, there may be a smell of sulphur from the exhaust gas under some conditions. This depends on the sulphur content of the fuel being used.

Appropriate ecological and environmentally friendly driving

Introduction

Fuel consumption, environmental impact and engine, brake and tyre wear depend largely on three factors:

Personal driving style.

Conditions of use (weather, road surface).

Technical requirements.

Savings of up to 25% in fuel consumption are possible with an appropriate driving style and the adoption of certain simple tips.

WARNING

Always adapt your speed and the distance to the vehicles ahead in line with visibility, weather conditions, the condition of the road and the traf- fic situation.

209Driving and the environment

Economic driving style

Changing gear early

General instructions: The highest gear is always the most economical gear. As a guideline, for the majority of vehicles: At a speed of 30 km/h (19 mph), drive in third gear, at 40 km/h (25 mph) in fourth gear and at 50 km/h (31 mph) in fifth gear.

In addition, skipping gears when shifting up helps to save fuel, weather and traffic conditions permitting.

Do not wait until the last moment before changing gear. Only use first gear when you move off and change to second gear quickly. Avoid the kick-down function in vehicles with automatic gearbox.

Vehicles with a gear display help to achieve an economical driving style as the display indicates the best moment to change gear.

Let the vehicle roll

If you take your foot off the accelerator, the fuel supply is stopped and con- sumption is reduced.

Allow the vehicle to roll without accelerating, for example when approach- ing a red traffic light. However, if the vehicle is rolling too slowly or the dis- tance is too long, the clutch pedal should be pressed to declutch. The en- gine will then operate at idle speed.

If the vehicle is going to be at a standstill for a period of time, switch off the engine; for example, while waiting at a level crossing. In vehicles which have the Start-Stop function on, the engine switches off automatically when the vehicle is not moving.

Think ahead and flow with the traffic

Frequent acceleration and braking considerably increase fuel consumption. If you think ahead as you drive and keep a safe distance from the vehicle in front, it is possible to slow down by simply lifting your foot off the accelera- tor. This eliminates the need for constant braking and acceleration.

Calm and steady driving

Constancy is more important than speed: The more you drive at a constant speed, the lower the fuel consumption.

When driving on the motorway, it is more efficient to drive at a constant and more moderate speed than to be continuously accelerating and braking. As a general rule, you will reach your destination just as quickly when you drive at a constant speed.

The cruise control system function helps you to achieve a constant style of driving.

Moderate use of additional electrical devices

It is important to travel in comfort, but convenience systems should be used in an ecological manner.

Some equipment, when connected, increase fuel consumption considera- bly, for example:

Air conditioning cooling system: If the air conditioning system is re- quired to cool to significantly lower temperatures than the true outside tem- perature, it will require a large quantity of energy from the engine. There- fore, we recommend that the selected temperature for the vehicle is not too different to the outside temperature. It is a good idea to open all the win- dows of the car before starting your journey, and to drive a short distance with all the windows open to allow the vehicle to cool down slightly. Only then should you close all the windows and switch on the air conditioning. Keep windows closed when travelling at high speeds. Driving with the win- dows open increases fuel consumption.

Switch off the seat heating when the seats have warmed up.

Switch off the heated rear window and the windscreen heating when the windows have demisted and are free of ice.

Do not leave the auxiliary heater switched on when the vehicle is mov- ing page 150.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

210 Driving and the environment

Other factors which increase fuel consumption (examples):

Fault in engine management.

Driving on hills.

Trailer towing.

Saving fuel while driving

Fig. 160 Fuel consump- tion in litres per 100 km (mpg) at different outside temperatures

By adopting an economical driving style and anticipating the traffic situa- tion ahead, you can easily reduce fuel consumption by 10-15%.

A vehicle uses most fuel when accelerating. By anticipating the traffic situa- tion ahead, you will brake and therefore accelerate less. Wherever possible, let the car roll slowly to a stop, for instance when you can see that the next traffic lights are red.

Avoid short journeys

Fuel consumption is much higher when the engine is cold, immediately af- ter it has been started. It takes a few kilometres of driving for the engine to warm up and to normalise consumption.

The engine and catalytic converter need to reach their proper working tem- perature in order to minimise fuel consumption and emissions. The ambient temperature has a decisive influence.

Fig. 160 shows the difference in consumption for the same journey at +20 C (+68 F) and at -10 C (+14 F).

Unnecessary short journeys should be avoided. Try to combine trips.

The vehicle uses more fuel in winter than in summer, even when other con- ditions are the same.

Warming the engine is not only forbidden in some countries, but in prac- tice it is technically superfluous as it is a waste of fuel.

Adjusting type pressures.

Having the correct pressure in your tyres helps to reduce rolling resistance and, as a result reduces fuel consumption. Increasing the tyre pressure slightly (+ 0.2 bar / 2.9 psi / 20 kPa) can help to save fuel.

If you are prepared to accept a slight reduction in comfort, the tyres may be filled to the pressures recommended for a fully-loaded vehicle. This is also valid when driving alone without luggage.

When you buy new tyres, make sure they are optimised for minimum rolling resistance.

Use low friction engine oil

The use of low viscosity totally synthetic oils, known as low friction engine oil, help to reduce fuel consumption. Low friction engine oils reduce the re- sistance caused by friction in the engine, they flow around the engine more quickly and efficiently, particularly in cold starts. The effect is particularly noticeable in vehicles frequently used for short journeys.

Always check the engine oil level and observe service intervals (engine oil change intervals).

When purchasing engine oil, always observe legal requirements and ensure that the oil is approved by SEAT.

211Driving and the environment

Avoid carrying unnecessary loads

The lighter the vehicle, the more economical and ecological the driving style. For example, an additional weight of 100 kg will increase fuel con- sumption up to 0.3 l/100 km.

Remove any unnecessary objects or loads from the vehicle.

Remove optional equipment and unnecessary accessories

The more aerodynamic the vehicle, the lower the fuel consumption. Option- al equipment and accessories (such as roof racks or bike carriers) reduce the aerodynamic benefits of the vehicle.

Therefore, we recommend you remove all optional and unnecessary equip- ment and racks, especially if you intend to drive at high speeds.

Environmental friendliness

Environmental protection is a top priority in the design, choice of materials and manufacture of your new SEAT.

Constructive measures to encourage recycling

Joints and connections designed for easy dismantling

Modular construction to facilitate dismantling

Increased use of single-grade materials.

Plastic parts and elastomers are marked in accordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 and ISO 1629.

Choice of materials

Use of recycled materials.

Use of compatible plastics within the same set of parts if its compo- nents are not easily separated.

Use of recycled materials and/or materials originating from renewable sources.

Reduction of volatile components, including odour, in plastic materials.

Use of CFC-free coolants.

Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptions dictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive 2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium.

Manufacturing methods

Reduction of the quantity of thinner in the protective wax for cavities.

Use of plastic film as protection during vehicle transport.

Use of solvent-free adhesives.

Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling systems.

Recycling and energy recovery from residues (RDF).

Improvement in the quality of waste water.

Use of systems for the recovery of residual heat (thermal recovery, en- thalpy wheels, etc.).

The use of water-soluble paints.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

212 Trailer

Trailer

Driving with a trailer

Introduction

Always be aware of the legal requirements for each country to drive with a trailer and to use a tow hitch.

Your car is intended mainly for transporting passengers however, it can also be used to tow a trailer provided that it is fitted with the necessary equip- ment. The additional load has an effect on the useful life, fuel consumption and the vehicle performance and, in some cases, reduce the service inter- vals.

Driving with a trailer requires more force from the vehicle and, thus, more concentration from the driver.

For wintertime temperatures, fit winter tyres to the vehicle and the trailer.

Drawbar load

The maximum permitted Drawbar load exerted by the trailer drawbar on the ball joint of the tow hitch must not exceed 100 kg (approximately 220 lbs).

Vehicles with the Start-Stop function

With a SEAT factory fitted or retrofitted tow hitch, the Start-Stop function is automatically deactivated when a trailer is connected. For tow hitches not installed by SEAT, the Start-Stop function must be deactivated manually us- ing a button located on the dash panel before driving with a trailer and it must remain off for the entire journey .

WARNING

Never transport people in a trailer: this will endanger in their life and is against the law.

WARNING

The incorrect use of the tow hitch can cause accidents and injury.

Only use a tow hitch in good condition that is correctly installed.

Never change or repair a tow hitch.

To reduce the risk of injury in case of a rear collision, injury to pedes- trians and cyclists when parking, always store the ball joint when a trail- er is not being used.

Never fit a trailer tow hitch that distributes the load or balances the load. Your vehicle has not been designed for this type of tow hitch. The tow hitch may fail and the trailer will separate from the vehicle.

WARNING

Driving with a trailer and transporting heavy or large objects can affect vehicle handling and even cause an accident.

Always secure loads correctly with suitable and undamaged attach- ment rope or straps.

Adjust your speed and driving style to visibility, road, traffic and weather conditions.

Trailers with a high centre of gravity can overturn more easily than trailers with a low centre of gravity.

Avoid brusque manoeuvres and sudden braking.

213Trailer

WARNING (Continued)

Always take the following precautions seriously.

Reduce your speed immediately if you observe the trailer rocking from side to side.

Never drive at more than 80 km/h (50 mph) when towing a trailer (or 100 km/h (62 mph) in exceptional circumstances). This also applies in countries where higher speeds are permitted. Always take the speed lim- its for vehicles with and without trailers in each country into account.

Never try to stop the snaking by increasing speed.

WARNING

When driving with a trailer and using a tow hitch that was not installed by SEAT, the Start-Stop function must be manually deactivated. Other- wise, this could cause a braking anomaly that could result in an accident with serious consequences.

Always manually deactivate the Start-Stop function when a trailer is being used on a tow hitch that has not been installed by SEAT.

Note Always turn off the anti-theft alarm system before connecting or discon- necting a trailer page 74. Otherwise, the tilt sensor may erroneously acti- vate the alarm.

Never use a trailer with a new engine (for the first 1,000 km or 600 miles) page 235.

At SEAT, we recommend folding in the tow hitch ball when a trailer is not being used. In case of a rear collision, the damage caused to the vehicle with the extended tow hitch ball could be more extensive.

In some models, a tow hitch is necessary for towing vehicles. For this reason, you should store the tow hitch in the vehicle at all times.

Technical requirements

If the car is supplied with a factory-fitted towing bracket it will already have the necessary technical modifications and meet the statutory requirements for towing a trailer.

Only use an approved tow hitch for the gross trailer weight rating. The tow hitch must be suitable for both the vehicle and trailer and must be securely fitted to the vehicle chassis. Only use a tow hitch with a removable ball joint. Always check and take into account the tow hitch manufacturer's in- structions. Never fit a trailer tow hitch that distributes the load or balan- ces the load.

Bumper mounted tow hitch

Never fit a tow hitch or its attachments to the bumper. A tow hitch should never interfere with the bumper performance. Do not modify the exhaust system and brake system. Regularly check the tow hitch to ensure it is firmly fitted.

Engine cooling system

Driving with a trailer increases the load on the engine and cooling system. The cooling system should always have sufficient coolant and to be able to cope with the vehicle and trailer.

Electric trailer brake

If the trailer has its own braking system, please note the relevant legal re- quirements. The trailer braking system should never be connected to the ve- hicle braking system.

Trailer cable

Always use a cable between the vehicle and the trailer page 216.

Trailer rear lights

The rear lights of a trailer must fulfil the corresponding standards page 216.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

214 Trailer

Never connect the trailer's rear lights directly to the vehicle electric system. In case of any doubt about the electrical connection of the trailer, ask a spe- cialised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a Technical Service.

Wing mirrors

When the field of vision behind the trailer cannot be seen using the stand- ard wing mirrors of the towing vehicle, additional wing mirrors are required according to the legal requirements of each country. The wing mirrors must be fitted before driving and must provide a sufficient field of vision behind.

Trailer electricity consumption

Never exceed the specifications:

devices Maximum power

Side lights and rear lights 50 Watts

Turn signal (each side) 54 Watts

Brake lights (total) 84 Watts

Reversing lights (total) 42 Watts

Rear fog light 42 Watts

WARNING

If the tow hitch is badly fitted or unsuitable, the trailer may separate from the vehicle causing an accident with serious consequences.

CAUTION If the rear lights of the trailer are not correctly connected, the vehicle electronics may be damaged.

If the trailer absorbs excessive electric current, the vehicle electronics may be damaged.

Never connect the trailer's electric system to the electrical connections of the rear lights or any other power sources. Only use suitable connections for providing electric current to the trailer.

Note Towing a trailer places additional demands on the vehicle. At SEAT, we recommend additional services between the normal inspection intervals if the vehicle is used frequently for towing a trailer.

In some countries, an additional fire extinguisher is required if the trailer weight is more than 2500 kg

Electric tow hitch ball*

Fig. 161 Right-hand side of the luggage com- partment: button to elec- trically release the tow hitch ball

The rotation radius of the tow hitch ball should be free of people, animals and objects .

The towing bracket is located in the bumper. The electric tow ball is fixed and cannot be removed.

Releasing and unfolding the tow ball

Stop the vehicle and apply the electric parking brake.

Switch the ignition off.

Open the rear lid.

Press the knob briefly Fig. 161. The tow ball is released electronically and folds out automatically; the button indicator will blink.

215Trailer

Move the ball joint until it inserts and the button control lamp lights.

Close the rear lid.

Before hitching the trailer, remove the dust guard from the ball.

The indicator only lights when the boot lid is open and when a trailer is not hitched.

Restoring the tow ball to its originally position

Stop the vehicle and apply the electric parking brake.

Switch the ignition off.

Remove the trailer and disconnect the cable between the vehicle and trailer. If necessary, remove the power socket adapter.

Place the dust guard over the ball.

Open the rear lid.

Press the knob briefly Fig. 161. The tow ball is electronically released; the indicator blinks.

Push the tow ball into the bumper until it locks in position and the but- ton indicator lights.

Close the rear lid.

The control lamp

When the control lamp flashes, the tow ball is not in its final position, has not engaged or is damaged .

When the control lamp remains lit and the rear lid is open, the tow ball has inserted correctly into the folded or deployed position.

When the rear lid is closed, the indicator is turned off.

WARNING

The incorrect use of the tow hitch can cause accidents and injury.

Ensure that no person, animal or object gets in the way of the tow ball.

WARNING (Continued)

Never push the button when there is a tow hitched or when any kind of carrier or accessory is fitted to the tow hitch ball.

While the ball is moving, do not interfere with any tool.

Do not drive with a trailer if the control lamp does not light.

If there is a fault in the electric system or the trailer tow hitch, visit a specialised workshop to have it checked.

If the diameter of the tow hitch is less than 49 mm, never use this for a trailer.

CAUTION If anything is attached to the tow hitch ball, do not, under any circum- stances press the button.

Never direct a high-pressure or steam cleaning system directly at the tow hitch ball or trailer power socket. This could cause damage to seals or remove lubricating grease.

Note In extremely low temperatures, it is possible that the tow hitch is not re- leased. In this case, place the vehicle in a warmer location (for example, a garage).

Installing a bicycle carrier to the tow hitch

The maximum load permitted for a bicycle carrier on the tow hitch ball is 75 kg, with a maximum distance of 30 cm from the support. The distance between supports is the distance between the bicycle carrier centre of gravi- ty (with the bicycles) and the centre of point of the tow hitch ball.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

216 Trailer

WARNING

The incorrect use of the tow hitch with a bicycle carrier installed can cause accidents and injury.

Never exceed the load and distances between supports indicated.

Never fit the bicycle carrier to the tow hitch ball neck, underneath the tow hitch given that the bicycle carrier may be incorrectly fitted due to the shape of the tow hitch and the model of bicycle carrier.

Always read and take the manufacturer assembly instructions into ac- count.

CAUTION Exceeding the maximum load and distance between supports indicated can cause considerable damage to the vehicle.

Never exceed the specifications.

Hitching and connecting the trailer

Trailer cable

Always secure the trailer cable to the towing vehicle correctly. Leave a little bit of slack in the cable for turning. However, ensure that the cable does not rub off the ground while driving.

Trailer power socket

The electric connection between vehicle and trailer is a 13-pin socket. If the trailer plug has seven pins, an adapter cable must be used.

Trailer rear lights

Check the trailer rear lights to ensure they work correctly and remain legal. Ensure that the trailer does not use more than the maximum power page 214.

Trailer connected to the anti-theft alarm:

When a vehicle comes from the factory fitted with an anti-theft alarm and tow hitch.

When the trailer is connected to the vehicle using the socket.

When the vehicle and trailer electrical systems work correctly and are not damaged.

When the vehicle is locked using the vehicle key and the anti-theft alarm is turned on.

When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is triggered when the electrical con- nection between the vehicle and the trailer is removed.

Always turn off the anti-theft alarm system before connecting or disconnect- ing a trailer. Otherwise, the tilt sensor may erroneously activate the alarm.

WARNING

Erroneous or unsuitable connection of electric cables may supply energy to the trailer causing an anomaly in the vehicle electronics that could re- sult in an accident with serious consequences.

All work on the electrical system must be carried out only by a speci- alised workshop.

Never connect the trailer's electric system to the electrical connec- tions of the rear lights or any other power sources.

CAUTION Do not leave the trailer connected to the vehicle when parked; places on its support wheel or its supports. For example, when changing the load or a puncture, the vehicle will be pushed up or down. The force acting on the tow hitch and the trailer could damage the vehicle or the trailer.

217Trailer

Note In case of a fault in the vehicle or trailer electrical system or in case of problems with the anti-theft alarm system, have the system checked by a specialised workshop.

If the trailer accessories use energy from the power socket when the en- gine is stopped, the battery will be discharged.

For technical reasons, trailers fitted with rear LED lights cannot be con- nected to the anti-theft alarm system.

If the vehicle battery is running low, the electrical connection with the trailer is automatically cut.

With the engine running, the electrical equipment on the trailer will con- sume power.

Loading the trailer

Trailer weight / drawbar load

The trailer weight is the load that the vehicle can pull . The drawbar load is the vertical weight of the tow hitch on the tow hitch ball page 220.

The figures for trailer weights and drawbar load weights given on the data plate of the tow hitch are for values of this model only. The correct figures for your specific vehicle, which may be lower than these figures for the tow hitch, are given in the vehicle documentation. The instructions in the official vehicle documents take precedence.

For the sake of road safety, SEAT recommends using the maximum allowed drawbar load. The handling of the combined vehicle and trailer will be poor if the drawbar load is too low.

The drawbar load increases the weight on the rear axle, reducing the vehicle carrying capacity.

Gross combination weight

This figure refers to the combined weight of the loaded vehicle and loaded trailer.

Loading the trailer

The combined vehicle and trailer must be balanced. Use the maximum drawbar load authorised and do not overload the front or the rear of the trailer:

Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy objects are as near to the axle as possible or even above it.

Correctly secure the trailer load.

Tyre pressure

Inflate the trailer tyres according to the manufacturer's instructions.

Inflate the towing vehicles tyres to the maximum page 267.

WARNING

Exceeding the maximum authorised axle load, drawbar load or the gross combination weight of the towing vehicle and trailer could cause a seri- ous accident with severe consequences.

Never exceed the specifications.

With the actual load on the front and rear axles, the maximum axle load should never be exceeded. The weight on the front and rear should never exceed the gross vehicle weight.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

218 Trailer

WARNING

If the load moves, the stability and safety of the vehicle and trailer com- bination will be seriously affected and this could result in a serious acci- dent.

Always correctly load the trailer.

Always secure loads correctly with suitable and undamaged attach- ment rope or straps.

Driving with a trailer

Adjusting the headlights

When towing a trailer, the front of the vehicle may rise and so the dipped beam headlights may blind other drivers. Use the headlight range control to lower the cone of light. If you do not have headlight range control, have the headlights adjusted by a specialised workshop. Vehicles with high-intensity discharge lamps adapt automatically and do not require adjustment.

Details of driving with a trailer

If the trailer has an overrun brake, apply the brakes gently at first and then, firmly. This will prevent the jerking that can be caused by the trailer wheels locking.

As of the combined vehicle and trailer mass, braking distances will be greater.

Select a low gear before driving down a steep hill to use the engine braking effect to slow down the vehicle. Otherwise, the braking system could overheat and fail.

The vehicle centre of gravity and handling change because of the trailer load and because of the increased combined mass of the vehicle and trail- er.

If the towing vehicle is empty and the trailer loaded then the load distri- bution is incorrect. If you must travel in these conditions, drive carefully and reduce your speed accordingly.

Hill starts with a trailer

Depending on the hill and the gross combined weight, it is possible that the combined vehicle and trailer move backwards slightly when starting.

For a hill start with a trailer, proceed as follows:

Press and hold the brake pedal.

Press the button once to turn off the electric parking brake page 168.

Press and hold the button to hold the vehicle and trailer combination using the parking brake.

With a manual gearbox: press the clutch pedal to the floor.

Engage first gear or the gear range D page 162, Changing gear.

Release the brake pedal.

Move off slowly. To do this, gently release the clutch pedal (for manual gearbox).

Release the button only when the engine provides sufficient power to move the vehicle and trailer combination.

WARNING

Jerking the trailer in an unsuitable manner could cause loss of vehicle control with the subsequent serious consequences.

Driving with a trailer and transporting heavy or a large objects will change the vehicle handling and braking distances.

219Trailer

WARNING (Continued)

Anticipate traffic and be extremely cautious. Brake early.

Adjust your speed and driving style to visibility, road, traffic and weather conditions. Reduce your speed, especially on steep hills.

Accelerate gently and carefully. Avoid brusque manoeuvres and sud- den braking.

Always take the following precautions seriously. Reduce your speed immediately if you observe the trailer rocking from side to side.

Never try to stop the snaking by increasing speed.

Always take the speed limits for vehicles with and without trailers in each country into account.

Stabilising the vehicle and trailer combination

Stabilisation of the vehicle and trailer combination is an extension of the electronic stability control (ESC) and helps, with the assistance of the trajec- tory control, to reduce trailer snaking.

Stabilisation of the vehicle and trailer combination is active when the ESC indicator on the dash panel remains lit for about two seconds more than the ABS indicator.

Requirements for stabilising the vehicle/trailer combination

An original tow hitch is fitted by the manufacturer or a compatible model is retrofitted.

The ECS is switched on. The warning lamp on the instrument panel is not lit.

The trailer is connected to the vehicle using the power socket.

Do not drive faster than 60 km/h (37 mph).

The maximum drawbar load is used.

The trailer must have a fixed drawbar.

Trailers with brakes must be equipped with a mechanical inertia brake.

WARNING

Do not let the extra safety afforded by the stabilisation system tempt you into taking any risks when driving.

Adjust your speed and driving style to visibility, road, traffic and weather conditions.

If the road surface is slippery, take care when accelerating.

When a system is operating, lift your foot off the accelerator.

WARNING

It is possible that the combination stabilisation system does not correct- ly recognised all driving situations.

It is possible that the stabilisation system does not detect snaking of a light trailer and thus does not intervene.

When driving on slippery ground, the trailer could jack-knife despite the stabilisation system.

Trailers with a high centre of gravity may even tip over before they start to rock sideways.

If a trailer is not used and the trailer power socket is connected (for example, installation of a bicycle carrier with lights), repeated automatic braking may occur in extreme driving conditions.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

220 Trailer

Retrofitting a tow hitch

Fig. 162 Measurements and attachments to retrofit a tow hitch

SEAT recommends visiting a specialised workshop to retrofit a tow hitch. For example, it may be necessary to adjust the cooling system or to include thermal plates. SEAT recommends visiting a Technical Service.

In any case, the separation distances must be observed when fitting a tow hitch. The distance between the centre of the tow hitch ball and the road surface Fig. 162 D must never be lower than that indicated. This also ap- plies when the vehicle is fully laden, including maximum drawbar load.

Separation distances Fig. 162:

Attachment points.

1,040 mm (41 inches)

74 mm (3 inches)

364 mm (14 inches)

A

B

C

D

247 mm (10 inches)

596 mm (23 inches)

1,097 mm (43 inches)

1102 mm (43 inches)

WARNING

Erroneous or unsuitable connection of electric cables may cause anoma- lies in the vehicle electronics that could result in an accident with serious consequences.

Never connect the trailer's electric system to the electrical connec- tions of the rear lights or any other unsuitable power sources. Only use suitable connectors to connect a trailer.

Visit a specialised workshop if you wish to retrofit a tow hitch to the vehicle.

WARNING

If the tow hitch is badly fitted or unsuitable, the trailer may separate from the vehicle while driving. This could result in a serious accident.

Note Use only tow hitches approved by SEAT for the vehicle.

Maximum gross trailer weight

The instructions in the official vehicle documents take precedence. All the technical data provided in this documentation is applicable to the basic model. The vehicle data label in the Maintenance Programme or the vehicle documentation shows which engine is installed in your vehicle.

E

F

G

H

221Trailer

The figures may be different depending whether additional equipment is fit- ted, for different models and for special vehicles.

WARNING

Exceeding the maximum trailer weight indicated could cause a serious accident.

Never exceed the indicated trailer weight.

CAUTION Exceeding the maximum trailer weight indicated could cause damage to the vehicle.

Never exceed the indicated trailer weight.

Gross combined vehicle weight rating

The instructions in the official vehicle documents take precedence. All the technical data provided in this documentation is applicable to the basic model. The vehicle data label in the Maintenance Programme or the vehicle documentation shows which engine is installed in your vehicle.

The figures may be different depending whether additional equipment is fit- ted, for different models and for special vehicles.

The maximum combined weights listed are only applicable for altitudes up to 1000 m above sea level. The weight of the car and trailer must be re- duced by about 10% for every further 1000 m (or part thereof).

WARNING

If the full weight exceeds the maximum weight indicated, a serious acci- dent may result.

Never exceed the gross combined weight rating.

CAUTION When the indicated maximum gross combined weight rating is exceeded, the vehicle may sustain damage.

Never exceed the gross combined weight rating.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

222 Vehicle maintenance and cleaning

Vehicle maintenance and cleaning

Care and cleaning the vehicle exterior

Introduction

Regular maintenance and washing help to maintain the value of the vehicle. This may also be one of the requirements for acknowledging warranty claims in the event of bodywork corrosion or paint defects.

Products suitable for the care of your vehicle are available at any Technical Service.

WARNING

Car-care products may be toxic and hazardous. If car care products are not suitable or are used inappropriately, this could result in accident, se- rious injury, burns or intoxication.

Car care products must always be stored in the original container which should be kept closed.

Observe information provided by the manufacturer.

To prevent confusion, never store car care products in empty food cans, bottles or other containers.

Keep all care products out of reach of children.

Harmful vapours may be produced when using car care products. Therefore, care products should only be used in well-ventilated spaces or in the open air.

Never use fuel, turpentine, engine oil, acetone or any other volatile liquid to wash, clean or care for the vehicle. These are toxic and highly flammable.

WARNING

Inappropriate care and cleaning of vehicle components may effect the ve- hicle safety equipment, increasing the risk of severe injury.

Vehicle components should only be cleaned and maintained in ac- cordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

Only use approved or recommended care products.

CAUTION Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.

For the sake of the environment Only wash the vehicle in areas allocated for this purpose, to prevent dirty water which may be contaminated by oil, grease or fuel, from entering the drains. In some places, washing vehicles outside the areas intended for this purpose is prohibited.

Where possible, always use products which respect the environment.

The remains of car care products should not be disposed of with ordina- ry household waste. Observe information provided by the manufacturer.

Washing the vehicle

The longer substances such as insects, bird droppings, resinous tree sap, road dirt, industrial deposits, tar, soot or road salt and other aggressive ma- terials remain on the vehicle, the more damage they do to the paintwork. High temperatures (for instance due to strong sunlight) further intensify the corrosive effect. The vehicle undercarriage should also be thoroughly wash- ed at regular intervals.

223Vehicle maintenance and cleaning

Automatic car washes

Always observe the instructions provided at the automatic car wash. The standard precautionary measures prior to entering the car wash should be taken to avoid damage to the vehicle (close all windows, fold in exterior mir- rors). If the vehicle is fitted with additional components (spoiler, roof-rack, aerial, etc.), check with the car wash supervisor whether these can enter the car wash .

The vehicle paintwork is so durable that the vehicle can normally be washed without problems in an automatic car wash tunnel. However, wear and dam- age to the paintwork will depend on the type of car wash used. SEAT recom- mends the use of car washed without brushes.

To remove traces of wax on windows and to prevent wiper blades from scratching, please observe the following page 224, Cleaning windows and exterior mirrors.

Washing the car by hand

When washing the car by hand, use plenty of water to soften the dirt first, and rinse off as well as possible.

Then clean the vehicle with a soft sponge, glove or brush using only slight pressure. Start at the roof and work downwards. Special car shampoo should only be used for very persistent dirt.

Rinse the sponge or glove thoroughly and often.

Wheels, sills and similar should be cleaned last. Use a second sponge for this.

WARNING

Sharp components on the vehicle may cause injury.

Protect arms and hands from sharp edges when cleaning the vehicle undercarriage or the interior of the wheel hubs.

WARNING

After the vehicle has been washed, the braking effect will be reduced (and the braking distance increased) due to moisture (and ice in winter) on the brakes.

Dry the brakes and remove ice by braking carefully. Ensure that you are not endangering other road-users or breaking traffic regulations in the process.

CAUTION The temperature of the water must not exceed +60 C (+140 F).

To avoid damage to the paintwork, do not wash the vehicle in full sun.

Do not use rough sponges or similar which could damage the surface to clean away the traces of insects.

Never wipe the headlights with a dry cloth or sponge, always moisten first. It is best to use soapy water.

Washing the vehicle in low temperatures: When washing the vehicle with a hose, do not direct water into the lock cylinders or the gaps around the doors, boot lid, or sunroof. Locks and seals could freeze!

CAUTION To prevent damage to the vehicle, please observe the following before en- tering an automatic car wash:

Compare the distance between the vehicle wheels and the distance be- tween the guide-rails of the car wash to prevent damage to the wheels and tyres!

Switch off the rain sensor and the Auto Hold function before entering a car wash.

Compare the height and width of your vehicle with the available height and width when entering and driving through the car wash.

Fold in exterior mirrors Electrically retractable exterior mirrors must not be folded in or out by hand. Always use the electrical power control.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

224 Vehicle maintenance and cleaning

To avoid damaging the bonnet paintwork, rest the wipers on the wind- screen after drying them. Do not let them fall!

Lock the rear lid to prevent it from opening unexpectedly while inside the car wash.

Washing the vehicle with high pressure cleaning equipment

When cleaning the vehicle with a high-pressure cleaner, always follow the operating instructions for the equipment. Pay special attention to the re- quired pressure of the jet and the distance between the jet and the vehicle .

Keep a suitable distance from soft materials, such as rubber hoses or insu- lating material, and from the parking distance warning system sensors. The parking distance sensors are fitted in the rear bumpers and, where applica- ble, in the front bumpers .

Do not use a nozzle that sprays the water out in a direct stream or one that has a rotating jet for forcing off dirt .

WARNING

The incorrect use of high pressure cleaning equipment could result in permanent damage, visible or invisible, to the tyres or other materials. This could result in a serious accident.

Ensure there is a suitable distance between the nozzle and the tyres.

Never wash tyres with a concentrated jet or so-called dirt blasters. Even at large spraying distances and short cleaning times, you may dam- age the tyres.

WARNING

After the vehicle has been washed, the braking effect will be reduced (and the braking distance increased) due to moisture (and ice in winter) on the brakes.

Dry the brakes and remove ice by braking carefully. Ensure that you are not endangering other road-users or breaking traffic regulations in the process.

CAUTION The temperature of the water must not be above +60 C (+140 F).

To avoid damage to the paintwork, do not wash the vehicle in full sun.

The sensors on the bumpers should be kept clean and free of ice at all times to ensure the parking distance warning system and the parking aid system operate correctly. When cleaning with pressure hoses and steam cleaners, the sensors should be sprayed only briefly. A distance of 10 cm between the sensors and the steam / hose nozzle must be observed.

Do not use a high pressure cleaner to remove ice or snow from windows

Washing the vehicle in low temperatures: When washing the vehicle with a hose, do not direct water into the lock cylinders or the gaps around the doors, boot lid, or sunroof. Locks and seals could freeze!

Cleaning windows and exterior mirrors

Cleaning windows and exterior mirrors

Spray windows and exterior windows with a standard window cleaner con- taining alcohol.

Dry the windows with a clean chamois leather or a lint-free cloth. The cha- mois leathers used on painted surfaces are not suitable for cleaning win- dows because they are soiled with wax deposits which could smear the win- dows.

225Vehicle maintenance and cleaning

Use window cleaner or a silicone remover to clean rubber, oil, grease and silicone deposits off .

Removing wax deposits

Automatic car washes and certain car care products may leave wax deposits on the windows. These deposits can only be removed with a special product or cleaning cloths. Wax deposits on the windscreen could cause the wiper blades to judder. SEAT recommends you wipe the wax deposits off the wind- screen with a soft cloth each time after you have washed the vehicle.

A window cleaning detergent which helps to dissolve the wax may be added to the windscreen washer fluid to prevent the wiper blades from scratching the windscreen. Please ensure the you add the cleaning product in the cor- rect proportions. Products for removing grease do not eliminate the wax de- posits .

Special cleaning products or window cloths are available at any Technical Service. To remove wax deposits, SEAT recommends the following products:

For the hottest time of the year: G 052 184 A1 window cleaner for sum- mer use. Proportion 1:100 (1 part detergent, 100 parts water) in the wind- screen washer reservoir.

All year round: the G 052 164 A2 window cleaner; proportion 1:2 in windscreen washer reservoir (1 part concentrate, 2 parts water) in winter, down to -18 C (-0.4 F), or 1:4, during the rest of the year.

Window cloths G 052 522 A1 for all windows and exterior mirrors.

Removing snow

Use a small brush to remove snow from the windows and exterior mirrors.

Removing ice

If possible, use a de-icing spray to remove ice. If you use an ice scraper, push it in one direction only without swinging it. If you pull the scraper backwards, the dirt may scratch the window.

WARNING

Dirty or misted windows reduce visibility in all directions and increase the risk of accident and serious injury.

Do not drive unless you have good visibility through all windows!

Remove ice and snow from the windows and demist inside and out.

CAUTION Never mix our cleaning products with other products not recommended by SEAT in the windscreen washer reservoir. This could lead to flocculation and may block the windscreen washer jets.

Do not use hot or warm water to remove ice or snow from the windows and exterior mirrors. The glass could crack!

The heating element for the rear window is located on the inner side of the window. Do not stick adhesive labels over the heating elements and never clean the inside of the rear window with corrosive or acid products or other similar chemical cleaning products.

Aerials on the inside of windows may be damaged if knocked or if cleaned with corrosive or acid cleaning products. Do not stick adhesive la- bels over the heating elements and never clean the inside of the rear win- dow with corrosive or acid products or other similar chemical cleaning prod- ucts.

Caring for and polishing the vehicle paintwork

Waxing

Regular waxing protects the paintwork. It is time to apply a good coat of wax when water no longer forms droplets and rolls off the clean paintwork.

Even if a wax solution is used regularly in the automatic car wash, SEAT rec- ommends protecting the paint with a hard wax coating at least twice a year.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

226 Vehicle maintenance and cleaning

Polishing

Polishing is only necessary if the paint has lost its shine, and the gloss can- not be brought back by applying wax.

If the polish does not contain wax, a wax product should be applied after polishing.

CAUTION To prevent damage, car polish or hard wax should not be used on com- ponents painted in matt paint, plastic components and the glass headlamp and tail light covers.

Do not polish the paintwork if it is dirty, apply polish in dusty or sandy zones.

Cleaning chrome parts

Clean chrome parts with a damp cloth. SEAT recommends the use of a chrome care product to clean stains and dirt from chrome surfaces. Use a soft dry cloth to polish chrome parts.

CAUTION To prevent scratching chrome surfaces:

Do not use abrasive products.

Do not clean or polish chrome parts in a sandy or dusty environment.

Do not polish dirty surfaces.

Caring for and cleaning anodized surfaces

It is not easy to detect the difference between aluminium and an anodized surface, for example, a radiator grille. However, anodized surfaces must not

be treated in the same way as aluminium surfaces. Never use rough spong- es or cloths to wipe away insect remains.

Use a clean, damp, lint-free cloth to clean anodized surfaces.

If there is a lot of dirt, use a special cleaning product which does not contain solvents.

CAUTION To prevent damage to the anodized surfaces:

Do not use products containing solvents.

Do not use polish or hard wax.

Do not use abrasive products.

Do not polish anodized surfaces in sandy or dusty environments.

Do not polish dirty surfaces.

Cleaning wheels

Cleaning steel wheels

Use an industrial cleaner to remove brake dust. Therefore, clean wheels reg- ularly with a separate sponge.

Any damage to the paint on steel wheels should be touched up before the metal starts to rust.

Caring for and cleaning alloy wheels

Remove road salt and brake dust by washing the wheels approximately once a fortnight. Use an acid free detergent to clean the wheel rims. SEAT recommends treating the wheels thoroughly with a wax compound about once every three months.

It is important to remove road salt and brake dust by washing the wheels at regular intervals, otherwise the finish will be impaired.

227Vehicle maintenance and cleaning

Always use an acid-free detergent for alloy wheel rims. Car polish or other abrasive agents should not be used for maintaining the rims.

If the protective coating on the paint has been damaged (for example, hit by a stone), it should be repaired immediately.

Caring for rubber seals

The rubber seals on doors, windows, etc., remain flexible, provide a better seal and last longer if they are regularly treated with a product specifically designed for use on rubber.

Before applying the product, use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the rubber seals.

De-icing the door lock cylinder

To de-ice the lock cylinders, SEAT recommend the use of genuine SEAT spray with lubricating and anti-corrosive properties.

CAUTION The use of products containing degreasing agents to de-ice the locks may rust the lock cylinder.

Protection of vehicle undercarriage

The vehicle underbody is coated to protect it from chemical and mechanical damage. The protective coat on the undercarriage may wear through use while driving. Therefore, SEAT recommends that the protective coating on

the undercarriage and on the running gear should be regularly checked, and repaired if necessary.

WARNING

Additional underseal or anti-corrosion products could catch fire due to the high temperatures reached by the exhaust gas system and other en- gine components.

Do not apply additional underseal or anti-corrosion products to the exhaust pipes, catalytic converters, heat shields or other parts of the ve- hicle which reach high temperatures.

Cleaning the engine compartment

The engine compartment of any motor vehicle is a potentially hazardous area page 251.

The engine compartment should only be cleaned by qualified personnel. If it is not correctly cleaned, the anti-corrosion coating and consequently elec- trical components may be damaged. Moreover, water may filter directly into the vehicle interior through the water chamber .

If the engine compartment is very dirty, always take the vehicle to a special- ised workshop for professional cleaning. SEAT recommends visiting a Tech- nical Service.

Water box

The water box is in the engine compartment, between the windscreen and the engine, and beneath a perforated cover. Air is taken in through the wa- ter box from outside to the vehicle interior via the heating and air condition- er.

Leaves and other loose objects should be regularly cleaned away from the water box either by hand or with a vacuum.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

228 Vehicle maintenance and cleaning

WARNING

When working on the engine or in the engine compartment, there is a risk of injury, burns, accident or fire.

Before starting work, please ensure you are familiar with the required procedure and the safety precautions page 251.

SEAT recommends contacting a specialised workshop.

CAUTION If water is manually poured into the water box (for example, using a high pressure cleaning appliance), this could cause significant damage to the ve- hicle.

For the sake of the environment Only wash the engine compartment in areas allocated for this purpose, to prevent dirty water which may be contaminated by oil, grease or fuel, from entering the drains. In some places, washing vehicles outside the areas in- tended for this purpose is prohibited.

Caring for and cleaning the vehicle interior

Introduction

The dye used in many modern garments, for example dark jeans, is not al- ways sufficiently colour-fast. Seat upholstery (fabric or leather), especially when light-coloured, may visibly discolour if the dye comes out of clothing (even when used correctly). This is not an upholstery defect but indicates that the dye in the item of clothing is not sufficiently colour-fast.

The longer stains or dirt remain on the vehicle surfaces, especially the fab- rics covering the padded upholstery, the more difficult it becomes to clean

and maintain them. If stains and dirt are left for a long time, it may be that they are impossible to remove.

WARNING

Car-care products may be toxic and hazardous. Using unsuitable car-care products or, using them in the wrong way, may cause accidents, serious injury, burns or intoxication.

Keep your car-care products in their original containers.

Read the instructions.

Never keep car-care products in empty food containers, bottles or other similar containers. Other people may confuse them.

Keep all car-care products out of the reach of children.

Some products may give off harmful vapours during use. Therefore, they should be used outdoors in well-ventilated places.

Never use fuel, turpentine, engine oil, nail-varnish remover or any other volatile product for washing, maintenance or cleaning. These are toxic and highly flammable.

WARNING

Unsuitable maintenance and cleaning of vehicle components may impair proper operation of safety equipment and cause serious injury.

Maintain and clean vehicle components according to the manufactur- er's instructions.

Only use approved or recommended cleaning products.

CAUTION Cleaning products which contain solvents have a corrosive effect and may damage the material irreparably.

Stains and dirt containing aggressive substances or solvents attack the material and may damage it irreparably, even when they are cleaned quick- ly.

229Vehicle maintenance and cleaning

Dirt and stains should not be allowed to dry and should be cleaned as quickly as possible.

In the case of stubborn stains, take the vehicle to a specialised work- shop to avoid damage.

Treating your upholstery

To treat and maintain your seat upholstery, keep the following in mind :

Before entering the vehicle, close any Velcro fasteners that might snag on the upholstery or trim fabric. Any open Velcro fasteners may damage the trim or upholstery fabrics.

To prevent damage, avoid direct contact between sharp decorative ob- jects and the upholstery and trim fabrics. Decorative objects include zips, rivets and rhinestones on clothing and belts.

From time to time, clean the dust that gathers in the perforations, folds and seams so that the surfaces of the seats are not damaged by its abrasive effect.

Make sure clothes are colour-fast to avoid them running and staining the upholstery. This is especially important if the upholstery is light in col- our.

CAUTION If you ignore this checklist, which is important for maintaining your seat up- holstery, the upholstery and trim fabric may be damaged or stained.

Note SEAT recommends you take the vehicle to a specialised workshop to treat any stains on the upholstery caused by the discolouration of clothing.

How to clean the upholstery, trim fabrics and Alcantara

Cleaning the fabric on heated seats and electrically adjustable seats or seats with airbag components

It is possible that there are important airbag components and electrical con- nections inside the driver seat, passenger seat and possibly the outer rear seats. If these seats and seat backrests are damaged, or are cleaned and are treated incorrectly, or if they get wet, the vehicle electric system may be destroyed and the airbag system damaged .

Electric and heated seats contain components and electrical connections that may be damaged if the seats are cleaned or incorrectly treated . Similarly, damage might be caused at other points in the vehicle's electric system.

For this reason, bear the following indications in mind for cleaning:

Do not use high-pressure or steam cleaning equipment or cold aerosols.

Do not use cream detergents or detergent-based solutions for delicate garments.

Prevent the fabric from getting wet at all times.

Only use cleaning products approved by SEAT.

If in doubt, take the vehicle to a professional cleaning company.

Cleaning the fabric on unheated seats, non-electrically adjustable seats and seats without airbag components

Before using any cleaning products, consult and keep in mind the in- structions of use, indications and warnings on the container.

Use a vacuum cleaner (with the brush attachment) on the trim and seat fabrics, the Alcantara upholstery of the seats and the carpet.

Do not use high-pressure or steam cleaning equipment or cold aerosols.

For general cleaning, use a soft sponge or an ordinary lint-free microfi- bre cloth .

Clean Alcantara surfaces with a slightly damp cotton or woollen cloth, or a standard lint-free microfibre cloth .

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

230 Vehicle maintenance and cleaning

If the dirt on the trim and upholstery fabrics is only superficial, you can use a standard foam cleaner.

If the upholstery and trim are very dirty, before cleaning them we recom- mend you find out about the most suitable cleaning options from a profes- sional cleaning company. If necessary, the cleaning should be carried out by a specialised company.

Stain removal

When removing stains, it may be necessary to clean the whole surface and not just the stain itself. Especially if the surface has been dirtied through normal use. If you only clean the stained area, that part may then look light- er than the rest. If in doubt, take the vehicle to a professional cleaning com- pany.

WARNING

If there is a fault in the airbag system, it is likely that the airbag will not deploy correctly, not deploy at all, or do so unexpectedly, which could cause serious or fatal injuries.

Have the system checked immediately by a specialised workshop.

CAUTION If the upholstery on electrically operated seats or seats with airbag compo- nents gets soaked, the vehicle's electric system and certain other compo- nents may be damaged.

If the seat gets soaked, take the vehicle immediately to a specialised workshop to be dried and for the system components to be inspected.

Do not use steam cleaning equipment as the dirt becomes more encrus- ted and fixed in the material.

High-pressure cleaning equipment and cold aerosols may damage the upholstery.

CAUTION Brushes should only be used to clean the carpet and floor mats! Other fabrics may be damaged if cleaned with a brush.

If cream detergents or detergents for delicate garments are applied with a damp cloth or sponge, they may, for example, leave rings when dry be- cause of the surfactant components they contain. Generally, such rings are very difficult or almost impossible to remove.

CAUTION Do not let water soak into Alcantara under any circumstances.

Do not use leather cleaning products, solvents, wax polish, shoe cream, stain removers or similar products on Alcantara.

Never use brushes for cleaning damp material as they could damage the surface.

Cleaning and maintenance of natural leather upholstery

Consult a professional cleaning workshop if you have any doubts on clean- ing and maintaining the leather equipment in your vehicle.

Maintenance and treatment

Nappa natural leather is delicate because it has no additional protective layer.

After cleaning, regularly apply a conditioner with sun-screen and im- pregnating action. These products nourish the leather, soften it and make it more breathable, as well as re-hydrating it. They also provide it with a pro- tective film.

Clean the leather every two or three months and remove stains as they appear.

Treat the leather regularly (about twice a year) with a suitable mainte- nance product.

231Vehicle maintenance and cleaning

Apply as few cleaning and maintenance products as possible, always using a dry, lint-free cotton or woollen cloth. Do not apply cleaning and maintenance products directly to the leather.

Remove recent ball-point pen and ink stains, lipstick, shoe cream and similar stains as soon as possible.

Maintain the colour of the leather. To do this, use a special cream espe- cially coloured for leather to achieve the same overall colour, if necessary.

Afterwards, go over it with a soft cloth.

Cleaning the vehicle

SEAT recommends using a slightly damp cotton or woollen cloth for general cleaning purposes.

Generally, the leather should never be soaked at any point, nor should wa- ter penetrate the seams.

Before cleaning leather upholstery, bear in mind the following recommen- dations page 229, Cleaning the fabric on heated seats and electrically ad- justable seats or seats with airbag components.

CAUTION On no account use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream, stain removers or similar materials on leather.

If the stain remains on the leather for long, it will soak in and be impos- sible to remove.

In the event of spilt liquids, dry immediately with an absorbent cloth to prevent the liquid penetrating through the leather or seams.

If the vehicle is left standing in the sun for long periods, the leather should be protected against direct sunlight to prevent it from fading.

Note The leather will usually change colour slightly with use.

Cleaning synthetic leather upholstery

Before cleaning synthetic leather upholstery, bear in mind the following rec- ommendations page 229, Cleaning the fabric on heated seats and electri- cally adjustable seats or seats with airbag components

Only use water and neutral cleaning products to clean synthetic leather up- holstery.

CAUTION Do not use solvents, floor wax, shoe cream, stain removers or similar prod- ucts on synthetic leather. These will stiffen the material, causing it to crack prematurely.

Cleaning storage compartments, drinks holders and ashtray

Cleaning storage compartments and drinks holders

Some storage compartments and drinks holders have a removable rubber mat.

Use a clean, damp, lint-free cloth to clean parts.

If this does not provide satisfactory results, we recommend using a spe- cial solvent-free plastic cleaning product.

Cleaning the ashtray

Extract the ashtray and empty it.

Clean the ashtray with a dishcloth.

Use a toothpick or similar to remove ash from the area where cigarettes are stubbed out.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

232 Vehicle maintenance and cleaning

Care and cleaning of plastic parts, wooden trim and the instrument panel

Use a clean, damp, lint-free cloth to clean parts.

Clean plastic parts (inside and outside the vehicle) and the dash panel with a special solvent-free product for the care and cleaning of plastic, ap- proved by SEAT .

Wash wooden trims with a mild soap and water solution.

WARNING

Solvents cause the surfaces of the airbag modules to become porous. If an airbag is accidentally triggered, the detachment of plastic parts could cause serious injury.

Never clean the dash panel and the surfaces of the airbag modules with cleaners containing solvents.

Cleaning seat belts

If the seat belt is very dirty, the belt retractor may not work correctly thus preventing the seat belt from operating correctly.

The seat belts should never be removed from the vehicle for cleaning.

Use a soft brush to remove the worst dirt .

Pull the seat belt right out and leave it out.

Clean dirty seat belts with a gentle soap and water solution.

Wait until they are completely dry.

Only allow the seat belt to retract when it is completely dry.

WARNING

Check the condition of all the seat belts at regular intervals. If the web- bing or other parts of the belt are damaged, the vehicle should be taken to a specialised workshop immediately and the belts should be replaced. It is extremely dangerous to drive using damaged seat belts and could re- sult in serious injury or loss of life.

Seat belts and their components must never be cleaned with chemi- cal products, nor should they be allowed to come into contact with corro- sive liquids, solvents or sharp objects. This could affect the strength of the seat belt webbing.

Seat belts should be completely dry before retracting. Damp could damage the belt retractor so that it is does not operate correctly.

Do not allow liquids or foreign bodies to enter the buckle fastenings. This could damage the buckles and seat belts.

Never attempt to repair, modify or remove a seat belt yourself.

Always have damaged seatbelts replaced immediately by seat belts approved for the vehicle in question by SEAT. Seat belts which have been worn in an accident and stretched must be replaced by a specialised workshop. Renewal may be necessary even if there is no apparent dam- age. The belt anchorage should also be checked.

Notes for the user

Labels and plates

Some parts in the engine compartment come from the factory with certifi- cates of safety, stickers or plates containing important information regard- ing the operation of the vehicle, for example, on the petrol cap, on the pas- senger sun visor, on the driver door pillar, or on the floor of the luggage compartment.

233Vehicle maintenance and cleaning

Never remove these certificates of safety, labels or plates, and ensure they are kept in good condition and are legible.

If a vehicle part, bearing a certificate of safety, label or plate, is re- placed, the specialised workshop should attach the information back in the same place.

Certificate of safety

A certificate of safety on the door strut states that all the safety standards and regulations established by the national traffic authorities responsible for road safety were met at the time of manufacture. It may also give the month and year of manufacture, together with the chassis number.

Warning of high voltage label*

There is a label close to the bonnet lock which warns of high voltage in the vehicle electrical installation. The vehicle ignition system complies with sev- eral standards, including the Canadian standard, ICES-002.

Using your vehicle in other countries and continents

The vehicle is manufactured at the factory for use in a particular country in accordance with the national legislation in force at the time of manufacture.

If the vehicle is sold in another country or used in another country for an ex- tended period of time, the applicable legislation of that country should be observed.

It may be necessary to fit or remove certain pieces of equipment or to deac- tivate certain functions. Service work may also be affected. This is particu- larly true if the vehicle is used in a different climate for an extended period of time.

As there are different types of frequency bands around the world, you may find that the radio or navigation system supplied at the factory does not work in another country.

CAUTION SEAT does not accept liability for any damage to the vehicle due to the use of a lower quality fuel, an inadequate service or the non-availability of genuine spare parts.

SEAT does not accept liability if the vehicle does not comply in part or in full with the legal requirements of other countries or continents.

Radio reception and the aerial

The aerial of radio and navigation systems fitted at the factory may be mounted in different parts of the vehicle:

On the inside of the rear window, next to the rear window heating,

on the inside of the rear side windows,

on the inside of the windscreen,

on the roof of the vehicle.

Aerials mounted on the inside of a window can be recognised by the fine wires.

CAUTION Aerials on the inside of windows may be damaged if knocked or if cleaned with corrosive or acid cleaning products. Do not stick adhesive labels over the heating elements and never clean the inside of the rear window with corrosive or acid products or other similar chemical cleaning products.

Note If electrical equipment is used near an aerial built-into the window, you may observe interference in the reception of AM stations.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

234 Vehicle maintenance and cleaning

Notes on SEAT repairs

WARNING

Repairs or modifications which are not performed correctly may result in damage or errors in the vehicle operation, affecting the effectiveness of the driver assist and airbag systems. This could result in serious acci- dent.

Have any repairs or modifications carried out at a specialised work- shop.

Collection and scrapping of end-of-life vehicles

Collection of end-of-life vehicles

An extensive network of used car reception centres already exists in much of Europe. After the vehicle has been delivered, you will receive a certificate of destruction describing the environmentally friendly scrapping of the vehicle in accordance with applicable legislation.

We will collect the used vehicle free of charge, provided it complies with all national legislation.

Please see your Technical Service for further information about the collec- tion and scrapping of end-of-life vehicles.

Scrapping

The relevant safety requirements must be observed when the vehicle or components of the airbag or belt tensioner systems are scrapped. These re- quirements are known to specialised workshops.

235Accessories, replacement of parts and modifications

Accessories, replacement of parts and modifications

Accessories, replacement of parts and modifications

Introduction

WARNING

The use of spare parts and accessories, or incorrectly performed modifi- cations or repairs may result in damage to the vehicle, accidents and se- rious injury.

SEAT strongly recommends you to only use SEAT approved accesso- ries and SEAT original spare parts. These parts and accessories have been specially tested by SEAT for suitability, reliability and safety.

Have any repairs or modifications carried out at a specialised work- shop. These workshops have the necessary tools, diagnostic equipment, up-to-date repair information and qualified personnel.

Only mount parts with the same specifications as the parts fitted at factory.

Never mount, fasten or fit objects such as drink holders or telephone cradles over the covers of the airbag modules or within their radius of ac- tion.

Only use wheels and tyre combinations which have been approved by SEAT for your vehicle type.

Accessories and spare parts

SEAT recommends you consult an Official Service before purchasing acces- sories and spare parts or consumables. For example, when fitting accesso-

ries at a later date, or when replacing a component. A Technical Service will advise you as to the legal requirements and manufacturer's recommenda- tions regarding accessories, spare parts and other components.

SEAT recommend you use only approved SEAT accessories and genuine SEAT spare parts. These parts and accessories have been specially tested by SEAT for suitability, reliability and safety. In addition the Technical Serv- ices will guarantee that the assembly is carried out professionally.

Although we continually monitor the market, SEAT cannot guarantee that products not approved by SEAT are reliable, safe and suitable for the vehi- cle. Therefore, SEAT cannot accept liability, even in those cases authorised by an officially recognised technical inspection office or other official body.

Any retro-fitted equipment which has a direct effect on the vehicle and/or the way it is driven must be approved by SEAT for use in your vehicle and bear the e mark (the European Union's authorisation symbol). This includes cruise control systems or electronically controlled suspension.

If any additional electrical components are fitted which do not serve to con- trol the vehicle itself, these must bear the pertinent seal (European Un- ion manufacturer declaration of conformity). This includes refrigerator box- es, laptops or ventilator fans.

WARNING

Repairs or modifications to the vehicle not carried out by a professional may affect the performance of the airbags, resulting in operating faults or a fatal accident.

Never mount, fasten or fit objects such as drink holders or telephone cradles over the covers of the airbag modules or within their radius of ac- tion.

Objects placed over the airbag covers, or within their radius of action, could lead to serious injury or loss of life if the airbags are triggered.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

236 Accessories, replacement of parts and modifications

Fluids and consumables

All vehicle fluids and consumables, such as notched belts, tyres, coolant fluids, engine oils, spark plugs and batteries are continually being devel- oped. Therefore all fluids and consumables should be changed at a special- ised workshop. Technical Services are permanently informed of any modifi- cations.

WARNING

The incorrect use or handling of fluids or consumables may result in acci- dent, serious injury, burns or intoxication.

Therefore, fluids must always be stored closed in their original con- tainer.

Never store fluids in empty food containers or bottles as other people may accidentally drink the fluid.

Keep all fluids and consumables out of reach of children.

Read and observe the information and warnings given on the fluid containers.

Only work in the open air or in well-ventilated zones, when using products which give off harmful vapours.

Never use fuel, turpentine, engine oil, acetone or any other volatile liquid in the maintenance of the vehicle. These are toxic and highly flam- mable. They could lead to fire or explosions!

CAUTION Only use appropriate fluids. When topping up fluids make sure the cor- rect fluid is put into the correct filler opening, otherwise this can cause seri- ous malfunctions or engine damage.

Accessories and other components mounted in front of the air inlet re- duce the cooling effect of the coolant. If the engine is running under great strain in high outside temperatures, it could overheat.

For the sake of the environment Leaking fluids could pollute the environment. Collect any spilt fluids in suit- able containers and dispose of in accordance with legislation and with re- spect for the environment.

Repairs and technical changes

When performing repairs and technical modifications, SEAT's directives must be observed!

Unauthorised modifications to the electronic components or software in the vehicle may cause malfunctions. Due to the way the electronic components are linked together in networks, other indirect systems may be affected by the faults. This may significantly affect the vehicle's performance, increase component wear and could mean that the vehicle registration documents are no longer valid.

Your Technical Service cannot be held liable for any damage caused by tech- nical modifications or repairs performed incorrectly.

The Technical Service does not accept liability for damage resulting from technical modifications or repairs performed incorrectly; neither is the SEAT warranty valid in these cases.

SEAT recommends you have any technical modifications or repairs per- formed at a Technical Service and that you use genuine SEAT spare parts.

Vehicles with special accessories and equipment

The manufacturers of additional equipment guarantee that the equipment complies with applicable laws and regulations with respect to the environ- ment, in particular Directives 2000/53/CE and 2003/11/CE. The first direc- tive governs the disposal of end-of-life vehicles while the second refers to the restrictions on the marketing and use of certain dangerous substances and preparations.

237Accessories, replacement of parts and modifications

The vehicle owner should keep the documentation for the additional equip- ment safely and hand it over to the scrap yard at the end of the vehicle's service life. This ensures that any additional equipment mounted in end-of- life vehicles is correctly disposed of with respect for the environment.

WARNING

Repairs or modifications which are not performed correctly may result in damage or errors in the vehicle operation, affecting the effectiveness of the driver assist systems. This could result in serious accident.

All repairs and modifications to the vehicle should only be performed by a specialised workshop.

Repair and faults in the airbag system

When performing repairs and technical modifications, SEAT's directives must be observed!

Modifications and repairs to the front bumper, doors, front seats, and re- pairs to the roof or chassis should only be carried out in a specialised work- shop. These components may contain parts or sensors belonging to the air- bag system.

If work is carried out on the airbag system or parts have to be removed and fitted on the system when performing other repair work, parts of the airbag system may be damaged. The consequence may be that, in the event of an accident, the airbag inflates incorrectly or does not inflate at all.

So that the effectiveness of the airbag is not reduced and that removed parts do not cause any injuries or environmental pollution, regulations must be observed. These requirements are known to specialised workshops.

Modifications to the vehicle suspension may affect the operation of the air- bag system in the event of collision. For example, if wheel and tyre combi- nations not approved by SEAT are used, or if the vehicle height is lowered,

the suspension is stiffened or the suspension springs, telescopic arms, dampers, etc., are modified, the results received by the airbag sensors and sent to the control unit may not be accurate. For example, some modifica- tions to the suspension could increase the force measured by the sensors and result in the triggering of the airbag systems in collisions. Under normal conditions, the measured values would be lower and the airbag would not have been triggered. Other modifications may reduce the forces measured by the sensors and therefore the airbags are not triggered in situations when they should have triggered.

WARNING

Repairs or modifications which are not performed correctly may result in damage or errors in the vehicle operation, affecting the effectiveness of the airbag systems. This could result in serious or fatal accident.

All repairs and modifications to the vehicle should only be performed by a specialised workshop.

Airbag modules must never be repaired: if damaged, they must be re- placed.

Never fit recycled or reused airbag components in your vehicle.

WARNING

Modifications to the vehicle suspension, including the use of unauthor- ised wheel and tyre combinations, may affect the performance of the air- bags and increase the risk of serious or fatal injury in the event of acci- dent.

Never fit suspension components which are not identical to the origi- nal parts mounted in the vehicle.

Never use wheel and tyre combinations not approved by SEAT.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

238 Accessories, replacement of parts and modifications

Retro-fitting of two-way radios

An exterior aerial is required for the use of two-way radios in the vehicle.

The retro-fitting of electrical or electronic appliances in the vehicle is sub- ject to their approval for use in your vehicle. Under certain circumstances, this could mean that your vehicle registration documents are no longer val- id.

SEAT has approved your vehicle for use with two-way radios providing the following conditions are observed:

The exterior aerial must be mounted professionally.

The maximum transmitting power is 10 watts.

The optimal reach of the equipment is only achieved with an external aerial.

Check first with a specialised workshop if you wish to use a two-way radio with a transmitting power of over 10 watts; they will provide you with infor- mation on installation options. SEAT recommends visiting a Technical Serv- ice.

All legal requirements, together with the instructions for the use of two-way radios must be observed.

WARNING

If the two-way radio is not securely fastened in position, it could be sent flying around the vehicle in the event of sharp braking, sudden manoeu- vres or accident, causing injury.

While driving, two-way radios must be securely fastened in position, outside the radius of action of the airbags, or safely stowed away.

WARNING

When using a two-way radio without a connection to an exterior aerial, the maximum permitted levels of electromagnetic radiation may be ex- ceeded. This is also the case if the aerial has not been correctly installed.

You should only use a two-way radio inside the vehicle if it has first been correctly connected to an exterior aerial.

Information stored by the control units

Your vehicle is fitted at the factory with a series of electronic control units responsible for the engine and gearbox management. In addition, the con- trol units supervise the performance of the exhaust gas system and the air- bag systems.

Therefore, while the vehicle is being driven, these electronic control units are continuously analysing the vehicle data. In the event of faults or devia- tions from the theoretical values, only this data is stored. Normally, the warning lamps on the instrument panel light up in the event of faults.

This data can only be read and analysed using special equipment.

The storing of the data allows specialised workshops to detect and repair faults. Stored data may include:

Data relating to the engine or the gearbox

Speed

Direction of travel

Braking force

Detection of seat belt

The vehicle control units never record conversations held by passengers in the vehicle.

239Accessories, replacement of parts and modifications

In vehicles equipped with an emergency call function via the mobile phone or other appliances connected in the vehicle, it is possible to send the vehi- cle position. If the control unit records an accident with airbag activation, the system may automatically send a signal. This will depend on the net- work operator. Normally, transmission is only possible in areas with good coverage.

Event Data Recorder

The vehicle is not fitted with an event data recorder.

An event data recorder temporarily stores the vehicle information. There- fore, in the event of accident, it is possible to obtain detailed information about how the accident occurred. For example, in vehicles with airbag sys- tems, data relating to speed of impact, seat belt status, seat positions and airbag activation times may be stored. The volume of data depends on the manufacturer.

Event data recorders can only be mounted with authorisation from the vehi- cle owner and, in some countries, they are governed by local legislation.

Reprogramming control units

On the whole, all the data required for the component management is stor- ed in the control units. The programming of certain convenience functions, such as the convenience turn signals, individual door opening and instruc- tions on the display can be modified using special equipment at the work- shop. If this is the case, the information and descriptions given in the In- struction Manual will not match the original functions. Therefore, SEAT rec- ommends that any modifications are recorded in the section Other work- shop observations in the Maintenance Programme.

The Technical Service must have a record of any modification to the pro- gramming.

Reading the vehicle fault memory

There is a diagnostics connector in the vehicle interior for reading the vehi- cle fault memory. The fault memory documents errors and deviations from the theoretical values of the electronic control units.

The diagnostics connector is in the driver side footwell area, next to the lev- er for opening the bonnet, below a cover.

The fault memory should only be read and reset by a specialised workshop.

Using a mobile telephone in a vehicle without connection to an exterior aerial

Mobile telephones transmit and receive radio waves, both when in use and when on stand-by. Scientific studies state that radio waves exceeding cer- tain values may be harmful to the human body. International committees and authorities have established limits and directives in order to ensure electromagnetic radiation from mobile phones remains within certain limits that do not endanger human health. Nevertheless, there is no conclusive scientific evidence that wireless telephones are totally safe.

Therefore, some experts recommend that use of mobile phone be kept to a minimum until the results of current research are published.

When a mobile phone not connected to an exterior aerial is used inside the vehicle, the electromagnetic radiation may be greater than if the mobile phone were connected to a built-in aerial or to another exterior aerial.

If the vehicle is fitted with a suitable hands-free device, it will comply with the legislation in many countries which only permits the use of mobile phones inside vehicles using a hands-free device.

The hands-free system mounted at the factory has been designed for use with conventional mobile phones and phones with Bluetooth technology. Mobile phones should be placed on a suitable phone cradle. In addition, the cradle should always be correctly fitted into the base plate. This ensures that the mobile phone is securely attached to the dash panel, it is always within reach of the driver and is connected to the vehicle exterior aerial.

If the mobile phone is connected to an aerial incorporated into the vehicle or an exterior aerial connected to the vehicle, this will help to reduce the

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

240 Accessories, replacement of parts and modifications

electromagnetic radiation transmitted and the risk to human health. It will also improve the quality of the connection.

If the phone is used inside the vehicle without the hands-free system, it will not be securely fastened and will not be connected to the exterior aerial of the vehicle telephone. Nor will the telephone charge if it is not on the sup- port. In addition, some calls may break off and the quality of the connection will be affected.

Mobile phones should only be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to a hands-free system with an exterior aerial.

WARNING

If the mobile phone is not securely fastened in position, it could be sent flying around the vehicle in the event of sharp braking, sudden manoeu- vres or accident, causing injury.

While driving, mobile phones must be securely fastened in position, outside the radius of action of the airbags, or safely stowed away.

WARNING

When using a mobile phone without a connection to an exterior aerial, the maximum permitted levels of electromagnetic radiation may be ex- ceeded. This is also the case if the aerial has not been correctly installed.

A minimum of 20 centimetres should be kept between mobile phone aerials and artificial pacemakers, as mobile telephones may affect the working of pacemakers.

Do not keep mobile phones in breast pockets directly above pacemak- ers.

Switch off the mobile phone immediately if you suspect there may be interference.

Jacking points for raising vehicle

Fig. 163 Front jacking points for raising vehicle with lifting platform or jack

Fig. 164 Rear jacking points for raising vehicle with lifting platform or jack

Always use the jacking points indicated in the figures Fig. 163 and Fig. 164 when raising the vehicle. If the vehicle is not lifted at these points, it could be damaged or cause serious injury .

The vehicle should not be lifted using lifting platforms with lift pads con- taining fluid.

When raising a vehicle using a platform or jack, a series of precautionary measures are required. Never raise the vehicle with a lifting platform or jack

241Accessories, replacement of parts and modifications

unless you have received training in how to do so and know how to lift the vehicle safely.

Notes on raising the vehicle with a jack page 281.

WARNING

The improper use of the lifting platform or the jack when raising the vehi- cle may result in accidents or serious injury.

Before raising the vehicle, please observe the manufacturer's instruc- tions for the platform or jack, and the legal requirements, where applica- ble.

There should not be anyone inside the vehicle when it is being raised or once it is in the air.

Only use the jacking points indicated in the figures Fig. 163 and Fig. 164 when raising the vehicle. If the vehicle is not lifted at the indi- cated points, it may fall from the platform while the engine or gearbox is being dismounted, for example.

The jacking points should be centrally aligned and firmly positioned on the platform support plates.

Never start the engine when the vehicle is raised! The vehicle may fall from the platform due to the engine vibrations.

If it is necessary to work underneath the vehicle while it is raised, you should check that the supporting stands have an adequate load capacity.

Never climb onto the lifting platform.

Always make sure that the weight of the vehicle does not exceed the lifting platform load capacity.

CAUTION Never raise the vehicle at the engine oil sump, the gearbox or the rear or front axles.

Always use an intermediate rubber support to prevent damage to the vehicle underbody. Check that the arms of the lifting platform are able to move with obstruction.

The arms should not come into contact with the side running boards or other parts of the vehicle.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

242 Checking and refilling levels

Checking and refilling levels

Filling the tank

Introduction

The fuel tank flap is on the rear right of the vehicle.

WARNING

Refuelling or handling fuel carelessly can cause an explosion or fire re- sulting in serious burns and injuries.

Always make sure that you correctly close the fuel cap to avoid evap- oration and fuel spillage.

Fuels are highly explosive and inflammable substances that can cause serious burns and injuries.

Fuel could leak out or be spilt if the engine is not switched off or if the filler fuel nozzle is not fully inserted into the tank filler neck when refuel- ling. This could lead to a fire, explosion and severe injuries.

When refuelling, turn off the engine, the auxiliary heating (page 150) and turn off the ignition for safety reasons.

Always turn off mobile telephones, radio apparatus and other radio wave emitting equipment before refuelling. Electromagnetic waves could cause sparks and lead to a fire.

Never enter the vehicle while refuelling. If it is absolutely necessary to enter the vehicle, close the door and touch a metal surface before touching the filler nozzle again. This will prevent the generation of static electricity. Sparks could cause a fire when refuelling.

Never handle fuel close to open flames, sparks or objects with slow combustion (e.g. cigarettes).

WARNING (Continued)

Avoid static electricity and electro-magnetic radiation when refuel- ling.

Observe the safety regulations of the service station.

Never spill fuel on the vehicle or in the luggage compartment.

WARNING

For safety reasons, SEAT does not recommend carrying a spare fuel canis- ter in the vehicle. Fuel could be spilled and catch fire, above all in case of an accident and this applies to a full container as well as empty contain- ers. This could lead to explosions, fires and injuries.

Observe the following if you exceptionally have to carry fuel in a can- ister:

When filling a fuel container, never place it inside or on the vehicle, for example, in the luggage compartment or on the boot lid. Filling in these circumstances could create an electrostatic charge and spark that could ignite fuel fumes.

Always place the canister on the ground to fill it.

Insert the fuel nozzle into the neck of the canister as far as possi- ble.

If you are using a metal fuel canister, the nozzle must always touch the canister while it is being filled to avoid static electricity.

Follow the legal requirements for the use, storage and transport of spare fuel canisters.

Insure that the fuel container complies with manufacturing stand- ards, for example, ANSI or ASTM F852-86.

243Checking and refilling levels

CAUTION Always remove any fuel spilled on the vehicle paintwork immediately to avoid damage to the wheel housing, the tyre and vehicle paintwork.

Refuelling a petrol engine with diesel or a diesel engine with petrol can cause serious engine and fuel system damage; the resulting malfunctions are not covered by the SEAT warranty. If you refuel with the wrong type of fuel, never start the engine. This applies to even the smallest amount of the wrong fuel. Seek specialist assistance. With the engine running, the compo- sition of the wrong fuel could significantly damage the fuel system and the engine itself.

In vehicles with a diesel engine, under no circumstances should you re- fuel or drive with petrol, kerosene, heating oil or any other type of different fuel. Other types of fuels could cause serious damage to the engine and to the fuel supply system and the resulting problems are not covered by the SEAT warranty.

For the sake of the environment Fuels can contaminate the environment. Collect any spilt service fluids and allow a professional to dispose of them.

Note There is no emergency mechanism for the manual release of the tank flap. If necessary, request assistance from specialised personnel.

Control lamps and fuel gauge

Fig. 165 On the instru- ment panel: Fuel gauge for petrol and diesel

It lights up

Gauge posi- tion

Fig. 165 Possible cause Solution

Red mark (ar-

row)

The fuel tank is almost empty. The reserve tank is be- ing used page 323.

Refuel as soon as possible .

Fuel tank not closed correctly.

Stop the vehicle and close the tank flap properly.

Several warning and control lamps should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few seconds.

When the control lamp lights up or the auxiliary heater and the auxiliary heater running off petrol automatically switch off.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

244 Checking and refilling levels

WARNING

Driving with insufficient fuel reserve could result in the vehicle breaking down in traffic and a serious accident.

If the fuel level is too low then the fuel supply to the engine can be- come irregular especially on slopes.

If the engine is choked or stalls due to lack of fuel or irregular fuel supply, the power steering as well as all of the driver assistance systems including braking assistance will stop working.

Always refuel when there is only one quarter of the fuel tank left to avoid running out of fuel.

CAUTION Always pay attention to any lit control lamps and to the corresponding descriptions and instructions to avoid damage to the vehicle.

Never run the fuel tank completely dry. An irregular fuel supply may lead to ignition faults and unburnt fuel could enter the exhaust system. This could damage the catalytic converter filter or the diesel particulate filter!

Note The arrow next to the fuel pump symbol on the instrument panel Fig. 165 indicates the side of the vehicle on which the tank flap is located.

Filling the tank with petrol or diesel

Fig. 166 Open tank flap with tank cap attached to the holder

Before refuelling, always turn off the engine, the ignition, mobile tele- phones, auxiliary heating and keep them off during refuelling.

Opening the fuel tank cap

The tank flap is at the rear of the vehicle on the right.

Press the rear of the tank flap to open it.

Unscrew the tank cap anticlockwise and insert it in the hole in the tank flap hinge Fig. 166.

Refuelling

The correct petrol type for the vehicle is located on a sticker inside the fuel tank flap page 245.

If the automatic filler nozzle is operated correctly, it will switch itself off as soon as the tank is full .

Do not continue to refuel if it is turned off! Otherwise, this will fill the ex- pansion chamber and fuel may leak out if the ambient conditions are warm.

245Checking and refilling levels

Closing the fuel tank cap

Screw on the tank cap clockwise until it you hear it click into position.

Press the tank flap until you hear it click into place. The tank flap must be flush with the body contour.

WARNING

Do not continue refilling once the fuel nozzle has switched itself off. The fuel tank may be filled too much. As a result, fuel may spurt out and spill. This could lead to a fire, explosion and severe injuries.

CAUTION Always remove any fuel spilled on the vehicle paintwork immediately to avoid damage to the wheel housing, the tyre and vehicle paintwork.

For the sake of the environment Spilt fuel can contaminate the environment.

Fuel

Introduction

You will find a factory-fitted sticker containing information on the type of fuel for your vehicle on the inside of the fuel tank flap.

WARNING

Refuelling or handling fuel carelessly can cause an explosion or fire re- sulting in serious burns and injuries.

Fuel is a highly explosive, easily flammable substance.

Observe current safety instructions and local regulations concerning the handling of fuel.

Types of fuel

The type of fuel to use when refilling will depend on the vehicle's engine. You will find a factory-fitted sticker containing information on the type of fuel for your vehicle on the inside of the fuel tank flap.

SEAT recommends the use of sulphur-free or low sulphur fuel to reduce con- sumption and prevent engine damage.

Possible types of fuel

Alternative names Further information

91a) RON Normal petrol, normal unlea- ded petrol

page 246 95a) RON Premium unleaded petrol (95

RON)

98a) RON Premium unleaded petrol (98 RON)

Diesel page 246

a) RON = Regulation Octane Number

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

246 Checking and refilling levels

Petrol

Petrol types

Vehicles with petrol engines must refuel using unleaded petrol according to European norm EN 228 .

Petrol types are categorised according to their octane number (e.g. 91, 95, 98 or 99 RON (RON = Research Octane Number). You may use petrol with a high octane number than the one recommended for your engine. Howev- er, this has no advantage in terms of fuel consumption and engine power.

SEAT recommends refuelling with a low sulphur content or sulphur-free pet- rol to reduce fuel consumption for petrol engines.

Petrol additives

The quality of the fuel influences the behaviour, performance and service life of the engine. This is why the petrol you use should carry suitable addi- tives already included by the petrol industry, free of metals. These additives will help to prevent corrosion, keep the fuel system clean and prevent de- posits from building up in the engine.

If good-quality petrol with metal-free additives is not available or engine problems arise, the necessary additives must be added when refuelling .

Not all petrol additives have been shown to be effective. The use of unsuita- ble petrol additives may cause significant damage to the engine and the catalytic converter. Metal additives should never be used. Metal additives may also be contained in petrol additives for improving anti-detonation rat- ings or octane ratings .

SEAT recommends genuine Volkswagen Group fuel additives for petrol en- gines. These additives can be bought at SEAT Authorised Services, where information on how to use them can also be obtained.

CAUTION Do not refuel if the filler indicates that the fuel contains metal. LRP (lead replacement petrol) fuels contain high concentrations of metal additives. Using them may damage the engine!

Only use fuel with an octane rating that is in line with the norm EN 228, otherwise significant damage could be caused to the engine and fuel sys- tem. Furthermore, it could lead to a loss of performance with the conse- quent engine fault.

The use of unsuitable petrol additives could damage the engine.

If, in exceptional circumstances, petrol with a lower octane rating to that recommended is used, only use moderate engine speeds and a light throt- tle. Avoid using full throttle and overloading the engine. Otherwise you may damage the engine. Fill up with fuel of a suitable octane rating as soon as possible.

Just one full tank of leaded fuel would seriously impair the efficiency of the catalytic converter and could damage it.

Diesel

Diesel fuel

Diesel fuel must correspond to European standard EN 590 (In Germany, EN 590 or DIN 51628).

The use of diesel fuel with a high sulphur percentage requires shorter serv- ice intervals Booklet Maintenance Programme . Your Technical Serv- ice will be able to tell you which countries have diesel with a high sulphur content.

Do not mix fuel additives (thinners, or similar additives) with diesel fuel.

247Checking and refilling levels

Winter-grade diesel

When using summer-grade diesel fuel, difficulties may be experienced at temperatures below 0 C (+32 F) because the fuel thickens due to wax sep- aration. For this reason, winter-grade diesel fuel is available in Germany, for example, during the cold months. It can be used at temperatures as low as -20 C (-4 F).

In countries with different climatic conditions, other types of diesel fuel are available that are suitable to local temperatures. Technical Services and fill- ing stations in the country concerned will inform you on the type of diesel fuels available.

A cold diesel engine makes more noise during winter temperatures than summer temperatures. Furthermore, the exhaust gases may turn slightly bluish while the engine is heating. The quantity of exhaust gases will de- pend on the outside temperature.

Filter pre-heater

Vehicles with a diesel engine are fitted with a fuel filter pre-heating system. This ensures that the fuel system remains operational to approx. -24 C (-11 F), provided you use winter-grade diesel which is safe to -15 C (+5 F).

However, if the fuel has waxed to such an extent that the engine will not start at temperatures of under -24 C (-11 F), simply place the vehicle in a warm garage or workshop for a while to heat up.

Auxiliary heater

Vehicles with a diesel engine may be fitted with an auxiliary heater. The heater runs off the fuel from the fuel tank. On doing so, smells and steam may be noticed outside the vehicle for a short period. This is normal and it is not an indication of a fault in the vehicle.

Whenever there is little fuel in the tank (reserve), the auxiliary heater auto- matically switches off.

WARNING

Never use start boosters. An aerosol start booster could explode or cause a sudden rise in engine speed leading to engine damage and serious in- jury.

CAUTION The vehicle is not prepared for the use of biodiesel. Never, under any circumstances refuel with biodiesel. It could damage the fuel system and subsequently lead to engine faults!

The addition of biodiesel to diesel by the diesel producer according to Standard EN 590 or other equivalent (DIN 51628 in Germany, for example) is authorised and causes no type of damage to the engine or the fuel sys- tem.

The diesel engine has been designed for to use diesel fuel exclusively. Therefore, never use petrol, fuel oil or other unsuitable fuels. The composi- tion of these fuels may significantly damage the fuel system and the en- gine.

The use of diesel fuels with a high sulphur percentage could considera- bly reduce the service life of the diesel particulate filter. Your Technical Serv- ice will be able to tell you which countries have diesel with a high sulphur content.

Information on fuel consumption

The consumption and emission values indicated do not refer to one specific vehicle. They are only to be used to compare the values of the different ve- hicle versions. The fuel consumption and CO2 emissions of a vehicle not on- ly depend on the effective use of fuel. They also depend on your driving style and other non-technical factors.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

248 Checking and refilling levels

Calculation of fuel consumption

Fuel consumption and emission values are determined according to the cur- rent version of the 715/2007/EC or 80/1268/EEC regulation and are valid for the vehicle kerb weight. The specifications do not refer to an individual vehicle. Two measuring cycles are carried out on a rolling road test bed to calculate fuel consumption. The test criteria are as follows:

Urban cycle Measurement of the urban cycle starts with an engine cold start. City driving is then simulated at between 0 and 50 km/ h (31 mph).

Road cycle

In the road cycle simulation, the car undergoes frequent ac- celeration and braking in all gears, as in normal everyday driving. The road speed ranges from 0 to 120 km/h (0 to 75 mph).

Combined The average combined consumption is calculated with a weighting of around 37 % for the urban cycle and 63 % for the road cycle.

CO2 emis- sions of the combination

The exhaust gases are collected during both driving cycles to calculate carbon dioxide emissions (urban and road). The gas composition is then analysed to evaluate the CO2 con- tent and other emissions.

Note The kerb weight may vary according to the vehicle equipment. This could raise consumption and the CO2 emissions slightly.

In practice, consumption values could be different to the values calcula- ted based on the 715/2007/EC or 80/1268/EEC regulations.

Selective Catalytic Reduction* (AdBlue)

Introduction

The AdBlue fill level must be checked when the vehicle is being serviced.

WARNING

If the AdBlue fill level is too low, the vehicle may not restart after switch- ing the ignition off. The emergency start or jump start will not be possi- ble either!

Top up with AdBlue at the latest 1,000 km or 600 miles before it runs out.

Do not allow the AdBlue to run too low.

WARNING

AdBlue is an irritant, corrosive liquid that can cause injuries if it touches the skin, eyes or respiratory organs.

If AdBlue get in contact with eyes and skin, rinse for at least 15 mi- nutes with plenty of water and seek medical help.

If the AdBlue is swallowed, wash your mouth with plenty of water for at least 15 minutes. Do not try to provoke vomiting unless recommended by a Doctor. Seek medical advice immediately.

CAUTION AdBlue damages surfaces such as painted vehicle parts, plastic, items of clothing and carpets. Spilt AdBlue should be removed as quickly as possi- ble using a damp cloth and plenty of cold water.

If the AdBlue has crystallised, remove with warm water and a sponge.

249Checking and refilling levels

Control and warning lamps

It lights up Possible cause Solution

(red)

The engine cannot be re- started! The level of AdBlue is too low.

Stop the vehicle in a suitable, safe and flat area then top up with the minimum quantity of AdBlue required page 250.

(red) with

The engine cannot be re- started! AdBlue system malfunction.

Contact a specialised work- shop. Have the system checked there.

(yellow)

The AdBlue reserve is low.

Refill AdBlue over the next kil- ometres or miles as indicated page 250. SEAT recom- mends contacting a special- ised workshop.

(yellow)

together with

There is a fault in the AdBl- ue system or unsuitable AdBlue fluid has been used.

Contact a specialised work- shop. Have the system checked there.

Several warning and control lamps should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few seconds.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings in Control and warning lamps on page 56.

Information on AdBlue

In vehicles with Selective Catalytic Reduction, a special urea solution (AdBl- ue) is injected into the exhaust gas system, before the catalytic converter to reduce nitrogen oxide emissions.

The consumption of AdBlue depends on individual driving style, the tem- perature at which the system operates and the outside temperature where the vehicle is driven.

AdBlue is kept in an independent tank in the vehicle and should be refilled at an official supplier. The AdBlue tank holds about 17 litres.

A message will be displayed on the dash panel around 2,400 km before the next service to indicate that AdBlue must be refilled page 250. If you ig- nore this message and do not refill, you will be unable to start the engine afterwards page 249.

SEAT recommends contacting a specialised workshop. If you are unable to visit a qualified specialised workshop, you should temporarily refill with a minimum of 10.0 litres of AdBlue. Only refill using AdBlue expressly ap- proved by SEAT.

When the indicators and light simultaneously, there is a fault. SEAT recommends visiting the closest specialised workshop.

AdBlue is a registered trademark in the US, Germany, the European Union and other countries belonging to the German automobile industry ("Ver- band der Automobilindustrie e. V.", VDA).

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

250 Checking and refilling levels

Refilling AdBlue

Fig. 167 At the rear left of the luggage compart- ment: AdBlue tank, be- hind a cover panel

Fig. 168 AdBlue tank with filler neck cap and refilling bottle

To refill AdBlue, the vehicle must be on flat ground and not, for example, parked on a kerb or slope. If the vehicle is not on flat ground then the filling indicator cannot measure the filling quantity.

Opening the tank filling neck

Open the rear lid.

Rotate the shut off on the cover clockwise Fig. 167 and open the cover forwards.

Unscrew the tank filler neck cap Fig. 168 1 anticlockwise.

Refilling AdBlue

Only use AdBlue that is approved by SEAT and that complies with the ISO 22241-1 Standard. Only use genuine bottles.

Observe the instructions and information provided by the refill bottle manufacturer.

Observe the expiry date.

Unscrew the cap on the refill bottle.

Place the refill bottle 2 upside down inside the tank filler neck.

Press the refill bottle against the filler neck and keep in this position.

Add at least 10 litres of AdBlue (6 bottles). A lower quantity would be insufficient.

Wait until the contents of the refill bottle have been poured into the AdBlue tank. Do not crush or damage the bottle!

Unscrew the liquid bottle anticlockwise and remove it carefully .

You can tell when the AdBlue tank is full because the bottle will be emp- ty.

Closing the tank filling neck

Screw on the tank filler neck cap Fig. 168 1 clockwise until it is fully inserted.

Place the cover and turn the shut off anticlockwise to close it.

251Checking and refilling levels

Operations before driving

Only switch the ignition on after refilling.

Keep the ignition switch on for at least 30 seconds so that the system detects tank refilling.

Wait 30 seconds before starting the engine!

WARNING

Only keep AdBlue in its original container, tightly shut and in a safe place.

Never keep AdBlue in empty food cans, bottles or other containers to avoid other people mistaking it for something else.

Keep the AdBlue out of the reach of small children.

CAUTION Only refill using AdBlue expressly approved by SEAT. The use of any oth- er type of AdBlue could cause engine damage!

AdBlue should never be mixed with water or any other additives. Any type of damage caused by a mixture will not be covered by the warranty.

Do not add AdBlue to the diesel fuel tank! Otherwise you may damage the engine.

Never leave the refill bottle in the vehicle. It could become permeable due to temperature changes and bottle damage and the AdBlue could dam- age the vehicle interior.

For the sake of the environment Dispose of the refill bottle in an environment-friendly manner.

Note Suitable AdBlue refill bottles can be purchased from a Technical Service.

Working in the engine compartment

Introduction

Before working in the engine compartment, make sure that the vehicle is parked on horizontal and firm ground.

The engine compartment of the vehicle is a hazardous area. Never work on the engine or in the engine compartment if you are not familiar with the op- erations to be carried out, the applicable safety standards and especially if you do not have the instruments, liquids and tools necessary ! Have the work carried out by a specialised workshop if you are uncertain. Negli- gent work can cause serious injury.

WARNING

If the vehicle moves unexpectedly, this could cause serious injury.

Never work underneath the vehicle if it is not secured against moving. If you must work underneath the vehicle with the wheels in contact with the ground then it should be parked on flat ground, the wheels should be prevented from moving and the key must be removed from the ignition.

If you have to work underneath the vehicle, you must use suitable stands additionally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of accident!. The jack is not intended for this kind of work and its failure could lead to severe injuries.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

252 Checking and refilling levels

WARNING

The engine compartment is a dangerous area capable of causing serious injury.

For all type of work, always take the utmost precautions, work care- fully and note the general safety standards in force. Never take personal risks.

Never work on the engine or in the engine compartment if you are not familiar with the necessary operations. If you are not sure about proce- dures then visit a specialised workshop to carry out the necessary work. Incorrect work can cause serious injuries.

Never open the bonnet if you see steam or coolant escaping from the engine compartment. These can cause severe burns. Always wait until you cannot see or hear the sound of steam or coolant coming from the engine compartment.

Always allow the engine to cool down before opening the bonnet.

Contact with hot elements of the engine and the exhaust system can cause burns.

Once the engine has cooled, follow the instructions below before opening the bonnet:

Turn on the electronic parking brake and place the gear selector lever in P or the gearbox lever in neutral.

Remove the key from the ignition.

Keep children away from the engine compartment and never leave them unsupervised.

WARNING (Continued)

When the engine is warm or hot, the cooling system is pressurised. Do not unscrew the cap on the expansion tank when the engine is hot. Otherwise, coolant may spray out under pressure causing burns and seri- ous injury.

Carefully and slowly unscrew the cap anticlockwise, gently press- ing down on it.

Always protect your face, hands and arms from hot coolant and steam using a large, thick cloth.

When refilling liquids, avoid spilling them on parts of the engine and the exhaust system. Spilled liquids could cause a fire.

WARNING

The high voltages of the electrical system can give electric shocks as well as causing burns and serious injury and possibly even death!

Never cause short circuits in the electrical system. The battery could explode.

To minimise the risk of electric shock and serious consequences while the engine is running or starting the engine, note the following:

Never touch the electrical wiring of the ignition system.

Never touch electric cables or the gas discharge lamps.

WARNING

In the engine compartment, there are rotating parts that could cause se- rious injury.

Never place your hands on or near the radiator fan. Touching the rotor blades could seriously harm you. The ventilator works according to the engine temperature and could start suddenly even when the ignition is turned off and the key is removed.

253Checking and refilling levels

WARNING (Continued)

If any work has to be performed when the engine is started or with the engine running, there is an additional, potentially fatal, safety risk from the rotating parts, such as the drive belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc., and from the high-voltage ignition system. Always work with the ut- most caution.

Always make sure that no parts of your body, jewellery, ties, loose clothing and long hair can be trapped by the rotating parts of the en- gine. Before any work, remove ties and jewellery (necklaces, etc), tie longhair back and tighten all items of loose clothing to your body to make sure that they cannot be trapped by engine components.

Take extreme caution when operating the accelerator and remain attentive. The vehicle could move, even with the electronic parking brake activated.

Always make sure you have not left any objects, such as cleaning cloths and tools, in the engine compartment. If any object is left in the engine compartment, this could cause malfunctions, engine faults and even a fire.

WARNING

Refill liquids and certain materials can catch fire easily in the engine compartment, causing a fire and serious injury!

Never smoke.

Never work close to places exposed to flames or sparks.

Never pour service fluids over the engine. These fluid may ignite hot engine parts and cause injuries.

WARNING (Continued)

If it is necessary to work on the fuel system or the electrical system, please follow the instructions below:

Always disconnect the vehicle battery. When disconnecting the battery, ensure that the vehicle is unlocked otherwise the anti-theft alarm will be triggered.

Never work close to heaters, heat sources or places exposed to flames or sparks.

Always keep a recently serviced and perfectly working fire extin- guisher close by.

Never cover the engine with additional insulating materials such as a blanket. Risk of fire!

CAUTION When refilling or changing service liquids, ensure that you put the liquids into the right tank. Making a mistake when refilling could cause serious malfunctions and damage the engine!

For the sake of the environment Service fluids leaks are harmful to the environment. For this reason you should make regular checks on the ground underneath your vehicle. Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop to be checked if you see stains, oil or other fluids on the ground. Collect any spilt service fluids and allow a pro- fessional to dispose of them.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

254 Checking and refilling levels

Opening and closing the bonnet

Fig. 169 In the footwell on the driver side: Lever for unlocking the bonnet

Fig. 170 Release lever to open the bonnet in the radiator grille

Opening the bonnet

The lever to open the bonnet can only be used if the driver door is open.

Before opening the bonnet, make sure that the windscreen wiper arms are in place against the windscreen .

Open the driver door.

Pull the release lever Fig. 169 in the direction of the arrow. The bonnet is released from the lock carrier by a spring mechanism .

Lift the bonnet using the release lever Fig. 170 (arrow) and open the bonnet fully. The bonnet is held open thanks to the gas strut.

Closing the bonnet

To close the bonnet, pull it down to overcome the gas strut pressure .

Allow the bonnet to fall into the lock carrier. Do not press down.

If the bonnet is not correctly closed, open it once again and close it correct- ly.

The bonnet is correctly closed when it is flush with the corresponding parts on the bodywork.

WARNING

If the bonnet is not correctly closed, it could suddenly open while driving leaving the driver without visibility. This could result in a serious acci- dent.

After closing the bonnet, always check that it is properly secured by the locking mechanism in the lock carrier. The bonnet must be flush with the surrounding body panels.

While driving, if you notice that the bonnet is not correctly closed then stop immediately and close it correctly.

Only open and close the bonnet when there is nobody within its range.

CAUTION To avoid damage to the bonnet and to the windscreen wiper arms, only open the bonnet when the windscreen wipers are in place against the wind- screen.

Before driving, always lower the wiper arms.

255Checking and refilling levels

Engine oil

Introduction

WARNING

Incorrectly handling engine oil can cause injury and serious burns.

Always protect your eyes when handling engine oil.

Oil is toxic and must be kept out of the reach of children.

Engine oil must only be kept closed in its original container; used oil must also be stored in an oil container before its disposal.

Never store engine oil in empty food containers or bottles as other people may accidentally drink it.

Regular contact with engine oil can be bad for the skin. If you come into contact with engine oil, wash your skin with soap and water.

With the engine running, the engine oil gets extremely hot and can cause severe skin burns. Always wait until the engine has fully cooled.

For the sake of the environment Similar to the other service liquids, spilled engine oil can be bad for the en- vironment. Collect any spilt fluids in suitable containers and dispose of them in accordance with legislation and with the utmost respect for the en- vironment.

Warning and control lamps

It lights up

Possible cause Solution

Insufficient engine oil. Switch the ignition off. Check the engine oil level page 256.

Flashes Possible cause Solution

Engine oil pressure too low.

Stop the vehicle! Switch off the engine. Check the engine oil level. - If the warning lamp flashes al- though the oil level is correct, do not continue driving or leave the engine running. Otherwise, the engine could be damaged. Seek specialist assistance.

Engine oil sensor faulty. Contact a specialised workshop. Have the engine oil sensor checked.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings in Control and warning lamps on page 56.

Engine oil specifications

Replacement engine oil must strictly comply with the specifications.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

256 Checking and refilling levels

The correct oil must be used to ensure the correct operation and long serv- ice life of the engine. The engine comes with a high-quality multigrade oil that can generally be used all year round.

Only use an engine oil that complies to SEAT standards whenever possible . If you wish to maintain the long-life service duration, only engine oils approved for this service according to the corresponding VW standard (table on page 256) may be used. All oils indicated are synthetic multi- grade oils.

Engine oils are being continuously further developed. Technical Services are permanently informed of any modifications. SEAT therefore recommends that you have the engine oil changed by a Technical Service.

Engines Engine oil specifications

with LongLife service without LongLife service

Petrol engines VW 504 00, VW 503 00 VW 504 00, VW 502 00

Diesel engines VW 507 00 VW 507 00

CAUTION Only use engine oils whose specifications are expressly approved by SEAT. The use of any other type of AdBlue could cause engine damage!

No additives should be used with engine oil. Any damage caused by the use of such additives would not be covered by the factory warranty.

Checking the engine oil level and topping up

Fig. 171 Marked engine oil dipstick

Fig. 172 In the engine compartment: Engine oil filler cap

Preparations

Park the vehicle on flat ground so that the engine oil reading is correct.

Stop the engine and wait a few minutes for the oil to drain back into the sump. When the engine has cooled down, immediately check the oil level and top up if necessary.

Open the bonnet page 251.

The engine oil filler neck can be recognised by the symbol on the cap Fig. 172 and the dipstick by its coloured handle.

257Checking and refilling levels

Checking the engine oil level

Pull out the dipstick and wipe it on a clean cloth.

Replace the dipstick, pushing it in as far as it will go. If the dipstick has a mark, when you reintroduce it this mark should slot into the corresponding groove located on the upper end of the tube.

Remove the dipstick again and check the engine oil level table on page 257.

After reading the oil level, replace the dipstick in the tube completely.

Engine oil topping up ranges

Fig. 171 Operations required depending on the engine oil topping up level:

Area A Do not add oil .

Area B Add approximately 0.5 L of oil (1/2 quarter of a gallon). The oil level can be in the zone A , but never above A .

Area C It is essential to add oil (approximately 1 litre or quarter of a gallon). Ensure that the level is around the centre of the zone B after adding oil.

Adding oil after checking the level

Only add engine oil in small quantities and in steps:

Unscrew the cap from engine oil filler neck on the cylinder head Fig. 172. If you are not sure where the cap is, request help from a special- ist.

Only refill using engine oil expressly approved by SEAT and in small quantities (not more than 0.5 l or 1/2 a quarter of a gallon at a time) page 255.

To avoid adding too much oil, each time you add a quantity, wait until the oil has flowed into the crankcase so that it can be measured with the dipstick.

Check the oil level before adding any more oil. Do not top up with too much engine oil .

When the oil level is in at least the Fig. 171 B zone, insert the dip- stick into the tube fully to avoid engine oil escaping when the engine is run- ning.

After topping up the oil, ensure that the cap is screwed on to the filler neck correctly.

WARNING

Oil could catch fire if it comes into contact with hot engine components. This could lead to a fire, explosion and severe injuries.

Always ensure that after topping of oil, the engine oil filler cap is cor- rectly tightened. This will avoid engine oil spilling onto hot engine parts when the engine is running.

CAUTION If the engine oil level is above the area Fig. 171 A do not start the engine. Seek specialist assistance. Otherwise catalytic converter and en- gine damage may occur.

When refilling or changing service liquids, ensure that you put the liq- uids into the right tank. Making a mistake when refilling could cause seri- ous malfunctions and damage the engine!

For the sake of the environment The oil level must never be above area Fig. 171 A . Otherwise oil can be drawn in through the crankcase breather and escape into the atmosphere via the exhaust system.

Engine oil consumption

The consumption of engine oil can be different from one engine to another and can vary during the useful life of the engine.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

258 Checking and refilling levels

Depending on driving style and the conditions of use, the consumption of engine oil can reach 1 litre every 2,000 km (one quarter of a gallon every 1,200 miles); for new vehicles, this could be higher for the first 5,000 km (3,000 miles). For this reason the engine oil level must be checked at regu- lar intervals, preferably when filling the tank and before a journey.

When the engine is working hard, for instance during sustained high-speed motorway cruising in summer, when towing a trailer or climbing mountain passes, the oil level should preferably be kept within area Fig. 171 A .

Changing the engine oil

The engine oil must be changed regularly according to the specifications of the Maintenance Programme.

Due to the problems linked with disposing of used oil and the need for suit- able tools and special knowledge, always visit a specialised workshop to have the engine oil and filter changed. SEAT recommends visiting a Techni- cal Service.

Detailed information on the service intervals are shown in the Maintenance Programme.

Engine oil additives make new oil darker after the engine has been running for a short period. This is normal and does not mean more frequent oil changes are required.

WARNING

If, in exceptional circumstances, you must change the engine oil yourself, please note the following:

Wear eye protection.

WARNING (Continued)

Always wait until the engine has completely cooled to avoid being burned.

Always keep your arms horizontal when unscrewing the oil drainage bolt so that the oil does not run down your arms when it begins to drain.

Use a suitable and large enough container to collect all of the used oil in the engine.

Never collect engine oil in empty food containers, cans, bottles and other containers as not all people are able to identify engine oil.

Oil is toxic and must be kept out of the reach of children.

For the sake of the environment Before changing the engine oil, find a suitable location or service for proper disposal.

For the sake of the environment Always dispose of engine oil with the utmost respect for the environment. Never dispose of used engine oil in places such as a garden, woods, drains, roads, paths, rivers or drainage systems.

259Checking and refilling levels

Engine coolant

Introduction

WARNING

Engine coolant is toxic!

Only keep engine coolant in its original container, tightly shut and in a safe place.

Never store engine coolant in empty food containers or bottles as other people may accidentally drink it.

Always keep engine coolant out of reach of children.

Ensure that the proportion of engine coolant additive corresponds to the lowest outside temperature to which the vehicle will be exposed.

If the outside temperature is extremely low, the engine coolant could freeze causing the vehicle to stop. As this would also cause the heating to stop working, passengers without sufficient clothing could freeze.

For the sake of the environment Coolants and additives can contaminate the environment. Collect any spilt fluids in suitable containers and dispose of in accordance with legislation and with the utmost respect for the environment.

Coolant temperature warning lamp and gauge

Fig. 173 Engine coolant temperature gauge on the instrument panel: A

cold area; B normal area; C warning area

When driving normally, the needle will remain in the middle area. The tem- perature may also rise when the engine is working hard, especially at high outside temperatures and so the indicator will move quite far to the right- hand side.

Several warning and control lamps should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few seconds.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

260 Checking and refilling levels

It lights up

Gauge po- sition

Fig. 173 Possible cause Solution

Warning area C

Excessive engine coolant tempera- ture.

Stop the vehicle! Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. Switch off the engine and wait for it to cool down and for the needle to return to the normal area. Check the engine coolant lev- el page 261.

Normal area B

Insufficient engine coolant level.

Check the engine coolant when the engine has cooled and, if it is low, refill with en- gine coolant page 261. Although the coolant level is correct, there is a fault.

-- Engine coolant system faulty.

Do not drive any further. Obtain professional assis- tance.

-- Cold area

A --

Avoid revving the engine too much or making it work hard while it has not reached nor- mal service temperature.

Flashes Possible cause Solution

Engine coolant system faulty. Seek specialist assistance.

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings in Control and warning lamps on page 56.

Engine coolant specifications

The engine cooling system is supplied from the factory with a specially trea- ted mixture of water and, at least, 40 % of the additive G 13 (TLVW 774 J). The engine coolant additive is recognisable by its purple colour. This mix- ture of water and additive gives the necessary frost protection down to -25 C (-13 F) and protects the light alloy parts of the cooling system against corrosion. It also prevents scaling and considerably raises the boil- ing point of the coolant.

To protect the engine cooling system, the percentage of additive must al- ways be at least 40 %, even in warm climates where anti-freeze protection is not required.

If greater frost protection is required in very cold climates, the proportion of additive can be increased. However, the percentage of additive should not exceed 60%, as this would reduce the frost protection and, in turn, de- crease the cooling capacity.

When the coolant is topped up, use a mixture of distilled water and, at least, 40 % of the G 13 or G 12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G) additive (both are purple) to obtain an optimum anticorrosion protection . The mixture of G 13 with G 12 plus (TL-VW 774 F), G 12 (red) or G 11 (green-blue) engine coolants will significantly reduce the anticorrosion protection and should, therefore be avoided .

WARNING

If there is not enough anti-freeze in the coolant system, the engine may fail leading to serious damage.

Please make sure that the percentage of additive is correct with re- spect to the lowest expected ambient temperature in the zone in which the vehicle is to be used.

When the outside temperature is very low, the coolant could freeze and the vehicle would be immobilised. In this case, the heating would not work either and inadequately dressed passengers could die of cold.

261Checking and refilling levels

CAUTION The original additives should never be mixed with coolants which are not approved by SEAT. Otherwise, you run the risk of causing severe damage to the engine and the engine cooling system.

If the fluid in the expansion tank is not purple but is, for example, brown, this indicates that the G 13 additive has been mixed with an inade- quate coolant. The coolant must be changed as soon as possible if this is the case! This could result in serious faults and engine damage.

For the sake of the environment Coolants and additives can contaminate the environment. If any fluids are spilled, they should be collected and correctly disposed of, with respect to the environment.

Checking the engine coolant level and refilling

Fig. 174 In the engine compartment: Marking on coolant expansion tank

Fig. 175 In the engine compartment: Coolant expansion tank cap

If the coolant level is low, the coolant warning indicator will light.

Preparations

Park the vehicle on even, flat and firm ground.

Allow the engine to cool .

Open the bonnet page 251.

The coolant expansion tank is easily recognisable because of the sym- bol on the cap Fig. 175.

Checking the engine coolant level

When the engine is cold, check the coolant level using the side marking on the expansion tank Fig. 174.

If the level is below the MIN mark, top up with coolant. When the en- gine is hot it may be slightly above the marked area.

Topping up the engine coolant level

Always protect your face, hands and arms from hot coolant and steam using a large, thick cloth over the coolant expansion tank cap.

Remove the cap very carefully .

Only refill using new engine coolant according to SEAT specifications (page 260) .

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

262 Checking and refilling levels

The engine coolant level should be between the marks on the coolant expansion tank Fig. 174. Do not exceed the top level of the marked area .

Screw on the cap tightly.

If, in the event of an emergency, you have no coolant that is compliant to the required specifications (page 260), never use another type of addi- tive. Instead, first top up with distilled water only. Then re-establish the correct proportion of the mixture with the correct additive as soon as possible page 260.

WARNING

Hot vapours and coolant can cause serious burns.

Never open the coolant expansion tank if steam or coolant is coming from the engine compartment. Wait until you cannot see or hear any steam or coolant escaping.

Always wait until the engine has completely cooled before very care- fully opening the expansion tank cap. Contact with hot elements of the engine can cause skin burns.

When the engine is warm or hot, the cooling system is pressurised. Do not unscrew the cap on the expansion tank when the engine is hot. Otherwise, coolant may spray out under pressure causing burns and seri- ous injury.

Carefully and slowly unscrew the cap anticlockwise, gently press- ing down on it.

Always protect your face, hands and arms from hot coolant and steam using a large, thick cloth.

When refilling liquids, avoid spilling them on parts of the engine and the exhaust system. Spilled liquids could cause a fire. Under specific cir- cumstances, the ethylene glycol can catch fire.

CAUTION Top up with distilled water only. Any other type of water may lead to con- siderable rusting in the engine due to its chemical components. This could consequently damage the engine. If you have not used distilled water but another type of water to top up the coolant, a specialised workshop must immediately replace all of the fluid in the engine cooling system.

Only top up coolant to the top level of the marked area Fig. 174. Oth- erwise the excess coolant will be forced out of the cooling system when the engine is hot, causing damage.

If a lot of liquid coolant has been lost, wait for the engine to cool down completely before adding coolant. Extensive coolant loss is an indication of leaks in the engine cooling system. Have the engine cooling system inspec- ted immediately by a specialised workshop. Otherwise engine damage may occur.

When refilling or changing service liquids, ensure that you put the liq- uids into the right tank. Making a mistake when refilling could cause seri- ous malfunctions and damage the engine!

Vehicle battery

Introduction

The battery is a component of the vehicle's electrical system.

Never work on the electrical system without fully understanding the opera- tions required, the applicable safety standards and without the correct tools ! In such a case, have any work carried out by a Specialised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a Technical Service. Negligent work can cause serious injury.

Location and number of batteries in the vehicle

The battery is located in the engine compartment.

263Checking and refilling levels

Explanation of the warning indications on the vehicle's battery

Symbol Meaning

Wear eye protection!

Battery acid is very corrosive and caustic. Always wear protective gloves and eye protection!

Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are prohibited.

A highly explosive mixture of gases is released when the battery is under charge.

Keep children away from acid and batteries!

WARNING

Working on the vehicle battery and the electrical system can cause corro- sion, fire and electric shocks. Always read and take into account the fol- lowing warnings and safety standards before carrying out any work:

Before working on the battery, switch off the engine, the ignition, all electrical devices and then disconnect the negative connection on the battery.

Keep children away from acid and the battery itself!

Wear eye protection.

Battery acid is very corrosive and caustic. It can burn skin and cause blindness. When handling the battery, protect yourself from splashes of acids, above all your hands, arms and face.

Do not smoke and never work close to places exposed to flames or sparks.

Avoid sparks and electrostatic discharges when working with cables and electrical devices.

Never short the battery terminals.

WARNING (Continued)

Never use a damaged battery. It can explode. Replace a damaged bat- tery immediately.

Replaced damaged or frozen batteries as soon as possible. A flat bat- tery can also freeze at temperatures close to 0 C (+32 F).

For vehicles with the battery in the luggage compartment: Check that the battery gas ventilation hose is securely attached.

CAUTION Never disconnect the battery if the ignition is switched on or if the en- gine is running. This could damage the electrical system or electronic com- ponents.

Do not expose the battery to direct sunlight over a long period of time, as the intense ultraviolet radiation can damage the battery housing.

If the car is left standing for long periods, protect the battery from ex- treme cold temperature so that it does not freeze up and become dam- aged.

Warning lamp

It lights up

Possible cause Solution

Faulty generator.

Contact a specialised workshop. Have the electrical system checked. Disconnect any unnecessary electrical devices. The generator does not charge the battery while the vehicle is in motion.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

264 Checking and refilling levels

Several warning and control lamps should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few seconds.

WARNING

If the warning lamps and messages are ignored, the vehicle may stall in traffic, or may cause accidents and severe injuries.

Never ignore the warning lamps or text messages.

Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.

CAUTION Failure to heed the control lamps and text messages when they appear may result in faults in the vehicle.

Checking the electrolyte level of the vehicle battery

Fig. 176 In the engine compartment: Remove the cover from the vehi- cle battery.

Fig. 177 In the engine compartment: Unfold the vehicle battery hose.

The battery's electrolyte level should be checked regularly in high-mileage vehicles, in hot countries and in older batteries. Other batteries do not re- quire maintenance.

Start-Stop systems (page 181) are equipped with a special battery label- led AGM. For technical reasons, it is not possible to check the electrolyte level of these batteries

Preparations

Prepare the vehicle for work in the engine compartment page 251

Open the bonnet page 251.

Opening the battery cover

The battery covers are different depending on the engine size of the vehicle:

In the case of a cover: press the tab Fig. 176 A in the direction of the arrow and pull the cover upwards.

In the case of a hose: fold the cover to one side to remove Fig. 177.

Checking the battery electrolyte level

Make sure there is sufficient lighting to clearly recognise the colours. Never use open flames or sparklers as a light source.

Depending on the level of acid, the Magic eye on the top of the battery will change colour.

265Checking and refilling levels

Colour indicator Necessary operations

light yellow or col- ourless

The electrolyte level of the vehicle's battery is too low. Have the battery checked and, where applicable, re- placed by a specialised workshop.

Black The electrolyte level of the vehicle's battery is correct.

WARNING

Working with the vehicle battery involves a risk of corrosion, explosions and electric shock.

Never tilt the vehicle battery. Battery acid could spill out of the open- ings, releasing fumes and causing corrosion damage.

Never open the vehicle battery.

If battery acid splashes on you, immediately rinse your eyes and skin abundantly with water for several minutes. Then seek medical care imme- diately.

If acid is swallowed by mistake, consult a doctor immediately.

Charging, replacing and connecting or disconnecting the battery

Charging the battery

The vehicle battery should be charged by a specialised workshop only, as batteries using special technology have been installed and they must be charged in a controlled environment . SEAT recommends visiting a Technical Service.

Replacing a vehicle battery

The battery has been developed to suit the conditions of its location and has special safety features. If the battery must be replaced, consult a Tech- nical Service for information on electromagnetic compatibility, the size and maintenance, performance and safety requirements of the new battery in

your vehicle before you purchase one. SEAT recommends you have the bat- tery replaced by a Technical Service.

Use only maintenance-free genuine batteries conforming to TL 825 06 and VW 7 50 73 Standards. These standards must be dated April 2008 or later.

Start-Stop systems (page 181) are equipped with a special battery. There- fore, it must only be replaced with a battery of the same specifications.

Disconnecting the vehicle's battery

If you must disconnect the battery from the electrical system, please note the following:

Switch off the ignition and all electrical equipment.

The vehicle must be unlocked before disconnecting the battery, other- wise the alarm will be triggered.

First disconnect the negative cable and then the positive .

Connecting the vehicle's battery

Before reconnecting the battery, switch off the engine, the ignition and electric devices.

First reconnect the positive cable and then the negative .

Different control lamps may light up after connecting the battery and switch- ing the ignition on. They will be turned off after a short trip at a speed of between 15 - -20 km/h (10 - 12 mph). If the warning indicators remain lit, please visit a specialised workshop to have the vehicle checked.

If the battery has been disconnected for a long time, it is possible that the next service date is not displayed or calculated correctly page 49. Respect the maximum service intervals permitted Booklet Maintenance Pro- gramme.

Vehicles with Keyless Access (page 71): If, after connecting the battery, the ignition cannot be switched on, lock and unlock the vehicle from out- side. Then try to switch the ignition back on. If the ignition cannot be switched on, seek professional assistance.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

266 Checking and refilling levels

Automatic device disconnection

The intelligent vehicle electrical system automatically implements a range of measures to prevent the battery from discharging when high demands are made on it:

the idling speed is increased so that the alternator provides more elec- tricity.

where necessary, the power of the most powerful devices is reduced or even completely disconnected.

On starting the engine, the power supply from the 12-volt power sockets and the cigarette lighter may be interrupted for a short time.

The on-board management program cannot always prevent the battery from running flat. For example, if the ignition is left on for a long period with the engine off or if the side lights or parking lights are left on while the vehicle is stationary.

Why does the battery run flat?

When stationary for a long time without starting the engine, particularly if the ignition is switched on.

Use of electrical devices with the engine switched off.

If the auxiliary heater is running page 150.

WARNING

Incorrectly securing the battery or using the wrong battery can cause short-circuits, fire and serious injuries.

Always use only maintenance free batteries that do not run flat alone and whose properties, specifications and size correspond to the stand- ard battery. The specifications are indicated on the battery case.

WARNING

A highly explosive mixture of gases is released when the battery is under charge.

The batteries should be charged in a well-ventilated room only.

Never charge a frozen or recently thawed battery. A flat battery can al- so freeze at temperatures close to 0 C (+32 F).

Always replace a battery which has frozen.

Battery cables not correctly connected may cause a short circuit. Re- connect first the positive cable and then the negative cable.

CAUTION Never disconnect the battery if the ignition is switched on or if the en- gine is running. This could damage the electrical system or electronic com- ponents.

Never plug accessories that supply current, such as solar panels or a battery charger, to the 12-volt power sockets or the cigarette lighter. This could damage the vehicle's electrical system.

For the sake of the environment Dispose of the battery in an environment-friendly manner. Batteries con- tain toxic substances such as sulphuric acid and lead.

Battery acid can contaminate the environment. Collect any spilt service fluids and allow a dispose of them correctly.

267Wheels and tyres

Wheels and tyres

Wheels

Introduction

The SEAT Alhambra is equipped as standard with anti-puncture technology tyres (Conti-Seal). In the event of a puncture or air leak of up to 5 mm, the tyre seals the hole with a protective layer inside the tread.

The inclusion of such technology means that there is no type of spare wheel included in the vehicle's inventory.

SEAT recommend that all work on tyres and wheels is carried out by a speci- alised workshop. These workshops have the necessary special tools and spare parts, trained personnel and facilities for safely disposing of the old tyres. SEAT recommends visiting a Technical Service.

WARNING

The vehicle cannot be totally controlled or braked if the tyres (new or used) are worn or damaged.

Incorrect use of wheels and tyres could make driving more dangerous and result in serious accidents and damage.

All four wheels must be fitted with radial tyres of the same type, size (rolling circumference) and the same tread pattern.

New tyres do not give maximum grip and will not have reached their maximum braking capacity to start with, and therefore need running in. To prevent accidents and major damage, extreme caution should be tak- en for the first 600 km (370 miles).

WARNING (Continued)

Check tyre pressures regularly and ensure they are maintained at the pressures indicated. If the tyre pressure is too low, the tyres could over- heat, resulting in tread detachment or even burst tyres.

Never drive on damaged (punctured, cut, cracked or dented) or worn tyres. Driving on damaged or worn tyres could result in burst tyres, seri- ous accidents or damage. Worn or damaged tyres must be replaced im- mediately.

Never exceed the maximum permitted speed or loads specified for the type of tyre fitted on your vehicle.

The effectiveness of driver and brake assist systems also depends on the grip of the tyres.

If you notice unusual vibration or if the vehicle pulls to one side when driving, stop the car immediately and check the tyres and wheels for damage.

To minimise the risk of losing control of the vehicle or causing a seri- ous accident, never undo the bolted joints of beadlock wheels.

Never mount used tyres or wheels if you are not sure of their previous history. They may be damaged, although the damage is not immediately visible.

Old tyres, even if they have never been used, may lose air or burst un- expectedly while driving, resulting in serious accident or damage. If tyres are over six years old, they should only be used in an emergency and with extreme caution.

Note For technical reasons, it is not generally possible to use the wheels from other vehicles. In some cases, this may also be true for the same model of wheel. Please refer to the vehicle documentation or ask at a Technical Serv- ice.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

268 Wheels and tyres

About your tyres and wheels

Fig. 178 Diagram for changing wheels

The tyres of a vehicle are the components which are subjected to most stress and are the most underestimated. Tyres are very important, as the support offered by their narrow surface is the only point of contact between the vehicle and the road.

The service life of tyres is dependent on tyre pressure, driving style, the care they receive and the correct fitting.

The tyres and wheel rims are an essential part of the vehicle's design. The tyres and rims approved by SEAT are specially matched to the characteris- tics of the vehicle and our critical to good road holding and safe handling.

Avoiding damage to tyres and wheels

If you have to drive over a kerb or similar obstacle, drive very slowly and as near as possible at a right angle to the kerb.

Inspect the tyres regularly for damage (punctures, cuts, cracks, dents).

Remove any foreign bodies found on the outside of the tread provided they have not passed through the wall of the tyre page 273.

The instructions for tyre control systems should always be observed.

Replace damaged or worn tyres as soon as possible page 273.

Regularly check tyres for non-visible damage page 273.

Never exceed the maximum permitted speed or loads specified for the type of tyre fitted on your vehicle page 276.

Do not allow tyres to come into contact with aggressive substances, grease, oil, fuel or brake fluid .

Lost valve caps should be replaced immediately.

Tyres with directional tread pattern

Tyres with directional tread pattern have been designed to operate best when rotating in only one direction. An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the direction of rotation on tyres with directional tread page 276. Always observe the direction of rotation indicated when mounting the wheel. This guarantees optimum grip and helps to avoid aquaplaning, excessive noise and wear.

If the tyre is mounted in the opposite direction of rotation, drive with ex- treme caution, as the tyre is no longer being used correctly. This is of partic- ular importance when the road surface is wet. Change the tyre as soon as possible or remount it with the correct direction of rotation.

Interchanging tyres

To ensure that the wear is equal on all tyres the wheels should be changed round from time to time according to the system Fig. 178. The useful life of all the tyres will then be about the same time.

SEAT recommends you take the vehicle to a specialised workshop to have the tyres changed.

Tyres that are over 6 years old

Tyres are subject to an ageing process as a result of physical and chemical processes. This may affect their performance. Tyres which are stored for long periods of time without being used, harden and become more fragile than tyres which are in constant use.

SEAT recommends that tyres over six years old are replaced with new tyres. This also applies to tyres which appear to be in perfect condition on the out- side and which have a tread depth within the values stipulated by the Law .

269Wheels and tyres

The date of manufacture, part of the tyre identification number (TIN), indi- cates the age of the tyre page 276.

Storing tyres

Mark tyres when you remove them to indicate the direction of rotation (left, right, forwards, backwards). This ensures you will be able to mount them correctly when you replace them. When removed, the wheels and/or tyres should be stored in a cool, dry and preferably dark location. Do not place tyres mounted on the wheel in a vertical position.

Protect tyres not mounted on wheels from dirt by storing them in suitable bags and standing them on the ground on their tread.

WARNING

Aggressive fluids or substances could result in visible or invisible dam- age to tyres with the consequent risks.

Always ensure that tyres do not come into contact with chemical products, oil, grease, fuel, brake fluid or other aggressive substances.

WARNING

Old tyres, even if they have never been used, may lose air or burst unex- pectedly while driving, resulting in serious accident or damage.

If tyres are over six years old, they should only be used in an emer- gency and with extreme caution.

For the sake of the environment Old tyres must be disposed of by qualified personnel according to the laws in the country concerned.

Wheel rims

The design of wheel bolts is matched to the rims. If different rims are fitted, the correct wheel bolts with the right length and correctly shaped bolt heads must be used. This ensures that wheels are fitted securely and that the brake system functions correctly page 279.

For technical reasons, it is not generally possible to use the wheels from other vehicles. In some cases, this may also be true for the same model of wheel.

The tyres and rims approved by SEAT are specially matched to the character- istics of the vehicle and are critical to good road holding and safe handling.

Wheel bolts

Wheel bolts must be tightened to the correct torque page 279.

Beadlock wheel rims

Beadlock wheel rims have various components. These are joined together by special bolts using a special procedure. This ensures good performance, a better seal, improved safety and wheel run out. Therefore, worn rims should always be replaced and must only be repaired in a specialised work- shop. SEAT recommends visiting a Technical Service .

Wheel rims with bolted trims

Wheel rims may be fitted with interchangeable trim parts which are attach- ed to the rim using self-locking bolts. Worn trims should only be replaced at a specialised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a Technical Service .

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

270 Wheels and tyres

WARNING

The use of worn or damaged wheel rims could make driving more danger- ous and result in serious accidents and damage.

Only wheel rims which have been approved for use with your vehicle should be used.

Inspect wheel rims regularly for damage and replace as required.

WARNING

If the bolted joints of wheel rims with bolted ring trims are not correctly tightened or loosened, this could result in serious accident.

Never loosen the bolted joints of wheel rims with bolted ring trims.

Any work relating to wheel rims with bolted rims should be carried out at specialised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a Technical Serv- ice.

Replacement of new tyres and wheel rims

New tyres

When tyres are new, drive with extreme caution for the first 500 km (310 miles), as all tyres need to be run-in. Tyres which have not been run-in do not have such good grip or braking capacity .

All four wheels must be fitted with radial tyres of the same type, size (rolling circumference) and the same tread pattern.

The tread depth of new tyres may vary, according to the type and make of tyre and the tread pattern.

Replacing tyres

Where possible, always replace both wheels on an axle (both wheels on the front axle or both wheels on the rear axle) .

Old tyres should only be replaced by SEAT approved tyres for the vehicle in question, and in accordance with the maximum permitted size, diameter, load and speed capacity.

When replacing tyres, ensure that the new tyres have an emergency drive system (Conti-Seal/Run flat). Otherwise, ensure that there is an Anti- puncture kit in the vehicle.

Never use tyres which are larger than SEAT approved tyres. If the tyres are too big, they may knock or rub against the chassis or other components, resulting in damage.

WARNING

New tyres do not give maximum grip and will not have reached their max- imum braking capacity to start with, and therefore need running in.

To prevent accidents and major damage, extreme caution should be taken for the first 600 km (370 miles).

WARNING

There should be adequate space between the tyres and the vehicle in ac- cordance with the vehicle design. If this is not the case, the tyres may rub against parts of the running gear, chassis or brake lines, leading to faults in the brake system or to tread detachment, and the risk of burst tyres.

The true tyre dimension should not be greater than the dimensions of tyres manufactured and approved by SEAT and should not rub against parts of the vehicle.

271Wheels and tyres

Note Although tyres may be shown as being the same size, the true dimen- sions of different types of tyre may vary with respect to the nominal size, or tread patterns may be different.

If you use tyres that are approved by SEAT, you can be sure that the true tyre dimensions will be correct for your vehicle. For other tyre models, the tyre vendor should provide the manufacturer's certificate with the tyre, indi- cating that this type of tyre is suitable for your vehicle. This certificate should always be carried with the vehicle.

Tyre pressures

Fig. 179 Position of tyre pressure specification plate

The correct tyre pressures for tyres fitted at the factory is shown on a label and is valid for summer and winter tyres. This label Fig. 179 is located ei- ther in the driver door pillar or inside the fuel cap.

Under-inflation or over-inflation will reduce the life of the tyres considerably and also impair the car's handling . It is essential to maintain the cor- rect tyre pressure, especially if driving at high speeds. Incorrect tyre pres- sure causes premature wear and could cause tyre blow-out.

The pressure should therefore be checked at least once a month and before starting a journey.

As a general rule, the pressures given are for cold tyres. When the tyres are hot, the pressures are greater.

Never deflate a hot tyre in order to obtain the required pressure. This could result in very low tyre pressures which may lead to sudden blow-outs.

Checking tyre pressures

Tyre pressures should only be checked when the vehicle has not been driv- en for more than a few kilometres (miles) at low speeds in the past three hours.

The tyre pressures should be checked regularly, and only when the tyres are cold. Always check all the tyres. Tyre pressures should be checked more often in colder regions, and only when the vehicle has not been driven re- cently. Always use a correctly-operating tyre gauge.

Adjust tyre pressures to the loads carried in the vehicle.

After checking the pressure, always replace the valve caps, and where applicable, observe the instructions given for adjusting the tyre control sys- tem page 202.

WARNING

If tyre pressures are too high or too low, the tyre may deflate or burst suddenly while driving. This could result in a serious accident.

If the tyre pressure is too low, the tyres could overheat, resulting in tread detachment or even burst tyres.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

272 Wheels and tyres

WARNING (Continued)

When driving at high speeds and/or fully loaded, the tyre could sud- denly overheat, burst or be subject to tread detachment, with the resul- tant loss of control of the vehicle.

Tyre pressures which are too high or too low reduce the service life of the tyre, affecting the vehicle's performance.

Tyre pressures should be checked regularly, at least once a month and before long journeys.

Adjust the pressures of all the tyres to the vehicle load.

Never deflate excess pressure from hot tyres.

CAUTION Take care not to tilt the manometer when placing it on the valve. Other- wise, the valve may be damaged.

To avoid damage to the valves, always make sure valve caps have been tightened properly over the valves, and that they are always covered. Check that the caps are identical to the standard caps and have been correctly tightened.

For the sake of the environment Under-inflated tyres will increase the fuel consumption.

Note When checking tyre pressures, please observe the instructions for the tyre control system page 202.

Tread depth and wear indicators

Fig. 180 Tyre tread: tread wear indicators

Tread depth

Certain driving conditions require a deeper tread, as well as needing the tread to be approximately the same on the front and rear tyres. This is par- ticularly important when driving in winter, in cold temperatures and on wet roads .

The minimum tread depth required by law in the majority of cases is 1.6 mm (1/16 of an inch), measured in the tread grooves next to the tread wear indi- cators. Observe legal requirements in each country.

The performance of winter tyres is much reduced when the tread has worn to 4 mm (5/32 inch).

The tread depth of new tyres may vary, according to the type and make of tyre and the tread pattern.

Wear indicators on the tyre

The original tyres on your vehicle have 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) high Fig. 180 tread wear indicators running across the tread. A number of these indicators are equally spaced around the tyre tread. Certain marks on the tyre walls (for example, the letters TWI or other symbols) indicate the position of the wear indicators.

273Wheels and tyres

Tread wear indicators indicate if a tyre is worn. Tyres must always be re- placed before the tyre tread has worn to the level of the indicator.

WARNING

Driving with worn tyres is dangerous, and may lead to loss of control of the vehicle with serious consequences.

Tyres must be replaced before the wear indicators are at the same lev- el as the tread pattern.

Worn tyres have significantly reduced grip, especially on wet surfa- ces, increasing the risk of aquaplaning.

Worn tyres make control of the vehicle more difficult in normal or dif- ficult driving conditions, increasing the braking distance and the risk of skidding.

Damaged tyres

Damage to wheels and tyres is often not immediately visible. If you notice unusual vibration or the car pulling to one side, this may indicate that one of the tyres is damaged .

Slow down immediately if you think you have a damaged wheel.

Check the wheels and tyres for damage.

If tyres are worn, stop driving and seek qualified assistance.

If there is no visible exterior damage, drive slowly and carefully to the nearest specialised workshop and have the vehicle checked.

Foreign bodies in the tyre

Do not remove foreign bodies if they have penetrated through the tyre wall!

If the vehicle is equipped with an Anti-puncture kit, if necessary, seal the damaged wheel as indicated in section page 283. Take the vehicle to a

specialised workshop to repair or replace the tyre. SEAT recommends visit- ing a SEAT dealership for this.

The sealant at the lower part of the tyre tread wraps around the foreign body and provisionally seals the tyre.

Wear of tyres

The wear of tyres depends on a number of factors, for example:

Driving style.

Unbalanced wheels.

Running gear settings.

Driving style: driving round bends fast or sudden acceleration or braking speed increase tyre wear. When the driving style is normal, if the tyres wear too quickly, have the running gear settings checked at a specialised work- shop.

Wheel run-out: The wheels on new vehicles are balanced. However, certain circumstances may lead to imbalance (wheel run-out), which is detected as vibrations in the steering wheel. Run-out leads to wear of the steering and suspension. In the event of run out, the wheels should be balanced again. When a new wheel is fitted, it should be balanced again.

Running gear settings: an incorrectly positioned running gear increases the wear of tyres and affects your safety while driving. If tyres wear too quickly, have the wheel alignment checked at a specialised workshop.

WARNING

If you notice unusual vibration or the car pulls to one side while driving, this may indicate that one of the tyres is damaged.

Reduce speed immediately and stop, while observing the highway code.

Check the wheels and tyres for damage.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

274 Wheels and tyres

WARNING (Continued)

Never carry on driving on worn tyres or wheels. Request qualified as- sistance immediately.

If there is no visible exterior damage, drive slowly and carefully to the nearest specialised workshop and have the vehicle checked.

Winter tyres*

In winter conditions winter tyres will considerably improve the vehicle's han- dling. The design of summer tyres (width, rubber compound, tread pattern) gives less grip on ice and snow. Winter tyres also improve the vehicle brak- ing performance, reducing the braking distance in winter weather. SEAT rec- ommend that winter tyres be fitted to the vehicle at temperatures below +7 C (+45 F).

The performance of winter tyres is much reduced if the tyre tread is worn be- low 4 mm (1/16 inch). The age of the tyre is another factor affecting per- formance, regardless of the depth of the tyre tread.

Please observe the following when using winter tyres:

Observe legal requirements in each country.

Winter tyres must be fitted on all four wheels.

Only use winter tyres in wintery weather conditions.

Only use winter tyres of the size authorised for the vehicle.

Only use radial winter tyres of the same type, size (rolling circumference) and tread pattern.

Adjust speeds to within the limits indicated (code letter on tyre) .

Speed limit

A code letter indicating the speed limit is stamped on all winter tyres page 277.

In some vehicles, it is possible to set a speed warning in the MFA (multifunc- tion display) menu on the instrument panel page 56.

If you use V-rated tyres the speed limits and tyre pressure will be deter- mined by engine size. Please ask your Technical Service for further informa- tion on the maximum permitted speed and the required pressures for the tyres.

All-wheel drive*

Thanks to its all-wheel drive, your car will have plenty of traction in winter conditions, even with the standard tyres. Nevertheless, SEAT still recom- mend that winter tyres or all-season tyres should be fitted on all four wheels when winter road conditions are expected, mainly because this will give a better braking response.

Please observe all instructions and warnings when using snow chains page 275.

WARNING

Although winter tyres help to make driving safer in the winter, you should not take unnecessary risks.

Adjust your speed and driving style to visibility, road, traffic and weather conditions.

Never exceed the maximum permitted speed or loads specified for the type of winter tyre fitted on your vehicle.

For the sake of the environment When winter is over, change back to summer tyres. In temperatures above +7 C (+45 F), performance will be improved if summer tyres are used. Fuel consumption, wear and noises while driving will all be reduced.

275Wheels and tyres

Note If the vehicle is fitted with a tyre control system, this should be reprog- rammed whenever a tyre is changed page 204.

Please ask at a Technical Service for information about the permitted sizes for winter tyres.

Snow chains

When using snow chains, applicable local legislation and maximum permit- ted speed limits must be observed.

In winter weather, snow chains not only help to improve grip but also im- prove the braking capacity.

Snow chains must only be mounted on the front wheels, even on all-wheel drive vehicles, and only with the tyre and rim combinations listed below:

Tyre size Wheel rim

205/60 R16 6 1/2 J x 16 ET 33

SEAT recommends you ask a Technical Service for further information on wheel, tyre and chain sizes.

Wherever possible use fine-link chains measuring less than 15 mm (37/64 inch) including the lock.

Remove wheel hub covers and trim rings before fitting snow chains . The wheel bolts should be covered with caps for safety reasons. These are available from Technical Services.

WARNING

The use of unsuitable or incorrectly fitted chains could lead to serious ac- cidents and damage.

Always the appropriate snow chains.

Observe the fitting instructions provided by the snow chain manufac- turer.

Never exceed the maximum permitted speeds when driving with snow chains.

CAUTION Remove the snow chains to drive on roads without snow. Otherwise they will impair handling, damage the tyres and wear out very quickly.

Wheel rims may be damaged or scratched if the chains come into direct contact with them. SEAT recommends the use of covered snow chains.

Note Snow chains are available in different sizes according to the vehicle type.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

276 Wheels and tyres

Tyre code

Fig. 181 Universal code on tyres

Radial

Rim diameter code

Load index & speed rating

DOT tyre identification number

Severe snow conditions

Tyre ply composition and materials used

Max. load rating

Treadwear, traction and temperature grades

Max. permissible inflation pressure

Passenger car tyre

Nominal width of tyre in millimetres

Ratio of height to width (aspect ratio)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Tyre code (example) Meaning

Make, logotype Manufacturer

Product name Name of tyre assigned by manufacturer.

P215 / 55 R 16 Size:

P Passenger vehicle code.

215 Nominal width between walls, in mm.

55 Height/width ratio in %

R Tyre type (R indicates "radial").

16 Rim diameter in inches

91 V Load index page 277 and speed rating page 277.

XL Reinforced tyres (Reinforced).

M+S or M/S Winter tyres (mud and snow tyres) page 274.

SSR or DSST, Eufonia, RFT, ROF, RSC, ZP, Conti-Seal

Specific manufacturer codes for run-flat tyres.

RADIAL TUBELESS Radial tyre without inner tube.

E4 ... E-mark certifying tyre complies with internation- al legislation followed by a number denoting the country granting the authorisation. The authori- sation number ( several digits) is shown below.

DOT BT RA TY5 1709 Tyre identification number (TINa), may be only on interior wall of wheel) and date of manufacture:

DOT The tyre complies with the legal require- ments of the US Department of Trans- port, responsible for tyre safety regula- tions.

BT Place of manufacture code.

RA Information about manufacturer and tyre size.

TY5 Manufacturer's tyre specifications.

1709 Date of manufacture: week 17 of 2009.

277Wheels and tyres

Tyre code (example) Meaning

TWI This identifies the position of the Tread Wear In- dicator page 272.

MAX LOAD 615 KG (1356 LBS)

US load rating, indicating maximum permitted load per tyre.

MAX INFLATION 350 KPA (51 PSI)

US limit, indicating maximum permitted tyre pressure.

SIDEWALL 1 PLY RAYON Information about tyre wall components: 1 layer of rayon (artificial silk).

TREAD 4 PLIES 1 RAYON + 2 STEEL + 1 NYLON

Information about tread components: In the example, there are 4 layers below the tread: 1 layer of rayon (artificial silk), 2 layers of steel reinforcement and 1 layer of nylon.

Information for the end consumer concerning the comparative values of the established base tyres (standardised test procedures):

TREADWEAR 280 Relative service life of the tyre, with respect to specific US standard test.

TRACTION AA Braking capacity of tyre on wet surface (AA, A, B or C).

TEMPERATURE A Tyre temperature resistance at higher test speeds (A, B or C).

If there are different letters, they are specific codes of the tyre manufac- turer or specific national codes.

a) The letters TIN refer to the tyre serial number.

Tyres with directional tread pattern

Tyres with directional tread pattern have been designed to operate best when rotating in only one direction. An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the direction of rotation on tyres with directional tread. Always observe the direction of rotation indicated when mounting the wheel. This guarantees optimum grip and helps to avoid aquaplaning, excessive noise and wear.

Tyre load rating

The load rating code indicates the maximum load in kilogrammes each wheel can carry (load capacity).

615 kg (1356 pounds)

650 kg (1,433 pounds)

690 kg (1,521 pounds)

730 kg (1,609 pounds)

775 kg (1,709 pounds)

Speed rating

The speed rating indicates the maximum speed permitted for the tyres.

max. 150 km/h (93 mph)

max. 160 km/h (99 mph)

max. 170 km/h (106 mph)

max. 180 km/h (112 mph)

max. 190 km/h (118 mph)

max. 200 km/h (124 mph)

max. 210 km/h (130 mph)

max. 240 km/h (149 mph)

max. 240 km/h (149 mph)

max. 270 km/h (168 mph)

max. 300 km/h (186 mph)

Some manufacturers use the letters ZR for tyres with a maximum author- ised speed above 240 km/h (149 mph).

91

93

95

97

99

P

Q

R

S

T

U

H

V

Z

W

Y

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

278 Wheels and tyres

Wheel trims*

Introduction

WARNING

If the wheel trims are not appropriate or not fitted correctly, they could cause major accidents or damage.

Incorrectly mounted wheel trims may come off while driving and en- danger other road users.

Damaged trims must never be mounted on the wheels.

Always ensure that the brake ventilation and cooling is not cut off or blocked. This is also valid if hubcaps are fitted later. If there is not enough air, you may require significantly longer braking distances.

CAUTION Remove and remount wheel trims taking care to avoid damage to the vehi- cle.

Full hubcaps*

Fig. 182 Removing the full hubcap

Removing the full hubcap

Take the wheel brace and the wire hook from the vehicle tool kit page 293.

Hook the wire through one of the grooves on the hubcap.

Insert the wheel brace onto the wire hook Fig. 182 and pull the hub cap in the direction shown by the arrow.

Fitting hubcaps

Before mounting the full hubcap, the anti-theft wheel lock must be threaded into position Fig. 185 2 or 3 . Otherwise it will not be possible to mount the full hubcap.

Press the hubcap against the wheel so that the tyre valve fits into the space allotted to it Fig. 185 1 . Make sure that the hubcap is correctly fitted all the way around the wheel.

279Wheels and tyres

Wheel bolt caps

Fig. 183 Removing the wheel bolt caps

Take the wire hook from the vehicle tool kit page 293.

Insert the wire hook in the cap through the opening Fig. 183 and pull outwards in the direction of the arrow.

The caps protect the wheel bolts and should be remounted after changing the tyre.

The anti-theft wheel locking bolt has a special cap. This cap only fits on an- ti-theft locking bolts and is not for use with standard wheel bolts.

Changing a wheel*

Introduction

The tyres mounted on the vehicle are anti-puncture. The wheels should only be changed when switching from summer to winter tyres or vice-versa. See page 273

The vehicle only incorporates the tools necessary to change the wheels if winter tyres are factory fitted. Otherwise, we recommend consulting a Speci- alised workshop to change the wheels.

You should only change the wheels yourself if the vehicle is parked in a safe place, you are familiar with the procedure and you have all the necessary tools! Otherwise, you should seek professional assistance.

WARNING

Changing a wheel can be dangerous, especially on the hard shoulder. Please observe the following rules to minimise the risk of injury:

Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. To replace the tyre, park your vehicle as safe distance from surrounding traffic.

When changing a tyre, keep all passengers and particularly children a safe distance away from the work area.

Turn on the hazard warning lights to warn other road users.

Ensure the ground on which you park is flat and solid. If necessary, support the jack on a wide solid base.

If you are changing a wheel yourself, you should be familiar with the required procedure. Otherwise, you should seek professional assistance.

Only use suitable tools that are not damaged when changing a wheel.

Always stop the engine, turn on the electronic parking brake and place the gear selector lever in position P, for an automatic gearbox, or engage a gear for a manual gearbox to reduce the risk of the vehicle mov- ing accidentally.

Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked as soon as possible with a reliable torque wrench.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

280 Wheels and tyres

Wheel bolts

Fig. 184 Changing a wheel: Slacken the wheel bolts.

Fig. 185 Changing a wheel: Tyre valve 1 and position of anti-theft wheel locking bolt 2 or

3

Only use the tool supplied with the vehicle to loosen the wheel bolts.

Loosen the wheel bolts only about one turn before raising the vehicle with the jack.

If the wheel bolt is very tight, you may be able to loosen it by pushing down on the end of the wheel brace carefully with your foot. Hold on to the vehicle for support and take care not to slip.

Loosening wheel bolts

Fit the wheel brace as far as it will go over the wheel bolt Fig. 184.

Hold the wheel brace at the end and rotate the bolt approximately one turn anticlockwise .

Loosening anti-theft wheel bolts

For wheels with full hubcap, the anti-theft wheel lock must be threaded into position Fig. 185 2 or 3 . Otherwise it will not be possible to mount the full hubcap.

Take the adapter for anti-theft wheel bolts out of the vehicle tool kit.

Insert the adapter onto the anti-theft wheel bolt.

Fit the wheel brace onto the adapter as far as possible.

Hold the wheel brace at the end and rotate the bolt approximately one turn anticlockwise .

Important information about wheel bolts

The wheel rims and bolts have been designed to be fitted to factory op- tions. If different rims are fitted, the correct wheel bolts with the right length and correctly shaped bolt heads must be used. This ensures that wheels are fitted securely and that the brake system functions correctly.

In some circumstances, wheel bolts from the same model vehicle should not be used.

Wheel bolt tightening torque

The prescribed tightening torque for wheel bolts for steel and alloy wheels is 140 Nm. Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked as soon as possible with a reliable torque wrench.

If wheel bolts are rusty and it is difficult to tighten them, the threads should be replaced and cleaned before checking the tightening torque.

Never grease or lubricate wheel bolts or the wheel hub threads. Although they have been tightened to the prescribed torque, they could come loose while driving.

281Wheels and tyres

WARNING

If the wheel bolts are not fitted correctly they could be released while driving leading to loss of vehicle control and serious damage.

Only use wheel bolts which correspond to the wheel rims in question.

Never use different wheel bolts.

The bolts and threads should be clean, free of oil and grease and easy to thread.

To loosen and tighten the wheel bolts, always use the wheel brace supplied with the vehicle.

Loosen the wheel bolts only about one turn before raising the vehicle with the jack.

Never grease or lubricate wheel bolts or the wheel hub threads. Al- though they have been tightened to the prescribed torque, they could come loose while driving.

Never loosen the bolted joints of wheel rims with bolted ring trims.

If the wheel bolts are not tightened to the correct torque, they may come loose while driving, and the bolts and rims may come out. If the tightening torque is too high, the wheel bolts and threads can be dam- aged.

Raising the vehicle with the jack

Fig. 186 Jack position points

Fig. 187 Jack mounted on the left rear part of the vehicle.

The jack may be applied only at the jacking points shown (marks on chas- sis) Fig. 186. The mark indicates the jacking points below the vehicle. The jacking points are on the ribs behind the front edges Fig. 187. Always the relevant jacking point for the wheel to be changed .

Raise the vehicle using only the designated jacking points.

For your own safety and that of other passengers, the following points should be observed in the order given:

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

282 Wheels and tyres

Select a suitable flat and firm surface for raising the vehicle.

Switch off the engine, engage a gear (manual gearbox) or place the se- lector lever in position P page 162 and turn on the electronic parking brake page 168.

Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel being changed with col- lapsible wheel chocks* or other suitable objects.

When towing a trailer: unhook the trailer from the towing vehicle and park it correctly.

Loosen the wheel bolts on the wheel to be changed page 280.

Look below the vehicle for the jacking point Fig. 186 closest to the tyre which has to be changed.

Raise the jack with the handle until it can be inserted below the jacking point.

Ensure that the foot of the jack is firmly on the ground and that it is placed immediately below the lifting point on the vehicle Fig. 187.

Straighten the jack and continue raising it using the handle until the claw holds the vertical reinforcement beneath the vehicle Fig. 187.

Raise the vehicle until the wheel is clear of the ground.

WARNING

If the vehicle is not correctly raised, it could slip and fall off the jack causing serious injury. Please observe the following rules to minimise the risk of injury:

You should only use a jack approved by SEAT for your vehicle. Other jacks, even those approved for other SEAT models, might slip out of place.

The ground should be firm and flat. If the ground is sloped or soft then the vehicle could slip and fall off the jack. If necessary, support the jack on a wide solid base.

If the ground is slippery (for example, on tiles), place a non-slip sur- face (for example a floor mat) beneath the jack to avoid slipping.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

WARNING (Continued)

Only fit the jack at the prescribed jacking points. The claw of the jack should grip the reinforcement nerve on the underbody Fig. 187.

You should never have any limbs beneath a raised vehicle which is only supported by a jack.

If you have to work underneath the vehicle, you must use suitable stands additionally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of accident!.

Never raise the vehicle if it is tilting to one side or the engine is run- ning.

Never start the engine when the vehicle is raised. The vehicle may come loose from the jack due to the engine vibrations.

Changing a wheel

Fig. 188 Changing a wheel: loosen wheel bolts with the socket at the end of the wheel brace

Removing the wheel

Loosen the wheel bolts page 280.

Jacking up the vehicle page 281.

283Wheels and tyres

Using the hexagonal socket in the wheel brace Fig. 188, unscrew the slackened wheel bolts and place them on a clean surface.

Take off the wheel.

Putting on the spare wheel

Check the direction of rotation of the tyre page 268.

Fit the wheel.

Screw on the anti-theft locking bolt with the adapter in position Fig. 185 2 or 3 clockwise and tighten gently.

Replace the other wheel bolts and tighten slightly using the hexagonal socket on the end of the wheel brace.

Lower the car with the jack.

Tighten all of the wheel bolts clockwise . Tighten the bolts in diago- nal pairs (not in a circle).

Put the caps, trim or full hubcap back on page 278.

WARNING

If the wheel bolts are not treated suitably or not tightened to the correct torque then this could lead to loss of vehicle control and to a serious ac- cident.

All the wheel bolts and hub threads should be clean and free of oil and grease. The wheel bolts should be easily tightened to the correct tor- que.

The hexagonal socket in the wheel brace should be used for turning wheel bolts only. Do not use it to loosen or tighten the wheel bolts.

After changing the wheel

Clean the wheel brace, if necessary and put it away in the luggage com- partment page 293.

Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked as soon as possi- ble with a torque wrench page 280.

Note If the vehicle is fitted with a tyre monitoring system, this should be reprog- rammed if necessary whenever a tyre is changed page 204.

Anti-puncture kit TMS (Tyre Mobility System)*

Introduction

The Anti-puncture kit* (Tyre Mobility System) will reliably seal punctures caused by the penetration of a foreign body of up to about 4 mm in diame- ter. Do not remove foreign objects, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre.

Once the sealant has been applied to the tyre, be certain to check the tyre pressure after running for about 10 minutes.

If more than one tyre is damaged, seek professional assistance. The tyre mobility set has been designed to fill one tyre.

Only use the anti-puncture kit if the vehicle is properly parked, if you are highly familiar with the procedures, safety measures and the proper kit is available! Otherwise, you should seek professional assistance.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

284 Wheels and tyres

The tyre sealant must not be used in the following cases:

If the wheel rim has been damaged.

The outside temperature is lower than approximately -20 C (-4 F).

If the cut or puncture in the tyre is greater than 4 mm in diameter.

If you have been driving with very low pressure or a completely flat tyre.

If the bottle of tyre sealant has expired.

WARNING

Using the tyre mobility kit set can be dangerous, especially when filling the tyre at the roadside. Please observe the following rules to minimise the risk of injury:

Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. To fill the tyre, park the vehicle at a safe distance from surrounding traffic.

Ensure the ground on which you park is flat and firm.

All passengers and particularly children must keep a safe distance from the work area.

Turn on the hazard warning lights to warn other road users.

Use the tyre mobility kit only if you are familiar with the necessary procedures. Otherwise, you should seek professional assistance.

The tyre mobility kit is intended for temporary emergency use only until you can reach the nearest specialised workshop.

Replace the repaired tyre with the tyre mobility set as soon as possi- ble.

The sealant is a health hazard and must be cleaned immediately if it comes into contact with the skin.

Keep the tyre mobility kit out of the reach of small children.

WARNING (Continued)

Never use a jack, even one that has been approved for use with your vehicle.

Always stop the engine, turn on the electronic parking brake and place the gear selector lever in position P , for an automatic gearbox, or engage a gear for a manual gearbox to reduce the risk of the vehicle mov- ing accidentally.

WARNING

A tyre filled with sealant does not have the same performance properties as a conventional tyre.

Do not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph).

Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and fast cornering.

Check the tyre after driving for approximately 10 minutes at a maxi- mum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph).

For the sake of the environment Once used or expired, dispose of the sealant in accordance with legal regu- lations.

Note Sealant can be obtained from SEAT dealerships.

Observe the usage instructions provided by the tyre mobility kit manu- facturer.

285Wheels and tyres

Components of the tyre mobility kit*

Fig. 189 Standard repre- sentation: contents of the tyre mobility kit.

The tyre mobility kit kit is located underneath the floor covering in the lug- gage compartment. It includes the following components Fig. 189:

Valve insert remover

Sticker indicating maximum speed max. 80 km/h or max. 50 mph

Filler tube with cap

Air compressor

ON/OFF switch

Air bleed screw1)

Tyre pressure gauge1)

Tube for inflating tyres

12 volt connector

Bottle of sealant

Spare tyre valve

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

The valve insert remover 1 has a gap at the lower end for a valve insert. The valve insert can only be screwed or unscrewed in this way. This also ap- plies to its replacement part 11 .

Sealing and inflating a tyre

Sealing the tyre

Unscrew the tyre valve cap.

Use the enclosed valve insert remover Fig. 189 1 to unscrew the valve insert. Place the valve insert on a clean surface.

Vigorously shake the sealant bottle Fig. 189 10 for several seconds.

Screw the inflator tube Fig. 189 3 securely into the sealant bottle in a clockwise direction. The seal on the mouth of the bottle will break auto- matically.

Remove the lid from the inflator tube Fig. 189 3 and completely in- sert the open end of the tube into the tyre valve.

Hold the tyre sealant can upside down and fill the complete contents of the can into the tyre.

Remove the empty can from the valve.

Thread the valve insert with the extractor Fig. 189 1 .

Inflating the tyre

Securely screw the tyre inflator tube Fig. 189 8 of the compressor in- to the tyre valve.

Check whether the air bleed screw Fig. 189 6 is properly screwed in.

Start the engine and leave it running in neutral.

Attach the connector Fig. 189 9 to a 12 volt socket of the vehicle page 141.

Connect the air compressor using the ON/OFF switch Fig. 189 5 .

1)

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

It can also be integrated in the tube for inflating tyres.

286 Wheels and tyres

Keep the air compressor running until it reaches 2.0 to 2.5 bar (29-36 psi / 200-250 kPa) . Do not let it run for more than 8 mi- nutes .

Switch the compressor off.

When an air pressure of 2.0 2.5 bar (29-36 psi/200-250 kPa) cannot be reached, unscrew the inflator tube 5 from the tyre valve.

Drive the vehicle some 10 metres forwards or backwards so that the sealant is evenly distributed in the tyre interior.

Securely screw the compressor tyre inflator tube into the tyre valve and repeat the inflation process.

If the indicated pressure still cannot be reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre cannot be sealed with the anti-puncture kit. Do not con- tinue driving. You should obtain professional assistance .

Disconnect the air compressor and unscrew the inflator tube from the tyre valve.

Drive the vehicle at a maximum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) once a tyre pressure of 2.0 - 2.5 bar (29-36 psi / 200-250 kPa) has been reached.

After 10 minutes, check the pressure again page 286.

WARNING

When inflating the tyre, the air compressor and the inflator tube may be- come hot.

Protect hands and skin from hot parts.

Do not place the tyre inflator tube or hot air compressor on top of flammable materials.

Allow to cool before storing the equipment.

If the tyre cannot be inflated to a minimum pressure of 2.0 bar (29 psi/200 kPa), then the tyre is too badly damaged. The sealant cannot be used to seal the tyre. Do not continue driving. Seek specialist assis- tance.

CAUTION The air compressor must be switched off before a maximum of 8 minutes, otherwise it will overheat. Allow to cool for a few minutes before switching it on again.

Checking after 10 minutes of driving

Screw the inflator tube Fig. 189 8 again and check the pressure on the gauge 7 .

1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower:

Do not drive the vehicle! It has not been possible to sufficiently seal the tyre with the anti-puncture kit.

You should obtain professional assistance .

1.4 bar (20 psi / 140 kPa) and higher:

Always check to ensure the correct tyre pressure page 267!

Drive carefully to the nearest specialised workshop at a maximum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph).

Request that the workshop change the damaged tyre.

WARNING

Driving with an unsealed tyre is dangerous; it can cause accidents and serious injury.

Do not continue driving if the tyre pressure is 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower.

Seek specialist assistance.

287If and when

If and when

In case of emergency

Protecting yourself and securing the vehicle

Fig. 190 In the centre of the dash panel: Switch for hazard warning lights

Always fulfil legal requirements for securing a broken down vehicle. In a number of countries it is now obligatory, for example, to turn on the hazard warning lights and use a reflective safety vest page 288.

When being towed with the hazard warning lights on, a change in direction or traffic lane can be indicated as usual using the turn signal lever. The haz- ard lights will be interrupted temporarily.

For your own safety and that of other passengers, the following points should be observed in the order given:

Park the vehicle a safe distance from traffic and on suitable ground .

Turn on the hazard warning lights with the button Fig. 190.

Connect the electronic parking brake page 168.

Move the selector lever to its intermediate position or to P page 162.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition page 156.

Have all occupants leave the vehicle and move to safety, for example behind a guard rail.

When leaving the vehicle, take all keys with you.

Place an emergency warning triangle to indicate the position of your ve- hicle to other road users.

Allow the engine to cool and check if a specialist is required.

Examples of when to use the hazard warning lights:

If the vehicles ahead suddenly slow down or reach the end of a traffic jam, to warn the vehicles behind.

In case of an emergency.

If the vehicle breaks down.

When being towed.

Always comply with the applicable laws regarding the use of hazard warn- ing lights.

If the hazard warning lights are not working, you must use an alternative method of drawing attention to your vehicle. This method must comply with traffic legislation.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

288 If and when

WARNING

A faulty vehicle in traffic represents a risk of accident for the driver and for other road users.

Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. Park the vehicle a safe distance from surrounding traffic to lock all the doors in case of an emer- gency. Turn on the hazard warning lights to warn other road users.

Never leave children or disabled people alone in the vehicle if the doors are to be locked. In case of an emergency, passengers will be trap- ped inside the vehicle. Individuals locked in the vehicle can be exposed to very high or very low temperatures.

WARNING

The components of the exhaust system reach very high temperatures. This could cause a fire and considerable damage.

Always park your vehicle so that no part of the exhaust system can come in contact with flammable materials (such as dried grass or fuel).

Note The vehicle battery will discharge and run down if the hazard warning lights remain on for too much time (even with the ignition turned off).

For some vehicles, the brake lights will blink when braking suddenly at speeds of approximately 80 km/h (50 mph) to warn vehicles behind. If brak- ing continues, then the hazard warning lights system will automatically be turned on at the speed of less than approximately 10 km/h (6 mph). The brake lights remain lit. Upon accelerating, the hazard warning lights will be automatically turned off.

First aid kit, warning triangle, reflective vests and fire extinguishers*

Fig. 191 On the rear lid: Warning triangle bracket

Reflective vests

Some vehicles will have a driver door compartment to store a reflective vest page 46.

Warning triangle

With the boot lid open, rotate the lock Fig. 191 90. Lower the bracket and remove the warning triangle.

First-aid kit

There is a first aid kit page 131 in the rear left-hand side storage com- partment of the luggage compartment.

The first aid kit must comply with legal requirements. Check the expiry date of the contents of the first aid kit.

Fire extinguisher

There is a Fire extinguisher underneath the front passenger seat.

The fire extinguisher must conform to legal requirements, be ready for use and be checked regularly. Check the certification seal on the extinguisher.

289If and when

WARNING

Loose objects in the vehicle interior can be violently thrown in case of a sudden manoeuvre or braking and especially in accidents causing seri- ous injury.

Secure fire extinguishers, first aid kit, reflective vests and warning triangle securely to their respective supports.

Emergency locking and unlocking

Introduction

The doors, rear lid and panoramic sliding sunroof can be locked manually and partially opened, for example if the key or the central locking is dam- aged.

WARNING

Opening and closing doors carelessly can cause serious injury.

If the vehicle is locked from outside, the doors and windows cannot be opened from the inside.

Never leave children or disabled people alone in the car. They could be trapped in the car in an emergency and will not be able to get them- selves to safety.

Depending on the time of the year, temperatures inside a locked and closed vehicle can be extremely high or extremely low resulting in seri- ous injuries and illness or even death, particularly for young children.

WARNING

Getting in the way of the doors and the panoramic sliding sunroof is dan- gerous and can lead to serious injury.

Open and close the doors and the panoramic sliding sunroof only when nobody is in the way.

CAUTION When opening and closing in an emergency, carefully disassemble compo- nents and then reassemble them carefully to avoid damage to the vehicle.

Manually locking and unlocking the driver door

Fig. 192 Driver door handle: Hidden lock cyl- inder

As a general rule, when the driver door is locked manually, all other doors are locked. Unlocking manually only opens the driver door. Please note the instructions for the anti-theft alarm page 68.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

290 If and when

Unfold the key shaft page 65.

Insert the key shaft into the opening in the cover on the driver door han- dle from below Fig. 192 (arrow) then remove the cover upwards.

Insert the key shaft into the lock cylinder to unlock or lock the vehicle.

Unlocking notes:

The anti-theft alarm will remain active when vehicles are unlocked. How- ever, the alarm will not yet be triggered page 68.

If the driver door is opened, the alarm will be triggered.

Switch the ignition on. When the ignition is switched on, the electronic immobiliser recognises a valid vehicle key and deactivates the anti-theft alarm system.

Note The anti-theft alarm is not activated when the vehicle is locked manually us- ing the key shaft page 68.

Locking the passenger side door and sliding doors manually

Fig. 193 To the front of the passenger side door: Emergency lock, hidden by a rubber cap

Fig. 194 Emergency locking of the vehicle us- ing the vehicle key

The passenger side door and the sliding doors can be locked manually. The anti-theft alarm is not activated in this case.

Door open.

Remove the rubber cap to the front of the door. The rubber cap is marked with a lock symbol Fig. 193.

Unfold the vehicle key shaft page 65.

Insert the key shaft horizontally into the opening and move the coloured lever forwards Fig. 194.

Replace the rubber cap and close the door.

Check if the door is locked.

Carry out the same operation on the other doors if necessary.

Have the vehicle checked by a specialised workshop.

Note The doors can be opened and unlocked individually from the inside by pull- ing the inside door handle. To open, pull the inner door release lever twice page 68.

291If and when

Emergency unlocking the rear lid

Fig. 195 From the lug- gage compartment: Re- moving boot lid cover.

Fig. 196 From the lug- gage compartment: Man- ually unlocking the boot lid.

Remove equipment to access the inside of the rear lid.

Remove the square cover in the inner trim of the rear lid Fig. 195.

Push the release lever Fig. 196 A in the direction of the arrow to un- lock the boot lid.

Manually open the rear lid.

Manually closing the panoramic sliding sunroof

Fig. 197 On the interior roof lining: Remove cov- er.

Fig. 198 Allen bolt to close the panoramic slid- ing sunroof

Push open the cover in the direction indicated (arrow) Fig. 197.

Insert a standard 4 mm Allen key1) into the Allen bolt Fig. 198 A .

Rotate the Allen bolt to close the panoramic sliding sunroof.

1) Not included with the vehicle tool kit.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

292 If and when

Re-install the lining.

Bring the vehicle to a specialised workshop to check the panoramic slid- ing sunroof given that the emergency closing operation could damage general operation or the anti-trap function of the panoramic sliding sunroof.

Manually unlocking the gear selector lever

Fig. 199 Remove the lin- ing from the area of the gear indication

Fig. 200 Manual release of gear selector lever

If the vehicle power supply should ever fail (discharged battery, etc.) and the vehicle has to be pushed or towed, the selector lever must first be moved to position N using the emergency release mechanism.

The emergency release mechanism is located underneath the gearbox cover panel to the right-hand side. To release the gear selector lever mechanism, a suitable tool is required, for example a screwdriver.

Preparations

Apply the parking brake. If the parking brake cannot be activated, the vehicle must be secured by another means to ensure that it cannot move.

Switch the ignition off.

To remove the gearbox cover panel

Pull the cover up around the dust guard on the gear selector lever Fig. 199.

Take the cover off by passing it over the gear selector lever .

Manual release of the selector lever

Press the release lever Fig. 200 in the direction of the arrow and hold it in this position.

Press the lock button Fig. 199 1 on the gear selector lever knob and place the gear selector lever in the N position.

WARNING

Never move the gear selector lever from the position P while the electron- ic parking brake is deactivated. Otherwise, the vehicle may accidentally move off on hills or steep slopes causing serious accidents.

CAUTION If the vehicle is moved on its wheels with the engine stopped and the selec- tor lever in position N for a prolonged period of time and at high speed, for example for towing, then the automatic gearbox will be damaged.

293If and when

Vehicle tool kit*

Introduction

When securing the vehicle in case of a breakdown, please note the legal re- quirements for each country.

WARNING

Loose objects in the vehicle interior can be violently fired through the compartment in case of a sudden manoeuvre or braking and especially in accidents causing serious injury.

Make sure that the vehicle tools are stored safely in the luggage com- partment.

WARNING

Unsuitable or damaged vehicle tools can cause injury or accidents.

Never work with inappropriate or damaged tools.

Location

Fig. 201 In the luggage compartment, viewed from inside the vehicle: The vehicle tool kit loca- ted in a cavity close to the lock carrier.

Depending on the model, the vehicle tools may be kept in the luggage com- partment, in a cavity close to the lock carrier Fig. 201. Loosen the safety straps and remove the vehicle tool kit. For vehicles factory-fitted with winter tyres, you will find additional tools in a toolbox located in the luggage com- partment.

Note After use, return the jack to its initial position using the handle in order to securely store it in the vehicle.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

294 If and when

Components

Fig. 202 Components of the vehicle tool kit

The vehicle tool kit depends on the vehicle equipment. The following is a description for a vehicle with all options.

The individual elements of the vehicle tool kit Fig. 202

Adapter for anti-theft bolt. SEAT recommend you carry the wheel bolt adapter in the vehicle tool kit at all times. The code number of the anti- theft wheel bolt is stamped on the front of the adapter. In case it is lost, another adapter can be ordered using this number. Note the anti-theft bolt code for the wheels and keep it in a place other than the vehicle.

Towline anchorage, removable.

Wheel spanner.

Crank handle for jack. Fold the handle before returning it to the tool box.

Jack. Before storing the jack in the tool kit, fold its hook.

1

2

3

4

5

Screwdriver with hexagon socket in the handle to unscrew or screw loosened wheel bolts. The screwdriver bit is interchangeable. The screwdriver may be found underneath the wheel spanner.

Wire hook for pulling off the wheel cover, integral hubcaps and the wheel bolt caps.

Note The jack does not generally require maintenance. If necessary it should be lubricated with universal grease.

Folding wedges*

Fig. 203 To unfold the foldable wedges.

The foldable wedges are included with the on-board tools Fig. 202.

Unfolding the foldable wedges

Lift the base plate Fig. 203 1 .

Insert the two tabs of the base plate into the rectangular openings 2 .

Correct operation

The foldable chocks are used to block the wheel diagonally opposite to the wheel being changed.

6

7

295If and when

The foldable chocks are placed in front of and behind the wheel and must be used on firm ground.

WARNING

Inappropriate assembly or use of folding chocks can cause an accident and serious injuries.

Never use damaged chocks.

Do not use the foldable chocks to hold the vehicle on hills or slopes.

Fuses

Introduction

Due to the constant update of vehicles, fuse assignments depending on equipment and the use of the same fuse for various electrical devices, at the time of printing this manual it is not possible to provide an up-to-date summary of the electrical components fuse positions. For detailed informa- tion about the fuse positions, please consult a Technical Service.

In general, a fuse can be assigned to various electrical devices. Yet an elec- trical device can also be protected by several fuses.

Only replace fuses when the cause of the problem has been solved. If a newly inserted fuse blows after a short time, you must have the electrical system checked by a specialised workshop as soon as possible.

WARNING

The high voltages in the electrical system can give serious electrical shocks, causing burns and even death!

Never touch the electrical wiring of the ignition system.

Take care not to cause short circuits in the electrical system.

WARNING

Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses or bridging a current circuit with- out fuses can cause a fire and serious injury.

Never use a fuse with a higher value. Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same amperage (same colour and markings) and size.

Never repair a fuse.

Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, staple or similar.

CAUTION To avoid damage to the vehicle's electrical system, before replacing a fuse turn off the ignition, lights and all electrical devices and remove the keys from the ignition.

If you replace a fuse with higher-rating fuse, you could cause damage to another part of the electrical system.

Protect open fuse boxes to avoid the entry of dust or humidity as this can damage the electrical system.

Note One single device could have more than one fuse.

Several devices could run over one single fuse.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

296 If and when

Vehicle fuses

Fig. 204 On the driver- side dash panel: fuse box cover

Fig. 205 In the engine compartment: fuse box cover

Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same amperage (same colour and markings) and size.

Identifying fuses by colours

Colour Amp rating

Purple 3

Light brown 5

Brown 7.5

Colour Amp rating

Red 10

Blue 15

Yellow 20

White or transparent 25

Green 30

Orange 40

To open the dash panel fuse box

To remove the cover, move the activation lever in the lower part to the right Fig. 204.

For right-hand drive vehicles, move the lever to the left.

To open the engine compartment fuse box

Open the bonnet page 251.

Move the attachment tabs forwards, in the direction indicated by the ar- row to release the fuse box cover Fig. 205.

Then lift the cover out.

To fit the cover, place it on the fuse box. Push the attachment tabs back, in the opposite direction indicated by the arrow until they click audibly into place.

In is possible that there are more fuses behind a cover in the lower left-hand side of the luggage compartment.

CAUTION Always carefully remove the fuse box covers and refit them correctly to avoid problems with your vehicle.

Protect the fuse boxes when open to avoid the entry of dust or humidity. Dirt and humidity inside fuse boxes can cause damage to the electrical sys- tem.

297If and when

Note In the vehicle, there are more fuses than those indicated in this chapter. These should only be changed by a specialised workshop.

Replacing a blown fuse

Fig. 206 Image of a blown fuse

Fig. 207 Removing or fit- ting a fuse

Preparation

Switch off the ignition, lights and all electrical devices.

Open the corresponding fuse box page 296

Identifying a blown fuse

A fuse is blown if its metal strip is ruptured Fig. 206.

Point a lamp at the fuse. This will make it easier to see if the fuse is blown.

To replace a fuse

If necessary, remove the plastic pincers from the fuse box cover.

For small fuses, insert the pincers from above Fig. 207 A.

For larger fuses, insert the pincers from one side of the fuse Fig. 207 B.

Remove the relevant fuse.

Replace the blown fuse by one with an identical amperage rating (same colour and markings) and identical size .

Replace the cover.

CAUTION If you replace a fuse with higher-rating fuse, you could cause damage to an- other part of the electrical system.

Changing bulbs

Introduction

Changing bulbs requires a certain amount of manual skill. If you are unsure, SEAT recommends that you consult a Technical Service or request assis- tance from a specialist. In general, a specialist is required if other vehicle components must be removed or if the discharge lamps must be replaced.

You should store spare light bulbs in the vehicle for safety-relevant lights. Spare bulbs may be obtained from the Technical Services. In some coun- tries, it is a legal requirement to carry spare bulbs in the vehicle.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

298 If and when

Driving with faults and blown bulbs on the vehicle exterior lighting is against the law.

Additional bulb specifications

The specifications of some headlamp bulbs and bulbs for the tail lamps fit- ted at the factory may be different to those of conventional bulbs. Bulb in- formation is displayed on the bulb socket or on the bulb itself.

WARNING

If the road is not well-lit and the vehicle is not clearly visible to other drivers, there is a risk of accident.

WARNING

Failure to replace bulbs correctly may cause serious accidents.

Before carrying out any work in the engine compartment please read and observe the warnings page 251. In any vehicle, the engine com- partment is a hazardous area and could cause severe injury.

Discharge lamps work with high-voltage and can cause serious or fa- tal injury if handled incorrectly.

H7 and discharge lamps are highly pressurised and could explode when being changed.

Only replace the bulbs concerned when they have cooled.

Never replace bulbs alone if you are not familiar with the operations necessary. If you are not sure about procedures then visit a specialised workshop to carry out the necessary work.

Never touch the bulb glass directly. Fingerprints will be evaporated by the heat of the operating bulb thus fogging up the reflector.

The headlamp frameworks in the engine compartment and the tail lamps contain sharp elements. Always protect your hands when chang- ing bulbs.

CAUTION After changing a bulb, if the rubber covers are not replaced correctly on the headlamp framework, the electrical installation may be damaged, espe- cially if water is allowed to enter.

Remove the ignition key before working on the electric system. Other- wise, a short circuit could occur.

Switch off the lights and the parking light before changing a bulb.

Take good care to avoid damaging any components.

Control lamp

It lights up

Possible cause Solution

A vehicle exterior lighting bulb is not working.

Replace the faulty bulb.

Several warning and control lamps should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few seconds.

Checking the bulbs of a trailer

For vehicles with the factory fitted towing bracket, certain trailer lights are also controlled if the power socket is correctly connected.

A fault on a trailer turn signal is indicated on the instrument panel by the turn signal blinking twice as fast ( or ) page 90.

General fault of all turn signals on one side.

Fault in one tail light (on some models, also the registration light).

Fault in two brake lights.

299If and when

WARNING

Observe the safety warnings in Control and warning lamps on page 56.

Note A fault in the LED on the tail lights will not be indicated. However, if the fault affects all the LEDs then this will be indicated by the control lamp .

To replace halogen headlight bulbs

Fig. 208 In the engine compartment: Left-hand side headlight lining. A

dipped beam headlights, B daytime driving lights

and C main beam head- lights and side lights

Fig. 209 Left headlight

There is no need to remove the headlight to replace bulbs.

Complete operations only in the sequence given:

A B C

Turn signals (small lamp

holder)

Dipped beam head- lights

Daytime driving

light

Main beam headlights

Side lights

1. Open the bonnet page 251.

2. Remove the rubber cover on the rear of the head-

light.

3.

Rotate the lamp holder 1

to the left all the way and

pull it out back- wards with the

bulb.

Rotate the lamp holder to the left all the way and pull it out back- wards with the

bulb.

Press the wire clip down-

wards and pull the lamp hold- er 2 out with

the bulb.

Pull the lamp holder 3 out

backwards with the bulb.

4. Depending on the model, the bulb is removed directly from the lamp

holder or it may need to be rotated and then removed.

5. Replace the faulty bulb by a new identical bulb.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

300 If and when

A B C

Turn signals (small lamp

holder)

Dipped beam head- lights

Daytime driving

light

Main beam headlights

Side lights

6. Place the bulb holder in the head- light and rotate to the right all the

way.

Place the lamp holder in the

headlight and pull the wire clip upwards until it clicks into place.

Place the lamp holder in the

headlight and insert com-

pletely.

7. Insert the rubber cover.

Note The images show the left hand headlight from behind. The structure of the right hand side headlight is symmetric.

To replace the xenon headlights bulb

Fig. 210 In the engine compartment: turn signal cover

Fig. 211 Turn signal lamp holder 1 and turn- ing light 2

There is no need to remove the headlight to replace bulbs.

Complete operations only in the sequence given:

Turn signals 1 Turning lights 2

1. Open the bonnet page 251.

2. Rotate the cover Fig. 210 in the direction of the arrow and remove

it.

3.

Rotate the lamp holder 1

Fig. 211 to the left all the way and pull it out backwards with the bulb.

Press the wire clip downwards and pull the lamp holder 2

Fig. 211 out with the bulb.

4. Depending on the model, the bulb is removed directly from the

lamp holder or it may need to be rotated and then removed.

5. Replace the faulty bulb by a new identical bulb.

6. Place the bulb holder in the headlight and rotate to the right all the way.

Place the lamp holder in the headlight and pull the wire clip upwards until it clicks into place.

7. Rotate the cover Fig. 210 in the opposite direction to the arrow as

far as it will go.

Always seek the help of a specialist when changing the Xenon dipped beam and main beam headlamps in Introduction on page 298.

301If and when

Note The illustrations show the left hand headlight. The structure of the right hand side headlight is symmetric.

To replace the front bumper bulbs

Fig. 212 On the right- hand side of the front bumper: Removing the headlights

Fig. 213 Changing the bulbs in the headlights

Complete operations only in the sequence given:

1. Pull the cover forwards, in the direction of the arrow Fig. 212.

2. Unscrew the attachment screw Fig. 212 1 using the screwdriver from the vehicle tool kit page 293.

3. Tilt the headlight slightly forward and extract it from its lateral at- tachments Fig. 213 (small arrows).

4. Release the connector Fig. 213 1 and remove it.

5. Rotate the lamp holder Fig. 213 2 to the left all the way, in the direction of the arrow, and pull it out backwards with the bulb.

6. Replace the faulty bulb by a new identical bulb.

7. Place the bulb holder in the headlight and rotate to the right all the way.

8. Insert the connector Fig. 213 1 on the lamp holder 2 . The con- nector must audibly click into place.

9. Place the headlight into its position Fig. 213 (small arrows) and tilt it backwards.

10. Tighten the attachment screw Fig. 212 1 using the screwdriver.

11. Replace the cover on the bumper Fig. 212.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

302 If and when

To replace the rear lid light bulbs

Fig. 214 On the rear lid: Remove the cover.

Fig. 215 On the rear lid: Remove the lamp holder.

Complete operations only in the sequence given:

1. Open the rear lid page 80.

2. Extract the cover carefully using the flat part of the screwdriver from the vehicle tool kit as a lever (Fig. 202) on the indent Fig. 214

1 .

3. Release the lamp holder connector by pulling on the red connector block.

4. Press on the attachment tabs in the direction of the arrow Fig. 215 and pull out the lamp holder.

5. Replace the faulty bulb by a new identical bulb.

6. Install the lamp holder. The attachment tabs should audibly click into place.

7. Insert the cover. The cover should lock into place.

303If and when

To replace the tail light bulbs

Fig. 216 On the side of the luggage compartment: To remove the left and right hand side tail lights. 1 remove the cap; 2 attachment screw

Fig. 217 Tail lights on bodywork: Remove the lamp holder 1 to 4 : At- tachment tab

Complete operations only in the sequence given.

Removing the tail light units

Complete operations only in the sequence given:

Tail light, left Tail light, right

1. Open the rear lid page 80.

2. Open the storage compartments on the left-hand side of the lug- gage compartment page 131.

Move the 12 V power socket sup- port by pressing gently down- wards Fig. 216 B (arrow).

3. Rotate the cap 1 90 in the di- rection of the arrow and remove it.

4. Unscrew the attachment screw Fig. 216 2 using the screwdriver from the vehicle tool kit page 293. The bolt is secured in its posi-

tion.

5. Extract the tail light from the bodywork by carefully pulling back-

wards.

6. Pull the red strip on the connector and extract the connector.

7. Disassemble the tail light unit and place it on a flat, clean surface.

To change the bulb

8. To release the lamp holder, press on the attachment tabs Fig. 217

1 to 4 in the direction of the arrow.

9. Remove the lamp holder from the tail light unit.

10. Replace the faulty bulb by a new identical bulb.

11. Place the lamp holder in the tail light unit. The attachment tabs should audibly click into place.

12. Insert the connector and press the red attachment strip in so that the connector is locked into place.

Assembling the tail light units

Complete operations only in the sequence given:

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

304 If and when

Tail light, left Tail light, right

13. Carefully insert the tail light unit into the opening in the bodywork. To do this, insert the upper tail light unit guide into the attachment

ring.

14. Tighten the white attachment screw using the screwdriver from the

vehicle tool kit.

15. Ensure that the tail light unit has been correctly fitted and is firmly

secured.

16. Replace the cap Fig. 216 1

and rotate it 90 in the opposite direction of the arrow.

Move the 12 V power socket sup- port upwards gently until it is correctly closed.

17. Close the storage compartment.

18. Close the rear lid page 80.

Changing the number plate light

Fig. 218 On the rear bumper: number plate lights

Fig. 219 Number plate light: Remove the lamp holder

Complete operations only in the sequence given:

Fixed number plate light Bolted number plate light

1.

Press the flat part of the screw- driver included in the vehicle on- board tools (Fig. 202) in the direction of the arrow, in the groove of the number plate light Fig. 218.

Unscrew the number plate light screws using the screwdriver from the vehicle tool kit (Fig. 202).

2. Detach the number plate light.

3.

Press on the connector lock in the direction of the arrow Fig. 219 1 and pull out the connector.

Separate the attachment tabs from the rear panel of the num- ber plate light by pressing.

4. Rotate the lamp holder in the di- rection of the arrow Fig. 219

2 and extract it with the lamp.

Take the lamp holder out of the number plate light.

5. Replace the faulty bulb by a new identical bulb.

6.

Insert the lamp holder into the number plate light and rotate all the way in the opposite direction to the arrow Fig. 219 2 .

Insert the lamp holder into the number plate light.

305If and when

Fixed number plate light Bolted number plate light

7. Plug the connector into the lamp holder.

Press on the attachment tabs. The lamp holder must be firmly attached to the number plate light.

8. Insert the number plate light carefully into the opening on the

bumper. Ensure that the number plate light is in the correct posi- tion.

9. Insert the number plate light into the bumper until it audibly clicks into place.

Tighten the attachment screws for the number plate light using the screwdriver.

Starting assistance

Introduction

If the engine fails to start because of a discharged battery, the battery of an- other vehicle can be used to start the engine. Before starting, check the magic eye on the battery page 262.

For starting assistance, jump lead cables conforming to the standard DIN 72553 are required (see the cable manufacturer instructions). The jump lead cable must be at least 25 mm2 in section (0.038 inches2) for petrol en- gines, and 35 mm2 (0.054 inches2) for diesel engines.

For vehicles whose battery is not in the engine compartment, the jump leads should only be connected to the starting assistance connection points in the engine compartment.

WARNING

Incorrect use of jump leads and incorrectly jump starting could cause the battery to explode resulting in serious injury. Please observe the follow- ing rules to minimise the risk of a battery explosion:

The battery providing current must have the same voltage (12V) and approximately the same capacity (see markings on battery) as the flat battery.

Never charge a frozen or recently thawed battery. A flat battery can al- so freeze at temperatures close to 0 C (+32 F).

If a battery is frozen and/or has been frozen then it must be replaced.

A highly explosive mixture of gases is released when the battery is being charged. Always keep lit cigarettes, open flames, sparks and fire far from the battery. Never use a mobile telephone when connecting and removing the jump leads.

Charge the battery only in well ventilated areas given that when the battery is charged by outside assistance, it creates a mix of highly explo- sive gases.

Jump leads should never enter into contact with moving parts in the engine compartment.

Never switch the positive and negative poles or connect the jump leads incorrectly.

Note the instruction manual provided by the manufacturer of the jump leads.

CAUTION To avoid considerable damage to the vehicle electrical system, note the fol- lowing carefully:

If the jump leads are incorrectly connected, this could result in a short circuit.

The vehicles must not touch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as soon as the positive terminals are connected.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

306 If and when

Positive pole on the starting assistance points

Fig. 220 In the engine compartment: positive pole for starting assis- tance +

On some vehicles, there is a starting assistance terminal in the engine com- partment, under a labelled cover.

How to jump start: description

Fig. 221 Diagram of con- nections for vehicles without Start-Stop sys- tem.

Fig. 222 Diagram of con- nections for vehicles with Start-Stop system.

Jump lead terminal connections

1. Switch off the ignition of both vehicles .

2. Connect one end of the red jump lead to the positive + termi- nal of the vehicle with the flat battery A Fig. 221.

3. Connect the other end of the red jump lead to the positive ter- minal + in the vehicle providing assistance B .

4. For vehicles without Start-Stop system: connect one end of the black jump lead to the negative terminal in the vehicle pro- viding assistance B Fig. 221.

For vehicles with Start-Stop system: connect one end of the black jump lead X to a suitable ground terminal, a solid piece of metal in the engine block, or to the engine block Fig. 222.

5. Connect the other end of the black jump lead X to a solid met- al component bolted to the engine block or to the engine block itself of the vehicle with the flat battery. Do not connect it to a point near the battery A .

307If and when

6. Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into contact with any moving parts in the engine compartment.

Starting

7. Start the engine of the vehicle supplying electricity and let it run at idling speed.

8. Start the engine of the vehicle with the flat battery and wait 2 or 3 minutes until the engine is running.

Removing the jump leads

9. Before you remove the jump leads, switch off the dipped beam headlights (if they are switched on).

10. Turn on the heater blower and heated rear window in the vehi- cle with the flat battery. This helps minimise voltage peaks which are generated when the leads are disconnected.

11. When the engine is running, disconnect the leads in reverse or- der to the details given above.

Connect the battery clamps so they have good metal-to-metal contact with the battery terminals.

If the engine fails to start, switch off the starter after about 10 seconds and try again after about 1 minute.

WARNING

Please note the safety warnings referring to working in the engine compartment page 251.

The battery providing assistance must have the same voltage as the flat battery (12V) and approximately the same capacity (see imprint on battery). Failure to comply could result in an explosion.

Never use jump leads when one of the batteries is frozen. Danger of explosion! Even after the battery has thawed, battery acid could leak and cause chemical burns. If a battery freezes, it should be replaced.

Keep sparks, flames and lighted cigarettes away from batteries, dan- ger of explosion. Failure to comply could result in an explosion.

Observe the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the jump leads.

Do not connect the negative cable from the other vehicle directly to the negative terminal of the flat battery. The gas emitted from the battery could be ignited by sparks. Danger of explosion.

Do not attach the negative cable from the other vehicle to parts of the fuel system or to the brake line.

The non-insulated parts of the battery clamps must not be allowed to touch. The jump lead attached to the positive battery terminal must not touch metal parts of the vehicle, this can cause a short circuit.

Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into contact with any moving parts in the engine compartment.

Do not lean on the batteries. This could result in chemical burns.

Note The vehicles must not touch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as soon as the positive terminals are connected.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

308 If and when

Towing and tow starting

Introduction

When towing, always respect legal requirements.

For technical reasons, it is not possible to tow a vehicle if the battery is flat.

Vehicles with the Keyless Access system are only allowed to be towed with the ignition switched on!

If the vehicle is towed with the engine switched off and ignition switched on, the battery will drain. Depending on the battery's charge level, the volt- age drop can be so large, even after only a few minutes, that no electrical device will function e.g. hazard lights. In vehicles with the Keyless Access system, the steering wheel could be locked .

WARNING

A vehicle with a flat battery should never be towed.

Never remove the key from the ignition lock. Otherwise, the steering wheel lock could suddenly lock. You may lose control of the vehicle and there is a risk of serious accident.

WARNING

When towing the vehicle, the handling and braking efficiency change considerably. Please observe the following instructions to minimise the risk of serious accidents and injury:

As the driver of the vehicle being towed:

The brake must be depressed must harder as the brake servo does not operate. Always remain aware to avoid collision with the towing vehicle.

More strength is required at the steering wheel as the power steer- ing does not operate when the engine is switched off.

As the driver of the towing vehicle:

Accelerate gently and carefully.

Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.

Brake well in advance than usual and brake gently.

CAUTION Carefully fit and remove the towline anchorage and its cover to avoid damage to the vehicle (for example, paintwork).

When towing, fuel could enter the catalytic converter and cause dam- age!

Instructions for tow starting

In general, the vehicle should not be started by towing. Jump-starting is much more preferable page 305.

For technical reasons, the following vehicles can not be tow started:

Vehicles with an automatic gearbox.

Vehicles with the Keyless Access locking and ignition system, given that the electronic steering lock may not be unlocked.

309If and when

Vehicles with an electronic parking brake, given that it is possible that the brake will not be disengaged.

If the vehicle battery is flat, it is possible that the engine control units do not operate correctly.

However, if your vehicle must absolutely be tow-started (manual gearbox):

Engage the 2nd or 3rd gear.

Keep the clutch pressed down.

Switch on the ignition and the hazard warning lights.

Release the clutch when both vehicles are moving.

As soon as the engine starts, press the clutch and move the gear lever into neutral. This helps to prevent a collision with the towing vehicle.

CAUTION When tow-starting, fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.

Towing instructions

Tow rope or tow bar

When towing, the tow bar is the safest and vehicle friendly way. You should only use a tow rope if you do not have a tow bar.

A tow rope should be slightly elastic to avoid damage to both vehicles. It is advisable to use a tow rope made of synthetic fibre or similarly elastic mate- rial.

Only secure the tow rope or tow bar to the towline anchorage or specially designed fitting.

Vehicles with a factory fitted towing device, can only be used for towing with a tow bar, specially designed to fit on a tow hitch ball page 212.

Towing vehicles with an automatic gearbox

Note the following for a towed vehicle:

Make sure the gear selector lever is in the N position.

Do not drive faster than 50 km/h (30 mph).

Do not tow further than 50 km (30 miles).

If a breakdown truck is used, the vehicle must be towed with the front wheels raised. Note the following instructions for towing four all-wheel drive vehicles.

Instructions for towing all-wheel drive vehicles

All-wheel drive vehicles can be towed using a toolbar or tow rope. If the ve- hicle is towed with the front or rear axle raised, the engine must be turned off to avoid transmission damage.

For vehicles with a double clutched DSG (direct shift gearbox) the instruc- tions for towing vehicles with an automatic gearbox apply page 309.

Situations in which the vehicle should not be towed

In the following cases, the vehicle should not be towed but transported on a trailer or special vehicle:

If the vehicle gearbox does not contain lubricant due to a fault.

If the vehicle battery is flat and, as a result, the electronic steering lock and electronic parking brake cannot be disengaged if applied.

If the vehicle to be towed has an automatic gearbox and the distance to be covered is greater than 50 km (30 miles).

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

310 If and when

Note The vehicle can only be towed if the electronic parking brake and steer- ing lock are deactivated. If the vehicle has no power supply or there is an electric system fault, the engine must be started using jump leads to deacti- vate the electronic parking brake and electronic steering lock.

Vehicles with the Keyless Access locking and starting system should on- ly be towed with the ignition switched on because otherwise the electronic steering column lock remains on.

Fitting the front towline anchorage

Fig. 223 On the right- hand side of the front bumper: Screw in the towline anchorage.

The location for the removable towline anchorage is on the right-hand side of the front bumper Fig. 223.

The towline anchorage should always be kept in the vehicle.

Note the instructions for towing page 309.

To fit the towline anchorage

Take the towline anchorage from the vehicle tool kit page 293.

Press on the upper cover and carefully remove it forwards. Allow the cov- er to hang.

Screw in the towline anchorage into its position anticlockwise as far as it will go Fig. 223 . Use a suitable tool to firmly tighten the towline anchorage in its location.

After towing, remove the towline anchorage by turning it clockwise and put the cover back in place.

CAUTION The towline anchorage must always be completely and firmly tightened. Otherwise, it could be released while towing and tow-starting.

Fitting the rear towline anchorage

Fig. 224 On the rear bumper, to the right hand side: Tow ring in position

The location for the removable towline anchorage is on the right-hand side of the rear bumper Fig. 224. For vehicles with a factory fitted towing brack- et, there is no fitting behind the cover to insert the towline anchorage. For towing, fit and use the tow hitch page 212, .

311If and when

Note the instructions for towing page 309.

Fitting the towline anchorage to the rear for vehicles without factory fitted tow hitch

Take the towline anchorage from the vehicle tool kit in the luggage com- partment page 293.

Press on the upper cover and carefully remove it back. This may require some strength. Allow the cover to hang.

Screw in the towline anchorage into its position anticlockwise as far as it will go . Use a suitable tool to firmly tighten the towline anchorage in its location.

After towing, remove the towline anchorage by turning it clockwise and put the cover back in place.

CAUTION The towline anchorage must always be completely and firmly tightened. Otherwise, it could be released while towing and tow-starting.

Vehicles with a factory fitted towing bracket, can only be used for towing with a tow bar, specially designed to fit on a tow hitch ball. Otherwise, the tow hitch ball and the vehicle may be damaged. Otherwise, a tow rope should be used.

Towing advice

Towing requires some experience, especially when using a tow rope. Both drivers should be familiar with the technique required for towing. For this reason, inexperienced drivers should abstain.

While driving, avoid excessive traction forces and jerking. When towing on an unpaved road, there is always a risk of overloading and damaging the anchorage points.

If the vehicle is towed, with the hazard warning lights on and the ignition switched on, the turn signal may be used to indicate changes of direction. Simply operate the turn signal lever as usual. Meanwhile, the hazard warn- ing lights will go off. When the turn signal lever is returned to the rest posi- tion, the hazard warning lights will be turned on automatically.

Notes for the driver of the towed vehicle

Leave the ignition on to avoid locking the steering wheel, to release the electronic parking brake and to activate the turn signals, the horn as well as the window wipers and window washers.

As the power assisted steering does not work if the engine is not run- ning, you will need more strength to steer than normally.

The brake must be depressed must harder as the brake servo does not operate. Avoid hitting the towing vehicle.

Note the instructions and information contained in the Instruction Man- ual for the vehicle to be towed.

Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle

Accelerate gently and carefully. Avoid sudden manoeuvres.

Brake well in advance than usual and brake gently.

Note the instructions and information contained in the Instruction Man- ual for the vehicle that is towing.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

312 Description of specifications

Technical specifications

Description of specifications

Important information

Important

The information in the vehicle documentation always takes precedence over the information in this Instruction Manual.

All technical specifications provided in this documentation are valid for the standard model in Spain. The vehicle data card included in the Mainte- nance Programme or the vehicle registration documents shows which en- gine is installed in the vehicle.

The figures may be different depending whether additional equipment is fit- ted, for different models, for special vehicles and for other countries.

Abbreviations used in the Technical Specifications section

Abbrevia- tion

Meaning

kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.

PS Pferdestrke (horsepower), formerly used to denote engine power.

rpm Revolutions per minute - engine speed.

Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.

litres per 100 km

Fuel consumption in litres per 100 km.

g/km Carbon dioxide emissions in grams per km (mile) travelled.

CO2 Carbon dioxide

CN Cetane number, indication of the diesel combustion power.

RON Research octane number, indication of the knock resistance of petrol.

313Description of specifications

Vehicle code

Fig. 225 Vehicle identifi- cation number

Vehicle identification number

The vehicle identification number (chassis number) can be read from out- side the vehicle through the windscreen Fig. 225. This viewer is located in the lower part of the windscreen. The vehicle identification number (chassis number) is also stamped on the right water drain channel. The water drain channel is located between the suspension tower and the wing. Open the bonnet to read the vehicle identification number page 251.

Vehicle data plate

The vehicle data plate is attached to the luggage compartment, and con- tains the following information:

Vehicle identification number (chassis number)

Vehicle type, engine power, gearbox type

Engine and gearbox code, paint number, interior equipment.

Optional extras, PR numbers

These data are also provided in the Maintenance Programme.

1

2

3

4

Type plate

The type plate is visible when the driver door is opened, on the lower part of the strut. Vehicles for certain export countries do not have a type plate.

The manufacturer's type plate contains the following data:

Gross vehicle weight

Maximum authorised weight of vehicle and trailer

Maximum gross front axle weight

Maximum rear axle weight

Information on fuel consumption

The consumption and emission details shown on the vehicle data sticker differ from one vehicle to another.

The fuel consumption, CO2 emissions and actual kerb weight of the vehicle are noted on the vehicle data sticker.

The fuel consumption and emissions figures given are based on the vehicle weight category, which is determined according to the engine/gearbox combination and the equipment fitted.

The consumption and emission figures are calculated in accordance with the EC test requirements 1999/100/EC. These test requirements specify a realistic test method based on normal everyday driving.

The following test conditions are applied:

Urban cycle The urban cycle starts with an engine cold start. City driving is then simulated.

Extra urban cycle

In the extra urban cycle simulation the vehicle frequently ac- celerates and brakes in all gears, as in normal everyday driv- ing. The road speed ranges from 0 to 120 km/h (75 mph).

5

6

7

8

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

314 Description of specifications

Total con- sumption

The average total consumption is calculated with a weight- ing of around 37% for the urban cycle and 63% for the extra urban cycle.

CO2 emis- sions

The exhaust gases are collected during both driving cycles to calculate carbon dioxide emissions. The gas composition is then analysed to evaluate the CO2 content and other emissions.

Note Actual consumption may vary from quoted test values, depending on per- sonal driving style, road and traffic conditions, the weather and the vehicle condition.

Weights

Kerb weight refers to the basic model with a fuel tank filled to 90% capacity and without optional extras. The figure quoted includes 75 kg to allow for the weight of the driver.

The weight of the vehicle may increase in special versions, or when optional equipment or accessories are fitted .

WARNING

Please note that the centre of gravity may shift when transporting heavy objects; this may affect vehicle handling and lead to an accident. Always adjust your speed and driving style to suit road conditions and re- quirements.

Never exceed the gross axle weight rating or the gross vehicle weight rating. If the permissible axle load or the permissible total weight is ex- ceeded, the driving characteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents, injuries and damage to the vehicle.

Towing a trailer

Trailer weights

Trailer weight

The trailer weights and drawbar loads approved are selected in intensive tri- als according to precisely defined criteria. The approved trailer weights are valid for vehicles in the EU for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (50 mph) (in certain circumstances up to 100 km/h (62 mph)). The figures may be differ- ent in other countries. All data in the official vehicle documentation takes precedence over these data at all times .

Drawbar loads

The maximum permitted drawbar load on the ball joint of the towing bracket must not exceed 100 kg.

In the interest of road safety, we recommend that you always tow approach- ing the maximum drawbar load. The response of the trailer on the road will be poor if the drawbar load is too small.

If the maximum permissible drawbar load cannot be met (e.g. with small, empty and light-weight single axle trailers or tandem axle trailers with a wheelbase of less than 1 metre), a minimum of 4% of the actual trailer weight is legally required for the drawbar load.

WARNING

For safety reasons, do not exceed the 80 km/h limit. This is also valid in countries where higher speeds are permitted.

Never exceed the maximum trailer weights or the drawbar load. If the authorised weight is exceeded, the driving characteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents, injuries and damage to the vehicle.

315Description of specifications

Wheels

Tyre pressure, snow chains, wheel bolts

Tyre pressures

The sticker with the tyre pressure values can be found on the inside of the fuel tank flap. The tyre pressure values given there are for cold tyres. The slightly raised pressures of warm tyres must not be reduced.

Snow chains

Snow chains may be fitted only to the front wheels.

Consult the section wheels of this manual.

Wheel bolts

After the wheels have been changed, the tightening torque of the wheel bolts should be checked as soon as possible with a torque wrench . The tightening torque for steel and alloy wheels is 140 Nm.

WARNING

Check the tyre pressure at least once per month. Checking the tyre pressure is very important. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, there is an increased danger of accidents - particularly at high speeds.

If the tightening torque of the wheel bolts is too low, they could loos- en while the vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tightening tor- que is too high, the wheel bolts and threads can be damaged.

Note We recommend that you ask your Technical Service for information about appropriate wheel, tyre and snow chain size.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

316 Technical specifications

Technical specifications

Checking fluid levels

Fig. 226 Diagram for the location of the various elements.

From time to time, the levels of the different fluids in the vehicle must be checked. Never fill with incorrect fluids, otherwise serious damage to the engine may be caused.

Coolant fluid deposit

Engine oil dipstick

Oil filler neck

Brake fluid reservoir

Vehicle battery (underneath a cover)

Windscreen washer fluid reservoir

1

2

3

4

5

6

The checking and refilling of service fluids are carried out on the compo- nents mentioned above. These operations are described in page 251.

Overview

Further explanations, instructions and restrictions on the technical data are contained as of page 312

317Technical specifications

Petrol engine 1.4 110 kW (150 PS)

Engine specifications

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/capacity (cm3) Fuel

110 (150)/5,800 240/5,800 4/1,390 Super 95 RONa)

a) Research Octane Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol.

Performance Manual Automatic

5 seats 7 seats 5 seats 7 seats

Top speed (km/h) 197 197

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (s) 6.9 6.6

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (s) 10.7 9.9

Consumption (l/100 km)/ CO2 (g/km)

Urban cycle 9.2/214 9.4/218

Extra-urban cycle 6.1/143 6.6/154

Combined 7.2/167 7.6/178

Weights (in kg)

Gross vehicle weight 2,290 2,480 2,310 2,500

Weight in running order (with driver) 1,723 1,771 1,742 1,790

Gross front axle weight 1,170/1,220 1,170/1,220 1,190/1,240 1,190/1,240

Gross rear axle weight 1,070/1,120 1,260/1,310 1,070/1,120 1,260/1,310

Permitted roof load 100 100 100 100

Trailer loads (in kg)

Trailer without brakes 750 750

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 2,000 1,800

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 1,800 1,800

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

318 Technical specifications

Petrol engine 2.0 147 kW (200 PS)

Engine specifications

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/capacity (cm3) Fuel

147 (200)/5,100 280/1,700-5,000 4/1,984 Super 95 RONa)

a) Research Octane Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol.

Performance Automatic

5 seats 7 seats

Top speed (km/h) 218

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (s) 5.8

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (s) 8.3

Consumption (l/100 km)/ CO2 (g/km)

Urban cycle 11.5/268 11.6/270

Extra-urban cycle 6.6/155 6.7/156

Combined 8.4/196 8.5/198

Weights (in kg)

Gross vehicle weight 2,360 2,530

Weight in running order (with driver) 1,790 1,838

Gross front axle weight 1,210/1,260 1,220/1,270

Gross rear axle weight 1,100/1,150 1,260/1,310

Permitted roof load 100 100

Trailer loads (in kg)

Trailer without brakes 750

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 2,200

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 2,000

319Technical specifications

Diesel engine 2.0 TDI CR 85 kW (115 PS)

Engine specifications

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/capacity (cm3) Fuel

85 (115)/1,750-2,500 280/4,200 4/1,968 Diesel according to standard EN 590,

Min. 51 CZa)

a) Cetane Number (cetane index) = Measure of the diesel combustion power.

Performance 5 seats 7 seats

Top speed (km/h) 184

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (s) 8.4

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (s) 12.6

Consumption (l/100 km)/ CO2 (g/km)

Urban cycle 6.8/179 6.9/182

Extra-urban cycle 4.8/127 4.9/130

Combined 5.5/143 5.6/146

Weights (in kg)

Gross vehicle weight 2,360 2,520

Weight in running order (with driver) 1,772 1,823

Gross front axle weight 1,210/1,260 1,210/1,260

Gross rear axle weight 1,100/1,150 1,260/1,310

Permitted roof load 100 100

Trailer loads (in kg)

Trailer without brakes 750

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 2,200

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 2,000

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

320 Technical specifications

Diesel engine 2.0 TDI CR 100 kW (136 PS)

Engine specifications

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/capacity (cm3) Fuel

100 (136)/1,750-2,500 320/4,200 4/1,968 Diesel according to standard EN 590,

Min. 51 CZa)

a) Cetane Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel

Performance Manual Automatic

5 seats 7 seats 5 seats 7 seats

Top speed (km/h) 192 189

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (s) 7.8 7.8

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (s) 11.1 11.1

Consumption (l/100 km)/ CO2 (g/km)

Urban cycle 6.8/179 6.9/182

Extra-urban cycle 4.8/127 5/132

Combined 5.5/143 5.7/149

Weights (in kg)

Gross vehicle weight 2,340 2,500 2,370 2,540

Weight in running order (with driver) 1,174 1,822 1,803 1,851

Gross front axle weight 1,190/1,240 1,190/1,240 1,220/1,270 1,230/1,280

Gross rear axle weight 1,100/1,150 1,260/1,310 1,100/1,150 1,260/1,310

Permitted roof load 100 100 100 100

Trailer loads (in kg)

Trailer without brakes 750 750

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 2,300 2,400 2,300 2,400

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 2,200 2,200

321Technical specifications

Diesel engine 2.0 TDI CR 103 kW (140 PS)

Engine specifications

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/capacity (cm3) Fuel

103 (140)/4,200 320/1,750-2,500 4/1,968 Diesel according to standard EN 590,

Min. 51 CZa)

a) Cetane Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel

Performance Manual Automatic All-wheel drive

5 seats 7 seats 5 seats 7 seats 5 seats 7 seats

Top speed (km/h) 194 191 191

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (s) 7.7 7.7 7.5

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (s) 10.9 10.9 11.4

Consumption (l/100 km)/ CO2 (g/km)

Urban cycle 6.8/179 6.9/182 6.9/182 7.4/195 7.5/197

Extra-urban cycle 4.8/127 4.9/130 5/132 5.2/137 5.4/143

Combined 5.5/143 5.6/146 5.7/149 6.0/158 6.2/162

Weights (in kg)

Gross vehicle weight 2,340 2,510 2,370 2,540 2,530 2,580

Weight in running order (with driver) 1,774 1,822 1,803 1,851 1,891 1,942

Gross front axle weight 1,190/1,240 1,200/1,250 1,220/1,270 1,230/1,280 1,250/1,300 1,240/1,290

Gross rear axle weight 1,100/1,150 1,260/1,310 1,100/1,150 1,260/1,310 1,230/1,280 1,290/1,340

Permitted roof load 100 100 100 100 100 100

Trailer loads (in kg)

Trailer without brakes 750 750 750

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 2,300 2,400 2,300 2,400 2,400

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 2,200 2,200 2,400

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

322 Technical specifications

Diesel engine 2.0 TDI CR 130 kW (177 PS)

Engine specifications

Power output in kW (PS) at rpm Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) No. of cylinders/capacity (cm3) Fuel

130 (177)/4,200 380/1,750-2,500 4/1,968 Diesel according to standard EN 590,

Min. 51 CZa)

a) Cetane Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel

Performance Manual Automatic

5 seats 7 seats 5 seats 7 seats

Top speed (km/h) 208 205

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (s) 6.7 6.6

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (s) 9.3 9.6

Consumption (l/100 km)/ CO2 (g/km)

Urban cycle 7.3/192 6.7/177

Extra-urban cycle 5.0/132 5.4/143

Combined 5.8/152 5.9/154

Weights (in kg)

Gross vehicle weight 2,370 2,530 2,370 2,530

Weight in running order (with driver) 1,800 1,851 1,804 1,855

Gross front axle weight 1,220/1,270 1,220/1,270 1,220/1,270 1,220/1,270

Gross rear axle weight 1,100/1,150 1,260/1,310 1,100/1,150 1,260/1,310

Permitted roof load 100 100 100 100

Trailer loads (in kg)

Trailer without brakes 750 750

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% 2,300 2,400 2,300 2,400

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% 2,200 2,200

323Technical specifications

Dimensions

Length / Width (mm) 4,854/1,904

Height at kerb weight (mm) 1,720

Wheelbase (mm) 2,919

Turning circle diameter (m) 11.9

Front/reara) track width (mm) 1,557/1,569 1,605/1,617

a) This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.

Capacities

Capacities

Fuel tank 70 litres. Reserve 8 litres.

Windscreen washer fluid reservoir with headlight washer

3.5 l/ 6 l

Tyre pressure

Summer tyres: Correct tyre pressure can be seen on the sticker on the inside of the tank flap.

Winter tyres: The pressure of these tyres is 0.2 bar higher than that of summer tyres (2.9 psi / 20 kPa).

CAUTION Special care should be taken when parking in areas with high kerbs or fixed barriers. Objects protruding from the ground may damage the bumper or other parts of the vehicle during manoeuvres.

Special attention is required when driving through entrances, over ramps, kerbs or other objects. The vehicle underbody, bumpers, mudguards and running gear, and the engine and exhaust system could be damaged as you drive over these objects.

Safety Operation Advice Technical specifications

Index

A Abroad

Extended stay abroad with your vehicle . . 233 Sale of vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

ABS See "Brake assist systems" . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Acoustic warnings Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Adaptive headlights Dynamic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

AdBlue Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Minimum quantity for a refill . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Refilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Tank filling capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Additional equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Additional heater See "Auxiliary heater" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Adjusting passenger exterior mirror . . . . . . . . 105

Adjustment Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Electric front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Mechanical front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Seat with position memory . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Adjustments Folding the seat backrest of the front pas-

senger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Headlight range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Aerial built into the window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

AFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 27 Cleaning dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Deactivating the front passenger front air-

bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Deactivating using the key switch . . . . . . . . 30 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Differences between front passenger front

airbag systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Knee airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Locking the vehicle after airbag deploy-

ment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Use of child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Vehicle care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Air recirculation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Electronic manual air conditioning . . . . . . 145 Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Indirect ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Things to note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 User instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Air conditioning see "Air conditioner" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Air recirculation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Alcantara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

All-wheel drive Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Ambient lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Anodized surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Check after 10 minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 more than one damaged tyre . . . . . . . . . . 283 When it shouldn't be used . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

325Index

Anti-theft alarm system Anti-tow system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 False alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Interior monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Anti-theft bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Anti-theft locking bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Anti-theft wheel locking bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Anti-tow system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Anti-trap function Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Panoramic sliding sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Aspects to take into account before starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

ASR See "Brake assist systems" . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 See "Brake assist" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Turning on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Assistance call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Assistance systems Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Electronic differential lock system (EDL and

XDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . 174

Assist systems Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . 175 Auto Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Braking assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Lane Assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Optical parking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Park Assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Parking sensor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Rear Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Rear assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Sign Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Start assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Traction control system (ASR) . . . . . . . . . . 176 Traction control when accelerating (ASR) . 175 Tyre monitoring indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Auto Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Automatic belt retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Automatic car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Switching Auto Hold off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Switching the start assist off . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Automatic device disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Automatic dipped beam control . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Changing gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 DSG automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Ignition key lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Kickdown system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Launch-Control programme . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Manually unlocking the gear selector lever . .292 Please also see "Changing gears" . . . . . . 162 See "Automatic gearbox" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

AUX-IN connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Auxiliary heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150, 247 Automatic off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Remote control range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Remote control: Replacing the battery . . . 151 Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Things to note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150, 153

Auxiliary heater remote control Replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Axle loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

B BAS

See "Brake assist systems" . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Battery Discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Discharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 See Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Battery acid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Before starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Belt height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Belt tensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Service and disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Belt tension limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Bicycle carrier Installing a bicycle carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Maximum load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

326 Index

Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Bonnet Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Bottle holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Brake Assist Brake operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Brake assist systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Brake assist system (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Brakes Brake assist systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Brake fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Changing the brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Emergency brake indicator in case of sud-

den braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Running-in brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173, 174

Brake system Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Brake systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Braking assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Brake assist system (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Breakdown Securing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Bulb fault See changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

C Card compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Care See "Care of your vehicle" . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Vehicle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Care of your vehicle Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Caring for paintwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

CCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

CD changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131, 137

Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 70 Anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Locking/unlocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 69

Central locking system After airbag deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Opening doors individually . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Centre armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Changing Windscreen wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Raising the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Bodywork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Front bumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Halogen headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Number plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Sea changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302, 303 Xenon headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Changing gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Engaging gears (manual gearbox) . . . . . . 163 Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Manually unlocking the gear selector lever . .292 Selecting gears (automatic gearbox) . . . . 164 Warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Changing gears Gear recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Changing the battery of the vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Changing the wheel After changing the wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Checking Tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Checking the oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

327Index

Child safety seat Securing with seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Integrated child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 ISOFIX child seat on rear seats . . . . . . . . . . 38 Mounting child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Mounting systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 On rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 On the front passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Securing using a Top Tether retaining strap 40 Securing using ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Transporting children in the vehicle . . . . . . 36 Weight categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Child seats Disabling the front passenger front airbag 30

Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Cleaning dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 See "Care of your vehicle" . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Windscreen wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Cleaning chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Cleaning the vehicle Folding exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Climatronic see "Air conditioner" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Closing Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Electric sliding door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Panoramic sliding sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 See "Locking" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Sliding doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 vehicle, with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Coat hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Code number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Collection of end-of-life vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Combined weight rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Coming Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Compartment Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Compartments Card compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Centre console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Folding table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Front central armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Other storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . 137 Portable waste bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Rear footwell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Roof console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Spectacle case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Connectors Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Consumption How it is determined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Control lamp AdBlue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Brake pad wear indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Changing gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . 255 Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Engine oil sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Exhaust gas purification system . . . . . . . . 207 Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Lane assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Pressing the brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Steering column lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Tyre monitoring indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Tyre monitoring systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Windscreen wiper fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Control lamps Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Controlling function Electric exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Control of function Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

328 Index

Control units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Reprogramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Convenience closing Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Panoramic sliding sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Convenience functions Reprogramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Convenience opening Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Panoramic sliding sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Convenient entry function for the third row of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Coolant Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 See engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Counter steering assistance system . . . . . . . . 155

Crossing a river Salt water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Cruise control system (CCS) Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Curtain airbags See "Airbag system" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

D Damaged tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Dangers of not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . 18

Dash panel Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27, 232

Data link connector (DLC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Data plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Model identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Vehicle chassis number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Data registry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Data storage during the journey . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Data stored by the control units . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Daytime driving light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

De-icing the door lock cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

De-icing the locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Details Driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Device disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Diagnostics connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Auxiliary heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Filter pre-heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Winter-grade diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Recommended gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Things to note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Differential lock See "Brake assist systems" . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Dipped beam headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Disposal Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Belt tensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 End-of-life vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Door release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Childproof lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Emergency locking and unlocking . . . . . . 289 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Drawbar load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Drink holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Drink holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138, 139

Driving Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Cross country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Data storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Driving through water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Ecological . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Economic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Fuel level to low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Parking downhill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Parking uphill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

329Index

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Undercarriage guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Driving abroad Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Driving in winter Fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . 225 Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Driving through water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Driving tips For a loaded vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Technical requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

DSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

DSG automatic gearbox See "Automatic gearbox" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

DSG Automatic gearbox Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Dynamic headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Dynamic headlight range control . . . . . . . . 95

E Easy Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Ecological driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Economic driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

EDL See "Brake assist systems" . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Electrical components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141, 288

Electrical devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142, 153, 217

Electric child safety lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Electric sliding doors Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Rollback anti-trap function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Anti-trap function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Automatic one-touch operation . . . . . . . . . 85 Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Convenience closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Convenience opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 One-touch opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Electronic differential lock system (EDL and XDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Electronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . 174

Emergencies Fire extinguishers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 First aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Hazard warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Emergency brake indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Emergency locking and unlocking . . . . . . . . . 289 Driver door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Manually unlocking the gear selector lever . .292 Panoramic sliding sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Passenger side door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Sliding doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Engine Noises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Running-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Engine and ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156, 160 12 Volt power sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Pre-heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Starting engine with Keyless Access . . . . . 158 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Unauthorised vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Water box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Checking the level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Filler neck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 G 12 plus-plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 G 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Refilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Engine fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Checking the oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

330 Index

Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Filler neck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Environment Environmental friendliness . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

ESC See "Brake assist systems" . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Exhaust gas purification system . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Exterior aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Automatically folding exterior mirrors . . . 105 Controlling function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Synchronised mirror adjustment . . . . . . . . 105 Vehicle care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Extinguisher Driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

F Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Fault Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Park assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Parking sensor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Rear assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Fault memory Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Faults Air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Panoramic sliding sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Filling capacity AdBlue tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Filter pre-heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Fire extinguishers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

First-aid kit Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

First aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Fitting Tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Folding down rear seats Load space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Folding in exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Folding table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Folding the seat backrest of the front passen- ger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Folding wedges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Front airbags See "Airbag system" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Front passenger front airbag Deactivating using the key switch . . . . . . . . 30 See "Airbag system" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Depending on the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Information on consumption . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Type of fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Fuel consumption Economic driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Why does fuel consumption increase? . . . 207

Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Fuel tank flap Closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Function control Tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Identification using colours . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Identifying blown fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Preparation before replacing . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

G General overview of the engine compartment 316

Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Glove compartment lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

331Index

H Handbrake

See "Parking brake" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Hazard warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Headlamp range adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Headlight adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Headlights Adaptive headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Dipped beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Headlight control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Headlight washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Side light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Turning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Head restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Heated rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Heated windscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

High pressure cleaning equipment . . . . . . . . . 224

Hitch ball Electric release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

I Ignition

See "Engine and ignition" . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Safety interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Unauthorised vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Operating fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

In case of a breakdown Securing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

In case of an emergency Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 In case of a breakdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Protecting yourself and securing the vehi-

cle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

In case of emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Indication on display Sign Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Indicator Vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Information call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Information on consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 49, 56 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 56 Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Integrated child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Seat belt routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Interior monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

J Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Raising the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

K Kerb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

Keyless Access Easy Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Keyless-Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Keyless-Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Keyless-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 unlocking and locking the vehicle . . . . . . . 71

Keyless Access locking and starting system see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Assigning a key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Changing the battery (vehicle key) . . . . . . . 67 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Spare key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Key switch Deactivating the front passenger front air-

bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Kickdown system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Knee airbag See "Airbag system" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

332 Index

L Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Lamps Audible warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Lane assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Operation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 When is it necessary to disconnect it? . . . 198

Lane Assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Launch-Control programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Leaving Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Lifting platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Acoustic warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Coming home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Daytime driving light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Leaving home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Main beam lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Parking light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Switch lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Load Driving with the rear lid open . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Transporting a load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 General advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Loading luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . 119 Net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Rails and attachment system . . . . . . . . . . 125 Roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Loading the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Locking From the inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 The rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 The vehicle from the outside . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Locking button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Locking the vehicle with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Luggage compartment Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Folding down rear seats to create load

space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Luggage compartment lighting . . . . . . . . . . 96 Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Rails and attachment system . . . . . . . . . . 125

Luggage compartment baggage net . . . . . . . . 128

M Main beam headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Main beam lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Main panel Turn signal and main beam lever . . . . . . . . 91

Maintenance and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Malfunction Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 DSG automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 DSG Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Lane assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Please also see "Changing gears" . . . . . . 162

MEDIA-IN connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Menus Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Mirrors Adjusting passenger mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Convenience function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Folding exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Rear vision mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Synchronised mirror adjustment . . . . . . . . 105

Mobile telephone Using without an exterior aerial . . . . . . . . 239

Mobile tow hitch Installing a bicycle carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Model identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232, 236

333Index

Modifications to the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

N Net

Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

New engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

New tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

New tyres and wheels About your tyres and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Noise Auxiliary heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Noises Brake assist systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Notes for the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

O Octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Oil See engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Older tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Onboard diagnostic system (ODB) . . . . . . . . . 239

Opening Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Electric sliding door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 From the inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Panoramic sliding sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 See "Unlocking" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Sliding doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 vehicle, with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Opening doors individually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Operating fault Immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Operating faults Radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Optical parking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Overview Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

P Panoramic sliding sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Anti-trap function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Convenience closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Convenience opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Emergency locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Park assist system Automatic stoppage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Leaving the parking space . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Preparing to park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Switching on or off (leaving the parking

space) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Switching on or off (parking) . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Park Assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168, 172

Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Parking aid system Use of high pressure cleaning equipment 224

Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Automatic release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Emergency braking function . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 See "Parking brake" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Parking distance warning system Use of high pressure cleaning equipment 224

Parking indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Parking light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Parking sensor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182, 183 Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Optical parking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 With towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 162

334 Index

Petrol Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Portable waste bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Power sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 12 Volts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Pre-heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Preparation Checking the engine coolant level . . . . . . 261 Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Preparations Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . 256 Topping up the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . 256

Principles of physics regarding a frontal colli- sion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Protection of vehicle undercarriage . . . . . . . . 227

Pushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

R Radio reception

Aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Operating faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Rails and attachment element system Baggage net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Rails and attachment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Control of function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Raising the vehicle Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Raising vehicle Lifting platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 With a lifting platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Reading the Fault memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Rear assist Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Mode 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Mode 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Things to note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 User instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Rear Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Rear assist systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Driving with the rear lid open . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Electronic locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Electronic opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Emergency locking and unlocking . . . . . . 291 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 See "Rear lid" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Rear shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Rear vision mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 104

Rear vision mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Rear window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Recommended gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Recycling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Reflective vest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Reflective vests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Refuelling Mistakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Remote control Auxiliary heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 See "Keys" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Removing ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Removing snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Removing wax deposits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Repairing tyres see Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235, 236 Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Lifting platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Replacement of parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Reprogramming control units . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Reservoir capacity Windscreen washer water reservoir . . . . . 103

Retaining hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Retro-fitting Two-way radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Vehicle telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Rev counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Reversing camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

335Index

Rocker switches Tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Rollback anti-trap function Electric sliding doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Rubber seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Run-flat tyres Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Running-in Brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 First trips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Running-in brake pads Please also see "Brakes" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Running in Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

S SAFE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 161

Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Sale of vehicle In other countries / continents . . . . . . . . . 233

Salt water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Scrapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Seat adjustment Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Seat belt position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Seat belt protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Automatic belt retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Belt height adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Belt tensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Belt tension limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Fastening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Seat belt position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Seat belt status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Twisted belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Unfastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Unfastening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 With two buckles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Seat belt warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Seat belt with two buckles Fastening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Twisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Unfastening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Seat functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Convenient entry function for the third row

of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Folding the seat backrest of the front pas-

senger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

SEAT information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Adjusting the head restraints . . . . . . . . . . 116 Adjusting the steering wheel position . . . 156 Convenient entry function for the third row

of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Correct position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Electric front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Fitting the head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Folding the seat backrest of the front pas-

senger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Mechanical front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Removing the head restraints . . . . . . . . . . 117 Seat with position memory . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Seat upholstery Alcantara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 cleaning Alcantara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Cleaning and maintenance of natural leath-

er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 cleaning the trim fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 synthetic leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Seat with position memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Selective Catalytic Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Selector lever locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Service notification: read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Side airbags See "Airbag system" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Side light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Sign Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198, 199 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Indication on display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Operation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Sitting position Incorrect position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

336 Index

Sliding door Manually opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . 78

Sliding doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Childproof lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Opening and closing electrically . . . . . . . . . 78

Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275, 315 All-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Spanner symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Spare fuel canister . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Special considerations Fumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Special features Automatic car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Easy Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Folding exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 High pressure cleaning equipment . . . . . . 224 Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169, 172, 323 Pushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Removing the vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73, 223 Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Special notes High-pressure cleaning system . . . . . . . . . 215 Long parking times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308, 309 Tow starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Specifications Combined weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Drawbar load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Trailer weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Specific notes Electric sliding doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Spectacle case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Speed rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Stabilising the vehicle and trailer combina- tion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Start-Stop function Driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Start-Stop Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Start assist See "Start assist systems" . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Starting assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Positive pole on the starting assistance

points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Starting using an external battery See Starting assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Steering Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Counter steering assistance system . . . . . 155 Electromechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Steering column lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Tendency to pull to one side . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Steering wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Rocker switches (Tiptronic) . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Storage compartment on the roof console . . . 132

Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Glove compartment lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Sudden braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Sun blind Anti-trap function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Sun blinds Rear side windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Sun protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Sun visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Symbols See "Lamps" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

System Automatic dipped beam control . . . . . . . . . 92

Systems ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Adaptive headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . 175 ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175, 176 Auto Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 BAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Brake assist system (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Braking assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 EDL and XDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Electronic differential lock system (EDL and

XDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . 174

337Index

ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Lane Assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Launch-Control Programme . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Optical parking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Park Assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Parking sensor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Rear Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Rear assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Sign Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Start assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Tiredness detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Traction control when accelerating (ASR) . 175 Tyre monitoring indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Tyre monitoring systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

T Technical data

Axle loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Engine oil specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Kerb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Reservoir capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Roof load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Total weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

Technical details Type of fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Lifting platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Telephone management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Temperature display Outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Temperature gauge Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

The rear lid Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 See "The rear lid" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Things to note Auxiliary heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150, 153 Diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Electric sliding doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Increase in exhaust gases . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Parking sensor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Rear assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Switching Auto Hold off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Water underneath the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 148

Tightening torque Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Tightening torque of wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . 315

TIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Tips for driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Before starting out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Tiredness detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Total weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

Tow hitch Function control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Installing a bicycle carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Tow hitch ball See "Trailer" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 All-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Front towline anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Rear towline anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Special notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Tow bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Towing prohibited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Towing rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 With a tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

Towing bracket Optical parking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Parking sensor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Tow starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Traction control system (ASR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Traction control when accelerating (ASR) . . . . 175

Trailer Adjusting the headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Drawbar load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212, 218 Electrically releasing the hitch ball . . . . . . 214 Fitting a trailer tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

338 Index

Function control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Hitch ball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Hitching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Rear LED lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213, 216 Rear lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213, 216 Stabilising the vehicle and trailer combina-

tion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Trailer cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213, 216 Trailer weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Wing mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Trailer cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213, 216

Trailer tow hitch Electric release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Trailer weight Permitted maximum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Trailer weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

Transport Folding the seat backrest of the front pas-

senger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Transporting Transporting a load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Transporting a load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Transporting children in the vehicle . . . . . . . . . 36

Transporting objects Baggage net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212, 218 Driving with the rear lid open . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Rails and attachment system . . . . . . . . . . 125

Retaining hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129, 130 Trailer weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Trip recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Turning lights See "Static turning lights" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Static . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Turning off the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Turning on the headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Turn signal convenience function . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Two-way radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Type of fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Tyre control systems Tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Tyre load rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

tyre mobility kit Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Tyre mobility kit inflating the tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 sealing the tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Tyre Mobility System see Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Tyre monitoring indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Tyre monitoring systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Tyre monitoring indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271, 315

Tyres with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . 277

U Undercarriage guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Unlocking From the inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 The rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 The vehicle from the outside . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Unlocking the vehicle with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Upholstery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Treating your upholstery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

V Valve caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Vehicle Collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Parking downhill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Parking uphill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Recycling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Securing in case of a breakdown . . . . . . . 287 unlocking and locking with Keyless Access 71

Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Acid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Automatic device disconnection . . . . . . . . 266 Checking the electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . 264 Discharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Explanation of symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Positive pole on the starting assistance

points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

339Index

Starting assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Vehicle care Aerial built into the window . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Airbag modules (dash panel) . . . . . . . . . . 232 Anodized surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Automatic car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Changing windscreen wiper blades . . . . . 101 Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Cleaning compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Cleaning seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Cleaning wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Cleaning windscreen wiper blades . . . . . . 101 Dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 De-icing the door lock cylinder . . . . . . . . . 227 Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 High pressure cleaning equipment . . . . . . 224 Plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Protection of vehicle undercarriage . . . . . 227 Rubber seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223, 224 Treating your upholstery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Vehicle paintwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Washing by hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Wooden trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Vehicle chassis number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Vehicle code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Vehicle data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Vehicle key Synchronising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Vehicle key set See "Keys" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Vehicle maintenance electrically adjustable seats . . . . . . . . . . . 229 heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 natural leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 non-electrically adjustable seats . . . . . . . 229 seats with airbag components . . . . . . . . . 229 seats without airbag components . . . . . . 229 synthetic leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 trim fabrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 unheated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Vehicle specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Vehicle telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Vehicle's battery Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Running flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Vibrations Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

W Warning lamp

AdBlue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Changing gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Engine oil pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Pressing the brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 by hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183, 186 special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 with high pressure cleaning equipment . . 224

Water box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Wear of tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279, 280, 315 Caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Wheel load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

340 Index

Wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Beadlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Bolted trims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 See "Wheels and tyres" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Avoiding damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Damaged tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Errors in wheel alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Foreign bodies in the tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Interchanging tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 New tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Older tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Replacing tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Run-flat tyre codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Run-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Speed rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276, 277 Storing tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Tyre code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Tyre identification number (TIN) . . . . . . . . 276 Tyre load rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Tyre pressure sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Tyres with directional tread pattern . 268, 277 Valve caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Wear of tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Wheel balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Wheel trims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Full hub caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Wheel bolts caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Windows See "Electric windows" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Windscreen washer water Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Windscreen wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Window wiper lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Windscreen wiper fluid Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Windscreen wipers Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Headlight washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Heated windscreen washer jets . . . . . . . . . 99 Lifting the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Replacing the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Special features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Windscreen wipers service position . . . . . . . . 100

Wing mirrors Driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Winter Additional heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Menu configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Winter-grade diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Winter driving Driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Filter pre-heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Winter-grade diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Winter operation Headlight washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Heated windscreen washer jets . . . . . . . . . 99 Salt on the roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 All-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Speed limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

X XDS

See "Brake assist systems" . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Other Characters "Safe" security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

341Index

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to under- stand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.

All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.

Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.

SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the Copyright Act.

All rights on changes are reserved.

This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.05.14

OWNERS MANUAL

Alhambra

7N 50 12 72 0B B

In gl

s 7

N 50

12 72

0B B

( 05

.1 4)

( G

T9 )

A<

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the Alhambra Seat works, you can view and download the Seat Alhambra 2014 v2 Owner’s Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Seat Alhambra as well as other Seat manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Seat Alhambra. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Seat Alhambra 2014 v2 Owner’s Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Seat Alhambra 2014 v2 Owner’s Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Seat Alhambra 2014 v2 Owner’s Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Seat Alhambra 2014 v2 Owner’s Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Seat Alhambra 2014 v2 Owner’s Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.